1instnex r42 en

Installation and maintenance manual
NeXspan C/S/L/D Range
AMT/PTD/PBX/0058/1/2/EN
06/2006
AASTRA MATRA Telecom
Page 0-2
6/2/06
Installation and Maintenance Manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range
Preliminaries
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.1
PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.2
AUDIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
1.3
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
1.4
ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
1.5
DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE NEXSPAN C/S/L/D PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.2
FUNCTIONAL AND PHYSICAL ARCHITECTURE OF THE PBXS. . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
2.2.1
NeXspan D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
2.2.2
NeXspan C/S/L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
FUNCTIONAL PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF NEXSPAN PBXS . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.1
3.1
2.3
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1
Physical description of NeXspan D in simplex configuration

(see 3.11 to 3.15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1.2 Internal description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical description of NeXspan D in simplex configuration, with
secure power supply (seer 3.5 to 3.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.1.2
3.7
3.7
3.8
3.1.3 Physical description of NeXspan D in duplex configuration, (see 3.8 to 3.10)

3.12
3.12
3.13
3.1.4 Physical description of a NeXspan L PBX (see 3.11 to 3.15) . . . . . . . . . . .

3.17
3.17
3.17
3.1.5 Physical description of a NeXspan S PBX (see 3.16 to 3.18) . . . . . . . . . . .

3.23
3.23
3.24
3.1.6 Physical description of a NeXspan S12 PBX (see Figure 3.23 ) . . . . . . . . .

3.32
3.32
3.33
3.1.7
3.38
Physical description of a NeXspan C PBX (see Figure 3.27) . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

Prliminaires
6/2/06
Page 0-3
3.2

3.1.7.2 Internal description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.38
3.38
SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.40
3.2.1
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.40
3.2.2
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.40
3.2.3
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.42
3.3
CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.43
3.4
PHYSICAL BREAKDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.48
3.4.1
NeXspan D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.48
3.4.2
NeXspan C/S/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.54
CONFIGURATION RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.57
3.5.1 XD PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.1 XD main cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1.2 2XD and 3XD expansion cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.57
3.57
3.59
3.5.2 XL PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.1 XL main cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2.2 2XL and 3XL expansion cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.60
3.60
3.62
3.5.3
PBX XS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.63
3.5.4 XS12 PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4.1 Non-rackable XS12 PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4.2 Rackable XS12 PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.64
3.64
3.65
3.5.5
XC PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.65
I-BUTTON DONGLE AND SOFTWARE LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.66
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
XD PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.66
3.6.2
C/S/L PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.67
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.69
3.7.1 Command and processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.1.1 Data and voice switching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.2 Duplex and start logic (NeXspan D only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.3 Signal processing function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.4 Voice mail server function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.5 Defence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.6 Command management function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.7 Synchronisation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.69
3.69
3.70
3.70
3.70
3.71
3.71
3.71
3.7.2
Connection to the communication networks and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.71
3.7.3
Duplication (NeXspan D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.73
3.7.4 Synchronisation chain (Figure 9.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.4.1 Synchronisation of an isolated or master PBX in a multi-site network. .
3.75
3.75
3.7
Page 0-4
6/2/06

Prliminaires
3.7.4.2 Management of the master/slave mode (multisite network) . . . . . . . . .

3.7.4.3 Propagation of the synchronisations inside a multisite network
(Figure 9.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.76
3.7.5 Defence chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.5.1 Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.5.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.5.3 Alarm management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.5.4 Self protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.77
3.77
3.78
3.78
3.79
3.7.6 Power supply chain (3.34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.6.1 Presentation of NeXspan D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.6.2 Presentation of NeXspan C/S/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.6.3 Internal monitoring of C/S/L/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.6.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.6.5 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.79
3.79
3.83
3.88
3.89
3.95
3.8
3.96
3.8.1
Configuration ex factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.96
3.8.2
Standard configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.96
3.8.3
Multi-company configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.96
3.8.4
Multi-site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.96
3.8.5
Hotel/motel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.97
3.8.6
Hospital configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.97
INTRODUCING THE USER INTERFACE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.97
DESCRIPTION OF NEXSPAN COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
4.1
4.1
3.9
DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.77
EXPANSION CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
4.1.2
Loading CLX cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
4.2.1 ADS 300XD (XD PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1.2 Functional description (Figure 3.32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1.4 Physical description (Figure 4.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1.5 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1.6 Installation and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.6
4.6
4.7
4.7
4.2.2 ADS 300X (XL PBX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.2 Functional description (Figure 3.34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.2

Prliminaires
6/2/06
Page 0-5
4.2.2.4 Physical description (Figure 4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10
4.10
4.11
4.2.3 ADS 100X (XS and XS12 PBXs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3.2 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3.4 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11
4.11
4.11
4.11
4.12
4.12
4.12
4.2.4 ADS 50X (XC PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.4.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4.3 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12
4.12
4.13
4.13
4.14
4.14
4.14
4.3
UCT-D CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15
4.3.2
Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17
4.3.3
Hardware and software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19
4.3.4
Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19
IUCT-D CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20
4.4
4.4.1
4.20
4.4.2
4.22
4.4.3
4.25
4.4.4
4.26
RUCT-D CARD:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.27
4.5
4.5.1
4.27
4.5.2
4.27
4.5.3
4.29
4.5.4 Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.4.1 Connecting an expansion cabinet (2 XD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.4.2 Connecting two expansion cabinets (3 XD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.29
4.30
4.32
4.6
UCT-L CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.35
4.6.1
4.35
4.6.2
4.37
4.6.3
4.42
Page 0-6
4.15
6/2/06

Prliminaires
4.6.4
4.7
4.42
UCT1-S AND UCT2-S CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.43
4.7.1
4.43
4.7.2
4.46
4.7.3
Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.51
4.7.4
4.53
UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12 CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.55
4.8
4.8.1
4.55
4.8.2
4.57
4.8.3
4.60
4.8.4
4.61
UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.62
4.9
4.9.1
4.62
4.9.2
4.64
4.9.3
4.67
4.9.4
4.68
4.10 RUCT-L CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.69
4.10.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.69
4.10.2 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.69
4.10.3 Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.69
4.70
4.11 RUCT-S CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.71
4.11.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.71
4.71
4.11.3 Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.71
4.72
4.12 APPLICATION CARDS (CLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.73
4.12.1 LD4 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.1.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.1.6 Description of the signal processing daughterboard: ADPCM16 . . . . .
4.73
4.73
4.73
4.75
4.77
4.78
4.82
4.12.2 LD4N/LD4X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.2.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.83
4.83
4.83
4.86

Prliminaires
6/2/06
Page 0-7

4.88
4.89
4.12.3 LT2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.3.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.3.2 Functional description (see Figure 4.32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.3.3 Physical description (see Figure 4.36). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.93
4.93
4.93
4.95
4.97
4.102
4.12.4 PT2 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.4.1 Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.103
4.103
4.103
4.105
4.106
4.107
4.12.5 CS1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.5.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.5.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.108
4.108
4.110
4.110
4.112
4.112
4.12.6 CA1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.6.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.113
4.113
4.115
4.116
4.117
4.12.7 CP1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.7.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.119
4.119
4.120
4.120
4.120
4.12.8 MUM card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.8.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.120
4.120
4.120
4.122
4.123
4.123
4.13 EQUIPMENT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.124
4.13.1 LA16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.1.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.124
4.124
4.124
Page 0-8
6/2/06

Prliminaires

4.126
4.126
4.127
4.13.2 LA16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.2.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.128
4.128
4.128
4.130
4.130
4.131
4.13.3 LA8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.3.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.132
4.132
4.132
4.134
4.134
4.134
4.13.4 LN16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.4.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.135
4.135
4.135
4.137
4.137
4.137
4.13.5 LN16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.5.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.138
4.138
4.138
4.140
4.140
4.140
4.13.6 LN8 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.6.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.141
4.141
4.141
4.141
4.141
4.142
4.13.7 LM8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.7.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.143
4.143
4.143
4.144
4.144
4.144
4.13.8 LH8 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.145

Prliminaires
6/2/06
Page 0-9
4.13.8.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.145
4.145
4.145
4.145
4.13.9 LH16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.9.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.147
4.147
4.147
4.149
4.149
4.149
4.13.10LH16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.10.1Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.10.2Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.10.3Physical description (see Figure 4.56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.10.4Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.10.5Installation and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.150
4.150
4.150
4.152
4.152
4.152
4.13.11LR4 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.11.1Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.153
4.153
4.153
4.155
4.156
4.157
4.13.12LI1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.12.1Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.158
4.158
4.158
4.160
4.162
4.162
4.13.13IUMS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.13.1Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.170
4.170
4.171
4.171
4.172
4.172
4.13.14BTX card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.14.1Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.173
4.173
4.173
4.174
4.175
4.175
Page 0-10
6/2/06

Prliminaires
PRESENTATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.1
5.1
DIGITAL SETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.1.2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
ANALOGUE SETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
5.2
5.2.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
5.2.2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
IP SETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
5.3
5.3.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
5.3.2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
COMPUTER TERMINALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
5.4.2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
ATTENDANT CONSOLES (ATDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
5.5
5.5.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
5.5.2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
5.6
5.6.1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
5.6.2 VT100 terminal (see Figure 5.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.2.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6.3 Administration PC (see Figure 5.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.3.1 Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
5.8
5.9
5.6.4 Serial printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.4.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12
5.12
5.12
5.6.5 External music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.5.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13
5.13
5.13
5.6.6 Common bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.6.1 Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14
5.14
5.14
5.6.7 Alarm bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.7.1 Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15
5.15
5.15

Prliminaires
6/2/06 Page 0-11
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1
6.1
SECURITY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Staff clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1.2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1.3
Powering on the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
6.1.4
Powering off the power supply module and the cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
6.1.5
Handling cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
6.2
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
6.3
SITE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
6.3.1
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
6.3.2
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
6.3.3
Space required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
6.3.4
Electrical power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5
6.4
6.4.1
Existing equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5
6.4.2
New equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5
INSTALLATION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
6.5
6.5.1
Operating equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
6.5.2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7
6.5.3
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8
6.6
LIST OF CONSUMABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
6.7
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
6.7.1
Structure of the installation sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
6.7.2 List of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7.2.1 For a first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2.2 Operations on a site already installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2.3 Upgrading the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12
6.12
6.12
6.13
6.7.3
General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13
6.7.4
For a first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13
6.7.5 Operations on a site already installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7.5.1 Upgrading the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.34
6.58
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.1
SECURITY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2
MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2.1
Role and possibilities available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2.2 Maintenance resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.2.1 Role of the administration tool in maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
7.2
Page 0-12
6/2/06

Prliminaires
7.2.2.2 List of support equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
7.2.3
Preventive maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
7.2.4
Corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
7.2.5
Restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
7.2.6
Returning subassemblies to be repaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
List of interchangeable subassemblies, fuses, batteries, cables

and securing kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.1 Interchangeable XD PBX subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.2 Interchangeable C/S/L PBX subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.3 Interchangeable C/S/L/D PBX cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.4 Interchangeable fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.5 Optional interchangeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.6 Interchangeable cabinets (PBX XD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7.7 Mounting kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
7.5
7.7
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.10
7.10
7.3
PBX AVAILABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11
7.4
LOCAL OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12
7.5
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13
7.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.1 Chapter organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.2 Presentation of P sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.5.2
Preventive maintenance operations schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.16
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TEST SHEET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.34
7.2.7
7.6
7.6.1
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.34
7.6.2
LIST OF T SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.36
7.0.1 Alarm messages and codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.0.1.1 Description of errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.0.1.2 Operating system errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.0.1.3 Programming error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.0.1.4 Other errors caused for various reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.0.1.5 Additional error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.76
7.77
7.100
7.103
7.104
7.104
7.1
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE - EXCHANGE SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.105
7.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.1 Structure of exchange sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.2 Conventions used in the sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1.3 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.105
7.105
7.107
7.107
7.1.2
List of E sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.108
INSTALLING AND USING THE IPS BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1
8.1
8.1
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prliminaires
6/2/06 Page 0-13
8.1.1
8.1

8.2
8.5
8.2
INSTALLING AND WIRING THE IPS BOARD IN THE PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5
8.3
RECOMMENDATIONS ON HOW TO HANDLE THE IPS BOARD. . . . . . . . . . .
8.6
8.4
CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7
8.5
SHUTTING DOWN LINUX ON THE IPS BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7
8.6
RESTARTING LINUX ON THE IPS BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9
8.7
INSTALLING IPS BOARD SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10
8.7.1
Configuring the switches on the IPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.11
8.7.2
Flashing the EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.11
8.7.3
IPS board startup test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.12
CUSTOMISING AND SECURING THE IPS BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.14
8.8
8.8.1
Starting Linux on the IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.14
8.8.2
Getting into superuser mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.15
8.8.3
Running the customisation/security program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.16
8.8.4
Connecting to the IPS board through a web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.18
CONFIGURING THE IPS BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.19
8.9
8.9.1
Presentation of the IPS web browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.19
8.9.2
Network configuration of the IPS board using the web interface . . . . . . . . .
8.20
8.9.3
Network configuration of the IPS board using a VT100 connection. . . . . . .
8.22
8.9.4
Backing up the IPS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.24
8.9.5
Stopping the IPS web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.25
8.10 MANAGING THE IPS BOARD THROUGH THE IPS WEB BROWSER . . . . . . .
8.26
8.10.1 Checking IPS board versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.26
8.10.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.26
8.10.3 Rebooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.1 Restarting the SIP access point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.2 Starting the SIP access point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.3 Stopping the SIP access point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.4 Rebooting the IPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.5 Shutting down the IPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3.6 Time update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.27
8.27
8.28
8.29
8.30
8.31
8.32
8.10.4 Utilities and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.33
8.11 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.34
8.11.1 Full CompactFlash card software update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.11.1.1 Creating the CompactFlash card using a Windows PC. . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.11.1.2 Creating a CompactFlash card using a LINUX PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.34
8.35
8.37
Page 0-14
6/2/06

Prliminaires
8.11.2 Updating individual files or patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.39
FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1

Prliminaires
6/2/06 Page 0-15
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3.1
Table 3.2
Table 3.3
Table 3.4
Table 3.5
Table 3.6
Table 3.7
Table 3.8
Table 3.9
Table 3.10
Table 3.11
Table 3.12
Table 3.13
Table 3.14
Table 3.15
Table 3.16
Table 3.17
Table 3.18
Table 3.19
Table 3.20
Table 3.21
Table 3.22
Table 3.23
Table 3.24
Table 3.25
Table 4.1
Table 4.2
Table 4.3
Table 4.4
Table 4.5
Table 4.6
Table 4.7
Table 4.8
Table 4.9
Table 4.10
Table 4.11
Table 4.12
Physical specifications of C/S/L/D PBXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical specifications of the ADS 300XD power supply modules . . . . . .
Electrical specifications of the ADS 300X power supply modules . . . . . . .
Electrical specifications of the ADS 100X power supply module . . . . . . . .
Electrical specifications of the ADS 50X power supply module . . . . . . . . .
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Voice auxiliaries functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices associated with the UCT cards of C/S/L/D PBXs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices associated with the CLX cards of C/S/L/D PBXs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices associated with the equipment cards of C/S/L/D PBXs . . . . . . . .
List of XD PBX subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of XL, XS and XS12 subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible basic XD PBX back plane equipment configuration. . . . . . . . . . .
Possible configurations of the two expansion backplanes of an XD PBX .
Possible basic XL PBX back plane equipment configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible configurations of the two expansion backplanes of an XL PBX. .
Possible basic backplane and extension equipment configuration
of an XS PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Possible basic XS12 PBX back plane equipment configuration. . . . . . . . .
Specifications on the battery for an XD, XL, XS or XS12 PBX. . . . . . . . . .
Specifications on the battery for a 3 XD or 3 XL PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications on the battery for a 2 XD or XL PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications of a 2 XS PBX battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications on the battery for an XC PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of ADS 300XD power supply module indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of ADS 300X power supply module indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UCT-D card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the UCT-D card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of IUCT-D card connectors (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of iUCT card relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of IUCT-D card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of RUCT-D card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of RUCT-D card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UCT-L card connectors (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UCT card relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of UCT-L card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prliminaires
3.40
3.40
3.41
3.41
3.42
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.53
3.55
3.58
3.59
3.61
3.63
3.64
3.65
3.89
3.90
3.92
3.94
3.95
3.95
4.7
4.10
4.17
4.18
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.27
4.27
4.37
4.40
4.41
6/2/06 Page 0-14
Table 4.13
Table 4.14
Table 4.15
Table 4.16
Table 4.17
Table 4.18
Table 4.19
Table 4.20
Table 4.21
Table 4.22
Table 4.23
Table 4.24
Table 4.25
Table 4.26
Table 4.27
Table 4.28
Table 4.29
Table 4.30
Table 4.31
Table 4.32
Table 4.33
Table 4.34
Table 4.35
Table 4.36
Table 4.37
Table 4.38
Table 4.39
Table 4.40
Table 4.41
Table 4.42
Table 4.43
Table 4.44
Table 4.45
Table 4.46
Table 4.47
Table 4.48
Table 4.49
Table 4.50
Table 4.51
Table 4.52
Description of UCT1-S and UCT2-S connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Presentation of UCT1-S and UCT2-S card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S0 interface link with DECT base station (twisted cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UCT1-C and UCT2-C card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of UCT1-C and UCT2-C card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of RUCT-L card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of RUCT-S card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LD4 card connectors (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of the S0/T0 connections of the LD4 RJ card connectors . . . . . . .
Presentation of the LD4 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the CA2.1 microswitch on the lD4 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the CA2.2 microswitch on the LD4 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S0 interface link (LD4 ST card) with a DECT base station. . . . . . . . . . . . .
S0 interface link (LD4 RJ card) with a DECT base station . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LD4N/LD4X card connectors (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details of the S0/T0 connections of the LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ card connectors
Presentation of the LD4N/LD4X card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the microswitch CA1 (HVAL) on the LD4N/LD4X card . .
S0 interface link (LD4N ST/LD4X ST card) with a DECT base station. . . .
S0 interface link (LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ card) with a DECT base station . . . .
Description of LT2 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of LT2 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of microswitch CA8 on the LT2 card (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the CA5 microswitch on the LT2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the CA6, CA3 and CA2 microswitches on the LT2 card .
Description of PT2 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the PT2 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware configuration of the PT2 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of CS1 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts of connectors J2 - J3 on the CS1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts of the synchronous connectors on the CS1 card . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of CS1 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware configuration of the CS1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DCE (CS1) to a DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DTE (CS1) to a DCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of CA1 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prliminaires
4.49
4.50
4.54
4.59
4.59
4.66
4.66
4.69
4.71
4.75
4.76
4.76
4.77
4.77
4.80
4.81
4.86
4.87
4.87
4.88
4.91
4.92
4.95
4.96
4.97
4.99
4.100
4.101
4.101
4.105
4.106
4.106
4.110
4.111
4.111
4.111
4.112
4.112
4.113
4.115
6/2/06 Page 0-15
Table 4.53
Table 4.54
Table 4.55
Table 4.56
Table 4.57
Table 4.58
Table 4.59
Table 4.60
Table 4.61
Table 4.62
Table 4.63
Table 4.64
Table 4.65
Table 4.66
Table 4.67
Table 4.68
Table 4.69
Table 4.70
Table 4.71
Table 4.72
Table 4.73
Table 4.74
Table 4.75
Table 4.76
Table 4.77
Table 4.78
Table 4.79
Table 4.80
Table 4.81
Table 4.82
Table 4.83
Table 4.84
Table 4.85
Table 5.1
Table 5.2
Table 6.1
Table 6.2
Table 6.3
Table 6.4
Table 6.5
Contacts of connectors J2 - J5 on the CA1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description of CA1 card connectors TE0 - Te3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the CA1 card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware configuration of the CA1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DCE (CA1) to a DTE (PC or VT100 console) . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DTE (CA1) to a DCE (modem or V24 adapter) . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the CP1 card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of MUM card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of MUM card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LA16X card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LA16X card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LA8 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LN16x card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LN16x card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LN8 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LM8 card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LH16X card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of LH16X-8 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LR4 card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the LR4 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the S1 microswitch on the LR4 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the S2 microswitch on the LR4 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LI1 ST card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the LI1 RJ card connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the LI1 card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the LI1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the ST LI1 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the RJ LI1 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the IUMS card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the IUMS card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the BTX card connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the BTX card indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the BTX card jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC/IUCT-D console wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration parameters for a VT100 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of operating equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous tools list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of procedures to perform during a pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 0-16
6/2/06
4.115
4.115
4.116
4.116
4.117
4.118
4.120
4.122
4.122
4.126
4.130
4.134
4.137
4.140
4.141
4.144
4.149
4.152
4.155
4.155
4.156
4.156
4.160
4.161
4.161
4.162
4.163
4.167
4.171
4.172
4.174
4.175
4.175
5.7
5.8
6.6
6.8
6.8
6.9
6.12

Prliminaires
Table 6.6
Table 6.7
Table 6.8
Table 6.9
Table 7.1
Table 7.2
Table 7.3
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 7.6
Table 7.7
Table 7.8
Table 7.9
Table 7.10
Table 7.11
Table 7.12
Table 8.1
Table 8.2
Table 8.3
Table 8.4
Table 8.5
Table 8.6
Table 8.7
Operations which can be performed on a site already installed. . . . . . . . .

Software upgrade procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options for installing a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options for installing a cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of additional maintenance resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of interchangeable XD PBX subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of interchangeable XL, XS, XS12 and XC PBX subassemblies (1/2) .
List of interchangeable C/S/L/D PBX cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of interchangeable FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of optional interchangeable batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of interchangeable (XD PBX) cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of mounting kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impact of a faulty subassembly on XD PBX availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impact of a faulty subassembly on C/S/L PBX availability . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive maintenance operations schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of E sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of IPS board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of IPS board LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPS board hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware requirements for Boot software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default logins and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic IPS board network configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware requirements for IPS board CompactFlash creation . . . . . . . . .

Prliminaires
6.13
6.13
6.17
6.26
7.3
7.6
7.7
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.10
7.10
7.12
7.12
7.16
7.108
8.4
8.4
8.5
8.10
8.15
8.20
8.34
6/2/06 Page 0-17
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
Figure 3.5
Figure 3.6
Figure 3.7
Figure 3.8
Figure 3.9
Figure 3.10
Figure 3.11
Figure 3.12
Figure 3.13
Figure 3.14
Figure 3.15
Figure 3.16
Figure 3.17
Figure 3.18
Figure 3.19
Figure 3.20
Figure 3.21
Figure 3.22
Figure 3.23
Figure 3.24
Figure 3.25
Figure 3.26
Figure 3.27
Figure 3.28
Figure 3.29
Figure 3.30
Figure 3.31
Figure 3.32
Figure 3.33
Figure 3.34
Overview of an XD cabinet in simplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards. . . .

Rear view of an XD cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a 2XD cabinet in simplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards. . . .
Overview of a 3XD cabinet in simplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards. . . .
Overview of an XD cabinet in simplex configuration,
with secure power supply, fitted with RJ cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a 2XD cabinet in simplex configuration,
Overview of a 3XD cabinet in simplex configuration,
Overview of an XD cabinet in duplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards . . . .
Overview of a 2XD cabinet in duplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards . . . .
Overview of a 3XD cabinet in duplex configuration, fitted with RJ cards . . . .
Overview of an XL cabinet fitted with rj cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of an XL cabinet fitted with st cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view of an XL cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a 2XL cabinet fitted with rj cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a 3XL cabinet fitted with rj cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a non-rackable XS cabinet fitted with rj cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a non-rackable XS cabinet fitted with st cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a non-rackable 2XS cabinet fitted with rj cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view of a non-rackable XS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a rackable XS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a rackable 2XS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view of a rackable XS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a standard (non-rackable) XS12 cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view of a standard (non-rackable) XS12 cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of a standard (rackable) XS12 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view of a standard (rackable) XS12 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of an XC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot numbers on the backplane of an XD PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot numbers on backplane of an xl PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot numbers on the backplane of an XS PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot numbers on backplane of an xs12 PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of the power supply chain of an XD cabinet
in simplex configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of the power supply chain of an XD cabinet
in duplex configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of the power supply chain of an XL cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D

Prliminaires
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.39
3.57
3.60
3.63
3.65
3.81
3.82
3.84
6/2/06
Page 0-19
Figure 3.35
Figure 3.36
Figure 3.37
Figure 3.38
Figure 3.39
Figure 3.40
Figure 3.41
Figure 3.42
Figure 3.43
Figure 4.1
Figure 4.2
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.4
Figure 4.5
Figure 4.6
Figure 4.7
Figure 4.8
Figure 4.9
Figure 4.10
Figure 4.11
Figure 4.12
Figure 4.13
Figure 4.14
Figure 4.15
Figure 4.16
Figure 4.17
Figure 4.18
Figure 4.19
Figure 4.20
Figure 4.21
Figure 4.22
Figure 4.23
Figure 4.24
Figure 4.25
Figure 4.26
Figure 4.27
Block diagram of the power supply chain on an XS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Block diagram of the power supply chain on a non-rackable XS12 cabinet . .
Block diagram of the power supply chain on a rackable XS12 cabinet . . . . .
Block diagram of the power supply chain of an XC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a battery in parallel to a 3XD PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a battery in parallel to a 3XL PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a battery in parallel to a 2XD PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a battery in parallel to a 2XL PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a battery in parallel to a 2XS PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for locking an RJ card or blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the ADS300 XD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the ADS 300X Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the UCT-D card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the UCT-D card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IUCT-D interface between two UCT-D cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the iUCT-D card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iUCT card relay contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of IUCT-D card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the RUCT-D card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colour code for connection to the expansion cabinet(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an expansion cabinet (simplex configuration,
UCT-D(A)/RUCT-D(A)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an expansion cabinet (simplex configuration,
UCT-D(B)-RUCT-D(B)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an expansion cabinet (duplex configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting two expansion cabinets (simplex configuration,
UCT-D(A)/RUCT-D(A)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting two expansion cabinets (simplex configuration,
UCT-D(B)-RUCT-D(B)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting two expansion cabinets (duplex configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the UCT-L card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCT CARD RELAY CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the UCT-L card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of UCT1-S and UCT2-S (rj) cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of UCT1-S and UCT2-S (ST) cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of UCT1-S and UCT2-S card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring remote power supply of S/T0 to S/T3 accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DECT base station to an S0 interface of
UCT1-S/UCT2-S cards (UCT1-C/UCT2-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 0-20
6/2/06
3.85
3.86
3.87
3.88
3.90
3.91
3.92
3.93
3.94
4.3
4.6
4.9
4.16
4.18
4.20
4.21
4.24
4.25
4.28
4.29
4.30
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.36
4.40
4.41
4.44
4.45
4.51
4.52
4.54
4.56
4.60
Prliminaires
Figure 4.28
Figure 4.29
Figure 4.30
Figure 4.31
Figure 4.32
Figure 4.33
Figure 4.34
Figure 4.35
Figure 4.36
Figure 4.37
Figure 4.38
Figure 4.39
Figure 4.40
Figure 4.41
Figure 4.42
Figure 4.43
Figure 4.44
Figure 4.45
Figure 4.46
Figure 4.47
Figure 4.48
Figure 4.49
Figure 4.50
Figure 4.51
Figure 4.52
Figure 4.53
Figure 4.54
Figure 4.55
Figure 4.56
Figure 4.57
Figure 4.58
Figure 4.59
Figure 4.60
Figure 4.61
Figure 4.62
Figure 4.63
Figure 4.64
Figure 4.65
Overview of UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Presentation of UCT1-C and UCT2-C card indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the RUCT-L card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the RUCT-S card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LD4 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the t0 interface of an LD4 ST card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the t0 interface of an LD4 RJ card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an S0 bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTING DECT BASE STATIONS TO AN LD4 ST CARD
(Synchro signal by 3rd pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DECT base station to an LD4 RJ card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LD4N/LD4X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the t0 interface of an LD4N ST/LD4X ST card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the t0 interface of an LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an S0 bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTING DECT BASE STATIONS TO AN LD4N ST/LD4X ST
CARD (Synchro signal by 3rd pair) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a DECT base station to an LD4N RJ card/LD4X RJ . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LT2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an st LT2 card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the PT2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring for a PT2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating principle of a CS1 or CA1 card built into a PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the CS1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the CA1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the Cp1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the MUM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LA16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an LAX or LMX ST card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an LAX or LMX RJ card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LA16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an LAX or LMX ST card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring an LAX or LMX RJ card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LA8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LN16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LN16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LN8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LM8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LH8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the LH16X card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prliminaires
4.63
4.67
4.70
4.72
4.74
4.78
4.79
4.79
4.80
4.81
4.85
4.89
4.90
4.90
4.91
4.92
4.94
4.102
4.104
4.107
4.108
4.109
4.114
4.119
4.121
4.125
4.127
4.128
4.129
4.131
4.132
4.133
4.136
4.139
4.142
4.143
4.146
4.148
6/2/06 Page 0-21
Figure 4.66
Figure 4.67
Figure 4.68
Figure 4.69
Figure 4.70
Figure 4.71
Figure 4.72
Figure 4.73
Figure 4.74
Figure 4.75
Figure 4.76
Figure 4.77
Figure 4.78
Figure 4.79
Figure 4.80
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.4
Figure 5.5
Figure 5.6
Figure 5.7
Figure 5.8
Figure 5.9
Figure 5.10
Figure 6.1
Figure 7.1
Figure 7.2
Figure 7.3
Figure 8.1
Figure 8.2
Figure 8.3
Figure 8.4
Figure 9.1
Figure 9.2
Figure 9.3
Figure 9.4
Figure 9.5
Figure 9.6
Overview of the LH16X-8 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.151

Overview of the LR4 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.154
Overview of the LI1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.159
ST LI1 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.163
Wiring a 50 Hz 2-wire analogue TL (ST card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.164
Wiring a 2-wire+E/M analogue TL (ST card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.164
Wiring a 4-wire+E/M analogue TL (ST card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165
Wiring a 4-wire + 2 E/M analogue TL (ST card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165
RJ LI1 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.166
Wiring a 50 Hz 2-wire analogue TL (RJ card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.168
Wiring a 2-wire+E/M analogue TL (RJ card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.168
Wiring a 4-wire+E/M analogue TL (RJ card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.169
Wiring a 4-wire + 2 E/M analogue TL (RJ card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.169
Overview of the IUMS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.170
Overview of the BTX card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.173
Connecting an administration tool to the serial port of the UCT and IUCT-D card 5.7
Connecting an administration tool locally or remotely (IUCT-D card) . . . . . . .
5.10
Connecting an administration tool locally or remotely (UCT card) . . . . . . . . .
5.11
Printer / IUCT-D cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12
Printer/UCT cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13
EXTERNAL MUSIC / UCT wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13
Connecting a common bell (IUCT-D card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14
Connecting a common bell (UCT card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14
Connecting an alarm bell (IUCT-D card). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15
Connecting an alarm bell (UCT-D card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15
PRESENTATION OF AN INSTALLATION SHEET (I SHEET) . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11
Presentation of a preventive maintenance sheet (P sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15
Presentation of a test sheet (T sheet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.35
Presentation of an exchange sheet (E sheet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.106
IPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3
Wiring an IPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6
Serial cable diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.13
Screenshot of the CreateCF.exe program in Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.36
Functional diagram of a NeXspan D in a simplex configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2
Functional diagram of a NeXspan D in a duplex configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3
Functional diagram of a NeXspan L, S and S12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4
Functional diagram of a standard non-rackable NeXspanS12 . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5
Functional diagram of a NeXspan C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6
Functional diagram of multisite synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7
Page 0-22
6/2/06
Prliminaires
LIST OF FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

NEXSPAN D IN A SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
NEXSPAN D IN A DUPLEX CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
NEXSPAN L, S AND S12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
STANDARD NON-RACKABLE NEXSPAN S12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
NEXSPAN C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
MULTISITE SYNCHRONISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Preliminaries
6/2/06
Page 0-18
Introduction
1.1
Purpose of this document

The NeXspan C/S/L/D documentation for installers is comprised of several manuals
covering all aspects of the installation, use and maintenance of NeXspan systems,
namely:
five operating manuals
one installation and maintenance manual
The purpose of this document called "Installation and maintenance manual" is to describe
the NeXspan C/S/L/D product range and provide the information required for their
installation and maintenance at O level.
This document is composed of the following chapters:
Index of chapters, tables, figures, network diagrams.
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter provides general information about the document, such as abbreviations,
and definitions.
Chapter 2: Overview
This chapter provides a functional overview of the products in the NeXspan C/S/L/D
range.
Chapter 3: Description and characteristics of a PBX
This chapter gives the following PBX-related information:
- main characteristics (physical, electrical, environment, interfaces, connection
capacities, sizing)
- physical description (structure, breakdown)
- configuration rules, indicating the possible slots and restrictions relating to the
various NeXspan C/S/L/D range expansion cards
- functional description, presenting the functions provided by the PBX, this
description is based on a functional diagram.
Chapter 4: Description of NeXspan components
This chapter provides a full description of each component in a NeXspan PBX,
including its:
- functional description
- physical description (connectors, indicators, push-buttons)
- hardware configuration (microswitches, jumpers)
- installation and wiring.

Introduction
6/2/06
Page 1-1
Chapter 5: Presentation of peripheral devices

This chapter presents the type of peripheral device which can be connected to
NeXspan PBXs.
Chapter 6: Installation
This chapter describes the operations used to implement, configure, and make a
NeXspan PBX operational.
Chapter 7: Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance operations relating to NeXspan PBXs, in
particular :
- general information on maintenance: safety
maintenance, list of support equipment, etc.
instructions,
organisation
of
- the preventive maintenance operations to be performed periodically on the

equipment
- test sheets
- exchange sheets for components
Chapter 8: Installing and using the IPS board
This chapter contains all information about the IPS board, including the board
diagrams, technical specifications and information onf how to install, configure and use
the IPS board software.
Chapter 9: Functional system diagrams
This chapter provides functional system diagrams for each NeXspan system as well as
a functional view of multisite synchronisation.
1.2
Audience
This document is intended for:
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBX installers
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBX maintenance operators
trainers
1.3
Reference documents
[0]
Operating Manual (Volume 1 - Telephony management - Menu 1.1)

PS8147*
[1]
Operating Manual (Volume 2 - Telephony management - Menus 1.2 to 1.9)

PS8148*
[2]
Operating Manual (Volume 3 - System management)

PS8149*
Page 1-2
6/2/06

Introduction
[3]
Multi-site Management
PS10473*
[4]
Data management
PS10474*
[5]
B0F3 Kit Installation Manual

AMT/PTD/PBX/0059*
[6]
M7420 Update Installation and User Manual

AMT/PTD/NMA/0011* (former reference: PS10133*)
[7]
M7420 Directory Manager Installation and User Manual

APS0026*
[8]
M7420 Music Manager Installation and User Manual

LAAH-10004-506* (this reference is not definitive)
[9]
Software Release R4.1 Generation Summary

M65/VAL/DJD/00029*
[10] M7425 Enterprise - Basic functions

AMT/PTD/NMA/0003* (former reference: PS10426*)
[11]
M7425 Enterprise Installation Manual

AMT/PTD/NMA/0004* (former reference PS10425*)
[12] Integrated DECT Service - Installation and start-up manual

PS8123*
[13] MUM Multiplexer card - Installation and Start-up Guide
PS8913*
[14] CallPilot Mini - Maintenance and installation guide
PS10008AFRA*
[15] Hotel management - Operating manual
laah-30288-001* (this reference is not definitive)
[16] M7xx Digital Sets and i7xx IP Sets - Installation manual
PS10186*
[17] i2052 Software Phone - Installation manual
PS10259*
[18] i2070 Software Attendant Console - Installation manual
PS10143*

Introduction
6/2/06
Page 1-3
1.4
Abbreviations
ACD
LSB
IVB
CSTA
CTI
PTC
DECT
DISA
DTMF
ESF
DCTE
DTE
FIFO
HDLC
IP
TS
LAN
LCR
TL
PLL
MEVO
MIB
PCM
MOVACS
NC
NTP
PBX
MMI
ISDN
PSTN
DID
SF
SNA
IVS
TBD
DLT
DNT
TWP
DAU
CPU
UCT
UCT1
UCT1
Page 1-4
6/2/06
Automatic Call Distribution

Logical Security Block
Integrated Voice Box
Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications
Computer-Telephone Interface
Positive Temperature Coefficient
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephony
Direct Inward System Access
Dial Tone multi frequency
Extended Single Frame
Data Communic ation Terminal Equipment
Data Terminal Equipment
First In First Out
High-level Data Link Control
Internet Protocol
Time Slot
Local Area Network
Least Cost Routing
Tie-Line
Permanent Logical Link
Voice mail (from the French MEssagerie VOcale)
Management Information Base
Pulse and Coding Modulation
Multi-switch Original Virtual Addressing Communications System
Not connected
Network Time Protocol
Private Branch eXchange
Man-Machine Interface
Integrated Services Digital Network
Public Switched Telephone Network
Direct Inward Dialling
Single Frame
Systems Network Architecture
Integrated Voice Server
To Be Defined
Digital Link Terminal
Digital Network Terminal
Telephony Web Portal
Delocated Acquisition Unit
Central Processing Unit
Central Processing Unit card
Central processing unit card 1st generation
Central processing unit card 2nd generation

Introduction
VPIM
VTI/XML
VU
WAN
1.5
Voice Profil for Internet Mail

Virtual Terminal Interface / eXtended MarKup Language
Version Upgrade
Wide Area Network
Definitions
Synchronous announcements
Announcements synchronised with the start of a call.
ACD
Automatic call distribution used to optimise the number of replies and response time
relating to the number of operator sets in a single or multisite installation.
DECT radio base stations
Base stations providing radio coverage over a given zone and offering several
simultaneous communication channels with wireless telephones.
B-channel
Speech or data transmission channel in circuit mode.
D-channel
Data transmission channel in packet mode.
Signalling channel
Virtual link between 2 sites, used for carrying the MOVACS signalling when setting up a
telephone call. Used for proprietary signalling and system data (billing tickets,
management centre, directory).
BTX card
Charging buffer card used to print detailed telephone traffic reports.
CA1 card
Asynchronous serial interface card used for connecting 4 data transmission terminals.
CLX card
Interface card with a microprocessor having access to a memory zone on the UCT card
through the system bus. This category includes network access cards.
CP1 card
Circuit/Packet card used to connect to an X25 network for sending data in packet mode
over a B channel in a Numeris link.
CS1 card
Synchronous serial interface card, used to connect 2 X25 synchronous interfaces.

Introduction
6/2/06
Page 1-5
DTOC card
Busy tone detection daughter card, fitted on LR4 card.
FTXA card
Detection card 50 kHz for billing pulses, fitted on LR4 card.
FTXC card
12 kHz or 16 kHz detection card for billing pulses, fitted on LR4 card.
Equipment card
Interface card without microprocessor or access to the memory of the UCT card. This
category comprises the subscriber cards and cards for connecting with tie lines.
IPS card
NeXspan S, L and D range expansion card. This card serves as SIP access point,
enabling the PBXs to propose connections to SIP terminals, alternative SIP operators
(SIP trunk) or to remote SIP servers.
IUMS card
Integrated voice mail card.
LA16X card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 16 analogue sets.
LA16X-8 card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 8 analogue sets.
LA8 card
Interface card used for connecting 8 analogue sets.
LD4 card
4 S0/T0 ISDN interface card used to connect to 2- or 4-channel DECT base stations, or to
ISDN terminals (S0), or to an ISDN BRI interface (T0).
LD4N card
ISDN terminals (S0), or to an ISDN BRI interface (T0).
LD4X card
ISDN terminals (S0), or to an ISDN BRI interface (T0). The LD4X card is obtained from
the LD4N card by removing a specific jumper, and allows the use of additional functions.
LH8 card
Interface card used for connecting 8 hotel analogue sets.
LH16X card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 16 analogue hotel/
motel sets.
Page 1-6
6/2/06

Introduction
LH16X-8 card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 8 analogue hotel/motel
sets.
LI1 card
Interface card used in connecting 2 tie lines.
LM8 card
Interface card used for connecting 4 analogue sets and 4 digital sets.
LN16X card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 16 digital sets.
LN16X-8 card
Interface card, specific to the NeXspan range, used in connecting 8 digital sets.
LN8 card
Interface card used for connecting 8 digital sets.
LR4 card
Interface card used for connecting 4 telephone lines in analogue mode.
LT2 card
Access junctor card S2/T2 ISDN primary rate or PCM digital junctor.
MUM card
Voice / Fax multiplexer/demultiplexer card.
PT2 card
TCP/IP-X25 and voice over IP gateway card used for connection to a 10/100 Mbits
Ethernet LAN.
RJ cards
Cards designating the expansion cards in RJ45 format; these cards are fitted with a front
panel.
RUCT card
Bus interface card for an expansion cabinet providing the interface between the UCT card
of the main cabinet and the expansion cards in an expansion cabinet.
RUCT/RUCT-D
Bus interface card for an expansion cabinet providing the interface between the UCT-D
card of the main cabinet and the expansion cards in an expansion cabinet.
ST cards
Cards designating the expansion cards in Stocko format; these cards are fitted with an
extraction handle.
UCT card
Central Processing Unit card of a NeXspan C/S/L PBX.

Introduction
6/2/06
Page 1-7
UCT-D card
Central Processing Unit card of a Duplicated NeXspan PBX.
CSTA
Communication standard enabling telephone and computer applications to communicate
in client/server mode. The connection with the server is via either an X25 or TCP/IP link.
DISA
Service used to provide users outside the installation with the same features as a set
connected directly to the PBX.
Ethernet
Local network (LAN) protocol using twisted (10 base T) or coaxial cable (10 Base 2 or 10
base 5) for transferring at 10 Mbps in its base version and 100 Mbps in its fast version
(Fast Ethernet).
TS
Time slot for a frame carried over a PCM link, which can be used notably as a medium for
voice or data communication.
LCR
Least Cost Routing service. Based on the number requested, this service provides
automatic selection of the optimum route, according to the distances and billing zones or
caller rights.
The extended LCR service is used to take into account the pricing offers of the various
operators.
PBX
Private branch exchange: electronic device used to automatically route a company's
internal and external communications.
Class set
Name given to an analogue set connected to a line on which detection has been
authorised for the call's number, date and time. The rights are given to the PBX from an
operating console.
HDLC
High level data link control protocol.
Signalling
Exchange of information using supervision signals or transmission of DTMF code.
Signalling concerns the transmission of the communication or the called party
identification.
Page 1-8
6/2/06

Introduction
Basic or extended RON/TRON signalling

Signalling method in which the information is transferred between the switching and
transmission equipment through specialised wires, called TRON (transmission by the
PBX) and RON (reception by the PBX).
RON (ReceptiON) and TRON (TRansmissiON) signalling is carried over specific wires
transmitting a status or a pulse in each direction; it is basic when it uses a single RON
wire and a single TRON wire, and extended when it includes 2 (or more).
VU
Conversion tools (Version Upgrade). VUs are run to transmit data in the form of a new
software packet.
X.25
Protocol for the connection between a DTE and a DCE, or between two DTEs for
transmitting data in packet mode.

Introduction
6/2/06
Page 1-9
Page 1-10
6/2/06

Introduction
Overview
2.1
Description of the NeXspan C/S/L/D products

The NeXspan C/S/L/D range includes a set of homogeneous and flexible products used
to manage from 8 to 704 subscribers, based on a single software package and a range of
components (cards) common to all products in the range.
The Duplicated NeXspan (NeXspan D) is a secure upgrade of the NeXspan C/S/L PBXs.
The operation of the PBX is secured through the duplication of the CPU, integrated
services and power supply. This security offers 100% PBX resource availability.
The NeXspan D is available in configurations of one, two or three cabinets used to
manage 8 to 704 extensions. Like other products in the range, the NeXspan D is based
on a single software solution and a range of components common to all the NeXspan
products.
The NeXspan D can be configured in three different ways:
Simplex configuration, with a single UCT-D CPU card in the main cabinet, a single
RUCT-D card in the expansion cabinet(s), and a single power supply module per
cabinet. In this case, none of its elements is duplicated.
Simplex configuration with a secured power supply, comprised of a single UCT-D CPU
card in the main cabinet, a single RUCT-D card in the expansion cabinet(s), and two
power supply modules per cabinet.
Duplex configuration with two UCT-D CPU cards in the main cabinet, two RUCT-D
cards in the expansion cabinet(s), and two power supply modules per cabinet.
The C/S/L/D range is used for connecting to traditional analogue or digital communication
networks or using the IP protocol.
It provides a high level of integration of telephone services (messaging, IVS, answering
machine, announcements, etc.) and remote management (IP, HDLC, downloading).
It is based on total operation (monitoring, configuration, downloading) of the PBXs
through remote management.
The NeXspan C/S/L/D range is comprised of five products:
Duplicated NeXspan (XD)
NeXspan L (XL)
NeXspan S (XS)
NeXspan S12 (XS12)
NeXspan C (XC) PBXs
These five products differ mainly based on their management and switching power:
from 8 to 704 physical subscribers for an XD

Overview
6/2/06 Page 2-1
from 8 to 500 physical subscribers for an XL

from 20 to 100 physical subscribers for an XS
from 12 to 60 physical subscribers for an XS12
10 physical subscribers maximum for an XC
The XD, XL, XS and XS12 PBXs can be fitted with a broad range of expansion cards,
used to configure the PBXs optimally in order to meet your needs:
IP-PBX
trunk gateways (gateways optimising the resources actually used at a given time)
voice gateways (voice gateways: resources used to set up a voice circuit between two
sites in a network)
As the NeXspan C/S/L/D range belongs to the M6500 portfolio, it has all its advantages,
notably a single software application.
The software uniqueness guarantees not only the compatibility between the various types
of NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs, but also with any IP-PBX in the M6500 range.
The PBXs are highly scalable due to the reuse that is possible of expansion and network
cards within other products in the M6500 range, to which new subscriber cards can be
added.
The NeXspan C/S/L range is compatible with an existing multisite configuration from
software release R2.1-03 and R3.1 (F1a or F1C), with functional restrictions in terms of
interoperation. NeXspan D is compatible with any already existing multisite configuration
from software release 4.2, with functional restrictions in terms of inter-operation.
The NeXspan D was designed to optimise:
the available PBX resources
- CPU card duplication
- the duplication of certain integrated services
- power supply duplication
The NeXspan D also provides the following improvements, which prompted the
development of the NeXspan C/S/L range:
the hardware installation time:
- all cards are "rackable" on an XL cabinet, as well as on an XS cabinet in a rackable
version
- new cards are "plug and play"
Page 2-2
6/2/06

Overview
site visits thanks to the following features:

- secured software downloading
- remote management of voice services
- remote operation
2.2
Functional and physical architecture of the PBXs
2.2.1
NeXspan D
The architecture of NeXspan D is as follows:
a main cabinet including:
- one (simplex configuration) or two main UCT-D cards (duplex configuration), the
core of the PBX, performs mainly tasks such as process management, switching
and interface with the management devices, it includes:
X
the basic equipment of a PBX
management ports
- an IUCT-D card which supports the systems external connections

- if necessary, expansion cards. These cards interface with the communication
devices and connected networks. They are added to increase the connection
possibilities of:
- one or two ADS300-XD power supply modules:
X
one (ADS300-XD) power supply module and one VADS ventilation module, in
case of simplex configuration
two ADS300-XD power supply modules, for a simplex configuration with secure
power supply, or duplex
one or two expansion cabinets, optionally each linked by a wire to the main cabinet
with:
- one card (simplex configuration) or two RUCT-D cards (duplex configuration)
installed instead of UCT-D card(s)
- additional expansion cards
- one or two ADS300-XD power supply modules:
X
one (ADS300-XD) power supply module and one VADS ventilation module, in
case of simplex configuration
two ADS300-XD power supply modules, for a simplex configuration with secure
power supply, or duplex

Overview
6/2/06 Page 2-3
The NeXspan D accepts only one physical format of expansion cards: a card with a front
panel (RJ card) fitted with RJ45 connectors.
The CPU card of NeXspan D (UCT-D) exists in a single RJ45 format.
All products in the range have the same width (standard 19'') and colours and use the
same materials.
2.2.2
NeXspan C/S/L
NeXspan C/S/L PBXs are based on a common architecture:
a main cabinet including:
- The CPU card (UCT), the core of the PBX, performs mainly tasks such as process
management, switching and interface with the management devices, it includes:
X
the basic equipment of a PBX
management ports
- possibly expansion cards for XS12, XS and XL PBXs. These cards interface with
the communication devices and connected networks. They are added to increase
the connection possibilities of:
one or two optional expansion cabinets, for XS and XL PBXs, each connected with a
cable to the main cabinet integrating additional expansion cards (XS12 and XC PBXs
cannot be fitted with expansion cabinets).
Non-rackable XS PBXs and XL PBXs can be fitted with two physical expansion card
types:
a card with a front panel (RJ card) fitted with RJ45 connectors
a card with an extraction handle (ST card) fitted with Stocko connectors
Rackable XS PBXs accept only RJ cards.
The CPU card of the XL PBX (UCT-L) exists in a single format (RJ45); that of the XS PBX
(UCT1-S or UCT2-S) is manufactured in two variants with different interfaces on the front
panel for analogue and digital equipment:
one variant fitted with RJ45 sockets
a variant fitted with Stocko connectors
XS12 and XC PBXs exist in only one RJ45 format.
All products in the range have the same width (standard 19''), colours and use the same
materials.
Page 2-4
6/2/06

Overview
2.3
Functional presentation
The NeXspan C/S/L/D PBX range basically offers the following functions:
temporary links between subscriber lines, various types of networks, and possibly
other PBXs or private installations
subscriber service handling
device operation security (NeXspan D only)
In order to do this, they handle:
management of access to various types of networks:
- RTCP
- ISDN
- X25
- Ethernet
management of access to various types of devices:
- digital sets
- analogue sets
- IP sets
- computer terminals
- DECT base stations
management of access to other PBXs (multi-site access) through interfaces:
- PCM (E1/T1)
- Ethernet network
- analogue line
- tie line
call switching:
- circuit switching
- packet switching
signal generation and detection
subscriber services:
- voice mail server
- directory server
- answering machine
- automated attendant
- storage of information and data required for devices connected (voice messages,
directories, etc.)
internal management:
- operation and supervision of devices and networks connected to the PBX, together
with the operating system
- internal or external alarm collection
- management of expansion cards (XD, XL, XS and XS12 PBXs):
X initialisation and supervision

Overview
6/2/06 Page 2-5
storage of the information and data required for the operation of the cards
management of duplicated services (NeXspan D only):

- duplication of power supply (switchover)
- duplication of CPU cards
X
switchover
duplication of hardware functions
data synchronisation
software synchronisation
- duplication of the integrated answering service

- duplication of the voice mail system
- duplication of the integrated charging services
- duplication of IP network connections
Page 2-6
6/2/06

Overview
Description and characteristics of NeXspan PBXs
3.1
Physical description
3.1.1
Physical description of NeXspan D in simplex configuration

(see 3.11 to 3.15)
3.1.1.1
General description
A NeXspan D (XD) PBX in simplex configuration consists of one main cabinet and, if
necessary, one expansion cabinet (version 2XD) or two expansion cabinets (version
3XD).
The main cabinet and the expansion cabinets are in the form of a 19" metal cabinet, 10 U,
in which the subassemblies required for the PBX to operate are inserted.
The cabinets are adapted to 19" racks using securing brackets. They can also be just
placed on the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet.
The cabinets can be stacked, but not installed next to each other, to prevent blocking the
air inlets located on the left hand side.
The main cabinet and expansion cabinets have a common structure:
a slot on the right side, in the lower part of the cabinet, reserved for the power supply
module,
a slot on the right side, in the upper part of the cabinet, reserved for a ventilation
module,
a slot, in the upper part of the cabinet (main cabinet only), reserved for the card
supporting the device external connections,
a slot, in the upper part of the cabinet, reserved for the main card,
2 rows of 8 slots:
- in the main cabinet
X
The first 14 slots are reserved for plug-in expansion cards along the guides on
the sides of the cabinet (RJ45 format).
The last two slots are reserved for the BTX expansion cards.
- In the expansion card(s), the 16 slots are reserved for the plug-in expansion cards
along the guides on the side of the cabinet (RJ45 format).
- RJ cards can be locked on the front panel of the cabinet, blanking plates can be
fitted in unused slots.
openings for air flow ensuring ventilation of the cabinet elements are present on:
- left-hand side: fresh air inlet,
- rear panel: hot air outlet.

6/2/06
Page 3-1
The external cables are connected on the front panel of the subassemblies which can be
inserted in the cabinet (main card, expansion cards, mains unit).
Connections to the expansion cabinets and to an aoptional battery are made at the back
of the cabinet (see Figure 3.2 and Figure 4.11 to 4.17).
The list of subassemblies which can be inserted in the main cabinet and expansion
cabinets is provided in 3.7.
3.1.1.2
Internal description
The main cabinet and expansion cabinets include, in addition to the slots for removable
subassemblies, a backplane card integrating the connectors required for connecting the
main card, or the RUCT-D card for an expansion cabinet, and the card supporting the
connection of expansion cards.
Nota :
Fans are fixed on the power supply module and on the ventilation module.
Page 3-2
6/2/06

IUCT-D card
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
UCT-D card (A)
RJ expansion cards
BTX card
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Figure 3.1
Ventilation module
Power supply module
OVERVIEW OF AN XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-3
Connector
Battery
Hot air outlet
4 DB25-F connectors
Connection to the expansion cabinet(s)
Fresh air inlet
Figure 3.2
REAR VIEW OF AN XD CABINET
Page 3-4
6/2/06

Expansion cabinet
Connection cable for XD-2XD (A)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
RUCT-D card (A)
IUCT-D card
Ventilation module
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
UCT-D card (A)
Power supply module
RJ expansion cards
Ventilation module
Main cabinet
BTX card
Power supply module
Figure 3.3
OVERVIEW OF A 2XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-5
Second expansion cabinet

Ventilation module
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Power supply module

RUCT-D card (A)
Connection cable
XD-3XD (A)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
RUCT-D card (A)

Connection cable
XD-2XD (A)
IUCT-D card
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
First
expansion cabinet
UCT-D card (A)
Ventilation module
RJ expansion cards
Power supply module
Ventilation module
Main cabinet
BTX card
Figure 3.4
OVERVIEW OF A 3XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS
Page 3-6
Power supply module
6/2/06

3.1.2
Physical description of NeXspan D in simplex configuration, with

secure power supply (seer 3.5 to 3.7)
3.1.2.1
General description
A NeXspan D (XD) PBX in simplex configuration, with secure power supply, consists of
one main cabinet and, if necessary, one expansion cabinet (version 2XD) or two
expansion cabinets (version 3XD).
The cabinets are adapted to 19" racks using securing brackets. They can also be just laid
on the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet.
The cabinets can be stacked, but not installed next to each other to prevent blocking the
on the right side, two slots reserved for two power supply modules,
2 rows of 8 slots:
X

6/2/06
Page 3-7
Connections to the expansion cabinet(s) and to an aoptional battery are made at the back
The list of subassemblies which can be inserted into the main cabinet and expansion
cabinets is provided in Section3.4.
3.1.2.2
main card, or the RUCT-D card for an expansion cabinet, and the card supporting the
connection of expansion cards.
Nota :
The fans are fitted into the power supply modules.
Page 3-8
6/2/06

IUCT-D card
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
UCT-D card (A)
RJ expansion cards
BTX card
Power supply module

(power supply module 2)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Power supply module (power supply module 1)
Figure 3.5
OVERVIEW OF AN XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, WITH SECURE

POWER SUPPLY, FITTED WITH RJ CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-9
Expansion cabinet
Connection cable for XD-2XD (A)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
RUCT-D card (A)
Power supply module

Blanking plate
(empty slot)
UCT-D card (A)
Power supply module

(power supply
module 1)
RJ expansion cards
Power supply module

BTX card
Main cabinet
Power supply module
Figure 3.6
OVERVIEW OF A 2XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, WITH SECURE

Page 3-10
6/2/06


Power supply module
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Power supply module

RUCT-D card (A)
Connection cable
XD-3XD (A)
Blanking plate
empty slot)
RUCT-D card (A)

Connection cable
XD-2XD (A)
IUCT-D card
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
First
expansion cabinet
UCT-D card (A)
Power supply module

RJ expansion cards
Power supply module

Power supply module
Main cabinet
BTX card
Figure 3.7
Power supply module

OVERVIEW OF A 3XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, WITH SECURE


6/2/06
Page 3-11
3.1.3
Physical description of NeXspan D in duplex configuration, (see 3.8 to 3.10)
3.1.3.1
General description
A NeXspan D (XD) PBX in duplex configuration consists of one main cabinet and, if
necessary, one expansion cabinet (version 2XD) or two expansion cabinets (version
3XD).
The cabinets are adapted to 19" racks using securing brackets. They can also be just laid
on the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet.
on the right side, two slots reserved for two power supply modules,
two slots, in the upper part of the cabinet, reserved for two main cards,
2 rows of 8 slots:
X
Connections to the expansion cabinet(s) and to an aoptional battery are made at the back
The list of the subassemblies that can be inserted in the main cabinet and expansion
cabinets is given in 3.4 .
Page 3-12
6/2/06

3.1.3.2
two main cards, or the two RUCT-D cards for an expansion cabinet, and the card
supporting the connection external devices and the expansion cards.
Nota :
The fans are fitted into the power supply modules.

6/2/06
Page 3-13
IUCT-D card
UCT-D card (B)
UCT-D card (A)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
BTX card
Power supply module

RJ expansion cards
Power supply module

Figure 3.8
OVERVIEW OF AN XD CABINET IN DUPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS
Page 3-14
6/2/06

Expansion cabinet
Connection cable
XD-2XD (A)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
RUCT-D card (B)
Connection cable
XD-2XD (B)
RUCT-D card (A)
Power supply module

IUCT-D card
Power supply module
UCT-D card (B)

UCT-D card (A)
Power supply module

RJ expansion cards
Main cabinet
BTX card
Figure 3.9
Power supply module

OVERVIEW OF A 2XD CABINET IN DUPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-15

Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Power supply module (power suppl

Power supply module
RUCT-D card (B)

RUCT-D card (A)
Connection cable
XD-3XD (A)
Connection cable
XD-3XD (B)
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
First
expansion cabinet
Connection cable
XD-2XD (A)
RUCT-D card (B)

Connection cable
XD-2XD (B)
RUCT-D card (A)
IUCT-D card
UCT-D card (B)

UCT-D card (A)
First
expansion cabinet
Power supply module
RJ expansion cards
Power supply module

Power supply module
Main cabinet
BTX card
Power supply module

Figure 3.10 OVERVIEW OF A 3XD CABINET IN DUPLEX CONFIGURATION, FITTED WITH RJ

CARDS
Page 3-16
6/2/06

3.1.4
Physical description of a NeXspan L PBX (see 3.11 to 3.15)
3.1.4.1
General description
A NeXspan L (XL) PBX includes a main cabinet and possibly one (2XL version) or two
(3XL version) expansion cabinets.
The cabinets are adapted to 19" racks using ear cushions. They can also be just laid on
the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet.
on the right-hand side a location for the power supply module,
2 rows of 7 slots (i.e. 14 slots) reserved for plug-in expansion cards along the guides
on the sides of the cabinet (RJ45 or Stocko format):
fitted in unused slots,
- for ST cards, blanking plates can be fixed, notably when the cabinet needs to be
transported.
A cabinet with ST cards is compatible with a cabinet fitted with RJ45 cards. However the
same cabinet can be fitted with only with one type of card (Stocko or RJ45).
inserted in the cabinet (main card, expansion cards, optional battery). The expansion
cabinets are connected at the back of the cabinet.
The list of subassemblies which can be inserted into the main cabinet and expansion
A cabinet fitted with ST cards (see 3.12) has blanking plates used to protect access to the
expansion cards.
3.1.4.2
main card, or the RUCT card for an expansion cabinet, and the expansion cards.
Nota :
The fans are fitted onto the power supply module.

6/2/06
Page 3-17
PBX_MATRIX_XL_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_02
UCT-L card
RJ expansion cards
Blanking plate
(empty slot)
Power supply module
Figure 3.11 OVERVIEW OF AN XL CABINET FITTED WITH RJ CARDS
Page 3-18
6/2/06

UCT-L card
1L5
L
7
1L5
7L
L
8
LN16XL0
L
8
B
EE
IC
R
C
R
B
E
L
R
E
A
ISR
F
O
L
C
O
L
C
M
O
R
U
N
LN16XL0
E1T1
X_MATRIX_XL_COFFRST_AVCOTE_01_01
LT2X
Cable route
hatch
ST expansion cards
Blanking plate
Power supply module
Figure 3.12 OVERVIEW OF AN XL CABINET FITTED WITH ST CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-19
Expansion cabinet connection cable

connector
Fresh air inlet
PBX_MATRIX_XL_COFFRJ_3/4ARRIERE_01_01
Hot air outlet
Figure 3.13 REAR VIEW OF AN XL CABINET
Page 3-20
6/2/06

RUCT-L card
Expansion cabinet
UCT-L card
Connection cable
XL-2XL
BX_MATRIX_2XL_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_02
Main cabinet
Expansion cards
Blanking plates
(empty slots)
Power supply modules
Figure 3.14 OVERVIEW OF A 2XL CABINET FITTED WITH RJ CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-21
RUCT-L cards
Second
expansion cabinet
Connection cable
XL-2XL-3XL
UCT-L card
Main cabinet
Blanking plates
(empty slots)
PBX_MATRIX_3XL_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_02
First
expansion cabinet
RJ expansion
card
Figure 3.15 OVERVIEW OF A 3XL CABINET FITTED WITH RJ CARDS

Page 3-22
6/2/06

3.1.5
Physical description of a NeXspan S PBX (see 3.16 to 3.18)
3.1.5.1
General description
A NeXspan S (XS) PBX includes a main cabinet, and possibly an expansion cabinet (2XS
version).
the ground or on a piece of furniture by adding slip-free feet, or mounted on a wall.
The cabinets can be stacked or set side by side. In the case of wall-mounting, the
expansion cabinet can only be fitted beside the basic cabinet.
The two cabinets present a common structure:
A slot, located at the bottom of the cabinet, reserved for the main UCT1-S card (1st
generation) or UCT2-S card (2nd generation) :
- subscriber sockets and T0/S0 interfaces are built into the UCT1-S/UCT2-S card.
- The UCT1-S/UCT2-S card is manufactured in two variants with different interfaces
on the front panel for analogue and digital equipment:
X
one variant fitted with RJ45 sockets,
one variant fitted with Stocko connectors,
3 slots, located in the upper part of the cabinet, reserved for expansion cards (RJ45 or
Stocko format):
fitted in unused slots,
- the ST cards are fitted on spacers inside the cabinet,
- right-hand side: hot air outlet.
The XS cabinets exist in two versions:
The non-rackable version which requires the cover to be opened when an expansion
card is to be added or removed,
The rackable version which allows you to add or remove an expansion card from the
front panel without opening the cover. This version only receives cards in RJ format.
Note : The rackable XS cabinets are only fitted with UCT2-S main cards.
A cabinet with ST cards is compatible with a cabinet fitted with RJ45 cards. However, the
same cabinet can be fitted with only with one type of card (ST or RJ).
The external cables (for the main card and the expansion cards) are connected on the
front panel of the cabinet. The mains, battery (optional) connection, as well as the
6/2/06
Page 3-23
connection to the expansion cabinet are at the back of the cabinet.

The list of subassemblies which can be inserted in the main cabinet and expansion
A cabinet fitted with ST cards (see 3.17) has blanking plates used to protect access to the
expansion cards.
3.1.5.2
The main cabinet and expansion cabinet include, in addition to the slots for the CPU cards
and removable subassemblies:
a backplane connected to the main card (UCT1-S/UCT2-S for a main cabinet or
RUCT-S for an expansion cabinet), and used to host expansion cards.
In a rackable cabinet, the expansion cards (in RJ format) can be plugged in along the
guides located on the sides of the cabinets. In a non-rackable cabinet, the expansion
cards are not plug-in, so the cabinet must be opened from the top to add or extract an
expansion card.
Avertissement :
Do not hot-plug in or unplug an expansion card in a non-rackable XS

PBX.
Avertissement :
The connectors in the back plane may be damaged if a card in Stocko

format is plugged in a rackable XS PBX.
A power supply module connected to the CPU card (UCT1-S/UCT2-S or RUCT-S),

both fitted inside the cabinet,
A fan.
Page 3-24
6/2/06

Cover
Fresh air inlet
Power supply
UCT1-S card
RJ version
PBX_MATRIX_XS_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
Hot air outlet
RJ expansion card
Figure 3.16 OVERVIEW OF A NON-RACKABLE XS CABINET FITTED WITH RJ CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-25
Cover
Fresh air inlet

Power supply
UCT1-S card
ST version
Hot air outlet
Cable route
ST expansion cards
PBX_MATRIX_XS_COFFRST_AVCOTE_01_01
Blanking plates
Figure 3.17 OVERVIEW OF A NON-RACKABLE XS CABINET FITTED WITH ST CARDS
Page 3-26
6/2/06

RUCT-S card
Expansion cabinet
RJ expansion cards
Main cabinet
BX_MATRIX_XS_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
UCT1-S card
RJ version
Figure 3.18 OVERVIEW OF A NON-RACKABLE 2XS CABINET FITTED WITH RJ CARDS

6/2/06
Page 3-27
Cover
Expansion cards
Mains socket
"I/O" switch
Expansion cabinet
connection with
expansion cabinet
Figure 3.19
REAR VIEW OF A NON-RACKABLE XS CABINET
Page 3-28
Power supply
Battery connector
PBX_MATRIX_XS_COFFRJ45_3/4ARRIERE_01_01
Fuse holder
6/2/06

Fresh air inlet
Power supply
1L5
L
7
L
8
L
LN
16X0
1L5
7L
L
8
L
LN
16X0
1L5
L
7
UCT2-S card
RJ version
Hot air outlet
L
8
L
LN
16X0
PBX_MATRIX_XS2_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
RJ expansion card
Figure 3.20 OVERVIEW OF A RACKABLE XS CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-29
RUCT-S card
1L5
L
7
1L5
L
7
L
8
LNL0
16X
1L5
L
7
L
8
L
LN
16X0
1L5
L
7
1L5
L
7
L
8
LNL0
16X
UCT2-S card
RJ version
L
8
L
LN
16X0
Expansion cabinet
1L5
L
7
L
8
L
LN
16X0
Main cabinet
RJ expansion cards
PBX_MATRIX_2XS2_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
L
8
L
LN
16X0
Figure 3.21 OVERVIEW OF A RACKABLE 2XS CABINET
Page 3-30
6/2/06

Mains socket
Fuse holder
"I/O" switch
Battery connector
PBX_MATRIX_SX2_COFFRJ45_3/4ARRIERE_01_01
Expansion cabinet
connection with
expansion cabinet
Fresh air inlet
Figure 3.22 REAR VIEW OF A RACKABLE XS CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-31
3.1.6
Physical description of a NeXspan S12 PBX (see Figure 3.23 )
3.1.6.1
General description
A NeXspan S12 (XS12) PBX consists of a single cabinet in RJ45 format. No expansion
cards can be fitted in this cabinet.
NeXspan S12 cabinets exist in two versions:
A non-rackable version which, by default, cannot receive any expansion cards. It is
possible to add a back plane (optional). In this case, three expansion cards (RJ45
format only) can be fitted on the NeXspan S12. The non-rackable version requires the
cover to be opened when an expansion card is to be added or removed.
The rackable version which, by default, has a back plane and can receive three
expansion cards (RJ45 format only). This rackable version allows you to add or
remove an expansion card from the front panel without opening the cover.
Note : The rackable XS12 cabinets are only fitted with UCT2S-12 main cards.
The cabinet is in the form of a 19" metal cabinet, 2 U, in which the subassemblies required
for the PBX to operate are inserted.
the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet or mounted on the wall.
The cabinet has the following structure:
A slot, located at the bottom of the cabinet, reserved for the main UCT1S-12 card (1st
generation) or UCT2S-12 card (2nd generation).
Subscriber sockets and T0/S0 interfaces are built into the card.
- right-hand side: hot air outlet.
3 slots, located in the upper part of the cabinet, reserved for expansion cards (RJ45
format only). RJ cards can be locked on the front panel of the cabinet; blanking plates
can be fitted in unused slots.
In a rackable cabinet, the expansion cards (in RJ format) can be plugged in along the
guides located on the sides of the cabinets. In a non-rackable cabinet, the expansion
cards are not plug-in, so the cabinet must be opened from the top to add or extract an
expansion card.
Avertissement :
Page 3-32
6/2/06
Do not hot-plug in or unplug an expansion card in a non-rackable PBX

XS12.

3.1.6.2
In addition to the slot for the CPU card, the standard cabinet includes:
The non-rackable NeXspan S12:
- a power supply module connected to the CPU card, both fitted inside the cabinet,
- A fan.
The rackable NeXspan S12:
- a back plane connected to the main card and which is meant to receive the
expansion cards
- 3 slots reserved for the expansion cards (in RJ format), which can be plugged in
along the guides located on the sides of the cabinets.
- a power supply module connected to the CPU card, both fitted inside the cabinet,
- A fan.
Mains supply and (optional) battery connections are located at the back of the cabinet.

6/2/06
Page 3-33
Fresh air inlet
Cover
Hot air outlet

UCT1S-12 card
MATRIX_SX2_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
Power supply
Figure 3.23 OVERVIEW OF A STANDARD (NON-RACKABLE) XS12 CABINET
Page 3-34
6/2/06

Cover
Fuse holder
"I/O" switch
Battery connector
Power supply
MATRIX_XS_COFFRJ45_3/4ARRIERE_01_01
Mains socket
Figure 3.24 REAR VIEW OF A STANDARD (NON-RACKABLE) XS12 CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-35
Power supply
Fresh air inlet
1L5
L
7
L
8
LN
16XL0
1L5
L
7
8L
LN
16XL0
1L5
L
7
UCT2S-12 card
Hot air outlet
L
8
LN
16XL0
PBX_MATRIX_XS2_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_01
RJ expansion card
Figure 3.25 OVERVIEW OF A STANDARD (RACKABLE) XS12 CABINET
Page 3-36
6/2/06

Mains socket
Fuse holder
Fresh air inlet
"I/O" switch
PBX_MATRIX_SX2_COFFRJ45_3/4ARRIERE_01_01
Battery connector
Figure 3.26 REAR VIEW OF A STANDARD (RACKABLE) XS12 CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-37
3.1.7
Physical description of a NeXspan C PBX (see Figure 3.27)
3.1.7.1
General description
An XC PBX consists of a basic cabinet in RJ45 format. It cannot be fitted with expansion
cards or cabinets; the subscriber sockets and the T0/S0 interfaces are built into the CPU
card.
The cabinet is in the form of a 19" metal cabinet, 1 U, in which the subassemblies required
for the PBX to operate are inserted.
the ground or on a piece of furniture, by adding slip-free feet or mounted on the wall.
The cabinet has the following structure:
A slot reserved for the UCT1-C (1st generation) or UCT2-C (2nd generation) CPU card,
- right-hand side: fresh air inlet,
- left-hand side: hot air outlet.
3.1.7.2
In addition to the slot for the CPU card, the cabinet includes:
a power supply module connected to the CPU card, both fitted inside the cabinet,
a fan,
one integrated 12 V battery.
Note : A push button at the back of the XC cabinet is used to deactivate the integrated battery.
Page 3-38
6/2/06

Cover
Power supply
Integrated battery
UCT1-C card
Fresh air inlet
PBX_MATRIX_XC_COFFRJ45_AVCOTE_01_02
Fan
Figure 3.27 OVERVIEW OF AN XC CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-39
3.2
Specifications
3.2.1
Physical specifications
Table 3.1
3.2.2
SPECIFICATIONS
XL
CABINET
XS
CABINET
XS12
CABINET
XC
CABINET
MAIN
XD
Height
310 mm
(7 U)
89 mm
(2 U)
89 mm
(2 U)
45 mm
(1 U)
450 mm (10 U)
Width
440 mm
(19'')
440 mm
(19")
440 mm
(19")
440 mm
(19")
440 mm (19")
Depth
316 mm
400 mm
400 mm
400 mm
316 mm
Max. weight
20 kg
7.5 kg
7.5 kg
5 kg
15 kg (simplex)
18 kg (duplex)
without
expansion
cabinet
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF C/S/L/D PBXS
Electrical specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
VALUES
ADS 300XD power supply module

Rated voltage
Tolerances
+/- 10%
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power
Converter (48 V)
External battery (option)
Table 3.2
300 W
+5 V / 15 A and -5 V / 0.5 A
+12 V / 0.5 A and -12 V / 0.65 A *
(* 0.25 A for cards and 0.40 A for fans)
-48 V / 1.9 A
ring 70 V / 0.2A
20-50 Hz (symmetrical current)
see section 3.7.6.4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ADS 300XD POWER SUPPLY MODULES
Page 3-40
115 V or 230 V
6/2/06

SPECIFICATIONS
VALUES
ADS 300X power supply module (XL PBX)

Rated voltage
120 V or 230 V
Tolerances
+/- 10%
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power
300 W
Converter (48 V)
+5 V / 13 A and -5 V / 0.5 A
+12 V / 0.5 A and -12 V / 0.25 A
-48 V / 1.9 A
40V (ISDN) / 0.7 A (optional)
ring 70 V / 0.2A
25-50 Hz (symmetrical current)
Table 3.3
see section 3.7.6.4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ADS 300X POWER SUPPLY MODULES

SPECIFICATIONS
VALUES
ADS 100X power supply module (XS and XS12 PBXs)

Rated voltage
115 V or 230 V
Tolerances
+/- 10%
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power
Converter (48 V)
100 W
+5 V / 5 A and -5 V / 0.1 A
+12 V / 0.15 A and -12 V / 0.55 A
-48 V / 0.45 A
ring 70 V - 25-50 Hz / 0.06 A (symmetrical current)
Table 3.4
see section 3.7.6.4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ADS 100X POWER SUPPLY MODULE

6/2/06
Page 3-41
SPECIFICATIONS
VALUES
ADS 50X power supply module (XC PBX)

Rated voltage
115 V or 230 V
Tolerances
+/- 10%
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power
Converter (12 V)
50 W
+5 V / 1.8 A and -5 V / 0.5 A
-48 V / 0.16 A
ring 70 V - 25-50 Hz / 0.04 A (symmetrical current)
Battery built into the cabinet
Table 3.5
3.2.3
See section 3.7.6.4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ADS 50X POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Environmental conditions
SETTINGS
IN OPERATION
IN STORAGE
Temperature
5 to 40C
-10 to 70C
relative humidity
10% to 80 %, without condensation
10% to 95 %, without condensation
Table 3.6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Page 3-42
6/2/06

3.3
CAPACITY
All the combinations of sets and lines are authorised, provided the requirements are met
in terms of the maximum number of cards which can be installed (see 3.14 to 3.19 ). The
maximum capacities shown in the table below do not apply for simultaneous operation:
CAPACITY
XD
2XD
3XD
XL
2XL
3XL
XS
2XS
XS12
non
rack
XS12
rack
XC
Analogue sets
192
448
704
192
416
640
56
104
56
Digital sets
192
448
512
192
416
512
56
104
52
IP sets
500
500
500
250
250
250
250
250
250
Logical
extensions
512
512
512
DECT radio base

stations
40
40
40
40
40
40
DECT portable
512
512
512
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
VoIP channels
128
128
128
128
128
128
32
32
32
T2/S2 access
PCM access
T0 access
24
24
24
48
48
48
14
14
S0 BRI
40
40
40
48
48
48
12
12
10
48
48
48
12
24
LAN access
Analogue
network access
- LR4
- LR4 + DTOC
48
24
48
24
48
24
Tie lines
24
24
24
24
24
24
12
Asynchronous
serial ports1
32
32
32
32
32
32
12
12
12
Synchronous
serial ports
16
16
16
16
16
16
IVB channels
Announcement
access
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
IVS access
240
420
600
240
420
600
60
240
60
60
60
Max number of
voice mailboxes
(1)
Table 3.7
not included in the ports built into the UCT card

CAPACITY

6/2/06
Page 3-43
The "Voice Auxiliaries" functions supported are:
Table 3.8
FUNCTION
XD
CABINET
XL
CABINET
XS
CABINET
IVB voice mail
4 channels
4 channels
2 channels
2 channels 2 channels
IVS automated attendant 4 channels
4 channels
4 channels
4 channels 4 channels
Synchronous
announcements
20
channels
FMEVO daughter card
XS12
cabinet
20 channels 20 channels 20 channels

2
XC
CABINET
20
channels
0
SUPPORTED VOICE AUXILIARIES FUNCTIONS

The FMEVO daughter cards on the UCT and UCT-D cards each provide 2 additional IVB
voicemail channels.
The presence of 1 (XS cabinet) or 2 daughter cards (XD and XL cabinets) does not
change the capacity in IVS and synchronous announcements.
Tables 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 show the type and maximum number of devices that may be
associated with the UCT cards, of (CLX) applications and devices respectively.
Page 3-44
6/2/06

UCT CARD
EQUIPMENT OR NETWORKS CONNECTED
UCT-D
TCP/IP X25 gateway

1 debug link port
1 parallel port used to communicate with a PC for downloading or backup
operations.
iUCT-D
1 operating console port

1 port for the device used to broadcast external music
1 printer port
2 multi-site synchronisation DECT accesses
1 connection for alarms and relays
UCT-L
TCP/IP X25 gateway

External music broadcasting device
Printer
UCT1-S/UCT2-S
TCP/IP X25 gateway

2 basic ISDN network access (T0)
4 basic ISDN network (T0) or ISDN terminal (S0) accesses, or 4 two-channel
DECT base stations (on UCT1-S) / 4 channels (on UCT2-S fitted with an
ADPCM16)
8 analogue terminals
8 digital terminals
Printer
UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12
TCP/IP X25 gateway

4 basic ISDN network (T0) or ISDN terminal (S0) accesses, or
2 two-channel DECT base stations (on UCT1S-12) / 4 channels (on UCT2S-12
fitted with an ADPCM16)
4 digital terminals
Printer
UCT1-C/UCT2-C
TCP/IP X25 gateway

2 two-channel DECT base stations (on UCT1-C) / 4 channels (on UCT2-C fitted
with an ADPCM16)
4 digital terminals
Printer
Table 3.9
DEVICES ASSOCIATED WITH THE UCT CARDS OF C/S/L/D PBXS

6/2/06
Page 3-45
CLX CARD
LD4/LD4N/LD4X

4 two-channel DECT base stations
LD4 + 1 ADPCM 8
2 basic ISDN network access (T0) or ISDN terminals (S0), or +2 4channel DECT base stations
LD4 +2 ADPCM 8
or LD4/LD4N/LD4X
+ 1 ADPCM 16
Four 4-channel DECT base stations
LT2
1 primary access for a European ISDN network (E1, 32 TSs) or a US

type ISDN network (T1, 24 TSs), or, 1 PCM access (up to 32 TSs)
IPS
IP sets
PT2
TCP/IP X25 gateway
PT2 + VOIP4-E
8, 16 or 32 channels
TCP/IP X25 gateway

VoIP 8, 16, or 32 channel gateways
CS1
2 X25 synchronous access in V10 or V28 mode
CA1
4 asynchronous accesses up to 19200 Kbit/s for connecting 4 V24

terminals in V10 or V28 mode
CP1
Circuit/packet coupler with 2 accesses for data transmission
MUM
ISDN or Transfix voice/fax multiplexer/demultiplexer
Table 3.10
DEVICES ASSOCIATED WITH THE CLX CARDS OF C/S/L/D PBXS
Page 3-46
6/2/06

EQUIPMENT CARD
LA16X
16 analogue terminals (NeXspan range)
LA16X-8
8 analogue terminals (NeXspan range)
LA8
LN16X
16 digital terminals (NeXspan range)
LN16X-8
8 digital terminals (NeXspan range)
LN8
8 digital terminals
LM8
4 analogue terminals and 4 digital terminals
LH8
8 analogue hotel/motel terminals
LH16X
16 analogue hotel/motel terminals (NeXspan range)
LH16X-8
8 analogue hotel/motel terminals (NeXspan range)
LR4
4 analogue trunk lines
LR4 + DTOC
4 analogue network lines + 1 DTOC card per line with tone detection
LR4 + FTXA
4 analogue network lines + 1 FTXA card per line with 50 Hz detection of billing
pulses
LR4 + FTXC
4 analogue network lines + 1 FTXC card per line with 12 kHz or 16 kHz detection
of billing pulses
LI1
2 analogue tie lines with 2 or 4 wires + E/M or 50 Hz signalling
IUMS
Integrated Unified Messaging System
BTX
1 hotel/motel type charging buffer
Table 3.11
DEVICES ASSOCIATED WITH THE EQUIPMENT CARDS OF C/S/L/D PBXS

6/2/06
Page 3-47
3.4
PHYSICAL BREAKDOWN
3.4.1
NeXspan D
The subassemblies of each of the NeXspan D configurations are presented in a tree in
Table 3.12.
Nota :
The quantities indicated are the maximum hardware and software quantities for
each type of card. These quantities also depend on the configuration rules
(see Section3.5 ) and engineering rules of each site.
Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
Power supply module
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
Duplex
Ventilation module
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
Duplex
Battery (option)
Simplex
Simplex with secure
power supply
Duplex
UCT-D
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
Duplex
RUCT-D
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
Duplex
power
iUCT-D
List of XD PBX subassemblies - Feuillet 1 de 6 -
Page 3-48
6/2/06

Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
Duplex

6/2/06
Page 3-49
Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
12 (1)
12 (1)
12 (1)
10
10
10
CLX cards
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
secure
power
Duplex
LD4/LD4N (2) (3)
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
Duplex
LD4X (LD4N in X mode) (2) (3)
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
Duplex
LT2 (2) (3)
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
1
IPS(2)
PT2 (2)
+ 8-channel VoIP4E
+ 16-channel VoIP4E
+ 32-channel VoIP4E
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
Duplex
CS1
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
CA1
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
Page 3-50
6/2/06

Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
10
10
10
CP1
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
Duplex
MUM
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
Equipment cards
Simplex
Simplex
supply
12
16
28
44
12
16
28
44
12
16
28
44
12
12
28
32
Duplex
LA16X
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LA16X-8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LA8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
12
Duplex
LN16X
Simplex
Simplex
supply
12
16
Duplex
LN16X-8

6/2/06
Page 3-51
Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
12
16
28
44
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
Duplex
LN8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LM8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LH8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LH16X
Simplex
Simplex
supply
12
16
28
44
12
16
28
44
12
12
Duplex
LH16X-8
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
LR4
Simplex
Simplex
supply
12
Duplex
LR4-DTOC
Page 3-52
6/2/06

Subassemblies
XD MAIN
CABINET
XD EXPANSION
CABINET
2XD
3XD
12
12
12
Simplex
Simplex
supply
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
with
secure
power
Duplex
LI1
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
IUMS
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
BTX
Simplex
Simplex
supply
Duplex
List of XD PBX subassemblies - Feuillet 6 de 6 Table 3.12
LIST OF XD PBX SUBASSEMBLIES
(1)
If this figure is reached: equipment cards cannot be installed. If the number of CLX cards is below 12: any equipment
card can be added.
(2)
A - max number of LT2 = 6

B - max number of IPS = 1
C- max number of PT2 (32 V) = 4
D - max number of PT2 (32 V) + LT2 = 8
E- max number of DECT base stations = 40 (10 LD4N in X mode, with PBX software release R4.1 Other cases:
max number of base stations = 24)
F- max number of CLX (LD4N in X mode with PBX software release 4.1 min, LT2, PT2, CP1, CS1, CA1, MUM) = 12
G- max number of CLX (case of LD4 or LD4N not in X mode, LT2, PT2, CP1, CS1, CA1, MUM) = 10
If case F is reached (CLX = 12), no other card is accepted in the main cabinet.
If case G is reached (CLX = 10), no other card is accepted in the main cabinet.
(3)
The LD4, LD4N, LD4X and LT2 synchronising cards must be located in slots 0 to 5 of the XD main cabinet when they
are to be used to provide the carrier (PSTN) reference clocks for the main card.

6/2/06
Page 3-53
3.4.2
NeXspan C/S/L
The subassemblies fitted on each of the XL, XS and XS12 PBXs are presented in a tree
in 3.13.
The standard non-rackable XS12 PBXs consists only of:
a UCT1S-12 or UCT2S-12 card,
a power supply module,
an optional, external 48 V battery (same as that of XS).
The XC PBX comprises only:
a UCT1-C or UCT2-C card,
a power supply module,
one integrated 12 V battery.
Nota :
The quantities indicated are the maximum hardware and software quantities for
each type of card. These quantities also depend on the configuration rules
(see Section3.5 ) and engineering rules of each site.
Page 3-54
6/2/06

XL
MAIN
CABINET
XL
EXPANSION
CABINET
2XL
3XL
XS
BOX
PRIMARY
XS EXPANSION
CABINET
2XS
XS12 RACK
MAIN
CABINET
Battery (option)
UCT
14 1
14 1
14 1
LD4/LD4N (2) (3)
LD4X (2) (3)
10
10
10
LT2 (2) (3)
IPS (2)(4)
PT2 (2)
+ 8-channel VoIP4E
+ 16-channel
VoIP4E
+ 32-channel
VoIP4E
CS1
CA1
CP1
MUM
10
10
10
Equipment cards
14
28
42
LA16X
14
14
28
42
LA16X-8
14
14
28
42
LA8
14
14
14
LN16X
14
14
28
42
LN16X-8
14
14
28
42
LN8
14
14
14
LM8
14
14
14
LH8
14
14
14
LH16X
14
14
28
42
LH16X-8
14
14
28
42
LR4
LR4-DTOC
14
14
14
LI1
14
14
14
IUMS
BTX
SUBASSEMBLIES
Power
module
supply
RUCT
CLX cards
Table 3.13
(1)
14
LIST OF XL, XS AND XS12 SUBASSEMBLIES
If this figure is reached: equipment cards cannot be installed. If the number of CLX cards is below 14: any equipment
card can be added.

6/2/06
Page 3-55
(2)
The total number of LD4, LD4N, LD4X, IPS, PT2 and LT2 cards is 10.
(3)
The LD4, LD4N, LD4X and LT2 synchronising cards must be located in slots 0 to 5 of the XL main cabinet when they
are to be used to provide the carrier (PSTN) reference clocks for the main card.
(4)
1 IPS card maximum per system.
Page 3-56
6/2/06

3.5
CONFIGURATION RULES
3.5.1
XD PBX
3.5.1.1
XD main cabinet
An XD PBX contains 16 slots numbered from 00 to 15, corresponding to the following
physical positions:
(C) IUCTD
(B) UCT-D (RUCT-D)
(A) UCT-D (RUCT-D)
01
00
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
15
14
Figure 3.28
Power supply
module 2
(E)
Power supply
module 1
(D)
SLOT NUMBERS ON THE BACKPLANE OF AN XD PBX

The following table presents the possible slots, as well as the restrictions concerning the
various NeXspan D expansion cards of the main cabinet:

6/2/06
Page 3-57
XD MAIN CABINET
BACKPLANE SLOT 1-00
1-01
1-02
1-03
1-04
1-05
1-06
1-07
1-08
1-09
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
0
(H0)
1
(H1)
2
(H2)
3
(H3)
4
(H4)
5
(H5)
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
LD4/LD4N/LD4X Yes
without ADPCM*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
LD4X with ADPCM Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LT2* Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
SYNCHRONISING
POSITION
CLX cards
LD4/LD4N with
ADPCM
IPS Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PT2 without VOIP Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
PT2 8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
PT2 32 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CS1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CA1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CP1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
MUM Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
PT2 16
Equipment cards
LA16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LA16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LA8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LN16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LN16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LN8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LM8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LH8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LH16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LH16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LR4 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LI1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
IUMS Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
BTX Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Table 3.14
POSSIBLE BASIC XD PBX BACK PLANE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
*
The LD4, LD4N, LD4X and LT2 synchronising cards must be located in slots 0 to 5 of the main cabinet when they are
to be used to provide the reference clocks for the main card.
Understanding Table 3.14:

Synchronising position: indicates a synchronising position. The H0 clock signal in
position 1-00 has priority over H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5 which have the same priority.
Yes: indicates that the card concerned can be equipped.
No: indicates that the card concerned cannot be equipped.
Page 3-58
6/2/06

#8 to #13: indicates that the card can be equipped if no card in the short list is installed
in slot n in the main cabinet.
Exemple : If a PT2 + VOIP 16 card is installed in slot 1-00 (#8), a card from the short
list cannot be installed in slot 1-08, but a card from the full list can be
installed. If a PT2 + VOIP 16 card is installed in slot 1-00 (#9), a card from
the short list cannot be installed in slot 1-09, but a card from the full list can
be installed.
Exemple : If an LD4 or LD4N card is installed in slot 1-00 (#8), a card from the short
list cannot be installed in slot 1-08, but a card from the full list can be
installed.
- Short list: LA8, LN8, LM8, LH8, LI1, LR4, CP1, PT2 8 channels, PT2 16 channels,
LD4, LD4N, LD4X, MUM, IUMS.
- Full list: LA16X, LN16X, LA16X-8, LN16X-8, LH16X, LH16X-8, CS1, CA1, IPS, PT2
32 channels, LT2, BTX.
3.5.1.2
2XD and 3XD expansion cabinet

The slots in an expansion cabinet can only be fitted with certain equipment cards:
CARDS
2XD AND 3XD EXPANSION CABINET
LD4/LD4N/LD4X
LT2
IPS
PT2 8,16,32 channels
CS1
CA1
CP1
MUM
Equipment cards
LA16X
LA16X-8
LA8
LN16X
LN16X-8
LN8
LM8
LH8
LH16X
LH16X-8
LR4
LI1
IUMS
BTX
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CLX cards
Table 3.15
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS OF THE TWO EXPANSION BACKPLANES OF AN XD

PBX

6/2/06
Page 3-59
3.5.2
XL PBX
An XL PBX contains 14 slots numbered from 00 to 13, corresponding to the following
physical positions:
UCT-L (RUCT-L)
01
00
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
13
12
Figure 3.29 SLOT NUMBERS ON BACKPLANE OF AN XL PBX
3.5.2.1
XL main cabinet
The following table presents the possible slots, as well as the restrictions concerning the
various C/S/L NeXspan range expansion cards of the main cabinet:
Page 3-60
6/2/06

XL MAIN CABINET
BACKPLANE SLOT 1-00 1-01 1-02 1-03 1-04 1-05 1-06 1-07 1-08 1-09 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13
SYNCHRONISING
POSITION
0
1
2
3
4
5
(H0) (H1) (H2) (H3) (H4) (H5)
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
CLX cards
LD4/LD4N/LD4X Yes
without ADPCM*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
LD4X with ADPCM Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LT2* Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IPS Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PT2 without VOIP Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PT2 8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
PT2 32 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CS1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CA1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CP1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MUM Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LA16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LA16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LA8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LN16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LN16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LN8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LM8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LH8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LH16X Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LH16X-8 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LR4 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LI1 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IUMS Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
BTX Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LD4/LD4N with
ADPCM
PT2 16
Equipment cards
*
The LD4, LD4N, LD4X and LT2 synchronising cards must be located in slots 0 to 5 of the main cabinet when they are
to be used to provide the reference clocks for the main card.
Table 3.16
POSSIBLE BASIC XL PBX BACK PLANE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

6/2/06
Page 3-61
Understanding Table 3.16:

Synchronising position: indicates a synchronising position. The H0 clock signal in
position 1-00 has priority over H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5 which have the same priority.
Yes: indicates that the card concerned can be equipped.
No: indicates that the card concerned cannot be equipped.
#8 to #13: indicates that the card can be equipped if no card in the short list is installed
in slot n in the main cabinet.
Exemple : If a PT2 + VOIP 16 card is installed in slot 1-00 (#8), a card from the short
list cannot be installed in slot 1-08. If a PT2 + VOIP16 card is installed in 101 (#9), a card from the short list cannot be installed in 1-09...
Exemple : If an LD4 or LD4N card is installed in slot 1-00 (#8), a card from the short list
cannot be installed in slot 1-08, but a card from the full list can be installed.
- Short list: LA8, LN8, LM8, LH8, LI1, LR4, CP1, PT2 8 channels, PT2 16 channels,
LD4, LD4N, LD4X, MUM, IUMS.
- Full list: LA16X, LN16X, LA16X-8, LN16X-8, LH16X, LH16X-8, CS1, CA1, IPS, PT2
32 channels, LT2, BTX.
3.5.2.2
2XL and 3XL expansion cabinets

The slots in an expansion cabinet can only be fitted with certain equipment cards:
CARDS
2XL AND 3XL EXPANSION CABINET
LD4/LD4N/LD4X
LT2
IPS
PT2 8,16,32 channels
CS1
CA1
CP1
MUM
Equipment cards
LA16X
LA16X-8
LA8
LN16X
LN16X-8
LN8
LM8
LH8
LH16X
LH16X-8
LR4
LI1
IUMS
BTX
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CLX cards
Page 3-62
6/2/06
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes

Table 3.17
3.5.3
POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS OF THE TWO EXPANSION BACKPLANES OF AN XL

PBX
PBX XS
An XS PBX contains 3 slots numbered from 00 to 02, corresponding to the following
physical positions:
02
01
00
UCT1-S/UCT2-S (RUCT-S)
Figure 3.30 SLOT NUMBERS ON THE BACKPLANE OF AN XS PBX

The slots in a main cabinet can be fitted with all the cards in the C/S/L NeXspan range.
The slots in an expansion cabinet can only be fitted with equipment cards.
Note : The three main cabinet slots are synchronising positions. H0 (in position 1-00) has priority
over H1 (in position 1-01), H2 (in position 1-02) and H3 (retrieved from the T0 interfaces built
into the UCT card) which have the same priority.
The following table summarises the slots possible, and gives the restrictions concerning
the various expansion cards of the XS PBX:
CARDS
MAIN CABINET
CLX cards
LD4/LD4N/LD4X
Yes
Yes
EXPANSION
CABINET
No
No
LT2
IPS
PT2
CS1
CA1
CP1
MUM
Equipment cards
LA8
LA16X
LN16X
LA16X-8
LN16X-8
LN8
LM8
LH8
LH16X
LH16X-8
LR4
LI1
IUMS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

PARTICULAR CONSTRAINTS
Limited to 3
Limited to 3 (S0)
Limited to 2 (DECT)
Limited to 2
Limited to 1
Limited to 1
Limited to 3
Limited to 3
Limited to 3
Limited to 3
Limited to 1
6/2/06
Page 3-63
CARDS
MAIN CABINET
BTX
Table 3.18
Yes
EXPANSION
CABINET
Yes
Limited to 1
POSSIBLE BASIC BACKPLANE AND EXTENSION EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

OF AN XS PBX
3.5.4
XS12 PBX
3.5.4.1
Non-rackable XS12 PBX

Basically, no configuration rule applies to the non-rackable XS12 PBX (no expansion
cards). It is possible to add a back plane (optional). In this case, the cards accepted are
the same as on an XS PBX.
Attention : On an XS12 PBX, the back plane does not send network synchronisation
(synchronising positions are the T0 interfaces integrated into UCT).

Therefore, the XS12 PBX cannot receive LT2, LD4, LD4N, LD4X type
synchronising cards with the T0 function.
Page 3-64
6/2/06

3.5.4.2
Rackable XS12 PBX

An XS12 PBX contains 3 slots numbered from 00 to 02, corresponding to the following
physical positions:
02
01
UCT2S-12
00
Figure 3.31 SLOT NUMBERS ON BACKPLANE OF AN XS12 PBX

The slots in a main cabinet can be fitted with all the cards in the NeXspan range.
Attention : On an XS12 PBX, the back plane does not send network synchronisation
(synchronising positions are the T0 interfaces integrated into UCT).

Therefore, the XS12 PBX cannot receive LT2, LD4, LD4N, LD4X type
synchronising cards with the T0 function.
The following table summarises the slots possible, and gives the restrictions concerning
the various expansion cards of the XS12 PBX:
CARDS
CLX cards
LD4/LD4N/LD4X
LT2
IPS
PT2
CS1
CA1
CP1
MUM
Equipment cards
LA8
LA16X
LN16X
LA16X-8
LN16X-8
LN8
LM8
LH8
LH16X
LH16X-8
LR4
LI1
IUMS
BTX
Table 3.19
3.5.5
MAIN CABINET
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Limited to 3 (S0)
Limited to 2 (DECT)
Limited to 2
Limited to 1
Limited to 1
Limited to 1
Limited to 1
POSSIBLE BASIC XS12 PBX BACK PLANE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
XC PBX
No configuration rules apply to the XC PBX (no expansion cards in the XC cabinet).

6/2/06
Page 3-65
3.6
I-BUTTON DONGLE AND SOFTWARE LOCKING

Certain optional features of the PBX can be used only with software key codes.
A removable "i-Button" dongle (circuit in a metal box, similar to a battery) on the main card
(UCT and UCT-D) contains the PBX identification number (this number can be displayed
when the cabinet is RESET or via MMC). This number is used for unlocking optional
software functions.
When replacing a UCT/UCT-D card or a PBX on site, restoring the software configuration
of the new UCT/UCT-D card and moving the "i-Button" to the new card is sufficient to
restore the same functional configuration to the Switch, without any other action needed.
3.6.1
XD PBX
The various functions requiring software key codes are:
BASIC
PREMIUM
PRIVILEGE
HOSPITAL/HOTEL
IAE_DE_RENVOI
CALL DIST
LISTEN/INTRUSION
LCR
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
TICKET_>_128_BYTES
AVS2000
MULTI_SITE
CSTA 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 OBJECTS
IVB (Voice mail feature)
IVB INTERACTIVITY
AUTO STANDARD (Voice Integrated Standard)
IP/XML VOICE MAIL
ANA.XML VOICE MAIL
IVS_V24 2, 4, 8, 16 ACCESSES
IVS_V24_S2 32, 64 ACCESSES
IVS_Q23 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
IVS_Q23+ 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
SGML/PO 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
IP TERMINALS (10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500)
Page 3-66
6/2/06

R4.2_XC
R4.2_XS
R4.2_XL/XD
VERS.B_XC
VERS.B_XS
VERS.B_XL/XD
VERS.C_XC
VERS.C_XS
VERS.C_XL/XD
VERS.D_XC
VERS.D_XS
VERS.D_XL/XD
VERS.E_XC
VERS.E_XS
VERS.E_XL/XD
VERS.F_XC
VERS.F_XS
VERS.F_XL/XD
VERS.G_XC
VERS.G_XS
VERS.G_XL/XD
VERS.H_XC
VERS.H_XS
VERS.H_XL/XD
VERS.I_XC
VERS.I_XS
VERS.I_XL/XD
VERS.J_XC
VERS.J_XS
VERS.J_XL/XD
3.6.2
C/S/L PBX
The various functions requiring software key codes are:
HOSPITAL/HOTEL

6/2/06
Page 3-67
IAE_DE_RENVOI
CALL DIST
LISTEN/INTRUSION
LCR
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
TICKET_>_128_BYTES
AVS2000
MULTI_SITE
CSTA 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 OBJECTS
IVB (Voice mail feature)
AUTO STANDARD (Voice Integrated Standard)
IVS_V24 2, 4, 8, 16 ACCESSES
IVS_V24_S2 32, 64 ACCESSES
IVS_Q23 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
IVS_Q23+ 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
SGML/PO 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 ACCESSES
IP TERMINALS (10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500)
Page 3-68
6/2/06

3.7
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
A PBX can be broken down functionally into several functional chains, as shown in Figure
9.1 to Figure 9.6:
duplication (NeXspan D only),
command and processing unit,
network and terminal interface,
synchronisation,
defence,
power supply,
ventilation.
3.7.1
Command and processing unit

The command and processing unit chain is ensured by the main card. It manages the
following features:
duplex and start logic (NeXspan D only)
data and voice switching,
signal processing,
voice mail server,
defence (management of the interface card conditions),
command management,
synchronisation.
3.7.1.1
Data and voice switching function

Communication switching is provided by a switching matrix acting as the crossroads for
the various data and voice messages.
The switching matrix is used to transfer a message, a signal (speech) or digitised data:
from one expansion card to another expansion card,
from the signal processing module or the voice mail server module (voice auxiliaries)
from the main card to another expansion card.
This matrix routes the messages received over a PCM link, called a junctor, to another
expansion card or module on the main card, through another internal PCM link.
Each junction includes 32 Time Slots (TS) which are each used to route one voice
message or digitised data.
Certain TSs of a specific junction are assigned to the various subassemblies of the PBX
connected to the matrix.
The TSs are exchanged between the various subassemblies of the PBX over a
synchronous bus.

6/2/06
Page 3-69
3.7.1.2
Duplex and start logic (NeXspan D only)

Duplex logic
The main function of the duplex logic is to determine which of the two UCT-D cards of a
duplex system is active (see Section 3.7.2). It consists of:
an exclusion hardware logic which guarantees that only one of the two cards can be
active at a given moment,
commands (Normal/Maintenance, ON/OFF) and indicators (Operational, Active, Out of
service) on the front panel.
command and status registers.
Both cards exchange status signals, enabling them to know each others status.
Start
A card can only start, in the application sense of it, when its status changes to Active.
After the cabinet is powered on, the UCT-D card runs start-up tests. The behaviour then
varies, depending on whether the system is simplex or duplex:
In simplex mode, the status of the UCT-D card changes immediately to Active.
In duplex mode, the status of the UCT-D card changes to Active if it is not out of
service and if the other UCT-D card is not itself Active.
3.7.1.3
Signal processing function

The signal processing function is ensured by a module on the main card, and comprises:
generation of music on-hold,
Nota :
Music-on-hold can be replaced by external music. The level of external musicon-hold is stored in the memory of the UCT/UCT-D card, which- can be
programmed using the administration tool.
generation of tone signals,

tone detection,
transmission and reception of multiple frequency signals,
four-way conference management,
modem function (signal modulation and demodulation),
management of the signals delivered by the "class" sets,
generation of ringing current control.
3.7.1.4
Voice mail server function

Voice mail server function is ensured by a "Voice auxiliaries" module.
This module ensures the following functions:
remote polling of answering machine for each of the sets subscribed to the PBX,
configurable as a basic answering machine,
Page 3-70
6/2/06

A voice mailbox can be associated with each directory number recorded on the PBX.
IVS ensured by:
- integration of a predefined voice prompt used by the caller (through DTMF code
detection) to browse through a series of menus providing access to the functions
offered or a particular subscriber,
- voice prompt storage,
- calls on hold,
- forwarding to music or on-hold messages,
- direct forwarding to an attendant,
storage and broadcasting of synchronous announcements (synchronised with start of
call).
3.7.1.5
Defence function
See section3.7.5
3.7.1.6
Command management function

Command management function:
prompts the matrix to direct one junction to another junction,
asks signal processing to generate or listen to a signal,
asks the voice mail server to broadcast a message, announcement or music,
supervises the various expansion cards through the asynchronous system bus.
3.7.1.7
Synchronisation function
See 3.7.4
3.7.2
Connection to the communication networks and terminals

Connection to the communication networks and terminals is through expansion cards and
interfaces fitted on the UCT card (C/S/L PBX) and on UCT-D and IUCT-D (XD) cards.
These expansion cards can be divided into two categories:
CLX cards. They interface with the external applications connected to the PBX through
digital networks. CLX cards are smart cards (with microprocessor) with access through
the system bus to the memory zone of the UCT card. This category includes:
- IP gateway cards used for interfacing with:
X
IP applications: PT2 cards,
IP sets: PT2 cards fitted with a VoIP daughter card, IPS card,

6/2/06
Page 3-71
- cards ensuring data transmission in packet mode over an X25 network:

X
CS1 cards, X25 network interface cards complying with the HDLC or Transpac
standard,
CS1 cards, X25 network interface cards complying with the Numris standard,
- cards interfacing with asynchronous data transmission terminals through RS232

links: CA1 card,
- intersite voice/fax communication multiplexer cards: MUM card,
- cards interfacing PCM channels with other private systems: LT2 cards,
- cards interfacing with ISDN networks: LT2, LD4, LD4N and LD4X; these interfaces
also send the synchronisation clocks from a public network to the main card.
- cards for connecting with DECT base stations: LD4, LD4N and LD4X card.
the equipment cards including the subscriber cards and interface cards with analogue
lines. Equipment cards are cards without microprocessor which are not provided with
access to the memory zone of the UCT CPU cards. This category includes:
- cards for connecting to analogue sets: LAx cards,
- cards for connecting to digital sets: LNx cards,
- cards for connecting to analogue sets and digital sets: LMx cards,
- cards for connecting to hotel analogue sets: LH8, LH16X and LH16X-8 cards,
- the intersite link card through analogue lines: LI1 card,
- the card for connecting to PSTN analogue lines or a charging server: LR4 card.
These cards, installed in the main cabinet or an expansion cabinet (LAx and LNx cards
only) communicate with the central and processing unit of the UCT card, through:
- a synchronous bus, the equipment bus, to carry the voice or data information
through PCM TSs,
- an asynchronous system bus to exchange their status and command information.
The cards located in an expansion cabinet communicate with the UCT card or the active
UCT-D card of the main cabinet through the RUCT card or RUCT-D card.
The RUCT/RUCT-D card is installed instead of the UCT/UCT-D cards in the expansion
cabinet. Its main function is to distribute the line equipment bus and synchronous
junctions to the expansion card slots.
The main function of the RUCT-D card is to distribute the line equipment bus and
synchronous junctions to the expansion card slots.
Page 3-72
6/2/06

3.7.3
Duplication (NeXspan D)
Duplication of CPU cards
Duplication of UCT-D cards: two UCT-D CPU cards (duplex configuration) can be
fitted in the NeXspan D main cabinet. A single card is enough to run the entire system.
In a duplex configuration, one UCT-D card is active and the other passive. Interfaces
with the system bus and the equipment bus of both UCT-D cards are connected
together to the back plane. Only the interface of the active card is validated. Using the
duplex logic, the system determines which of the two UCT-D cards is active and
ensures that only one of the two cards can be active at a given moment.
After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration (15 s. to 1 min. ),
the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in the following three cases:
if the active card is removed,
if the active card remains idle for 2 minutes,
if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case, a
hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the cabinet
can, therefore, be up to 3 minutes).
Nota :
Since an anomaly causes software reset, it cannot trigger a switchover to the

passive card. The active card restarts.
A switchover can be triggered by MMC (upon the installer's request), with a view to
performing duplex function related tests.
Duplication of RUCT-D cards: in an expansion cabinet, the equipment buses and
synchronous buses of the two RUCT-D cards are connected together to the back
plane, the RUCT-D card connected to the active UCT-D card takes control of the
buses.
A hardware fault detected on the RUCT-D card connected to the active UCT-D card
triggers a switchover of the UCT-D card. Of course, this system performs this
switchover only if it does not encounter serious anomalies on the second UCT-D card.
After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration (15 s. to 1 min. ),
the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in the following three cases:
if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case, a
hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the cabinet
Duplicating the hardware functions
During a switchover, once the passive card has become active and functional, all the
hardware functions become automatically available again, through hardware function
redundancy on both cards, and through the centralisation of the front panel connections
on the IUCT-D card.

6/2/06
Page 3-73
IP port duplication
Thanks to its integration into the CPU card, the integrated 10/100 T-X Ethernet port is
duplicated. Therefore, all the applications that use this port to connect to the PBX benefit
from this IP link security. After CPU card switchover, the IP address of this integrated port
remains the same. The MAC address, on the other hand, changes.
Data synchronisation
Data synchronisation is performed progressively, to bring the data on the passive card to
the same level as the active card.
This synchronisation guarantees service continuity after switchover, for the following
functions:
Subscriber configuration
Network configuration
Customisation of digital sets
Programming functions (except last number redial and automatic callback)
DECT service
Directory numbers, etc.
All the sets reconnect automatically. Attendant console reactivation remains at the
operators discretion.
Software synchronisation
The system software package and application are synchronised after each software
upgrade on the active card, to bring the software on the passive card to the same level as
the active card: change of version, change of patch, change of MMC languages, etc.
This synchronisation is done once the new software release has been validated by the
PBX or by the management centre.
This synchronisation guarantees service continuity after switchover, for the following
functions:
active software release, system and application
digital set languages and MMC languages
patches
Power supply duplication
NeXspan D can receive two ADS 300XD power sypply modules (simplex configuration
with secure power supply and duplex configuration) in the same cabinet (main cabinet
and expansion cabinets), see Section 3.7.6.
Duplication of integrated services
The following functions are duplicated on NeXspan D:
Integrated call distribution (integrated ACD, music on hold, spoken announcements).
The answering service configuration and the associated voice messages (music,
spoken announcements) are automatically updated on the passive card each time the
Page 3-74
6/2/06

answering service is modified by the management centre, or after a new CPU card is
added in the system, in line with the answering service configuration.
Integrated IVS
The IVS configuration and voice messages are automatically updated on the passive
card each time the answering service is modified by the management centre, or after a
new CPU card is added in the system, in line with the answering service configuration.
Voice mail
The level of duplication differs according to voice mail type:
- Integrated messaging can be used on a NeXspan D, but in case of active CPU card
failure, the service will restart on the passive card, in partial mission capable mode:
the voice signatures, customised greeting messages and left messages are lost. A
user must re-record his personal greeting message in order to reactivate his
voicemail box after switchover.
- The M7470 IUMS unified messaging is not duplicated. It is managed by a dedicated
expansion card; the service level is, therefore, not reduced in case of switchover to
duplex mode (no loss of voice mail data).
- If an external messaging system is used, see the products technical definition to
know the applications duplication level.
Charging
- Since charging-related records are emitted at the end of a communication, any
charge records related to a communication in progress will be lost in the event of a
switchover or loss of service.
3.7.4
Synchronisation chain (Figure 9.6)

The synchronisation function ensures that a PBX or a PBX network is synchronised on a
public digital network and provides the multi-frame synchronisation required for DECT
base stations.
3.7.4.1
Synchronisation of an isolated or master PBX in a multi-site network

The UCT CPU card contains a time base used to synchronise the PBX on an external
reference clock. The latter can be chosen from 6 clocks (3 for the XS) retrieved from the
digital connections of a PSTN network (T0 or T2) through LT2, LD4, LD4N and LD4X
synchronising expansion cards.
These LT2, LD4, LD4N and LD4X cards must be fitted in slots 0 to 5 in the main cabinet of
the XL and XD (slots 0 to 2 for XS). The UCT1-S/UCT2-S and UCT1-C/UCT2-C ISDN
accesses are all synchronising.
The first active digital network card synchronises the system. It maintains this as long as
its clock is valid, and in the absence of higher priority clocks. Otherwise, a new clock is
sought.
The time base generates and distributes two synchronisation signals to the cards in the

6/2/06
Page 3-75
cabinet, and possibly to the other PBXs in a multisite configuration:

an HBIT synchronisation clock,
an HDECT synchronisation clock derived from the bit synchronisation,
The external reference clocks can belong to 2 priority classes (high priority and low
priority); the clock provided by the card located in slot 0 is high priority and the other 5
clocks are low priority.
The reference clock, selected according to its priority class, can be used to reset the
internal oscillator present on the main card.
When a reference clock is no longer valid, the oscillator is set on:
an average of the last few external reference clock values stored with the highest
priority, this value being checked permanently; when outside acceptable limits, another
reference clock is selected,
after resetting, a value programmed at the factory.
The number of the expansion card generating the reference clock is stored by the
operating software.
In certain particular situations, a POSTAL card can be used.
3.7.4.2
Management of the master/slave mode (multisite network)

For a multisite network with DECT base stations, the various C/S/L/D NeXspan PBX
ranges require the same synchronisation signal.
Nota :
Multi-site DECT synchronisation via third pair is not possible with the XS12 and
XC PBX.
In this case, DECT synchronisation is provided by one PBX to the others; it can also be
duplicated if two PBXs have a digital connection to the RTCP.
Nota :
One of the 2 has priority; apart from these 2 PBXs, all the other PBXs in the C/S/
L/D NeXspan range can only receive the synchronisation. The UCTX card has a
synchronisation port which can operate in Priority Master mode (only one in the
network), Non Priority Master mode (only one in the network) or Slave mode.
The DECT synchronisation ports of a NeXspan D are integrated into the IUCT-D card.
The synchronisation ports of the two UCT-D cards are connected together to the IUCT-D
connectors. The validation of the clock signals and status to the primary port includes the
active state.
In a master device, the active card provides the clocks, while the passive card
synchronises its time base on the master card.
Page 3-76
6/2/06

In a slave device, the two cards synchronise their time base using the signals received
on the primary port.
The 2 ports in Master mode exchange status signals used by an internal logic to select
the PBX supplying synchronisation to multi-site devices.
Here, the primary synchronisation port provides the bit clock and the DECT multiframe
clock.
Nota :
The DECT base stations connected to the integrated S0 accesses of the UCT2S, UCT2S-12 and UCT2-C cards are synchronised (management of the M bit in
the S frame).
By default, ex factory or after total reset, the PBX is configured for operation in Master and
Non Priority mode. These 2 parameters which set the operating mode can be configured
from the operating console (see Section1.3, Document 12). Their current condition is
stored in the PBX and locked.
3.7.4.3
Propagation of the synchronisations inside a multisite network

(Figure 9.6)
The UCT/UCT-D card includes 2 synchronisation ports used to propagate synchronisation
inside a multi-site network.
The two master PBXs are interconnected through their primary ports; their secondary
ports are each connected to the primary port of a slave PBX, whose secondary port is
itself connected to the primary port of another slave PBX
Synchronisation is then distributed from peer to peer within the multisite network.
Nota :
In case of failure or loss of synchronisation on the public network of the high

priority master Switch, the non priority master Switch provides synchronisation.
The secondary port of the PBX provides a copy of the synchronisation signals of the
primary port. Synchronisation continuity is maintained when a PBX fails or is powered off.
When losing one of the 2 bit or DECT clocks, the base shifts into local mode and inhibits
the transmission of clocks on its secondary port and to the DECT base stations connected
to the PBX.
In a multisite system, the bit clock of the master system is transmitted together with the
DECT synchro signal, and is the top priority clock for slave cabinets.
Nota :
An M6500 range PBX fitted with an OCT4 card can be used in slave mode in a
C/S/L/D NeXspan range network. Synchronisation wiring is required only for a
network including DECT base stations.
3.7.5
Defence chain
3.7.5.1
Presentation
The defence chain is provided by the various subassemblies fitted in the PBX. Its role is to
advise the operator of malfunctions of one or more items.

6/2/06
Page 3-77
It includes the following functions:

monitoring,
alarm analysis,
self-protection.
3.7.5.2
Monitoring
Monitoring is ensured by:
autotests:
The various subassemblies of the PBX (power supply unit, cards, main card functional
modules) include software or hardware self-monitoring devices; their condition is
broadcast to the central unit and triggers their resetting in case of fault, for CLX cards.
software watchdog on the UCT/UCT-D card,
tachometric sensors for the fans, built into the power supply module and into the
ventilation module,
temperature sensor built into the power supply module and ventilation module. When
the modules internal temperature exceeds a certain threshold (fixed by the
manufacturer), an alarm is activated.
3.7.5.3
Alarm management
Alarm management is ensured by maintenance software present on the main card. The
alarms managed are those of the subassemblies of the PBX, but also external alarms.
The main card collects the status of:
expansion cards,
devices and links connected to the various cards,
its modules and internal interfaces,
supplied by external sensors available to the customer (4 maximum).
A CLX card is declared faulty by the UCT/UCT-D in one of the following cases:
the card sends no reply,
the card sends invalid replies.
A CLX card declared faulty is reset automatically by the UCT/UCT-D card then, if the fault
persists, deactivated.
A presence test is performed regularly by the UCT/UCT-D card on the equipment cards.
These are declared faulty when they no longer send replies or send an invalid identifier.
An anomaly detected in the configuration triggers the following:
recording a fault report in the log,
fail-safe action initiated and executed by maintenance software,
recording an action report message in the log.
Page 3-78
6/2/06

The status of the subassemblies, centralised by the main card, can be viewed and
operated with the administration tool, in the log.
3.7.5.4
Self protection
Self protection of the PBXs is ensured by the remote supply module, ensuring:
isolation of the faulty elements using the power supply protection fuses,
fan monitoring (see Section 3.7.6.3).
3.7.6
Power supply chain (3.34)
3.7.6.1
Presentation of NeXspan D
The NeXspan D cabinets are powered up by one or two pluggable ADS300XD power
supply units.
In a simplex configuration with secure power supply and in a duplex configuration,
each cabinet is power up by two power supply units. The power supply modules then
work in load-sharing mode. If a power supply unit fails, the other takes over the load
(only one unit is enough to sustain the full load required by a cabinet). This switchover
is transparent for the cabinet equipment. There is, thus, no service interruption.
Nota :
The power supply modules of a main cabinet cannot supply power to an

expansion cabinet just like the power supply modules of an expansion cabinet
cannot supply power to a main cabinet.
In a simplex configuration, the cabinets are powered up by a single power supply unit.
A ventilation module is installed in place of the second power supply module. This
ventilation module comprises two fans powered up and supervised by the power
supply module.
The internal power supplies are distributed by a converter supplied with alternating
voltage: 115/230 V - 50/60 Hz.
The power supply module provides the direct low voltage power supplies for:
the different PBX cards, voltages supplied via the back plane:
- power supplies required by the internal circuits,
- ringing current (for certain equipment cards),
- sets line current (-48 V),
Each back plane connector of the XD PBXs hosting an expansion card has
advanced contacts for grounding and +5 V enabling the hot plugging-in, during
cabinet operation, of the CLX cards and new generation equipment cards (Lx16-X).
the fans on the power supply and ventilation module(s),
An optional, 48 V backup battery, connected to the back of the cabinet, can be installed to
provide direct power supply to the converter in case of mains failure (see Specifications in
Section 3.7.6.4).

6/2/06
Page 3-79
The mains is distributed to the power supply module's rectifier through:

a mains switch used to power the supply module on or off,
two fuses.
A converter inside the power supply module converts the 48 V power supply generated by
the battery or rectifier to the low voltages required by the various subassemblies of the
PBX.
Page 3-80
6/2/06

Battery
CABINET
BACKPLANE
CARD
P.sup
UCT/RUCT
card
Cards internal circuit
power supllies
48 V
Line power supplies

48 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
Converter
Fuses
"I/O"
Failure
of both
fans
PBX_MATRIX_XD_ALIM_SIMPLEX_SYNOP_01_01
115 V/230 V
Fan
monitoring
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
intermodule
signals
EXPANSION
CARDS
P.sup
Alarms
P.sup
VENTILATION
MODULE
P.sup
Figure 3.32 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN OF AN XD CABINET IN SIMPLEX
CONFIGURATION.

6/2/06
Page 3-81
Battery
CABINET
BACKPLANE
CARD
Active
P.sup
UCT/RUCT
card

power supplies
48 V
Line power supplies

48 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
Converter
Fuses
"I/O"
Failure
of both
fans
P.sup
Fan
monitoring
IUCT
card
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE

power supply
48 V
P.sup
Passive
UCT/RUCT
card
Line power supplies

48 V
PBX MATRIX XD ALIM DUPLEX SYNOP 01 01
115 V/230 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
Convecteur
EXPANSION
CARDS
Fuses
115 V/230 V
P.sup
"I/O"
Failure
of both
fans
Fan
monitoring
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
intermodule
signals
P.sup
Figure 3.33 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN OF AN XD CABINET IN DUPLEX
CONFIGURATION.
Page 3-82
6/2/06

3.7.6.2
Presentation of NeXspan C/S/L

The internal power supplies are distributed by a converter supplied with alternating
voltage: 115/230 V - 50/60 Hz.
This power supply module provides the direct low voltage power supplies for:
the various cards in the PBXs (only the CPU card for the non-rackable XC and XS12
PBXs), voltages carried through the back plane (for XL PBX) and via a specific
connector (for XS, XS12 and XC PBXs):
- power supplies required by the internal circuits,
- ringing current (for certain equipment cards),
- sets line current (-48 V),
Each backplane connector of the XL PBXs hosting an expansion card has
advanced contacts for grounding and +5 V enabling the hot plugging-in, during
cabinet operation, of the CLX cards and new generation equipment cards (Lx16-X).
to the fan(s) of the power supply module,
to be delivered over an ISDN connection: 40V voltage (only for ADS300X power
supply and optional).
An optional 48 V backup battery (or 12V battery integrated in the XC PBX), connected to
the power supply module, can be installed to provide a direct power supply source to the
converter in case of mains failure (see Specifications in section 3.7.6.4).
The mains is distributed to the power supply module's rectifier through:
a mains switch used to power the supply module on or off,
two fuses.

6/2/06
Page 3-83
A converter inside the power supply module converts the 48 V (or 12V for the XC cabinet)
generated by the battery or rectifier to the low voltages required by the various
subassemblies of the PBX.
Battery
CABINET
BACKPLANE
CARD
P.sup.
UCT/RUCT
card

power supplies
48 V
Line power supplies

48 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
EXPANSION
CARDS
Converter
Fuses
"I/O"
I/O"
Failure of
both fans
Fan
monitoring
PBX_MATRIX_XL_ALIM_SYNOP_01_02
115 V/240 V
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Figure 3.34 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN OF AN XL CABINET
Page 3-84
6/2/06

Battery
CABINET
BACKPLANE
UCT-S/
CARD
RUCT-S CARD

power supplies
48 V
EXPANSION
CARDS
Line power supplies

48 V
Ringing current
P.Sup.
Rectifier
Converter
115 V/240 V
Fuses
P.Sup.
Failure of
both fans
Fan
monitoring
P.Sup.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
PBX_MATRIX_XS_ALIM_SYNOP_01_01
I/O"
Figure 3.35 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN ON AN XS CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-85
Battery
CABINET
UCTS-I2
CARD
UCTS-12 card internal

circuits power supplies
48 V
Line power supplies

48 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
Converter
Fuses
240 V
Failure of
both fans
Fan
monitoring
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
PBX_MATRIX_SX2_ALIM_SYNOP_01_01
"I/O"
Figure 3.36 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN ON A NON-RACKABLE XS12
CABINET
Page 3-86
6/2/06

"ATTERY
#!").%4
"!#+0,!.%
#!2$
0OWERSUPPLYFORCARDS
INTERNALCIRCUITS
6
%80!.3)/.
#!2$3
0OWERSUPPLYFORCARDS
INTERNALCIRCUITS
6
5#4 3
#!2$
#ONVERTER
#URRENTFORRIGNING
0OWER3UPPLY
2ECTIFIER
&USES
66
0OWER3UPPLY
&AILUREOF
BOTHFANS
&AN
MONITORING
0OWER3UPPLY
0/7%23500,9
-/$5,%
0 " 8 ?-! 4 2 )8 ? 3 8 ?! , )-?3 9 . / 0 ??
)/
Figure 3.37 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN ON A RACKABLE XS12
CABINET

6/2/06
Page 3-87
Battery
CABINET
UCT-C
CARD

power supplies
12 V
Line power supplies

12 V
Ringing current
Rectifier
Converter
Fuses
115 V/240 V
I/O"
Failure of
both fans
Fan
monitoring
PBX_MATRIX_XC_ALIM_SYNOP_01_01
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Figure 3.38 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY CHAIN OF AN XC CABINET
3.7.6.3
Internal monitoring of C/S/L/D

A monitoring device built into the power supply module prevents full discharging of the
battery in the absence of mains, or in case of rectifier failure/shutdown.
The power supply module is fitted with:
4 fans (XD), that is 2 fans per power suuply module and per ventilation module, or
2 fans (XL), or
1 fan (XS12, XS, XC).
Page 3-88
6/2/06

The converter stops when the fan(s) is (are) detected as faulty (tachometric monitoring
inactive). This condition is ignored for 3 seconds (C/S/L) or 90 seconds (XD) after the
converter is powered up, to allow the replacement of a faulty power supply module or
ventilation module.
3.7.6.4
Battery
3.7.6.4.1 Description
XL, XS and XS12 PBX
An external backup battery can be optionally installed, to protect the PBX from a power
supply failure and prevent service disruption and loss of critical data.
When a PBX has several cabinets, a battery is available for each cabinet. However, the
same battery can be connected in parallel on the 2 or 3 cabinets of an XD or XL, or the 2
cabinets of an XS. In this case, check that the battery can withstand the charging current
(2A per ADS300XD power unit for charging the battery, 6A per ADS300X (XL) power unit
and 2.5 A per ADS100X (XS) power unit).
One battery per cabinet:
For proper operation (standard configuration), use a battery complying with the
specifications indicated in the following table:
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS
Number of battery elements
Voltage
4
4 x 12 V
(12 V per battery element)
Capacity (amp/hours)
Battery autonomy
Table 3.20
CAPACITY
XD and XL: 17 Ah
XS and XS12: 2.1 Ah
XD and XL: 4 h
XS and XS12: 1 h
SPECIFICATIONS ON THE BATTERY FOR AN XD, XL, XS OR XS12 PBX

6/2/06
Page 3-89
Battery in parallel on a 3 XD or 3 XL PBX (3 cabinets)

If you do not wish to use 3 batteries (one per cabinet), but only one for the 3 cabinets
together, use a battery complying with the specifications in the following table:
CAPACITY

(battery type YUASA NP38-12)
Voltage
4 x 12 V
38 Ah
Battery autonomy
Table 3.21
4h
SPECIFICATIONS ON THE BATTERY FOR A 3 XD OR 3 XL PBX
Attention : (1) Do not connect an XL PBX and an XS PBX to the same battery.
(2) Do not connect an XD PBX and another NeXspan range PBX (XL or XS PBX, for
instance) to the same battery.
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
+
+
-
Figure 3.39 CONNECTING A BATTERY IN PARALLEL TO A 3XD PBX
Page 3-90
6/2/06

1L
5
7L
1L
L
75
1L
L
75
1L
5
7L
1L
L
75
1L
L
75
80L 1L
L
LN
16X
L
75
L
80 1L
L
LN
16X
L
75
L
08L 17L
5
LN
16X
L
L
8L
0
LN
16X
8L
0L
LN
16X
L
80L
LN
16X
L
L
08
L
N
16X
L
80
L
L
N
16X
L
8L
0
L
N
16X
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
12V
38AH
L
80 1L
L
LN
16X
L
75
L
80 1L
L
LN
16X
L
75
L
8L
0 1L
LN
16X
L
75
L
80
L
LN
16X
L
8
0L
LN
16X
L
8L
0
LN
16X
+
BX_MATRIX_3XL_CONNEXION_BATTERIE_01_01
L
80
L
LN
16X
8
L
0L
LN
16X
L
80
L
LN
16X
L
80 1L
L
5
N
16X
E
1TL
L
T2X1LL757
E
1TL
LT2X1LL57
IF
I
C
C
R
R
E
E
L
L
B
B
R
R
E
S
IE
IS
A
A
F
C
C
L
L
M
M
O
O
C
C
N
N
U
U
R
R
1L
57
L
L
1L
75
L
1L
57
1L
57
L
+
-
Figure 3.40 CONNECTING A BATTERY IN PARALLEL TO A 3XL PBX

6/2/06
Page 3-91
Battery in parallel on a 2 XD or XL PBX (2 cabinets)

CAPACITY
Voltage
4 x 12 V
24 Ah
Battery autonomy
Table 3.22
3 h 30 mn
SPECIFICATIONS ON THE BATTERY FOR A 2 XD OR XL PBX
Attention : (1) Do not connect an XD PBX and another NeXspan range PBX (XL or XS PBX, for
instance) to the same battery.

(2) Do not connect an XL PBX and an XS PBX to the same battery.
.
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
+
+
-
Figure 3.41 CONNECTING A BATTERY IN PARALLEL TO A 2XD PBX
Page 3-92
6/2/06

L
L
08
LN
16X
L
8
0L
LN
16X
8L
L
0
LN
16X
L
8L
0 1L
5
N
16X
E
L
1TL
T2X1L7L75
E
1TL
LT2X1LL75
L
17L
5
1L
5
7L
L
1L
75
L
80L
LN
16X
L
8L
0
LN
16X
L
8L
0
LN
16X
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
12V
24AH
L
08L 15L
LN
16X
7L
L
L
08 1L
LN
16X
75L
L
08L 15L
L
LN
16X
7
L
8L
0
L
N
16X
L
8
0L
L
N
16X
L
08L
L
N
16X
PBX_MATRIX_2XL_CONNEXION_BATTERIE_01_01
IEF
I
R
R
C
C
E
E
L
L
B
B
E
S
IS
IE
A
A
F
C
C
L
L
M
M
O
O
C
C
N
N
U
U
R
R
1L
L
75
L
1L
75
1L
L
75
L
1L
75
+
-
Figure 3.42 CONNECTING A BATTERY IN PARALLEL TO A 2XL PBX

6/2/06
Page 3-93
Battery in parallel on a 2 XS PBX (2 cabinets)

CAPACITY

(battery type YUASA NP4-12)
Voltage
4 x 12 V
4 Ah
Battery autonomy
Table 3.23
1h
SPECIFICATIONS OF A 2 XS PBX BATTERY
Attention : Do not connect an XL PBX and an XS PBX to the same battery.
12V
4AH
12V
4AH
12V
4AH
+
+
-
PBX_MATRIX_2XS_CONNEXION_BATTERIE_01_01
12V
4AH
Figure 3.43 CONNECTING A BATTERY IN PARALLEL TO A 2XS PBX
Page 3-94
6/2/06

XC PBX
A 12V battery is installed in the cabinet to protect the PBX from a power supply failure in
order to prevent interrupting the service and losing critical data.
For proper operation (standard configuration), use a battery complying with the
specifications indicated in the following table:
CAPACITY
Voltage
12 V
1,7 Ah
Battery autonomy
30 mn
Table 3.24
SPECIFICATIONS ON THE BATTERY FOR AN XC PBX
3.7.6.4.2 Physical specifications

BATTERY ELEMENT PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height
6.3 cm
Width
18 cm
Depth
3.5 cm
Weight
1 kg
Table 3.25
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.7.6.4.3 Installation
The various specifications (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of the
external battery are described in the sections dealing with the power supply module
(see section 4.2). If a single battery is used for an entire 3XD, 3XL or 2XS PBX, see
Figure 3.39, Figure 3.40 and Figure 3.43 .
3.7.6.5
Ventilation
NeXspan XD
Ventilation is provided by the 4 fans on the power supply units, which draw air from the
cabinet on the rear of the power supply module. Fresh air enters through the fresh air
inlets on the left side.
Nota :
A single power supply unit is used in a simplex configuration. A ventilation unit

consisting of two fans is then added instead of the second power supply unit. No
matter the configuration, ventilation must be provided by four fans.

6/2/06
Page 3-95
The fans are monitored by the two power modules, for a duplex configuration, and by the
power module and the ventilation module, for a simplex configuration
(see Section 3.7.6.3).
NeXspan C/S/L
Ventilation is provided by the 2 fans in the power supply unit (1 fan only for XS, XS12 and
XC) which extract air from the cabinet on the back panel of the power supply module (lefthand side for XS, XS12 and XC). Fresh air enters through fresh air inlets on the left-hand
side (right-hand side for XS, XS12 and XC).
The fan(s) is/are monitored by the power supply module (see section 3.7.6.3).
3.8
DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS

The PBX is preconfigured by default at the factory. Through programming, it is possible to
define other specific configurations: standard configuration, multi-company configuration,
multi-site configuration, hotel/motel and hospital functions.
It is necessary to determine which configuration is to be used before initialisation. Once
initialised, the programming tool proposes the menus specific to the configuration chosen
(see Section1.3, List of documents).
3.8.1
Configuration ex factory
The PBX has a default configuration when it leaves the factory (default configuration also
obtained after a total reset). The system is fully functional and only requires a few
adjustments after initialisation to be completely operational.
3.8.2
Standard configuration
The standard configuration is a customised configuration. It caters for the special
requirements of a company. The standard configuration is suitable for single-company
installations, whether in small premises or for larger-scale organisations with a large
number of extensions. Customisation can include changing the numbering plan, setting
up an automatic call distribution service, defining categories, and much more to optimise
the use of the PBX by the customer.
3.8.3
Multi-company configuration
This is the term used to describe a configuration that enables many organisations to use
one PBX. A PBX can manage up to 32 different organisations. Each company/department
pair can be fully customised to suit its own unique requirements, including for example, its
own central office trunks, operator consoles, speed dial numbers, and greeting messages.
3.8.4
Multi-site configuration
A multi-site network is formed of a number of interconnected sites, hence offering services
similar to those of a high capacity system. Multisite operation ensures users are unaware
of the geographical location of the various sites composing a company.
3.8.5
Hotel/motel configuration
The PBX offers additional features suitable for hotels/motels. Monitoring can be carried
Page 3-96
6/2/06

out on an operator console or a digital set for the following services:

rooms status - occupied or free
check-in and check-out
wake-up function
billing credit allowance and record printouts
message lamp control for message notification

3.8.6
Hospital configuration
This configuration, similar to hotel operation, can also include functions specific to
hospitals such as:
a speech guide,
management of DID (Direct Inward Dialling) specifically suited to patients,
the do not disturb function for patients during the night
charging according to patient downpayments.
3.9
INTRODUCING THE USER INTERFACE

The PBX user interface allows:
telephony management:
- users,
- external lines,
- numbering plan,
- attendants and attendance services for inbound call distribution,
data management:
- operating data services,
- creating links,
system management:
- date and time
- cards,
- operating terminals,
- password,
- software configurations
operation monitoring and supervision:
- users,
- external lines,
- PBX subassemblies,
access to the system's data:

6/2/06
Page 3-97
- signalling activation,
- definition of tones,
- configuration transfer.
The operating interface is installed on a VT100 console or a VT100-emulated PC
(see section 5.6.2) and is organised as a tree with a menu providing access to various
MMCs. It can be connected to the PBX either locally or remotely.
Page 3-98
6/2/06

Description of NeXspan components
4.1
Expansion cards
4.1.1
Description
NeXspan D expansion cards exist in RJ45 physical format, a format fitted with a front
panel for RJ45 connectors. These cards are called "RJ cards".
The dimensions of the new generation cards (Lx16-X) are 280 mm in depth and 100 mm
in width. For 1st generation cards (all cards except for Lx16-X), the dimensions are the
same as those of cards with an extraction handle, the handle being replaced by a front
panel and a card for adapting to the connectors:
1st generation card with adapter

format
New generation card format
The physical interface of the card with the rest of the system is provided through a 96-pin
HE12 connector connected to the backplane. The backplane connectors include
advanced power supply contacts used to integrate the live Extraction/Insertion function of
the equipment cards (Lx16-X).
For C/S/L range PBXs, the expansion cards exist in two physical formats:
RJ format,
format fitted with an extraction handle and Stocko connectors,
These latter cards are called "ST cards".
The ST card dimensions are 220 or 270 mm in depth (extraction handle excluded) and
100 mm in width:
Format with extraction handle
6/2/06
Page 4-1
Conventions used in this document for card names

RJ45 cards (RJ cards) have the name of the card followed by the extension RJ (LD4
RJ, LT2 RJ, LA16X RJ, etc.).
Stocko cards (ST cards) have the name of the card followed by the extension ST (LD4
ST, LT2 ST, LA16X ST, etc.).
When a card is referred to in general, whether it is a Stocko or RJ45 card, only the
name of the card is used (LD4, LT2, LA16X, etc.).
Page 4-2
6/2/06

Extraction keys are used to lock and extract RJ cards and blanking plates.
An RJ card is locked as follows (see Figure 4.1):
Set the two 1/4-turn locks in the horizontal position.
Push the card to the bottom of its slot inside the cabinet.
Turn the locks by 1/4 turn inwards the inside to lock the card in its slot.
Turn 1/4 turn

inwards
Card unlocked
Card locked
Card unlocked
Figure 4.1
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_PPE-VERROU_MONT_01_01
Turn 1/4 turn

outwards
PROCEDURE FOR LOCKING AN RJ CARD OR BLANKING PLATE
6/2/06
Page 4-3
An RJ card is extracted as follows (see Figure 4.1):

Turn the two 1/4 turn locks outward to unlock the card.
Pull the two locks to extract the card.
4.1.2
Loading CLX cards

The flash memory on CLX cards contain the start-up software; an image of the application
software can be inserted, installed, etc. on it.
They can be fully loaded during an update using a BOF3 card (see section1.3, Document
[5]).
Page 4-4
6/2/06

4.2
Power supply module
4.2.1
ADS 300XD (XD PBX)
4.2.1.1
Description
ADS 300XD is the power supply module of the main cabinet and expansion cabinet of an
XD PBX.
Depending on the NeXspan D configuration, power is supplied to the cabinets through
one or two ADS300XD power supply modules:
For a simplex configuration, only one power supply module is used by the cabinet. A
ventilation system is then added instead of the second power supply module.
For a simplex configuration with secure power supply, and for a duplex configuration,
two power supply modules are used per cabinet. The power supply modules then work
in load-sharing mode. If one power supply module becomes faulty, the other one
carries the entire load.
The mains power supply voltage is 115/230 V - 50/60 Hz - 300 W.
An optional, external 48V backup battery can be installed (see Section3.7.6.4 ).
4.2.1.2
Functional description (Figure 3.32)

Each power supply module has the following functional units (see section 3.7.6):
a 48V converter supplying the following voltages:
- +5 V/15 A,
- -5 V/0.5 A,
- +12 V/0.5A. This value does not include the fan power supply current,
- -12 V/0.65 A,
- -48 V / 1.9 A (DECT phone sets and base stations),
- ring 70 V / 0.02A,
a 48V rectifier supplying a 6 A current, used as follows:
- 2.1 A for the converter
- 1.9 for the DECT telephone sets and base stations
- 2A to charge a 17 Ah battery for 10 hours providing the system with 4 hours
autonomy.
The rectifiers of several power supplies can be connected in parallel. The rectifier
can be connected to a 115 V or 230 V (+/- 10%) mains, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, without
configuration,
two fans supplied by the converter 12V DC voltage draw air towards the rear of the
cabinet.
6/2/06
Page 4-5
4.2.1.3
Monitoring
Two 3.15 A fuses located upstream from the rectifier are used to isolate the power supply
module in case of overvoltage.
An F300 (6.3 A) fuse inside the power supply module (see Figure 4.2) protects the power
supply in case of polarity inversion when connecting the battery.
The converter monitors the voltage on the battery terminals, and stops when this voltage
drops below a threshold set at 43V. This device prevents deep discharging of the battery
in the absence of mains or failure/shutdown of the rectifier.
When the 2 fans are detected as stopped simultaneously, the power supply is cut off
automatically; restarting is possible only through an On/Off sequence.
Internal F300 fuse
Indicators
Fans
"I/O" switch
Fuse holder
Mains socket
Securing screw
Figure 4.2
4.2.1.4
OVERVIEW OF THE ADS300 XD MODULE
Physical description (Figure 4.2)

The ADS 300XD power supply module is a 218 mm high, 135 mm wide and 292 mm deep
plug-in rack, extraction handles excluded. The maximum height of the components above
the PCB is 70 mm.
An "I/O" switch on the front panel is used to power the supply on and off.
Page 4-6
6/2/06

The fuse holder is located between the "I/O" switch and the mains outlet.
The ADS 300XD is fitted with two 80 mm diameter fans located at the back of the power
supply module.
Connectors
The front panel of the power supply module has a mains socket.
Indicators
The ADS 300XD power supply modules have 6 indicators on the front panel, which give
the following information:
SYMBOL
48V
Table 4.1
4.2.1.5
INDICATOR STATE
On
EXPLANATION
Line Power Present
On
Battery connected
On
Rectifier On
On
Converter On
On
Bell current generator On
On
Fans present
PRESENTATION OF ADS 300XD POWER SUPPLY MODULE INDICATORS
Hardware configuration
The mains voltage, 115 V or 230V (+/- 10%), is detected automatically, internally.
4.2.1.6
Installation and wiring

The ADS 300XD power supply module is supplied with a battery connection cable fitted
with a 4 pin connector, with a centring piece to prevent polarity inversion when connecting
the backup battery.
4.2.2
ADS 300X (XL PBX)
4.2.2.1
Description
The ADS 300X is the power supply module of the main cabinet and expansion cabinet of
an XL PBX. The mains power supply voltage is 120/230 V - 50/60 Hz - 300 W.
An optional, external 48V backup battery can be installed (see Section3.7.6.4 ).
6/2/06
Page 4-7
4.2.2.2
Functional description (Figure 3.34)

The two power supplies include the following functional blocks (see section 3.7.6):
- +5 V/13 A,
- -5 V/0.5 A,
- +12 V/0.5A. This value does not include the fan power supply current.
- -12 V/0.25 A,
- -48 V / 1.9 A (DECT phone sets and base stations),
- 40 V (ISDN) / 0.7 A (optional)
- ring 70 V / 0.02A,
a 48V rectifier supplying a 6 A current, used as follows:
- 2A to charge a 16 Ah battery for 10 hours providing the system with 4 hours
autonomy.
The rectifiers of several power supplies can be connected in parallel. The rectifier
can be connected to a 120 V or 230 V (+/- 10%) mains, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, without
configuration.
Two fans supplied by the converter 12V DC voltage draw air towards the rear of the
cabinet.
Page 4-8
6/2/06

4.2.2.3
Monitoring
Two 3.15 A fuses located upstream from the rectifier are used to isolate the power supply
An F300 (10 A) fuse inside the power supply module (see Figure 4.3) protects the power
supply in case of polarity inversion when connecting the battery.
The converter monitors the voltage on the battery terminals, and stops when this voltage
drops below a threshold set at 43V. This device prevents deep discharging of the battery
in the absence of mains or failure/shutdown of the rectifier.
When the 2 fans are detected as stopped simultaneously, the power supply is cut off
automatically; restarting is possible only through an On/Off sequence.
ISDN 40V (optional)
Internal F300 fuse

Fans
Battery connector
"I/O" switch
Fuse holder
Mains socket
PBX_MATRIX_XL_ADS_COTE_01_02
Securing screw
Figure 4.3
OVERVIEW OF THE ADS 300X MODULE
6/2/06
Page 4-9
4.2.2.4
Physical description (Figure 4.3)

The ADS 300X power supply module is a 7U high, 112mm wide and 316mm deep plug-in
rack, extraction handles excluded. The maximum height of the components above the
PCB is 90 mm.
An "I/O" switch on the front panel is used to power the supply on and off.
The fuse holder is located between the "I/O" switch and the mains outlet.
The ADS 300X is fitted with 2 80mm diameter fans located at the back of the power
supply module.
Connectors
The front panel of the power supply module has:
a mains socket,
a 4-pin battery connector,
an RJ45 40 V ISDN connector (optional).
Indicators
The ADS 300X power supplies include 6 indicators on the front panel giving the following
indications:
SYMBOL
INDICATOR STATE
On
EXPLANATION
Line Power Present
On
Battery connected
On
Rectifier On
On
Converter On
On
Ringing current generator in service (UCTx software

in service)
On
Fans present
On
ISDN 40V present (optional)
48V
40 V
IS
Table 4.2
4.2.2.5
PRESENTATION OF ADS 300X POWER SUPPLY MODULE INDICATORS
The mains voltage, 120 V or 230V (+/- 10%), is detected automatically, internally.
Page 4-10
6/2/06

4.2.2.6

The ADS 300X power supply module is supplied with a battery connection cable fitted
with a 4 pin connector, with a centring piece to prevent polarity inversion when connecting
the backup battery.
4.2.3
ADS 100X (XS and XS12 PBXs)
4.2.3.1
Description
ADS 100X is the power supply module of the main cabinet of XS and XS12 PBXs and
expansion cabinet of the XS PBX. The mains power supply voltage is 115V -50 Hz or 230
V - 60 Hz -100 W.
An external 48V backup battery can be installed optionally (see Section3.7.6.4 ).
4.2.3.2
Functional description
The ADS 100X includes the following functional blocks (see section 3.7.6):
- +5 V / 5 A,
- -5 V / 0.1 A,
- +12 V/0.15A. This value does not include the fan power supply current.
- -12 V / 0.55 A,
- -48 V / 0.45 A
- ring 70 V / 0.06A,
a 48V rectifier supplying a 2.5A current, used as follows:
- 1.1 A to supply the converter,
- 0.75 A to charge a 7.5 Ah battery for 10 hours providing 4 hours autonomy to the
system
The rectifier can be connected to a 115V or 230V mains, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, according
to the type of ADS 100X.
A fan supplied with 12V DC by the converter draws air through the left-hand side into
the cabinet.
4.2.3.3
Monitoring
Two 3.15A fuses located upstream from the rectifier are used to isolate the power
supply module in case of overvoltage.
The converter monitors the voltage on the battery terminals, and stops when this
voltage drops below a threshold set at 43V. This device prevents deep discharging of
the battery in the absence of mains or failure/shutdown of the rectifier.
6/2/06
Page 4-11
When the fan is detected as stopped, the power supply is cut off automatically;
restarting is possible only through an On/Off sequence.
4.2.3.4
The ADS 100X (see Figure 3.17) is a card 108mm wide and 342mm long. The height of
the components above the PCB is limited to 77 mm.
The ADS 100X card is secured on cross-pieces screwed on the back of the cabinet.
A metallic cover with ventilation holes separates the ADS 100X from the other elements in
the cabinet.
An "I/O" switch on the front panel of the XS cabinet is used to power the supply on and off.
The fuse holder is located between the "I/O" switch and the mains socket at the back of
the cabinet.
The ADS 100X is fitted with an 80mm diameter fan, located on the left of the power supply
module.
Connectors
The back plane of XS and XS12 cabinnets comprises:
a mains socket,
a 4-pin battery connector.
Indicators
An "ALIM" indicator located on the front panel of the UCT card indicates when on:
- mains presence, and,
- rectifier operation.
Note :
4.2.3.5
For an IT2 release, this LED also indicates a mains failure (flashes slowly) and
abnormal operation (flashes rapidly or LED out) of the power supply (both power
supplies if there is an expansion cabinet).
There is no hardware configuration. The ADS 100X is available in a 115 V and 230 V
version.
4.2.3.6

The ADS 100X power supply module is supplied with a connection cable fitted with a 4 pin
connector, with a centring piece to prevent polarity inversion when connecting the backup
battery.
4.2.4
ADS 50X (XC PBX)
4.2.4.1
Description
The ADS 50X is the power supply module of the XC PBX. The mains power supply
Page 4-12
6/2/06

voltage is 115V -50 Hz or 230 V - 60 Hz -50 W.

A 12V battery is integrated into the XC cabinet (see Section3.7.6.4).
4.2.4.2
The ADS 50X includes the following functional blocks (see section 3.7.6):
- +5 V / 1.8 A
- -5 V / 0.5 A
- -48 V / 0.16 A
- ring 70 V / 0.004A
a 12V rectifier supplying a 2.5A current, used as follows:
- 0.3 A to charge a 1.7 Ah battery for 10 hours providing 4 hours autonomy to the
system,
The rectifier can be connected to a 115 V or 230 V mains, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, without
configuration,
a fan supplied with 12V DC by the converter draws air through the left-hand side into
the cabinet.
4.2.4.3
Monitoring
Two 1 A fuses located upstream from the rectifier are used to isolate the power supply
When the fan is detected as stopped, the power supply is cut off automatically; restarting
is possible only through an On/Off sequence.
6/2/06
Page 4-13
4.2.4.4
The ADS 50X (see Figure 3.27) is a card 108mm wide and 342mm long. The height of the
components above the PCB is limited to 33 mm.
The ADS 50X card is secured on cross-pieces screwed on the back of the cabinet.
A metallic cover with ventilation holes separates the ADS 50X from the other elements in
the cabinet.
An "I/O" switch on the front panel of the XC cabinet is used to power the supply on and off.
The fuse holder is located between the "I/O" switch and the mains socket at the back of
the cabinet.
The ADS 50X is fitted with an 40mm diameter fan, located on the left of the power supply
module.
Connectors
The backlane of the XC cabinet has:
a mains socket.
Indicators
An "ALIM" indicator on the front panel of the UCT card indicates when on:
mains presence, and,
rectifier operation.
Note :
This indicator is also used to know when the PBX XC switches over to the
integrated battery (it flashes slowly) in case of mains failure, for example, and
during normal power supply operation (it flashes rapidly).
Push button
A push button at the back of the XC cabinet is used to deactivate the integrated battery.
4.2.4.5
The mains voltage, 115 V or 230V, is detected automatically, internally.
4.2.4.6

The ADS 50X power supply module is supplied with a connection cable fitted with a 4 pin
connector, with a centring piece to prevent polarity inversion when connecting the backup
battery.
Page 4-14
6/2/06

4.3
UCT-D card
4.3.1
The UCT-D card provides the following functions described in Section 3.7.1: :
duplex logic and start,
signal processing,
voice mail server,
synchronisation,
management of the commands of the interface cards.
As well as the following functions:
interface with:
- a test console,
- a tool for downloading and saving the PBX configuration,
- an Ethernet network,
- the RUCT card of an expansion cabinet,
supervision of the expansion cabinets:
The power on state of an expansion cabinet is detected by recognising a
synchronisation pattern. The UCT-D card can command the general "Reset" of the
expansion cabinets, provided they are synchronised.
power supply: the UCT-D card receives the following on the back plane connector
(J1):
- a +5 V power supply voltage used for the operation of its internal circuits,
- +12 V power supply used in operating the microcontroller.
The card includes a 2.4 V and 80 mAh NiMH battery responsible for:
X storage of the contents of the internal memory for about 2 months,
X backup power supply for the time stamp.
The battery is soldered onto the circuit and is not interchangeable; when installing
the system, charge the battery for 12 hours.
Daughterboards
The UCT-D card can host two FMEVO daughterboards which extend the voice
memory capacity, thus providing service to up to 600 users.
A daughterboard (POSTAL card) fitted with an oscillator can be installed on the UCT-D
card to ensure the accuracy of the DECT synchronisation clock when the PBX is
connected to a public digital network (other than the French network).
6/2/06
Page 4-15
J3
J4
J1
J5
J2
J10B
J10A
Figure 4.4
ACT
PBX_MATRIX_XD_UCT_FAV_01_02
RUN
UCT 1D
OVERVIEW OF THE UCT-D CARD
Page 4-16
OP
NMI
LAN
LAN
AUX
PARALLEL PORT
Tx / Rx
RST
DEBUG
6/2/06

4.3.2
Connectors
NAME
FUNCTIONS/CHARACTERISTICS
J1
Female connector, 192 pins:

backplane connection,
includes the synchronous junctions (equipment bus)
used in the main cabinet, the reference clocks and
system bus.
J2

link with the connector of the RUCT card in an
expansion cabinet.
J3

used for specific duplex UCT signals
J4 and J5
CMS 80-pin connectors: host two optional

daughterboards to increase the capacity of the MEVO
(Voice mail) function: FMEVO1 and 2.
DEBUG
(J6A)
(1)
DB9-M connector: receives a (TXA/RXA) test console

through RS232 serial links
V28 asynchronous serial link.
CONTACTS
Pin 2: TXA
Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
Pins 1, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9: NC
LAN
(J8)
(1)
RJ45 8-pin connector: host the Ethernet 10/100BASE- Pin 1: TXP

Pin 2: TXM
TX LAN access.
Pin 3: RXP
Note : Applications that use the VTI/XML Pin 4: TLBR
protocol (i2052 in CTI, TWP mode) can Pin 5: TLBR
Pin 6: RXM
be connected directly to the LAN port.
Pin 7: RLBR
Pin 8: RLBR
PARALLEL PORT
(J9B)
(1)
13
25
14
J10A and J10B
(1)
Table 4.3
DB25-F connector: hosts the parallel port used to LVT + R33 Ohm electric level
communicate with a PC for downloading or backup Pin 1: NSTRB
Pins 2 to 9: PB[0] to PB[7]
operations.
Pin 10: NACK
Pin 11: BUSY
Pin 12: PAPEND
Pin 13: SELECT
Pin 14: NAUTFD
Pin 15: NERROR
Pin 16: NPRINI
Pin 17: NSELIN
Pins 18 to 25: GNDL
HE14 connector: hosts the optional accuracy oscillator
daughterboard (POSTAL).
Connector front view.

DESCRIPTION OF UCT-D CARD CONNECTORS
6/2/06
Page 4-17
Indicators
The UCT-D card includes 2 sets of 3 superimposed indicators, each indicator can have
2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
Tx/Rx
(green/red)
Green flashing
Red flashing
On steady
Data exchange on the current LAN interface

Collision
Operating anomaly
LAN (green)
ON green
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX connection through the current LAN

interface
AUX (green)
On
State of the UCT card correct
RUN (green)
On steady
Flashing
Operating problem
Card in operation
OP (green)
ON green
ON red
Board operational
Card out of service
ACT (green)
ON green
Off
Card active
Card not active
PRESENTATION OF THE UCT-D CARD INDICATORS
Figure 4.5
ACT
OP
PBX_MATRIX_XD_LED-UCT_FAV_01_01
RUN
AUX
The "OP" and "ACT" indicators are useful in a duplex configuration. In a simplex
configuration, these indicators are always on (green) when the card is
operational.
LAN
Note :
Tx / Rx
Table 4.4
PRESENTATION OF THE UCT-D CARD INDICATORS

Pushbuttons
The front panel includes:
an "RST" pushbutton used to reset the PBX,
a "NMI" pushbutton used only at the factory.
Page 4-18
6/2/06

4.3.3
Hardware and software configuration

During operation, the UCT-D card has no hardware configuration. All the configurations
are performed by MMC from the administration tool:
Master/Slave mode of the synchronisation port (by default set to Master).
Priority/Non Priority mode of the synchronisation port (by default set to Non Priority).
Setting of the input level for the external music on hold.
Setting of the delay to apply to the DECT synchronisation signal.
Note :
The DECT synchronisation ports and the input for an external music source are
located on the front panel of the IUCT-D card.
The built-in battery is still in circuit (no microswitch).
4.3.4

The UCT-D card can be hot-plugged/removed in an operational XD PBX.
Avertissement :
After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration (15

s. to 1 min.), the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in the
following three cases:
if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case,
a hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the
cabinet can, therefore, be up to 3 minutes).
The equipment connected to the UCT-D card has the installation details described in
Section 5.6:
6/2/06
Page 4-19
4.4
4.4.1
IUCT-D card
The iUCT-D card supports the systems external connections:
one removable i-button circuit for storing the PBX ID number used in locking and
unlocking the optional software functions
one user console,
one serial port for a printer,

one input for a source of external music,
two primary and secondary DECT synchronisation ports
four alarm inputs and four relays (3 remote control relays + one watchdog alarm
relay).
For a duplex configuration, the main cabinet of an XD is fitted with two UCT-D cards. The
two UCT-D cards (active and passive) communicate through the iUCT-D card.
IUCTD
UCTD-B
UCTD-A
Figure 4.6
IUCT-D INTERFACE BETWEEN TWO UCT-D CARDS

Power supply: the iUCT-D card receives the following on the back plane connector (J1):
- a +12V power supply voltage used, among others, to supply power to an external
device.
Page 4-20
6/2/06

J1
02).4%2
Figure 4.7
V_01_02
RSV
S. DECT
!,!2-2%-/4%CONTROL
MEVO
C O N SO LE
$%#439.#
S
P
MST. DECT
-53)#
S. EXT
PBX_MATRIX_XD_IUCTD_COTE_01_01
i-Button.
)5#4$
OVERVIEW OF THE IUCT-D CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-21
4.4.2
Connectors
NAME
J1

link to the UCT-D card
CONSOLE
(J7)
(1)
DB9-M connector: receives a (TXA/RXA) user

console through RS232 serial links
CONTACTS
Pin 2: TXA
Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
Pins 1, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9: NC
DECT P
(J8A)
(1)
DECT S
(J8B)
(1)
8
PRINTER
(J9A)
(1)
(1)
Table 4.4
RJ45 connector: hosts a printer through an RS232

serial link.
Pin 1: TXB
Pin 2: RXB
Pins 3, 4, 5 and 6: GNDL
Note : RS232 links require a "cross" type Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
cable for connecting a terminal.
RJ45 8-pin connector: hosts an external source of Pin 2: JP12
music-on-hold.
Pin 3: GNDL
Pin 4: MUSA
MUSA: Input impedance 15 Kohms.
Pin 5: ETM
MUSB: Input impedance 600 Kohms.
Pin 6: GNDL
ETM: external source present.
Pin 7: MUSB
Pins 1 and 8: NC
MUSIC
(J9B)
(1)
8
RJ45 double connector: carries the radio base DECT P:

stations
primary
and
secondary
DECT Pin 1: AHGA
Pin 2: AHGB
synchronisation.
Pin 3: PHBIT1
Pin 4: PHDECT1
Pin 5: NHDECT1
Pin 6: NHBIT1
Pin 7: HEXTA
Pin 8: HEXTB
DECT S:
Pin 1 and 2: L0V
Pin 3: PHBIT2
Pin 4: PHDECT2
Pin 5: NHDECT2
Pin 6: NHBIT2
Pins 7 and 8: L0V
DESCRIPTION OF IUCT-D CARD CONNECTORS
Page 4-22
6/2/06

NAME
CONTACTS
ALARM / REMOTE DB25-F connector: hosts the alarms and relays Pin 1: NAL[3]
(alarm input 3)
connection:
CONTROL
Pin
2: GND NAL[3]
includes four alarm inputs controlled by a TTL
(J10)
Pin 3: NAL[2]
electric
level,
used
for
the
built-in
UAD
function.
(1)
(alarm input 2)
4 command relays (2).
Pin
4: GND NAL[2]
1
13
Pin 5: NAL[1]
25
(alarm input 1)
14
Pin 6: GND NAL[1]
Pin 7: NAL[0]
(alarm input 0)
Pin 8: GND NAL[0]
Pin 9: R4B
Pin 10: R4A
Pin 11: R3B
Pin 12: R3A
Pin 13: R2C
Pin 14: R2B
Pin 15: R2A
Pin 16: R1B
Pin 17: R1A
Pin 18: JP12 (+ 12 V)
Pin 19: GNDL
Pins 20 to 25: NC
RSV
(J11)
(1)
Table 4.5
RJ45 connector: manufacturer reserved.
(1)
Connector front view
(2)
Table 4.6 gives the details relating to the command relays.

DESCRIPTION OF IUCT-D CARD CONNECTORS (2/2)
6/2/06
Page 4-23
RELAYS
(1)
Table 4.6
FUNCTIONS
STATE
R1
Remote control
Work + 12 V (1)
R2
Alarm relays (assignment of alarms

by MMC)
R3
Reduced service or Common Bell
R4
"Watchdog" alarm
Idle + Work (see section 5.6.7.2)

Work (see section 5.6.6.1)
Work
The R1 Remote control relay delivers a +12V voltage through an 8 Ohm CTP
DESCRIPTION OF IUCT CARD RELAYS
Figure 4.5 illustrates the R1, R2 and R3 relays of the iUCT card.
Note :
Figure 4.8
The relay positions shown are the inactive states.

R1: switchover relay
R2: alarm relays ( assignment of alarms by MMC)
R3: reduced service relay for

connection ofacommon bell
R4: "Watchdog" alarm
IUCT CARD RELAY CONTACTS
Page 4-24
6/2/06

Indicators
The iUCT-D card includes 2 sets of 3 superimposed indicators, each indicator can have
2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
ON green
ON red
MEVO
Green flashing
(2 green/red LED) ON green or OFF
Figure 4.9
4.4.3
ON red (and green

LED which continues
flashing)
Recording
ON green
ON red
Green flashing
Red flashing
DECT synchronisation correct

DECT synchronisation loss alarm
Synchronisation search
Polarity inversion in the wiring of the DECT synchro signal
DECT ON green
Synchronisation master PBX
PRESENTATION OF IUCT-D CARD INDICATORS
S. DECT
Table 4.7
Run (Voice mail operating)

Voice mail not operating (MEVO not operating or faulty)
MST. DECT
MST
(green)
Network synchronisation clock correct

Synchronisation clock fault alarm
S. EXT
S.DECT
(green/red)
EXPLANATION
MEVO
S.EXT
(green/red)
STATE
PRESENTATION OF IUCT-D CARD INDICATORS

During operation, the IUCT-D card has no hardware configuration.
6/2/06
Page 4-25
4.4.4

The iUCT-D card can be hot-plugged/removed in an operational XD PBX.
The equipment connected to the iUCT-D card has the installation details described in
Section 5.6:
VT 100 programming console,
administration PC,
serial printer,
external music source,
common bell,
alarm bell.
Page 4-26
6/2/06

4.5
RUCT-D card:
4.5.1
The RUCT-D card is installed instead of the UCT-D card in the expansion cabinets. Its
primary function is to distribute and monitor the status of the line equipment bus and PCM
synchronous trunks at the positions of the expansion cards. It has an EEPROM memory
connected to the connection bus on the UCT-D card.
It includes a command interface for 16 equipment cards and 8 PCM trunks.
4.5.2
Connectors
NAME
FEATURE
CONTACTS
J1

backplane connection.
It includes the synchronous junctions used in
the expansion cabinet, the reference clocks
and system bus
J2 (rear panel)

connection to the main cabinet
J3
Connector with 8 pins (HE14):

JTAG programming
Table 4.8
DESCRIPTION OF RUCT-D CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
INDICATOR
LINK (green)
STATE
EXPLANATION
Green flashing
ON green or OFF
Clock received from UCT-D
ACCS (green)
Green flashing
access to one of the expansion cards of the current cabinet
ACT (green)
ON green
Off
Card active
Card not active
Table 4.9
No clock (UCT stopped or cable disconnected)
PRESENTATION OF RUCT-D CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-27
J1
RUCT D
ATRIX_XD_RUCTD_FAV_01_01
LINK
ACCS
ACT
J3
PBX_MATRIX_XD_RUCTD_COTE_01_01
J2
Figure 4.10 OVERVIEW OF THE RUCT-D CARD
Page 4-28
6/2/06

4.5.3

This card does not require any hardware or software configuration.
4.5.4

The RUCT-D card can be hot-plugged/removed in an operational XD PBX.
Avertissement :
After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration

(15 s. to 1 min.), the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in
the following three cases:
if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case,
a hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the
cabinet can, therefore, be up to 3 minutes).
The connection of an RUCT-D card to one UCT-D card requires a specific cable supplied
with the expansion cabinet (see cabinet reference in Section 7.2.7.6).
For a duplex configuration comprising one or two expansion cabinets, a second RUCT-D
card must be added to each expansion cabinet. A cable for connecting a main cabinet is
provided with each RUCT-D card (see RUCT-D reference in Table 7.2).
A colour code is indicated at the back of the XD cabinets to facilitate connection to the
expansion cabinet(s). The XD column shows the connection of cables to the main
cabinet. The 2 XD and 3 XD columns show the connection of cables to the expansion
cabinets. You only need to follow this code to carry out the wiring operation.
Read this column for wiring
on the 2XD expansion cabinet
Read this column
for connecting
cables to the
main cabinet
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
Read this column

for connecting
cables to the
3XD expansion cabinet
B-3XD
DB25-F connector
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.11
COLOUR CODE FOR CONNECTION TO THE EXPANSION CABINET(S)

Colour clamps are provided with the cables. Install the clamps on the connection cables,
respecting the colour code.
6/2/06
Page 4-29
4.5.4.1
Connecting an expansion cabinet (2 XD)

Simplex configuration: connecting UCT-D (A) / RUCT-D (A) (see Figure 4.12)
- Install the red clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-2XD
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
A-3XD
2 XD expansion cabinet
XD main cabinet
Figure 4.12 CONNECTING AN EXPANSION CABINET (SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, UCT-D(A)/

RUCT-D(A))
Simplex configuration: connecting UCT-D (B) / RUCT-D (B) (see Figure 4.13)
- Install the yellow clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
A-3XD
XD main cabinet
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.13 CONNECTING AN EXPANSION CABINET (SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, UCT-D(B)RUCT-D(B))
Page 4-30
6/2/06

Duplex configuration: (see Figure 4.14).

- Connecting UCT-D (A) / RUCT-D (A)
X
Install the red clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
- Connecting UCT-D (B) / RUCT-D (B)

X
Install the yellow clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
XD
2XD 3XD
B-2XD
A-3XD
XD main cabinet
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
XD
B-2XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.14 CONNECTING AN EXPANSION CABINET (DUPLEX CONFIGURATION)
6/2/06
Page 4-31
4.5.4.2
Connecting two expansion cabinets (3 XD)

Simplex configuration: connecting UCT-D (A) / RUCT-D (A) (see Figure 4.15)
- Install the red clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
- Install the green clamps at each end of the XD-3XD connection cable.
XD
2XD 3XD
B-2XD
A-3XD
XD main cabinet
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
A-2XD
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
XD
A-3XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.15 CONNECTING TWO EXPANSION CABINETS (SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, UCTD(A)/RUCT-D(A))
Page 4-32
6/2/06

Simplex configuration: connecting UCT-D (B) / RUCT-D (B) (see Figure 4.16)
- Install the yellow clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
- Install the blue clamps at each end of the XD-3XD connection cable.
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
A-3XD
XD main cabinet
A-2XD
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
XD
A-3XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.16 CONNECTING TWO EXPANSION CABINETS (SIMPLEX CONFIGURATION, UCTD(B)-RUCT-D(B))
6/2/06
Page 4-33
Duplex configuration: (see Figure 4.17).

- Connecting UCT-D (A) / RUCT-D (A)
X
Install the red clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
Install the green clamps at each end of the XD-3XD connection cable.
- Connecting UCT-D (B) / RUCT-D (B)

X
Install the yellow clamps at each end of the XD-2XD connection cable.
Install the blue clamps at each end of the XD-3XD connection cable.
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
A-3XD
XD main cabinet
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
A-2XD
XD
B-2XD
2XD 3XD
B
B-3XD
B-3XD
B-3XD
A-2XD
XD
A-3XD
A-2XD
A-3XD
Figure 4.17 CONNECTING TWO EXPANSION CABINETS (DUPLEX CONFIGURATION)
Page 4-34
6/2/06

4.6
UCT-L card
4.6.1
The UCT-L card provides the following functions described in Section 3.7.1:
signal processing,
voice mail server,
synchronisation,
management of the commands of the interface cards.
As well as the following functions:
interface with:
- one user console,
- a tool for downloading and saving the PBX configuration,
- a serial printer,
- an external music source,
- a common bell
- an alarm bell
- alarm inputs (four),
- an Ethernet network,
- the RUCT card of an expansion cabinet,
remote control of an external device (delivering a voltage of +12 V),
supervision of the expansion cabinets:
The power on state of an expansion cabinet is detected by recognising a
synchronisation pattern. The UCT-L card can command the general "Reset" of the
expansion cabinets, provided they are synchronised,
locking and unlocking of optional software functions, through a removable circuit of the
"i-Button" family, used in storing the PBX ID number,
power supply: the UCT-L card receives the following on the backplane connector (J1):
- a +12V power supply voltage used, among others, to supply power to an external
device,
- a - 48 V power supply voltage for analogue and digital sets,
- a 70V AC power supply voltage for the ringing current of analogue sets.
The card includes a 2.4 V and 80 mAh NiMH battery responsible for:
X storage of the contents of the internal memory for about 2 months,
X backup power supply for the time stamp.
The battery is soldered onto the circuit and is not interchangeable; when installing
the system, charge the battery for 12 hours.
6/2/06
Page 4-35
Daughterboards
The UCT-L card can host two FMEVO daughterboards which extend the voice memory
capacity, thus providing service to up to 600 users.
A daughterboard (POSTAL card) fitted with an oscillator can be installed on the UCT-L
card to ensure the accuracy of the DECT synchronisation clock when the PBX is
connected to a public digital network (other than the French network).
J1
J2
i-Button
J10A
J10B
J4
DECT SYNC
PRINTER
RUN
ALARM / REMOTE CONTROL
LAN
CONSOLE
S. EXT
RST
S. DECT
MUSIC
MST
DECT
MEVO
AUX
Tx / Rx
P
NMI
LAN
10/100-TX
UCT 1L
PBX_MATRIX_XL_UCT_FAV_01_01
PARALLEL PORT
PBX_MATRIX_XL_UCT_COTE_01_01
J5
Figure 4.18 OVERVIEW OF THE UCT-L CARD
Page 4-36
6/2/06

4.6.2
Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1

includes the synchronous junctions (equipment
bus) used in the main cabinet, the reference
clocks and system bus.
J2 (rear panel)

expansion cabinet.
J4 and J5
CMS 80-pin connectors: host two optional

daughterboards to increase the capacity of the
MEVO (Voice mail) function: FMEVO1 and 2.
CONSOLE
(J6A)
(1)
DB9-M connector: hosts an operating console (TXA/

RXA) and a test console (TXC/RXC) through RS232 Pin 2: TXA
serial links.
Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
Pin 6: RXC
Attention : For connection to a PC, do not Pin 7: GNDL
Pin 9: TXC
connect pins 6,7 and 9.
Pins 1, 4 and 8: NC
PRINTER
(J6B)
(1)
(1)
Table 4.10

serial link.
Pin 1: TXB
Pin 2: RXB
Note : RS232 links require a "cross" type Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
cable for connecting a terminal.

DESCRIPTION OF UCT-L CARD CONNECTORS (1/3)
6/2/06
Page 4-37
NAME
RJ45 double connector: carries the radio base DECT SYNC P :

stations
primary
and
secondary
DECT Pin 1: AHGA
Pin 2: AHGB
synchronisation.
Pin 3: NHBIT1
Pin 4: NHDECT1
Pin 5: PHDECT1
Pin 6: PHBIT1
Pin 7: HEXTA
Pin 8: HEXTB
DECT SYNC S :
Pin 1 and 2: L0V
Pin 3: NHBIT2
Pin 4: NHDECT2
Pin 5: PHDECT2
Pin 6: PHBIT2
Pins 7 and 8: L0V
DECT SYNC P
(J7A)
(1)
DECT SYNC S
(J7B)
(1)
8
RJ45 8-pin connector: host the Ethernet 10/
100BASE-TX LAN access.
Note : Applications that use the VTI/XML

protocol (i2052 in CTI, TWP mode) can
be connected directly to this 10/100-TX

LAN port.
10/100-TX LAN
(J8A)
(1)
(1)
Table 4.10
Connector front view

DESCRIPTION OF THE UCT-L CARD CONNECTORS (2/3)
Page 4-38
Pin 1: TXP
Pin 2: TXM
Pin 3: RXP
Pin 4: TLBR
Pin 5: TLBR
Pin 6: RXM
Pin 7: RLBR
Pin 8: RLBR

music-on-hold.
Pin 3: GNDL
Pin 4: MUSA
Pin 5: ETM
Pin 6: GNDL
Pin 7: MUSB
Pins 1 and 8: NC
MUSIC
(J8B)
(1)
8
CONTACTS
6/2/06

NAME
FUNCTION/CHARACTERISTIC
CONTACTS
(alarm input 3)
connection:
CONTROL
Pin
2: GND NAL[3]
(J9A)
(alarm input 2)
electric
level,
used
for
the
built-in
UAD
function.
(1)
Pin 3: NAL[2]
(alarm input 1)
1
13
Pin 4: GND NAL[2]
25
(alarm input 0)
14
Pin 5: NAL[1]
Pin 6: GND NAL[1]
Pin 7: NAL[0]
Pin 8: GND NAL[0]
Pin 9: R4B
Pin 10: R4A
Pin 11: R3B
Pin 12: R3A
Pin 13: R2C
Pin 14: R2B
Pin 15: R2A
Pin 16: R1B
Pin 17: R1A
Pin 18: JP12 (+ 12 V)
Pin 19: GNDL
Pins 20 to 25: NC
PARALLEL PORT
(J9B)
(1)
13
25
14
J10A and J10B
DB25-F connector: hosts the parallel port used to LVT + R33 Ohm electric level
operations.
Pin 10: NACK
Pin 11: BUSY
Pin 12: PAPEND
Pin 13: SELECT
Pin 14: NAUTFD
Pin 15: NERROR
Pin 16: NPRINI
Pin 17: NSELIN
Pins 18 to 25: GNDL
HE14 connector: hosts the optional accuracy
oscillator daughterboard (POSTAL).
(1)
(2)
Table 4.3 gives the details relating to the command relays.
Tableau 4.10
DESCRIPTION OF UCT-L CARD CONNECTORS (3/3)
6/2/06
Page 4-39
RELAYS
(1)
Table 4.11
FUNCTIONS
STATE
R1
Remote control
Work + 12 V (1)
R2
not used
R3
Reduced service or Common Bell
R4
"Watchdog" alarm
Idle + Work (see section 5.6.7.2)

Work (see section 5.6.6.2)
Work
The R1 Remote control relay delivers a +12V voltage through an 8 Ohm CTP
DESCRIPTION OF UCT CARD RELAYS
Figure 4.19 illustrates the R1, R2 and R3 relays of the UCT card.
Note :
The relay positions shown are the inactive states.

R1: switchover relay
R2: fallback regime alarm relay

or synchronisation clock alarm
R3: reduced service relay for

connection ofacommon bell
R4: "Watchdog" alarm
Figure 4.19 UCT CARD RELAY CONTACTS
Page 4-40
6/2/06

Indicators
The UCT-L card includes 2 sets of 4 superimposed indicators, each indicator can include
2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
LAN (green)
On

interface
Tx/Rx
(green/red)
Green flashing
Red flashing
On steady

Collision
Operating anomaly
RUN (green)
On steady
Flashing
Operating problem
Card in operation
AUX (green)
On
State of the UCT card correct
S.EXT
(green)
ON green
Off

MEVO
Green flashing
ON green
ON red
Green flashing
Red flashing

DECT On
S. DECT
MST
DECT
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LED-UCT_FAV_01_01
S. EXT
MEVO
RUN
PRESENTATION OF UCT-L CARD INDICATORS
AUX
Table 4.12
Recording
LAN
MST
(green)
ON red (and green

LED which continues
flashing)
Tx / Rx
S.DECT
(green/red)

Figure 4.20 PRESENTATION OF THE UCT-L CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-41
Pushbuttons
4.6.3

During operation, the UCT-L card includes no hardware configuration. All the
configurations are performed by MMC from the administration tool:
Priority/Non Priority mode of the synchronisation port (by default set to Non Priority).
Setting of the input level for the external music on hold.
Setting of the delay to apply to the DECT synchronisation signal.
4.6.4

The equipment connected to the UCT-L card has the installation details described in
Section 5.6:
administration PC,
serial printer,
common bell,
alarm bell.
Page 4-42
6/2/06

4.7
UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards
4.7.1
The UCT1-S and UCT2-S card provides the same functions as the UCT-L described in
Section 4.6.1 with, however, a few differences:
- additional interfaces for telephone equipment:
X
8 analogue set interfaces (type LA16X),
8 digital set interfaces (type LN16X),
4 configurable ISDN interfaces:

in T0 for connection to the network,
or in S0 for connecting terminals or DECT base stations (with 2 channels on
UCT1-S and 4 channels on UCT2-S fitted with an ADPCM16 daughterboard).
Note :
X
- On UCT2-S, the integrated S0 accesses manage synchronisation by bit M frame S.

- The XS cabinet cannot deliver a 40V remote supply over an S0 link.
2 ISDN T0 interfaces.
- two IVB accesses instead of four on the UCT-L.

- a single FMEVO extension card instead of two on the UCT-L.
- the power supplies are not supplied by the backplane connector, but through a
dedicated connector. The UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards receive the following on this
specific connector:
X
a +5 V power supply voltage used for the operation of its internal circuits,
a +12V power supply voltage used, among others, to supply power to an external
device,
a - 48 V power supply voltage for analogue and digital sets,
a 70V AC power supply voltage for the ringing current of analogue sets.
Daughterboards
The UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards can host an FMEVO daughterboard to expand the
voice memory capacity.
A daughterboard (POSTAL card) fitted with an oscillator can be installed on the UCT1S and UCT2-S card to ensure the accuracy of the DECT synchronisation clock when
the PBX is connected to a public digital network (other than the French network).
The UCT2-S card can receive an ADPCM16 daughterboard which offers the 4-channel
base station function on the ISDN ports integrated into the card (S/T0 to S/T3). See the
description of the ADPCM16 daughterboard in Section 4.12.1.6.
6/2/06
Page 4-43
J10
i-Button
J1
J2
PBX_MATRIX_XS_UCTRJ_COTE_01_02
J4
UCT1-S RJ card
J30
J10
J29
J1
i-Button
J2
PBX_MATRIX_XS_UCTRJ_COTE_02_01
J4
UCT2-S RJ card
LAN
RUN
S.EXT
S.DECT
Console
Music RST
LAN
NMI
10/100-TX
Tx/Rx
ALIM
MEVO
MST
DECT
S.DECT P.DECT T-1
Parallel Port
Printer
Alarm / Remote Control
S/T-3
S/T-2
T-0
S/T-1 S/T-0
A7
A6
A5
A4
N7
N6
N5
N4
A3
A2
A1
A0
N3
N2
N1
NO
Figure 4.21 OVERVIEW OF UCT1-S AND UCT2-S (RJ) CARDS

Page 4-44
6/2/06

J10
i-Button
J1
J2
PBX_MATRIX_XS_UCTST_COTE_01_02
J4
UCT1-S ST card
J10
J30
J29
J1
i-Button
J2
PBX_MATRIX_XS_UCTST_COTE_02_01
J4
UCT2-S ST card
LAN
RUN
S.EXT
S.DECT
Console
Music RST
LAN
NMI
10/100-TX
Tx/Rx
ALIM
MEVO
MST
DECT
S.DECT P.DECT T-1
Parallel Port
Printer
S/T-3
S/T-2
T-0
S/T-1 S/T-0
Figure 4.22 OVERVIEW OF UCT1-S AND UCT2-S (ST) CARDS

6/2/06
Page 4-45
4.7.2
The UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards are manufactured in two equipment interface variants:
a variant fitted with RJ45 sockets on the front panel,
a variant fitted with Stocko connectors.
Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
Connector 144 (3x48) male pins:

system bus.
J2 (rear panel)
Male connector, 26 pins:

expansion cabinet.
J4
CMS 80-pin connector: can be fitted with one optional

daughterboard to increase the capacity of the Voice
mail function.
CONSOLE
(J6A)
(1)
DB9-M connector: hosts an operating console (TXA/ Pin 2: TXA

RXA) and a test console (TXC/RXC) through RS232 Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
serial links.
Pin 6: RXC
Pin 9: TXC
Pins 1, 4 and 8: NC
PRINTER
(J6B)
(1)
P DECT
(J7A)
(1)
8
and
S DECT
(J7B)
(1)
8

serial link.
Pin 1: TXB
Pin 2: RXB
Note : RS232 links require a "cross" type cable Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
for connecting a terminal.
RJ45 connectors: carries the radio base stations P DECT:
primary and secondary DECT synchronisation.
Pin 1: AHGA
Pin 2: AHGB
Pin 3: NHBIT1
Pin 4: NHDECT1
Pin 5: PHDECT1
Pin 6: PHBIT1
Pin 7: HEXTA
Pin 8: HEXTB
S DECT:
Page 4-46
6/2/06
Pins 1 and 2: L0V

Pin 3: NHBIT2
Pin 4: NHDECT2
Pin 5: PHDECT2
Pin 6: PHBIT2
Pins 7 and 8: L0V

NAME
10/100-TX LAN
(J8A)
(1)
RJ45 8-pin connectors: host the Ethernet 10/


LAN port.
MUSIC
(J8B)
(1)
8
CONTACTS
Pin 1: TXP
Pin 2: TXM
Pin 3: RXP
Pin 4: TLBR
Pin 5: TLBR
Pin 6: RXM
Pin 7: RLBR
Pin 8: RLBR

music-on-hold.
Pin 3: GNDL
Pin 4: MUSA
MUSA: Input impedance 15 KOhms.
Pin 5: ETM
MUSB: Input impedance 600 Ohms.
Pin 6: GNDL
Pin 7: MUSB
Pins 1 and 8: NC
(alarm input 3)
connection:
CONTROL
Pin
2: GND NAL[3]
(J9A)
(alarm
input 2)
electric level, used for the built-in UAD function.
(1)
Pin
3:
NAL[2]
(alarm input 1)
1
13
Pin 4: GND NAL[2]
25
(alarm input 0)
14
Pin 5: NAL[1]
Pin 6: GND NAL[1]
Pin 7: NAL[0]
Pin 8: GND NAL[0]
Pin 9: R4B
Pin 10: R4A
Pin 11: R3B
Pin 12: R3A
Pin 13: R2C
Pin 14: R2B
Pin 15: R2A
Pin 16: R1B
Pin 17: R1A
Pin 18: JP12 (+ 12 V)
Pin 19: GNDL
Pins 20 to 25: NC
PARALLEL PORT
(J9B)
(1)
13
25
14
J10
DB25-F connector: hosts the parallel port used to LVT + R33 Ohm electrical level
operations.
Pin 10: NACK
Note : For a PC connection use a shielded Pin 11: BUSY
cable (ref: HG3033BA) or a standard Pin 12: PAPEND
Pin 13: SELECT
cable.
Pin 14: NAUTFD
Pin 15: NERROR
Pin 16: NPRINI
Pin 17: NSELIN
Pins 18 to 25: GNDL
Power supply module linking connector
6/2/06
Page 4-47
NAME
CONTACTS
J10A and J10B
HE14 connectors: host the optional POSTAL

accuracy oscillator daughterboard.
J29 and J30
Two connectors AMP CMS 2 x 10 female pins: hosts

an ADPCM16V daughterboard.
only on
UCT2-S card
S/T0, S/T1, S/T2,
S/T3 (1)
T0, T1
(1)
RJ45 connectors: T0/S0 access.
Note : Connecting S0 peripherals (S sets or

DECT base stations) requires a twisted
cable or S0/T0 adaptor.
RJ45 connectors: T0 access.
Pins 1 and 2: NC
Pin 3: EDX
Pin 4: RDX
Pin 5: NRDX
Pin 6: NEDX
Pins 7 and 8: NC
Pins 1 and 2: NC
Pin 3: EDX
Pin 4: RDX
Pin 5: NRDX
Pin 6: NEDX
Pins 7 and 8: NC
Card with RJ45 equipment variant

RJ45 connectors: used to connect 8 analogue sets.
LA0 to LA7
(1)
8
LN0 to LN7
(1)
8
Pin 4: LAX+
Pin 5: LAX Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
RJ45 connectors: used to connect 8 digital sets.

Pin 4: LNX+
Pin 5: LNX Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
Card with STOCKO equipment variant

J20 to J23
4
J24 to J27
4
STOCKO connectors with 4 pins: each socket

provides two connections to a digital set.
Pin 1: LN(X+1)+
Pin 2: LN(X+1)Pin 3: LNX+
Pin 4: LNX-
STOCKO connectors with 4 pins: each socket
provides two connections to an analogue set.
Pin 1: LA(X+1)+
Pin 2: LA(X+1)Pin 3: LAX+
Pin 4: LAX-
(1)
Page 4-48
6/2/06

(2)
Table 4.13
Table 4.11 and Figure 4.19 give the details relating to the command relays.
DESCRIPTION OF UCT1-S AND UCT2-S CONNECTORS
6/2/06
Page 4-49
Indicators
The UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have 2 sets of 4 superimposed indicators; each indicator
can have 2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
LAN (green)
On

interface
Tx/Rx
(green/red)
Flashes green
Flashes red
On steady

Collision
Operating anomaly
RUN
(green)
On steady
Flashing
Operating problem
Card in operation
ALIM
On steady
If one cabinet, indicates mains presence and operation of the

rectifier in the cabinet power supply unit.
If two cabinets (main cabinet and expansion cabinet), indicates
mains presence and operation of the rectifier in the power supply
unit of both cabinets.
If one cabinet, indicates mains failure and thus cabinet operation
with the battery.
If two cabinets (main cabinet and expansion cabinet), indicates
mains failure and thus operation of both cabinets with batteries.
Abnormal operation.
Examples: expansion cabinet not powered, expansion cabinet
powerd by battery and main cabinet powered from the mains
Slow flashing
Off or rapid flashing
S.EXT
(green)
ON green
Off
MEVO
Flashes green

ON red (and green LED Recording

which continues
flashing)
S.DECT
(green/red)
ON green
ON red
Flashes green
Flashes red

MST DECT
(green)
On
Table 4.14
PRESENTATION OF UCT1-S AND UCT2-S CARD INDICATORS
Page 4-50
6/2/06

RUN
S. EXT
S. DECT
ALIM
MEVO
MST
DECT
PBX_MATRIX_XS_LED-UCT_FAV_01_01
LAN
Tx / Rx
Figure 4.23 PRESENTATION OF UCT1-S AND UCT2-S CARD INDICATORS

Note :
The AUX indicator, present on the front panel of the UCT-L card, indicating the
card's state, is fitted to the PCB of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards.
Pushbuttons
4.7.3

UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have 4 jumpers for configuring the remote power supply of
the S/T0 to S/T3 accesses (one jumper block for each access). These jumpers are fitted
on connectors J29_xx and J30_xx located on the front panel of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S
cards (J29_30 and J30_30 for S/T0 access, J29_31 and J30_31 for S/T1 access, etc.).
The four accesses are placed vertically on the card. The one at the bottom is the S/T0
access and the one at the top the S/T3 access. Depending on the position of the jumpers,
the S/T0 to S/T3 accesses will be configured as follows:
no remote power supply.
48 V power supply (DECT and S sets).
40V power supply (option).
6/2/06
Page 4-51
J30xx
S/T3
J29xx
Pas de tlalimentation
S/T2
Alimentation 48V
S/T1
PBX_MATRIX_XS_TELEALIM_ACCESS_01_02
Alimentation 40V (option)
S/T0
Pas de tlalimentation
FACE AVANT UCT
Figure 4.24 CONFIGURING REMOTE POWER SUPPLY OF S/T0 TO S/T3 ACCESSES

All the following configurations are performed by MMC from the administration tool:
configuration of the T lines, S or DECT terminal.
Priority/Non Priority mode of the synchronisation port (by default set to Priority).
setting of the input level for the external music on hold.
setting of the delay to be applied to the DECT synchronisation signal.
Page 4-52
6/2/06

4.7.4

The following equipment connected to the UCT1-S or UCT2-S card has the installation
details described in section 5.6:
administration PC,
serial printer,
common bell,
alarm bell.
Interfaces LA0 to LA7 of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have the same special
installation details as the LA16X card interfaces (see Section 4.13.1.5).
Interfaces LN0 to LN7 of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have the same special
The S/T0 to S/T3 interfaces of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have installation details
identical to those of the interfaces of the LD4 card for T accesses (see section 4.12.1.5)
but are different for S accesses.
Attention : The S/T accesses of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards are wired in T. To
connect S peripherals (S sets or DECT base stations), a twisted cable or S0/

T0 adaptor (see Figure 4.25) is therefore required.
Interfaces T0 and T1 of the UCT1-S and UCT2-S cards have the same special installation
details as the LD4 cards T interfaces (see Section 4.12.1.5).
6/2/06
Page 4-53
Wiring DECT base stations

Each base station is connected to an ISDN S0 (BRI) interface of a UCT1-S or UCT2-S
card, and uses two pairs: 1 transmit pair and 1 receive pair (refer to document [12]
(see section 1.3) for more information).
A twisted cable or S0/T0 adaptor is required to connect DECT base stations.
UCT-S/UCT-C
6 7
6 7
Cble point point standard
6 7
Cble crois
Bote de
croisement
2
6 7
Borne DECT
6 7
1 ere mthode : utilisation d'un cble crois
eme
6 7
mthode : utilisation d'un adaptateur
PBX_MATRIX_XS_UCTS_CONNEXION_DECT_01_01
Figure 4.25 CONNECTING A DECT BASE STATION TO AN S0 INTERFACE OF

UCT1-S/UCT2-S CARDS (UCT1-C/UCT2-C)
Table 4.15
UCT1-S/UCT2-S card RJ45 connector
Base station RJ45 connector
Pin 6 (NED1)
Pin 5
Pin 3 (ED1)
Pin 4
Pin 5 (NRD1)
Pin 6
Pin 4 (RD1)
Pin 3
S0 INTERFACE LINK WITH DECT BASE STATION (TWISTED CABLE)
Page 4-54
6/2/06

4.8
UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 cards
4.8.1
The UCT1S-12 (UCT2S-12) card offers the same functions as the UCT1-S (UCT2-S) card
described in Section 4.7.1,however with some differences:
additional interfaces for telephone equipment:
- 8 analogue set interfaces (type LA16X),
- 4 digital set interfaces (type LN16X),
- 4 configurable ISDN interfaces:
X

UCT1S-12 and 4 channels on UCT2S-12 fitted with an ADPCM16
daughterboard).
Note :
On UCT2S-12, the integrated S0 accesses manage synchronisation by bit M frame S.

The XS12 cabinet cannot deliver a 40 V remote power supply over an S0 link.
two IVB accesses

no FMEVO expansion card.
no expansion cards for the standard non-rackable XS12 (optional back plane)
no multisite DECT synchronisation.
The power supplies are provided through a dedicated connector. The UCT1S-12/
UCT2S-12 card receives the following on this special connector:
Daughterboards
The UCT2S-12 card can receive an ADPCM16 daughterboard which offers the 4channel base station function on the ISDN ports integrated into the card (S/T0 to S/T3).
See the description of the ADPCM16 daughterboard in Section 4.12.1.6.
6/2/06
Page 4-55
J10
i-Button
PBX_MATRIX_SX2_UCTS12RJ_COTE_01_01
J1
UCT1S-12 card
J30
i-Button
J10
J29
UCT2S-12 card
02).4%2
#/.3/,%
!,!2-2%-/4%#/.42/,
34
234
34
,!.
25.
3%84
3$%#4
-53)#
,!.
48
.-)
4X2X
!,)-%6/
-34$%#4
0!2!,,%,0/24
34
34
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
.
.
.
.
0"8 -!42)8 38 5#432* &!6
PBX_MATRIX_SX2_UCTS12RJ_COTE_02_01
J1
Figure 4.26 OVERVIEW OF UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12
Page 4-56
6/2/06

4.8.2
Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
Connector 144 (3x48) male pins:

system bus.
CONSOLE
(J6A)
(1)
DB9-M connector: hosts an operating console (TXA/ Pin 2: TXA

RXA) and a test console (TXC/RXC) through RS232 Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
serial links.
Pin 6: RXC
Pin 9: TXC
connect pins 6, 7 and 9.
Pins 1, 4 and 8: NC
PRINTER
(J6B)
(1)
10/100-TX LAN
(J8A)
(1)
MUSIC
(J8B)
(1)
8

serial link.
Pin 1: TXB
Pin 2: RXB
Note : RS232 links require a "cross" type cable Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
for connecting a terminal.


LAN port.
Pin 1: TXP
Pin 2: TXM
Pin 3: RXP
Pin 4: TLBR
Pin 5: TLBR
Pin 6: RXM
Pin 7: RLBR
Pin 8: RLBR

music-on-hold.
Pin 3: GNDL
Pin 4: MUSA
Pin 5: ETM
Pin 6: GNDL
Pin 7: MUSB
Pins 1 and 8: NC
6/2/06
Page 4-57
NAME
CONTACTS
(alarm input 3)
connection:
CONTROL
Pin
2: GND NAL[3]
(J9A)
(alarm
input 2)
(1)
Pin 3: NAL[2]
(alarm input 1)
1
13
Pin 4: GND NAL[2]
25
(alarm input 0)
14
Pin 5: NAL[1]
Pin 6: GND NAL[1]
Pin 7: NAL[0]
Pin 8: GND NAL[0]
Pin 9: R4B
Pin 10: R4A
Pin 11: R3B
Pin 12: R3A
Pin 13: R2C
Pin 14: R2B
Pin 15: R2A
Pin 16: R1B
Pin 17: R1A
Pin 18: JP12 (+ 12 V)
Pin 19: GNDL
Pins 20 to 25: NC
PARALLEL PORT
(J9B)
(1)
13
25
14
operations.
Pin 10: NACK
Note : For a PC connection use a shielded Pin 11: BUSY
cable (ref: HG3033BA) or a standard Pin 12: PAPEND
Pin 13: SELECT
cable.
Pin 14: NAUTFD
Pin 15: NERROR
Pin 16: NPRINI
Pin 17: NSELIN
Pins 18 to 25: GNDL
J10
J29 and J30

only on
UCT2S-12 card
S/T0, S/T1, S/T2,
S/T3 (1)
Note : Connecting S0 peripherals (S sets or

Page 4-58
6/2/06
Pins 1 and 2: NC
Pin 3: EDX
Pin 4: RDX
Pin 5: NRDX
Pin 6: NEDX
Pins 7 and 8: NC

NAME
LA0 to LA7
(1)
CONTACTS
Pin 4: LAX+
LN0 to LN3
(1)
Pin 4: LNX+
(1)
(2)
Table 4.16
DESCRIPTION OF UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12 CONNECTORS

Indicators
The UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12 card has 2 sets of 3 superimposed indicators; each indicator
can have 2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
LAN (green)
On

interface
Tx/Rx
(green/red)
Flashes green
Flashes red
On steady

Collision
Operating anomaly
RUN
(green)
On steady
Flashing
Operating problem
Card in operation
ALIM
On steady
Indicates mains availability and the working of the rectifier in the

cabinet power supply unit.
Indicates mains failure and thus cabinet operation with the battery.
Abnormal operation.
Slow flashing
Off or rapid flashing
S.EXT
(green)
ON green
Off
MEVO
Flashes green

ON red (and green LED Recording

which continues
flashing)
Table 4.17
PRESENTATION OF UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12 CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-59
PBX_MATRIX_XC_LED-UCT_FAV_01_01
S. EXT
RUN
ALIM
MEVO
LAN
Tx / Rx
Figure 4.27 PRESENTATION OF UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12 CARD INDICATORS

Note :
The AUX indicator, present on the front panel of the UCT-L card, indicating the
card's state, is fitted to the PCB of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 cards.
Pushbuttons
4.8.3

The UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12 cards have jumpers for configuring remote supply of the S/T0
to S/T3 accesses. These jumpers are fitted on connectors J29_xx and J30_xx located on
the front panel of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12cards (J29_30 and J30_30 for S/T0
access, J29_31 and J30_31 for S/T1 access, etc.). Depending on the position of the
jumpers, the S/T0 to S/T3accesses will not be powered up remotely, but will be supplied
with 48 V (DECT and S sets) or 40 V (optional) (see Figure 4.24).
configuration of the T lines, S or DECT terminal,
By default, two accesses are set to T0 without remote power supply; the other two are set
to S0 with 48 V supply.
Page 4-60
6/2/06

4.8.4

The following devices connected to the UCT1S-12 or UCT2S-12 card have the installation
details described in Section 5.6:
administration PC,
serial printer,
common bell,
alarm bell.
Interfaces LA0 to LA7 of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S cards have the same special
Interfaces LN0 to LN3 of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S cards have the same special
The S/T0, S/T1, S/T2 and S/T3 interfaces of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 cards have
installation details identical to those of the interfaces of the LD4 card for T accesses (see
Section 4.12.1.5) but are different for S accesses.
Attention :The S/T accesses of the UCT1S-12 and UCT2S-12 S cards are wired
in T. To connect S peripherals (S sets or DECT base stations), a

twisted cable or S0/T0 adaptor (see Figure 4.25) is therefore required.
The special details for connecting DECT base stations to the S interfaces of the UCT1S12/UCT2S-12 cards of an XS12 PBX are the same as for the UCT1S/UCT2S cards of an
XS PBX (see Section 4.7.4).
6/2/06
Page 4-61
4.9
UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards
4.9.1
The UCT1-C (UCT2-C) card offers the same functions as the UCT1-S (UCT2-S card,
however, with a few differences:
additional interfaces for telephone equipment:
- 4 analogue set interfaces (type LA16X),
- 4 digital set interfaces (type LN16X),
- 4 configurable ISDN interfaces:
X

UCT1-C and 4 channels on UCT2-C fitted with an ADPCM16 daughterboard).
Note :
- On UCT2-C, the integrated S0 accesses manage synchronisation by bit M frame S.

- The XC cabinet cannot deliver a 40V remote supply over an S0 link.
two IVB accesses (like UCT1-S and UCT2-S)

no FMEVO expansion card.
no expansion cards.
no multisite DECT synchronisation.
The power supplies are provided through a dedicated connector. The UCT1-C and
UCT2-C cards receive the following on this specific connector:
Daughterboard
The UCT2-C card can receive an ADPCM16 daughterboard which offers the 4-channel
base station function on the ISDN ports integrated into the card (S/T0 to S/T3). See the
description of the ADPCM16 daughterboard in Section 4.12.1.6.
Page 4-62
6/2/06

J10
PBX_MATRIX_XC_UCTRJ_COTE_01_02
i-Button
UCT1-C card
J30
J10
J29
PBX_MATRIX_XC_UCTRJ_COTE_02_01
i-Button
UCT2-C card
Music
RST
S/T-1 S/T-0
A3
A2
A1
A0
N3
N2
N1
NO
LAN
NMI
10/100-TX
MEVO
Printer
S/T-3 S/T-2
LAN
RUN
S.EXT
Console
Tx/Rx
ALIM
Parallel Port
Figure 4.28 OVERVIEW OF UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARDS
6/2/06
Page 4-63
4.9.2
Connectors
NAME
CONSOLE
(J6A)
(1)
1
CONTACTS
DB9-M connector: hosts an operating console (TXA/

RXA) and a test console (TXC/RXC) through RS232
serial links.
Attention : For connection to a PC, do not
PRINTER
(J6B)
(1)
MUSIC
(J8B)
(1)
8


LAN port.
6/2/06
Pin 1: TXP
Pin 2: TXM
Pin 3: RXP
Pin 4: TLBR
Pin 5: TLBR
Pin 6: RXM
Pin 7: RLBR
Pin 8: RLBR

music-on-hold.
Pin 3: GNDL
Pin 4: MUSA
MUSA: Input impedance 15 KOhms.
Pin 5: ETM
MUSB: Input impedance 600 Ohms.
Pin 6: GNDL
Pin 7: MUSB
Pins 1 and 8: NC
Page 4-64
Pin 2: TXA
Pin 3: RXA
Pin 5: GNDL
Pin 6: RXC
Pin 7: GNDL
Pin 9: TXC
Pins 1, 4 and 8: NC

serial link.
Pin 1: TXB
Pin 2: RXB
Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
10/100-TX LAN
(J8A)
(1)

NAME
CONTACTS
(alarm input 3)
connection:
CONTROL
Pin
2: GND NAL[3]
(J9A)
(alarm
input 2)
(1)
Pin
3:
NAL[2]
(alarm input 1)
Pin
4: GND NAL[2]
1
13
(alarm input 0)
Pin 5: NAL[1]
25
14
Pin 6: GND NAL[1]
Pin 7: NAL[0]
Pin 8: GND NAL[0]
Pin 9: R4B
Pin 10: R4A
Pin 11: R3B
Pin 12: R3A
Pin 13: R2C
Pin 14: R2B
Pin 15: R2A
Pin 16: R1B
Pin 17: R1A
Pin 18: JP12 (+ 12 V)
Pin 19: GNDL
Pins 20 to 25 : NC
PARALLEL PORT
(J9B)
(1)
13
25
14
operations.
Pin 10: NACK
Pin 11: BUSY
Pin 12: PAPEND
Pin 13: SELECT
Pin 14: NAUTFD
Pin 15: NERROR
Pin 16: NPRINI
Pin 17: NSELIN
Pins 18 to 25: GNDL
J10
J29 and J30

Only on the UCT2C card

S/T0, S/T1, S/T2,
S/T3
(1)
Note :
Connecting S0 peripherals (S sets or

Pins 1 and 2: NC
Pin 3: EDX
Pin 4: RDX
Pin 5: NRDX
Pin 6: NEDX
Pins 7 and 8: NC
6/2/06
Page 4-65
NAME
LA0 to LA3
(1)
CONTACTS

Pin 4: LAX+
8
LN0 to LN3

Pin 4: LNX+
(1)
(2)
Table 4.18
DESCRIPTION OF UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
The UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards have 2 sets of 3 superimposed indicators; each indicator
can have 2 LEDs:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
LAN (green)
On

interface
Tx/Rx
(green/red)
Green flashing
Red flashing
On steady

Collision
Operating anomaly
RUN
(green)
On steady
Flashing
Operating problem
Card in operation
ALIM
On
Indicates mains presence and operation of the rectifier in the

cabinet power supply unit.
Slow flashing
Indicates mains failure and thus cabinet operation with the battery.
Abnormal operation.
Flashing rapidly
S.EXT
(green)
ON green
Off

MEVO
(2 green/red
LED)
Green flashing
ON green or OFF

ON red (and green LED

which continues
flashing)
Recording
Table 4.19
PRESENTATION OF UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARD INDICATORS
Page 4-66
6/2/06

PBX_MATRIX_XC_LED-UCT_FAV_01_01
S. EXT
RUN
ALIM
MEVO
LAN
Tx / Rx
Figure 4.29 PRESENTATION OF UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARD INDICATORS

Pushbuttons
4.9.3

The UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards have jumpers for configuring remote supply of the S/T0
to S/T3 accesses. These jumpers are plugged into connectors J29 and J30 on the front of
the UCT-C card. Depending on the position of the jumpers, the S/T0 to S/T3 accesses will
be either not remote supplied, supplied with 48V (DECT) and S sets) or 40 V (option) (see
Figure 4.24).
configuration of the T lines, S or DECT terminal,
By default the 4 S0/T0 accesses are configured without remote power supply.
6/2/06
Page 4-67
4.9.4

The following devices connected to the UCT1-C or UCT2-C card have the installation
details described in Section 5.6:
administration PC,
serial printer,
common bell,
alarm bell.
Interfaces LA0 to LA3 of the UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards have the same special
Interfaces LN0 to LN3 of the UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards have the same special
installation details as the LN16X card interfaces (see Section 4.13.4.5).
The S/T0, S/T1, S/T2 and S/T3 interfaces of the UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards have
installation details identical to those of the interfaces of the LD4 card for T accesses (see
Section 4.12.1.5) but are different for S accesses.
Attention :
The S/T accesses of the UCT1-C and UCT2-C cards are wired in T. To
connect S peripherals (S sets or DECT base stations), a twisted cable or S0/
T0 adaptor (see Figure 4.25) is therefore required.
The specifications for connecting DECT base stations to S interfaces on the UCT1-C/
UCT2-C cards are the same as those for the UCT1-S/UCT2-S cards (see Section 4.7.4).
Page 4-68
6/2/06

4.10
4.10.1
RUCT-L card
The RUCT-L card is installed instead of the UCT-L card in the expansion cabinet. Its
primary function is to distribute and monitor the status of the line equipment bus and PCM
synchronous trunks at the positions of the expansion cards. It contains an EEPROM
memory connected to the connection bus on the UCT-L card.
It includes a command interface for 14 equipment cards and 7 PCM trunks.
4.10.2
Connectors
NAME
Table 4.20
FEATURE
J1

and system bus
J2 (rear panel)

J3
Connector with 8 pins (HE14):

JTAG programming
CONTACTS
DESCRIPTION OF RUCT-L CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
The RUCT-L card has two indicators on the front panel:
"LINK" (green flashing): clock status received from the UCT-L,
"EQT. RUN" (green): access to one of the expansion cards of the current cabinet.
4.10.3

6/2/06
Page 4-69
4.10.4

The connection of an RUCT-L card to a UCT-L card requires a specific cable supplied with
the expansion cabinet ("Y" cable, HG4784).
J1
J2
RUCT 1L
PBX_MATRIX_XL_RUCT1L_FAV_01_02
LINK
EQT. RUN
PBX_MATRIX_XL_RUCT1L_COTE_01_01
J3
Figure 4.30 OVERVIEW OF THE RUCT-L CARD
Page 4-70
6/2/06

4.11
RUCT-S card
4.11.1
The RUCT-S card is installed instead of the UCT1-S or UCT2-S card in the expansion
cabinet. Its primary function is to distribute and monitor the status of the line equipment
bus and PCM synchronous trunks at the positions of the expansion cards. It contains an
EEPROM memory connected to the connection bus at the UCT1-S or UCT2- card.
It includes a command interface for 3 equipment cards and 7 PCM trunks for 3 equipment
cards (4 shared PCM trunks for the older cards and 3 full PCM trunks for the new C/S/L
NeXspan range cards).
4.11.2
Connectors
NAME
Table 4.21
FEATURE
J1A
J1B
J1C

and system bus
J1

Connection to the power supply module
J2

J3
Male connector with 8 pins (HE14):

JTAG programming
CONTACTS
DESCRIPTION OF RUCT-S CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
This card has no signalling indicator.
4.11.3

6/2/06
Page 4-71
4.11.4

The connection of an RUCT-S card to one UCT1-S or UCT2-S card requires a specific
cable supplied with the expansion cabinet (HG4862 cable).
Note : The basic cabinet does not have any internal connector for the inter-cabinet wire. Therefore,
the expansion ribbon (delivered with the expansion cabinet) must be connected to basic
cabinet.
J3
J1
PBX_MATRIX_XS_RUCT_COTE_01_01
J2
Figure 4.31 OVERVIEW OF THE RUCT-S CARD
Page 4-72
6/2/06

4.12
Application cards (CLX)
4.12.1
LD4 card
4.12.1.1 Description
This S0/T0 ISDN interface card is used to connect to ISDN terminals, DECT base stations
or an ISDN network.
The S0/T0 interface can be configured to supply:
one connection at reference point S0 to a terminal,
one connection at reference point T0 to the network.
These cards also handle packet-mode data transmission service on channel D between
the network and a terminal.
4.12.1.2 Functional description

The LD4 card is a card connecting to the base rate interface of the ISDN network. It
includes 4 line interfaces configurable individually in S0 or T0. There are two possible
configurations:
LD4 card without daughterboard: used to connect the PBX to the ISDN network or to
ISDN terminals. It is also used to connect 2-channel DECT base stations.
LD4 card fitted with one (ADPCM8 or ADPCM16) or two (ADPCM8) signal processing
daughterboards: used to connect 4-channel DECT base stations to one to four of its
interfaces (see the description of the ADPCM16 duaghter card in Section 4.12.1.6 );
the other interfaces can be connected to the ISDN network, ISDN terminals or 2channel DECT base stations.
Fitted with one or two daughterboards, the LD4 card uses the TSs assigned to 2 slots,
hence forbidding equipment sharing the same PCM in the associated slot (see
configuration rules in section 3.5).
The S0 interface can supply remotely the terminal connected to it. This function is
implemented through a dip-switch. The LD4 card can be configured to use:
the -48V trunk or,
on an XD or XL cabinet only, the ISDN 40V (optional) as remote supply voltage of the
S0 interfaces; the current is limited to 100 mA per interface.
The -48 V voltage is supplied by the backplane of the PBX whereas the ISDN
40 V voltage is connected through the J2 connector (on ST card) and S3 connector (on
RJ card).
The card also receives the +5 V supply voltage on the backplane connector (J1), used for
the operation of its internal circuits.
6/2/06
Page 4-73
5 10
SW8
1 6
M40V
SW7
M48V
SW1
J4
J3
ON
J5
ADAPT
SW5
J1
ADAPT
J8
1
Power Supply
Power Supply
CA1_1
ON
ADAPT
SW6
CA1_1
SW4
ON
1
Power Supply
J7
Power Supply
CA1_1
SW3
J6
ON
J2
J9
ADAPT
CA1_1
J3
SW8
SW7
J4
J6
SW6
SW1
J4
LD4 ST CARD
J2
SW4
ADAPT
SW5
J8
J1
J1
SW3
J7
J5
J2
CONSOLE
T
3
T
0
S
3
S
0
LD4 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LD4RJ_FAV_01_01
LD4 RJ CARD
LD4 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.32 OVERVIEW OF THE LD4 CARD
Page 4-74
6/2/06

4.12.1.3 Physical description

Connectors
NAME
J1
J2 (ST card)
2
1
J3
1
2
3
4
5
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
J4
CONTACTS
96-pin connector:
STOCKO male connector, 2 pins: receives the
ISDN 40 V remote supply voltage.
Pin 1: M40V
Pin 2: P40V
HE14 connector - 2 x 5 male pins partially not used
equipped.
HE14 connector -1 x 8 male pins, partially not used

equipped: used for loading programmable
components "On Site"
Two connectors AMP CMS 2 x 10 female pins:
host the ADPCM4V daughterboards.
J5 and J6
J7 and J8
8
STOCKO male connector, 8 pins: connection of Interface 0 (on J8):

the S0/T0 interfaces.
Pin 5: ED0
Pin 6: NED0
Pin 7: RD0
Pin 8: NRD0
(ST card)
Interface 1 (on J8):
Pin 1: ED1
Pin 2: NED1
Pin 3: RD1
Pin 4: NRD1
Pin 5: ED2
Pin 6: NED2
Pin 7: RD2
Pin 8: NRD2
J9
Table 4.22
Male 3-pin connector partially equipped.

Pin 1: ED3
Pin 2: NED3
Pin 3: RD3
Pin 4: NRD3
not used
DESCRIPTION OF THE LD4 CARD CONNECTORS (1/2)
6/2/06
Page 4-75
NAME
CONTACTS
console
(RJ card)
RJ45 -8 pin connectors: manufacturer reserved.
S0 to S2
(RJ card)
RJ45 -8 pin connectors:

connection to S0 interface.
S3
(RJ card)
RJ45 -8 pin connector: connection to S0 interface + ISDN (1)

40V remote supply voltage.
T0 to T2
(RJ card)

connection to T0 interface.
(1)
T3
(RJ card)
RJ45 -8 pin connector:

connection to T0 interface + ISDN 40 V remote supply
voltage (1) .
(1)
(1)
Table 4.22
(1)
See the detail of the connections in Table 4.23.

DESCRIPTION OF THE LD4 CARD CONNECTORS (2/2)
LINE NO.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 4.23
T3
E1
T1
PRI
M40 V
ED3
RD3
NRD3
NED3
ED2
RD2
NRD2
NED2
ED1
RD1
NRD1
NED1
ED0
RD0
NRD0
NED0
P40 V
S3
S2:
S1
S0
M40 V
RD3
ED3
NED3
NRD3
RD2
ED2
NED2
NRD2
RD1
ED1
NED1
NRD1
RD0
ED0
NED0
NRD0
P40 V
DETAILS OF THE S0/T0 CONNECTIONS OF THE LD4 RJ CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
NAME
CR2 (red)
Note :
Table 4.24
EXPLANATION
Card in service
For an RJ card, indicator not visible as not present on the front panel.
PRESENTATION OF THE LD4 CARD INDICATORS
Page 4-76
STATUS
Flashing rapidly
6/2/06

4.12.1.4 Hardware configuration

The ADAPT switches are used to adapt lines (factory setting, leave set to ON).
The CA2 microswitch (located on the copper side) is used to configure synchronisation
(T0) and master or slave mode (S0).
For LD4 in T0
MICROSWITCH CA2.1
EXPLANATION
ON
Leave set to ON position.

If the LD4 card is fitted in a synchronising slot, the ON position allows the
PBX to take the ISDN network clock as reference clock. In a nonsynchronising slot, CA1 has no effect.
Synchronising slots in an XD and XL cabinet are slots 1-00 to 1-05.
In an XS cabinet all positions are synchronising.
OFF
Do not set to the OFF position.

In OFF position, the ISDN clock is not taken as reference, whatever the
slots.
Table 4.25
CONFIGURATION OF THE CA2.1 MICROSWITCH ON THE LD4 CARD

For LD4 in S0 (for DECT BS)
EXPLANATION
MICROSWITCH CA2.2
LD4 master: Position not authorised.
Slave LD4: To be set to position E on all LD4 cards (LD4 card always slave).
Table 4.26
CONFIGURATION OF THE CA2.2 MICROSWITCH ON THE LD4 CARD

The SW1 jumper must be left in position 1-2 (factory reserved).
The jumpers SW3, SW4, SW5 and SW6 are used to enable remote power supply on each
interface when connecting a T0 interface:
SW3: Remote power supply for interface 3
The jumpers SW7, SW8 are used to select the 40V or 48V remote power supply.
SW7 AND SW8
40
48
40
48
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
POSITIONS
FEATURE
1-2
Selects the 48 V power supply.
2-3
Selects the 40 V power supply.
6/2/06
Page 4-77
4.12.1.5 Installation and wiring

Attention : Activating a card connected to an ISDN network requires specific
programming with the administration tool before the card can be used (see
section 1.3, Document [10]).
The LD4 card cannot be hot-plugged in a working PBX. The PBX must be powered off
before inserting the card.
This card must be connected using L904 - FTP cables (shielded twisted pairs), category
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
The cable referenced HG4731 is recommended for connecting RJ cards.
Connecting a T0 interface
One end of the connection cable must be fitted with an ISO 8877 compliant male RJ45
connector.
J7
1
4
J8
1
4
J9
1
J8
LD4N card
J10
1
NRD0
RD0
NED0
ED0
TNR
5
NRD1
RD1
NED1
ED1
NRD2
RD2
NED2
ED2
RTRT+
ETET+
NRD3
RD3
NED3
ED3
Figure 4.33 WIRING THE T0 INTERFACE OF AN LD4 ST CARD
Page 4-78
6/2/06

TNR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PBX MATRIX CARTE LAX-RJ CABLAGE-TO 01 01
ED
RD
NRD
NED
Figure 4.34 WIRING THE T0 INTERFACE OF AN LD4 RJ CARD

Connecting an S0 interface
The S0 bus is a shielded two-pair cable. Depending on the bus length and topology,
between one and eight female RJ45 connectors can be connected to it, for one ISDN/S0
(BRI) terminal.
Long bus (point to point)
T0
PBX
S0
connector 1
connector including the
bus adaptor resistors
(100 Ohms, 1/4W)
TNR
TE1
up to 800 m
Figure 4.35 WIRING AN S0 BUS
6/2/06
Page 4-79

Attention : Never invert the polarities of the clock and transmit/receive pairs.
Each terminal is connected to the ISDN S0 (BRI) interface of an LD4 card, and uses
2 pairs: 1 transmit pair and 1 receive pair (refer to document [12] (see section 1.3) for
more information).
If there are a DECT base station and an S0 terminal (other than the base station) on the
same card, the base station must be powered with a 40 V supply (available only on an XD
and XL cabinet).
,$#ARD
Figure 4.36 CONNECTING DECT BASE STATIONS TO AN LD4 ST CARD (SYNCHRO SIGNAL BY
3RD PAIR)
Whatever the synchronisation mode, ground the shielding or unused pairs to the cabinet.
Table 4.27
8-pin STOCKO connector
Pin 4 (NRD1)
Pin 6
Pin 3 (RD1)
Pin 3
Pin 2 (NED1)
Pin 5
Pin 1 (ED1)
Pin 4
S0 INTERFACE LINK (LD4 ST CARD) WITH A DECT BASE STATION
Page 4-80
6/2/06

RJ45
LD4
Figure 4.37 CONNECTING A DECT BASE STATION TO AN LD4 RJ CARD
Table 4.28
LD4 card RJ45 connector
Pin 6 (NRD)
Pin 6
Pin 3 (RD)
Pin 3
Pin 5 (NED)
Pin 5
Pin 4 (ED)
Pin 4
S0 INTERFACE LINK (LD4 RJ CARD) WITH A DECT BASE STATION
6/2/06
Page 4-81
4.12.1.6 Description of the signal processing daughterboard: ADPCM16

The ADPCM16 card provides the 32 kbit/s ADPCM encoding/decoding function that
enables multiple simultaneous calls on the same base station; it also provides echo
damping and cancellation functions.
ISDN interface cards (LD4, LD4N, LD4X) and UCT2-S/UCT2S-12/UCT2-C
daughterboards (fitted with four ISDN ports), which by default have the ADPCM encoding/
decoding function, can be fitted with an ADPCM16 card to increase the number of
channels per DECT base station: four channels per DECT base station when the
ADPCM16 card is available instead of four channels per base station without ADPCM16
card.
The ADPCM16 card is installed on connectors J5 and J6 of the ISDN interface cards
(LD4, LD4N and LD4X) as well as connectors J29 and J30 of UCT2-S, UCT2S-12 and
UCT2-C CPU cards.
MN2
MN5
M
Page 4-82
6/2/06

4.12.2
LD4N/LD4X card
This S0/T0 ISDN interface card is used to connect to ISDN terminals, DECT base stations
or an ISDN network.
one connection at reference point T0 to the network.
The LD4N and LD4X cards are physically identical (they have the same card reference).
The LD4X card is obtained from the LD4N card by removing a jumper (J14), and allows
the use of the following additional functions:
Since the LD4X uses the dedicated trunk of its slot, there are no longer any restrictions
on the location of the card.
The cards hardware information can be read through the MMC (presence of an
EEPROM on the LD4X card).
It is possible to declare up to10 LD4X cards of a NeXspan L.
It is possible to read the status of the LD4X cards remote power supply once the card
is in service.
Attention :The LD4X card is compatible only with software release 4.1 and later.

The LD4N/LD4X card is a card connecting to the base rate interface of the ISDN network.
It includes 4 line interfaces configurable individually in S0 or T0. There are 2 possible
configurations:
LD4N/LD4X card without daughterboard: used to connect the PBX to the ISDN
network or to ISDN terminals. It is also used to connect 2-channel DECT base stations.
LD4N/LD4X card fitted with an ADPCM16 signal processing daughterboard: used to
connect 4-channel DECT base stations to one to four of its interfaces (see the
description of the ADPCM16 duaghter card in Section 4.12.1.6 ); the other interfaces
can be connected to the ISDN network, ISDN terminals or 2-channel DECT base
stations.
Fitted with a daughterboard, the LD4N card (LD4N mode) uses the TSs assigned to 2
slots, hence forbidding equipment sharing the same PCM in the associated slot (see
configuration rules in Section 3.5 ). This is not the case for the LD4X card which uses the
dedicated trunk of its slot. There are no longer any conflicts between the cards. The
restrictions concerning the location of the LD4N card do not apply to the LD4X card.
6/2/06
Page 4-83
The S0 interface can supply remotely the terminal connected to it. This function is
implemented through a dip-switch. The LD4N/LD4X card can be configured to use:
the -48V trunk or,
on an XD or XL cabinet only, the ISDN 40V (optional) as remote supply voltage of the
S0 interfaces; the current is limited to 100 mA per interface.
The -48 V voltage is supplied by the PBX backplane.
ISDN 40 V is supplied only by the XL and XD PBX backplane and by external remote
power supply cards (not provided on the XS).
When not available on the PBX
backplane, it is connected via the J2 connector (ST card).
The card also receives the +5 V supply voltage on the backplane connector (J1), used for
the operation of its internal circuits.
Management of M bit channel by channel
For software releases before 3.2, the 4 equipment interfaces on the LD4N card generate
the M bit in the S frame every 800 ms (factory setting). This setting can be changed to 5
ms for particular ISDN applications (video conference, router) if the set of resistors on the
card (R91 and R67) are modified.
From release 3.2, operation at 5 or 800 ms is determined automatically. The LD4N card
has its accesses initialized channel by channel, depending on their configuration:
DECT M bit S frame: the interface generates the M bit in the S frame to the base
station every 800 ms.
DECT master base station, DECT slave base station or non-DECT S0 terminal: the
interface generates the M bit in the S frame to the base station every 5 ms. The slave
base station does not use this synchronization; it uses only the 800ms clock
transmitted by the master base station via the third pair.
Page 4-84
6/2/06

J14
1 2 3
J7
SW5
J4
J14
SW6
2 1
J7
J1-1 J2-1
J6
1
4
J8
1
J1-2 J2-2 RUN

DISA
J1
4
J9
J5
J1-3 J2-3
1 6
4
J10
J3
J11
1
J1-4 J2-4
5 10
CA1 HVAL
ON
1 2
CA1.1 = ON HVAL
CA1.1 = OFF H not validated
CA1.2 = not wired
LD4N ST CARD
J14
1 2 3
J14
SW5
J4
SW6
J1-1 J2-1
J6
J1
J1-2 J2-2
CA1 HVAL
J5
J1-3 J2-3
J1-4 J2-4
ON
CA1 HVAL
1 2
CA1.1 = ON HVAL
CA1.1 = OFF H non valide
CA1.2 = non cbl
LD4N RJ CARD
RST
NMI
OFF
T
3
T
0
S
3
S
0
RUN
LD4NX
Console
LD4N RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.38 OVERVIEW OF THE LD4N/LD4X CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-85

Connectors
NAME
J1
J2 (ST card)
J3 (ST card)
1
2
3
4
5
CONTACTS
96-pin connector:
STOCKO male connector, 2 pins: receives the
ISDN 40 V remote power supply when the latter is Pin 1: M40V
not available on the PBX backplane.
Pin 2: P40V
HE14 connector - 2 x 5 male pins, (debug not used

console, reserved for manufacturer).
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
J4
J5 and J6
J7 to J10 (ST card)

4
HE14 connector - 1 x 8 male pins: used for not used

loading programmable components "On Site"
(reserved for manufacturer).
Two connectors AMP CMS 2 x 10 female pins:
hosts an ADPCM16V daughterboard.
Caution: the ADPCM8V daughterboard is not
managed by the LD4N/LD4X card.
Four STOCKO male connectors, 4 pins: Interface 0 (on J7):
connection of the S0/T0 interfaces.
Pin 1: ED0
Pin 2: NED0
Pin 3: RD0
Pin 4: NRD0
Pin 1: ED1
Pin 2: NED1
Pin 3: RD1
Pin 4: NRD1
Pin 1: ED2
Pin 2: NED2
Pin 3: RD2
Pin 4: NRD2
Pin 1: ED3
Pin 2: NED3
Pin 3: RD3
Pin 4: NRD3
Male connector, 3 pins, (CPUTIME tool, reserved not used
for manufacturer).
J11
(ST card)
Table 4.29
DESCRIPTION OF LD4N/LD4X CARD CONNECTORS (1/2)
Page 4-86
6/2/06

NAME
CONTACTS
console
(RJ card)
RJ45 -8 pin connectors: debug console, reserved for

manufacturer.
S0 to S3
(RJ card)

connection to S0 interface.
(1)
T0 to T3
(RJ card)

connection to T0 interface.
(1)
(1)
Table 4.22
See the details of the connections in Table 4.30.

DESCRIPTION OF LD4N/LD4X CARD CONNECTORS (2/2)
LINE NO.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T3
ED3
RD3
NRD3
NED3
S3
RD3
ED3
NED3
NRD3
E1
ED2
RD2
NRD2
NED2
S2:
RD2
ED2
NED2
NRD2
T1
ED1
RD1
NRD1
NED1
S1
RD1
ED1
NED1
NRD1
PRI
ED0
RD0
NRD0
NED0
S0
RD0
ED0
NED0
NRD0
Attention : The ISDN 40V voltage is supplied by the XD and XL PBX backplane.
Table 4.30
DETAILS OF THE S0/T0 CONNECTIONS OF THE LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ CARD

CONNECTORS
Indicators
NAME
RUN (green)
OFF (orange)
Table 4.31
STATUS
Flashing rapidly
On
EXPLANATION
Card in service
Card can be removed while powered up
PRESENTATION OF THE LD4N/LD4X CARD INDICATORS

Note : Disable the card to hot unplug it.
Pushbuttons
an "RST" push-button used to reset the card
6/2/06
Page 4-87

Micro-switch CA1 (HVAL) is used to configure synchronisation (T0).
MICRO-SWITCH CA1 (HVAL)
EXPLANATION
ON
Leave set to ON position.

If the LD4N/LD4X card is fitted in a synchronising slot, the ON
position allows the PBX to take the ISDN network clock as reference
clock. In a non-synchronising slot, CA1 has no effect.
Synchronising slots in an XD or XL cabinet are slots 1-00 to 1-05.
In an XS cabinet all positions are synchronising.
OFF
Do not set to the OFF position.

In OFF position, the ISDN clock is not taken as reference, whatever
the slots.
Table 4.32
CONFIGURATION OF THE MICROSWITCH CA1 (HVAL) ON THE LD4N/LD4X CARD

Unlike LD4 cards, LD4N/LD4X cards do not have any Master/Slave microswitch for
DECT synchronisation. LD4N/LD4X cards are always slaves.
Jumpers J1_1, J1_2, J1_3 and J1_4 are used to enable the remote power supply
(40 V or 48 V) of each interface where an S0 interface is connected:
Attention : In T0, remove the jumpers (conflict between the 48V supplied by the
system and the 40V supplied by the public exchange).

- J1_1: Remote power supply for interface 0
Nota :
J2_1, J2_2, J2_3 and J2_4 are storage positions for jumpers.
Jumper J14 is used to select the (LD4N or LD4X) card's operating mode:
- leave the jumper in factory position 2-3 for an LD4N configuration.
- Place the jumper on 1-2 or remove the jumper for an LD4X configuration allowing
the use of additional functions.
A jumper placed on SW5 or SW6 is used to select the 40V or 48V remote power
supply.
- A jumper placed on SW5 (factory position) is used to select the 48V power supply.
- A jumper placed on SW6 is used to select the 40V power supply.
Note : The LD4N/LD4X (ST and RJ) card has no microswitch for downloading the flash memory
with a BOF3 type tool (automatic detection).
Page 4-88
6/2/06


The LD4N/LD4X card can be hot plugged/unplugged in an XL PBX, a reckable XS PBX,
or a working, rackable XS12 PBX.
Avertissement :

PBX.
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
Connecting a T0 interface
One end of the connection cable must be fitted with an ISO 8877 compliant male RJ45
connector.
J7
1
4
J8
1
4
J9
1
J8
LD4N card
J10
1
NRD0
RD0
NED0
ED0
TNR
5
NRD1
RD1
NED1
ED1
NRD2
RD2
NED2
ED2
RTRT+
ETET+
NRD3
RD3
NED3
ED3
Figure 4.39 WIRING THE T0 INTERFACE OF AN LD4N ST/LD4X ST CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-89
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ED
RD
NRD
NED
PBX MATRIX CARTE LAX-RJ CABLAGE-TO 01 01
TNR
Figure 4.40 WIRING THE T0 INTERFACE OF AN LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ CARD

Connecting an S0 interface
The S0 bus is a shielded two-pair cable. Depending on the bus length and topology,
between one and eight female RJ45 connectors can be connected to it, for one ISDN/S0
(BRI) terminal.
Long bus (point to point)
T0
PBX
S0
connector 1
connector including the
bus adaptor resistors
(100 Ohms, 1/4W)
TNR
TE1
up to 800 m
Figure 4.41 WIRING AN S0 BUS
Page 4-90
6/2/06


Attention : Never invert the polarities of the clock and transmit/receive pairs.
Each terminal is connected to the ISDN S0 (BRI) interface of an LD4N/LD4X card, and
uses 2 pairs: 1 transmit pair and 1 receive pair (refer to document [12] (see section 1.3)
for more information).
If there are a DECT base station and an S0 terminal (other than the base station) on the
same card, the base station must be powered with a 40 V supply (available only on the
XD and XL cabinets).
SYNCHRO
J7
J8
LD4N card
Idem
J9
J10
Figure 4.42 CONNECTING DECT BASE STATIONS TO AN LD4N ST/LD4X ST CARD (SYNCHRO
SIGNAL BY 3RD PAIR)
Whatever the synchronisation mode, ground the shielding or unused pairs to the cabinet.
Table 4.33
4-pin STOCKO connector
Pin 4 (NRD0)
Pin 6
Pin 3 (RD0)
Pin 3
Pin 2 (NED0)
Pin 5
Pin 1 (ED0)
Pin 4
S0 INTERFACE LINK (LD4N ST/LD4X ST CARD) WITH A DECT BASE STATION
6/2/06
Page 4-91
RJ45
LD4
Figure 4.43 CONNECTING A DECT BASE STATION TO AN LD4N RJ CARD/LD4X RJ
Table 4.34
LD4N card RJ45 connector
Pin 6 (NRD)
Pin 6
Pin 3 (RD)
Pin 3
Pin 5 (NED)
Pin 5
Pin 4 (ED)
Pin 4
S0 INTERFACE LINK (LD4N RJ/LD4X RJ CARD) WITH A DECT BASE STATION
Page 4-92
6/2/06

4.12.3
LT2 card
The LT2 card is a card providing access to the digital network. It provides connection:
either to the primary rate interface of a European ISDN network (E1, 32 TSs) or a US
type ISDN network (T1, 24 TSs),
or to PCM digital links channel by channel, which can be used to provide tie line links
with another private installation.
one connection at reference point T2 to the network
4.12.3.2 Functional description (see Figure 4.32)

The LT2 card provides the following functions:
interface with one ISDN primary rate interface consisting essentially in:
- aligning frames between the internal PCM link TSs and B channels (30 or 23
according to the type: E1 or T1) at 64 kbit/s of a primary ISDN link,
- inserting and extracting call status signals over the D channel of the ISDN link,
PCM lines interface (up to 32 channels) consisting mainly in:
- aligning frames between the internal PCM links and the external PCM links,
- inserting and extracting call status signals, PCM channel by PCM channel,
management of indicators showing the status of frames and calls,
power supply: the LT2 card also receives on the backplane connector (J1) the +5 V
supply voltage, used for the operation of its internal circuits.
6/2/06
Page 4-93
ON
CA6
ON
ON
ON
CA4
CA3
J4
1
CA2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J2
J1
1 2 3 4 5
ON
CA5
ON
CA7
1
J3
1 2 3 4 5
5
ON
2
4
6
7
8
CA8
9
10
LT2 ST CARD
J4
J7
Console
RUN
BIER BLER
RAI
LOF
CRCE
AIS
LOS
ER
COM
E1/T1
LT2 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LT2X_FAV_01_01
LT2 RJ CARD
LT2 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.44 OVERVIEW OF THE LT2 CARD
Page 4-94
6/2/06

4.12.3.3 Physical description (see Figure 4.36)

Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 and J3
Not used
J4 (ST card)
ISDN or PCM line connection Stocko connector:

(transmit and receive pair)
Pins 1 and 2: to transmit pair (TNL)
1 : EMICP
2 : EMICN
Pins 4 and 5: to receive pair (TNL)
4 : RMICP
5 : RMICN
Pins 3 and 6: NTPIN, TPIN
Nota : If an operation problem occurs, reverse

the wires on the 6 pin Stocko cable:
1 to 6
2 to 5
3 to 4
4 to 3
5 to 2
pin 6 to pin 1.
E1/T1 (RJ card)
console
(RJ card)
Table 4.35
11
ISDN or PCM line connection RJ45 -8pin connector:

(transmit and receive pair)
Pins 1 and 2: to transmit pair (TNL)
1 : EMICP
2 : EMICN
Pins 4 and 5: to receive pair (TNL)
4 : RMICP
5 : RMICN
Pins 3 and 6: NTPIN, TPIN
Pins 7 and 8: NTPOUT, TPOUT
RJ45 connector:
manufacturer reserved.
DESCRIPTION OF LT2 CARD CONNECTORS
6/2/06
Page 4-95
Indicators
The indicators described in the following table indicate the operating status of the calls
and frames:
INDICATOR
RUN (yellow)
COM (green)
STATE
Flashing rapidly
Off
On steady
Flashing
EXPLANATION
Card being used
Call status:
No signalling over channel D and no ongoing call
At least one ongoing call
Presence of signalling on channel D but no ongoing
call (level 2 established)
Status of the frames:
Table 4.36
LOS (red)
On
Loss Of Synchronisation
LOF (red)
On
Loss Of Frame
AIS (red)
On
Alarm Indication Signal
RAI (red)
On
Remote Alarm Indication (sent by the remote unit to

indicate a local alarm)
ER (red)
On
Multi-frame alignment loss
BLER (red)
On
BLock ERror (no incoming signal)
CRCE (red)
On
Frame errors detected for over 50 ms
BIER (red)
On
Wrong E bit detected for over 50 ms
PRESENTATION OF LT2 CARD INDICATORS

Pushbuttons
The SW1 and SW2 push buttons accessible on ST cards are used only at the factory.
Page 4-96
6/2/06


The LT2 card has several configuration switches, described in the following tables.
The CA8 microswitch configures the operating mode, i.e. ISDN (T2/S2) or PCM.
CA8.1
CA8.2
CA8.3
CA8.4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CA8 SWITCH
1
4
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Table 4.37
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PCM TYPE
LT2 card used in T2-S2 mode.*
at 2 Mbps (factory setting)
ON
PCM PRI E1 (SF) 0 dB

ISDN T1 at 1.544 Mbps
(export)
ON
PCM PRI (SF) 7.5 dB

(export)
ON
PCM PRI (SF) 15 dB

(export)
ON
Extended PCM PRI (ESF) 0 dB

ISDN T1 at 1,544 Mbps
(export)
ON
Extended PCM PRI (ESF) 7.5 dB

(export)
ON
Extended PCM PRI (ESF) 15 dB

(export)
ON
PCM (SF) 0 dB
PCM T1 at 1.544 Mbps
(export)
ON
PCM (SF) 7.5 dB

(export)
ON
PCM (SF) 15 dB
(export)
ON
Extended PCM (ESF) 0 dB

(export)
Represents the microswitch.
CONFIGURATION OF MICROSWITCH CA8 ON THE LT2 CARD (1/2)
6/2/06
Page 4-97
CA8.1
CA8.2
CA8.3
CA8.4
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
CA8 SWITCH
1
OFF
ON
PCM TYPE
ON
Extended PCM (ESF) 7.5 dB

(export)
ON
Extended PCM (ESF) 15 dB

(export)
PCM E2 (32TS) 2 Mbps
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ISDN T2.E1 T2/S2 2 Mbps

16TS
not used
* Use of T2 or S2 is validated with the administration tool.

*
TABLE 4.37
CONFIGURATION OF MICROSWITCH CA8 ON THE LT2 CARD (2/2)
Page 4-98
6/2/06

Microswitches CA5 and CA7 are used to configure the line coding, remote alarms, and
distances.
CA5.1
CA5.2 CA5.3
CA5.4
CA5 SWITCH
OFF
4
ON
ON
4
ON
OFF
PCM TYPE
Line coding = B8ZS
(Binary 8 zero suppression)
Line coding = AMI
(Alternate Mark Inversion)
Remote alarm = type A
4
ON
ON
Remote alarm = type B
4
ON
OFF
4
ON
ON
Reception level = 6 dB
(factory setting)
Reception level = 18 dB
4
ON
OFF
Synchronisation with the PCM clock possible
4
ON
ON
4
ON
Table 4.38
Synchronisation with the PCM clock not

possible
CONFIGURATION OF THE CA5 MICROSWITCH ON THE LT2 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-99
CA7.1
CA7.2
CA7.3
CA7.4
CA7 SWITCH
OFF
4
ON
ON
PCM TYPE
24 TS PCM in ANSI T1 mode
(factory setting)
24 TS PCM in CCITT mode
4
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
4
ON
OFF
ON
ON
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Rated transmission level

(factory setting)
Line length = 0-35 m
(0-3,505.20 cm)
(82-6,492.24 cm)
(180-312 ft)
Line length = 115-155 m (377-15,514.32 cm)
4
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Line length = 145-185 m (476-607 ft)
4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Line length = 175-210 m (574-21,000.72 cm)
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
Line length = -18 db
4
ON
Table 4.39
Page 4-100 6/2/06

Microswitches CA6, CA3 and CA2 are used to configure line impedance.
CA6.1
CA6.2
CA3.1
CA3.2
CA2.1
CA2.2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SWITCH
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CA2
ON
OFF
1
CA6
Table 4.40
2
OFF
ON
CA3
OFF
2
75 (E1)
ON
1
2
CA6
OFF
CA2
ON
OFF
2
OFF
ON
ON
CA3
OFF
OFF
OFF
CA6
100 (T1)
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
LINE
IMPEDANCE
OFF
120 (E1)
ON
1
2
OFF
CA3
CA2
CONFIGURATION OF THE CA6, CA3 AND CA2 MICROSWITCHES ON THE

LT2 CARD
The CA4 microswitch is used to configure the clock and switch the card to programming
mode.
CA4.1
CA4.2
OFF
OFF
SWITCH
MODE
Clock signal not used
2
1
ON
ON
OFF
Normal mode - Clock signal used

(factory setting)
2
1
ON
ON
Programming mode
2
1
ON
Table 4.41
6/2/06
Page 4-101

The LT2 card cannot be hot-plugged in a working PBX. The PBX must be powered off
Each end of the L904-120 Ohm FTP connection cable (shielded twisted pairs), category
5, must be fitted with ISO 8877 compliant male RJ45 connectors. One end must be
connected to the PBX ground or the telephone shielding.
Note :
Shield
J4
Transmit pair
at network termination
Shield
LT2 card
Recepive pair
at network termination
Figure 4.45 WIRING AN ST LT2 CARD
Page 4-102 6/2/06

4.12.4
PT2 card
4.12.4.1 Presentation
The PT2 card provides both a "TCP/IP internal buses" gateway function for signalling
and a "voice over IP" gateway function. It is used for connection to an Ethernet 10/
100 Mbits Base TX LAN socket, in compliance with IEEE 802.3 specifications.
It is able to manage 8, 16 or 32 VoIP gateway channels, with the addition of an optional
VoIP daughterboard performing speech signal processing tasks.

The PT2 card mainly provides the following functions:
gateway between an Ethernet LAN and the internal buses of the PBX used to
exchange data between the main card memory and an Ethernet LAN,
tunnelling function, used for PBX networking, using an IP network as a medium for the
signalling channel,
the Voice over IP (VoIP) gateway function, which uses the VOIP4-8, VOIP4E-16, or
VOIP4E- 32 daughterboard to manage 8, 16, or 32 Voice over IP circuits, for:
- speech compression and encoding to the G723.1 or G729A standard or with no
encoding (G711),
- relaying (detection and generation) of fax tones at 2100 Hz and transfer of DTMF
codes,
- fax modulation and demodulation (rates between 2400 and 14400 bit/s), according
to a priority mechanism, in transparent mode (bypass in G711), and electric echo
cancellation (G.165).
Attention : A multi-site link cannot mix a VOIP4E (HotHaus) card in conjunction with a
VOIP2 (Audiocodes) card.

power supply: the PLT2 card also receives on the backplane connector (J1) the +5 V
supply voltage, used for the operation of its internal circuits.
6/2/06
Page 4-103
J3
J4
J7
J1
J6
SW2 SW1
J2
NRA
RUN
RX
TX
LINK
COL
CA1
ON
PROG
J5
FLASH
PT2 ST CARD
1
1
9
J8
J7
J1
J6
CA1
ON
PROG
FLASH
RST
Console
NMI
ANR
COL
TX
RUN
LINK
RX
LAN
10/100-TX
PT2X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_PT2X_FAV_01_01
PT2 RJ CARD
PT2 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.46 OVERVIEW OF THE PT2 CARD
Page 4-104 6/2/06


Connectors
NAME
J1
CONTACTS
96-pin connector:
J2 (ST card) or LAN RJ45 connector:

10/100-TX (RJ card)
An RJ45 connector can be used to connect a
LAN port compatible with the 10 Base T or 100
Base TX standards and compliant with IEEE
specification 802.
Pin 1: TPTX+
Pin 2: TPTXPin 3: TPRX+
Pin 6: TPRXPins 4, 5, 7, and 8: NC
11
Console (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
J3
HE14 2 x 5-pin connector:

connecting a VT100 console or a PC (debug)
not used
J4
HE14 connector 1 x 8 pins:

loading programmable components "on site"
not used
J5
not used
HE14 connector 2 x 6 pins:
connecting an emulator or a JTAG test tool
(debug)
1
2
3
4
5
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
J6 and J7
21
40
20
Table 4.42
2 x 40 pin and 2 x 20 pin connectors: location of

the VOIP4E daughterboard.
DESCRIPTION OF PT2 CARD CONNECTORS
6/2/06
Page 4-105
Indicators
The six LEDs described in the table below show the operating state of the card:
INDICATOR
STATE
EXPLANATION
COL (green)
On
Ethernet collision
LINK (green)
On
Status of the Ethernet link:

Good link with the Ethernet switch
TX (green)
On
LAN transmitting
RX (green)
On
LAN receiving
RUN (green)
Flashing slowly
Flashing rapidly
Card downloading status:

Loading software
Card in operation
ANR (red) RJ card

NRA (red) ST card
On
Internal failure detected
Table 4.43
PRESENTATION OF THE PT2 CARD INDICATORS

This VoIP card has no signalling indicator.
Pushbuttons
The SW1 and SW2 push buttons accessible on ST cards are used only at the factory.
The front panel of the RJ card includes:
an "RST" push-button used to reset the card (manufacturer reserved),
an "NMI" push-button used for an non maskable interruption of the processor
(manufacturer reserved).

The PT2 card has a CA1 configuration microswitch.
DESIGNATION
CONFIGURATION (1)
Operating mode:
normal mode
CA1 on OFF
programming mode (programming the flash memory using the CA1 on ON
programming tool card)
(1)
Table 4.44
Factory delivery configuration in bold characters

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE PT2 CARD
Page 4-106 6/2/06


Attention : Specific programming with the administration tool is required to declare and
start this card before it can be used (see section 1.3, Document [4]).
The PT2 card cannot be hot-plugged in a working PBX. The PBX must be powered off
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
The PBX is connected to the Ethernet LAN by plugging the RJ45 connector of the PT2
card into an available LAN socket, as shown in the diagram below:
RJ45
SW1
LAN socket
SW2
PT2 card
NRA
RUN
RX
TX
LINK
COL
Figure 4.47 WIRING FOR A PT2 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-107
4.12.5
CS1 card
The CS1 card enables two X.25 synchronous interfaces to be connected in V28 or V10
mode.
DTE-P
PSTN
(PSTN/ISDN/X25)
synchronous serial link

type: "HDLC LOCAL"
DCE
PBX
DCE
CS1
DCE
DTE-C
DCE
DCE
DTE
DCE
CS1
system
DCE
DCE
DCE
synchronous serial link

type: "TRANSPAC"
CA1
asynchronous serial link

type: "PAD"
Figure 4.48 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF A CS1 OR CA1 CARD BUILT INTO A PBX
Page 4-108 6/2/06

3 2 1
AB
J2
6
SW1
3 2 1
J1
CR2
CR1
SW2
AB
J3
CS1 ST CARD
3 2 1
AB
J2
6
SW1
3 2 1
J1
SW2
CR2
CR1
AB
J3
SYNCHRONOUS PORT 1
SYNCHRONOUS PORT 0
CS1 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_CS1-RJ_FAV_01_01
CS1 RJ CARD
CS1 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.49 OVERVIEW OF THE CS1 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-109

4.12.5.3 Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin
connector:
connection
J2 (ST card)
CONTACTS
backplane
Connecting equipment 0
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3 (ST card)
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
6
SYNCHRONOUS
PORT 1 (RJ card)
(front view)
SYNCHRONOUS
PORT 2 (RJ card)
(front view)
Table 4.45
DESCRIPTION OF CS1 CARD CONNECTORS

(1) J2 and J3 connectors: the contacts on these connectors are described in Table
4.46.
(2)
SYNCHRONOUS connectors: the contacts on these connectors are described in

Table 4.47.
Page 4-110 6/2/06

CONTACT
FEATURE
CONTACT
FEATURE
A1
TD (Transmitted data)
B1
XTC (Clock signal sent)
A2
RD (Received data)
B2
Not wired
A3
DTR (Data Terminal Ready output)
B3
RTS
(Flow control output)
A4
CTS (flow control input)
B4
CD (Data terminal input)
A5
GND (0 V for junction outputs)
B5
RET (0 V return for junction input, with

V10)
A6
RC (Clock received for received data)
B6
TC (Clock received for transmitted data)
Table 4.46
Table 4.47
CONTACTS OF CONNECTORS J2 - J3 ON THE CS1 CARD

PIN NO.
CONTACT
FEATURE
TD
Transmitted data
RD
Received data
CTS
Flow control input
DTR
Data Terminal Ready output
GND
0 V return for junction output
CD
Signal presence input
15
XTC
Clock signal sent
17
TC
20
RTS
Flow control output
24
CR
Clock received for received data
Clock re ceived for received data
CONTACTS OF THE SYNCHRONOUS CONNECTORS ON THE CS1 CARD

Indicators
NAME
EXPLANATION
CR1 (red)
On steady
Incorrect operation
CR2 (red)
Flashing rapidly
Card in service
Note :
Table 4.48
STATUS
For an RJ card, indicators not visible as absent on the front panel.
PRESENTATION OF CS1 CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-111

The SW1 and SW2 microswitches are used to select V10 or V28 mode.
Table 4.49
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
CONNECTOR
MICROSWITCHES
J2
SW1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J3
SW2
3 2 1
3 2 1
V10 MODE
V28 MODE
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE CS1 CARD

The shielded serial link cable with the reference HG2830 (for ST card) and HG4660 (for
RJ card) are used to wire the interfaces on the CS1 card. The following tables give a list of
the circuits in the V24 junction on the CS1 card.
V24 SIGNAL NAME
CS1 CARD
CONNECTORS
CCITT
EIA
CS1*
DTE
ISO 2110
(25 PINS)
104
RD
RD
NDE
<---
A1
Received data
103
ED
ST/TD
NDR
--->
A2
Transmitted data
108
TDP
DTR
DTR
20
<---
B4
card present output
106
PAE
CTS
CTS
--->
B3
20
flow control input
102
TS
GND
SGND
--->
A5
0 V return for junction

output
115
HRM
CR
HR
15-17
--->
B6
17
clock received for received

data
24
--->
A6
24
clock signal sent
CIRCT
113
XTC
DIRECTION
CS1->DTE
J2 / J3
ST card
Port1/
Port 2
RJ card
B2
FEATURE
not wired
105
DPE
RTS
RTS
<---
A4
flow control output
109
DS
CD
CD
6-8
<---
A3
terminal present input
RET
HT
15
114
HEM
Table 4.50
TC
B5
--->
B1
0 V for junction input (with

V10)
15
clock received for data

transmitted
CONNECTING A DCE (CS1) TO A DTE
Page 4-112 6/2/06

V24 SIGNAL NAME

CIRC
T
CS1 CARD
CONNECTORS
DCE
DIRECTION
ISO 2110
CS1-->DCE J2 / J3
(25 PINS)
ST card
FEATURE
Port1/
Port 2
RJ card
CCITT
EIA
CS1
104
RD
RD
NDE
<---
A2
Received data
103
ED
ST/TD
NDR
--->
A1
Transmitted data
108
TDP
DTR
DTR
20
--->
A3
card present output
106
PAE
CTS
CTS
<---
A4
flow control input
102
TS
GND
SGND
--->
A5

outputs
115
HRM
CR
HR
17
<----
A6
24
clock received for received

data
24
--->
B1
15
clock signal sent
113
XTC
B2
not wired
105
DPE
RTS
RTS
--->
B3
20
flow control output
109
DS
CD
CD
<---
B4
RET
--->
B5
HT
15
<----
B6
114
HEM
Table 4.51
4.12.6
TC

V10)
17
clock received for data

transmitted
CONNECTING A DTE (CS1) TO A DCE
CA1 card
The CA1 card is used to connect V24 computer terminals (DTE or DCE) (see Figure 4.48)
in V10 or V28 mode (RS232C). It is fitted with 4 RS232 ports used to connect 4
asynchronous terminals for data transmission (max speed 19200 bit/s). XON/XOFF flow
control is used.
Note :
The V24/V10 interface is compatible with V24/V28 (RS232C) equipment.
See the operating principle of a CA1 card built into a PBX (Figure 4.48).
6/2/06
Page 4-113
3 2 1
AB
J2
SW1
3 2 1
SW2
AB
J3
J1
CR2
CR1
3 2 1
AB
SW3
J4
3 2 1
AB
J5
SW4
CA1 ST CARD
3 2 1
AB
J2
SW1
3 2 1
SW2
AB
J3
J1
3 2 1
CR2
CR1
AB
SW3
J4
3 2 1
6
1
AB
J5
SW4
TE3
TE2
TE1
TE0
CA1 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_CA1-RJ_FAV_01_01
CA1 RJ CARD
CA1 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL
Figure 4.50 OVERVIEW OF THE CA1 CARD

Page 4-114 6/2/06


Connectors
NAME
J1
J2 to J5 (ST card)
1
2
3
4
5
96-pin connector: backplane connection
AB
AB
1
2
3
4
5
CONTACTS
(1)
Connecting equipment items 0 to 3
(1)
Connecting equipment items 0 to 3
(2)
TE0 to TE3 (RJ card)
Table 4.52
(1)
(2)
CONTACT
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Table 4.53
PIN NO. *
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 4.54
DESCRIPTION OF CA1 CARD CONNECTORS

Connectors J2 to J5: the contacts on these connectors are described in Table 4.53.
Connectors TE0 to TE3: the contacts of these RJ 45 connectors are described in
Table 4.54.
FEATURE
TD (transmitted data)
RD (received data)
DTR (Data Terminal Ready output)
CTS (flow control input)
GND (0 V return for junction output)
CONTACT
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
FEATURE
not wired
not wired
RTS (flow control output)
CD (data terminal input)
RET (0 V return for junction input, with V10)
CONTACTS OF CONNECTORS J2 - J5 ON THE CA1 CARD

LINE NO.
TE2
TE1
TD2
TD1
GND
GND
RD2
RD1
RET2
RET1
DTR2
DTR1
CTS2
CTS1
RTS2
RTS1
CD2
CD1
TE3
TD3
GND
RD3
RET3
DTR3
CTS3
RTS3
CD3
TE0
TD0
GND
RD0
RET0
DTR0
CTS0
RTS0
CD0
FEATURE
Transmitted data
0 V return for junction output
Received data
0V return for junction input (V10)
Data Terminal Ready output
Flow control input
Flow control output
Data terminal input
DESCRIPTION OF CA1 CARD CONNECTORS TE0 - TE3

Indicators
NAME
CR1 (red)
CR2 (red)
Note :
STATUS
On steady
Flashing rapidly
EXPLANATION
Incorrect operation
Card in service
For an RJ card, indicators not visible as absent on the front panel.
6/2/06
Page 4-115
Table 4.55
PRESENTATION OF THE CA1 CARD INDICATORS

Switches SW1, SW2, SW3, and SW4 are used to set V10 or V28 mode.
Table 4.56
EQUIPMENT
NUMBER
CONNECTOR
SWITCH
V10 MODE
V28 MODE
J2
SW1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J3
SW2
3 2 1
3 2 1
J4
SW3
3 2 1
3 2 1
J5
SW4
3 2 1
3 2 1
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE CA1 CARD
Page 4-116 6/2/06


The following tables give a list of the circuits in the V24 junction on the CA1 card. The
cable, with reference HG2829 (for ST card) and HG4659 (for RJ card), is used to wire the
interfaces on the CA1 card.
DESIGNATION
DTE
CIRC
T
CCITT
EIA
CA1
9-PIN
25PIN
104
103
108
106
RD
ED
TDP
PAE
RD
ST/TD
DTR
CTS
NDE
NDR
DTR
CTS
2
3
4
8
3
2
20
5
102
TS
GND
SGND
105
109
DPE
DS
RTS
CD
Note :
Table 4.57
RTS
CD
7
1-6
4
6-8
RET
CONNECTORS
CA1 CARD
DIRECTION
CA1->DTE J2 TO J5 TE0 to
TE3:
ST card
RJ card
--->
A1
1
<--A2
3
<--B4
8
--->
B3
7
<---
A5
<----->
B1
B2
A4
A3
6
5
B5
FEATURE
Received data
Transmitted data
card present output
flow control input
output
not wired
not wired
flow control output
V10)
Circuit 107 Data set ready (PDP or DSR) is not present on the CA1 card. The
straps are not shown in this table.
CONNECTING A DCE (CA1) TO A DTE (PC OR VT100 CONSOLE)
6/2/06
Page 4-117
DESIGNATION
CIRCT
CONNECTORS
CA1 CARD
DIRECTION
FEATURE
TE0 to
CA1->DCE J2 TO J5
TE3:
9-PIN 25-PIN
ST card
RJ card
2
3
<--A2
3
Received data
3
2
--->
A1
1
Transmitted data
--->
4
20
A3
5
card present output
DCE
CCITT
EIA
CA1
104
103
RD
ED
RD
ST/TD
NDE
NDR
108
TDP
DTR
DTR
106
PAE
CTS
CTS
102
TS
GND
SGND
105
DPE
RTS
RTS
109
DS
CD
CD
RET
Note :
Table 4.58
<----->
--->
<---
A4
A5
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
7
8
4
flow control input

output
not wired
not wired
flow control output
0 V for junction input
(with V10)
Circuit 107 Data set ready (PDP or DSR) is not present on the CA1 card. The
straps are not shown in this table.
CONNECTING A DTE (CA1) TO A DCE (MODEM OR V24 ADAPTER)
Page 4-118 6/2/06

4.12.7
CP1 card
The CP1 card carries out circuit/packet switching, for X.25 protocol, used to transmit data
in packet mode in a B channel of a Numris link
1 2 3
SW1
AB
J2
J1
CR1
CR2
CP1 ST CARD
1 2 3
SW1
AB
J2
J1
CR1
CR2
CP1 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_CP1-RJ_FAV_01_01
CP1 RJ CARD
CP1 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.51 OVERVIEW OF THE CP1 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-119

Connectors
The connector J2 is reserved for factory tests.
This card has no external connections.
Indicators
NAME
EXPLANATION
CR1 (red)
On steady
Incorrect operation
CR2 (red)
Flashing rapidly
Card in service
Note :
Table 4.59
STATUS
For an RJ card, indicators located on the card circuit and not on the front panel.
PRESENTATION OF THE CP1 CARD INDICATORS

This card has no configuration microswitch.

This card has no external connections.
4.12.8
MUM card
Voice/Fax multiplexer/demultiplexer card, used to multiplex/demultiplex several calls
between 2 sites of an M6500 network on:
a call set up over the ISDN public network,
a Transfix lease line at 64 or 128 kb/s

The MUM card can be used in three different ways:
as a single multiplexer (8 channels to 1) to a remote site through a lease line (type
Transfix),
as a single multiplexer (7 channels to 1) to a remote site on the ISDN public network,
as a double multiplexer (3 channels to 1) to two remote sites on the ISDN public
network.
Page 4-120 6/2/06

CA1
1
RAZ
ON
TRANSFIX
NMI
J3
DEBUG
J1
AB
1
2
3
4
5
6
J2
4
1
JTAG
AB
J4
MUM ST CARD
CA1
2
RAZ
ON
TRANSFIX
NMI
J1
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
DEBUG
AB
J2
4
1
JTAG
AB
J4
RST
SYNC SERIAL
WAN INTERFACE
MUM X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_MUM-RJ_FAV_01_01
RUN
MUM RJ CARD
MUM RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.52 OVERVIEW OF THE MUM CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-121

Connectors
NAME
J1
J2 (ST card)
1
2
3
4
5
6
96-pin connector: backplane connection
Connector HE14 2 x 6-pin male connector:

Connection to a QSIG private point-to-point link (X24/
V11)
AB
AB
CONTACTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3 (ST card)
not used
STOCKO 4-pin male
J4 (ST card)
5
4
3
2
1
AB
HE14 2 x 5 pin connector
Pin 1: screen
Pin 2: Ta (TD+)
Pin 3: Ca to be looped with
5
Pin 4: Ra (RD+)
Pin 5: La
Pin 6: Sa (CLK+)
DB15 connector:
Pin 7: NC
Connection to a QSIG private point-to-point link (X24/ Pin 8: GND
Pin 9: Tb (TD-)
V11)
Pin 10: Cb to be looped
with 12
Pin 11: Rb (RD -)
Pin 12: Lb
Pin 13: Sb (CLK-)
Pin 14: NC
Pin 15: NC
Sync Serial Wan

Interface (RJ card)
Table 4.60
not used
DESCRIPTION OF MUM CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
Table 4.61
NAME
STATUS
RUN
Flashing
EXPLANATION
Card operating normally
PRESENTATION OF MUM CARD INDICATORS

Push buttons
The front panel of the RJ card includes:
an "RST" push-button used to reset the card (reserved manufacturer).
Page 4-122 6/2/06


The hardware configuration of the MUM card is described in Document [13]
(see section 1.3).

The installation details for the MUM card are described in Document [13]
(see section 1.3).
Note :
The cable references are HG4600A (ST card) and HG4601A (RJ card).
6/2/06
Page 4-123
4.13
Equipment cards
4.13.1
LA16X card
The LA16X card is used to connect 16 analogue set lines to a PBX.

The LA16X card mainly ensures:
transmission of the status and command signals between the UCT card and each
analogue set:
- the commands for analogue sets: for each connection a ring signal command
supplied by the UCT card authorises passage of the current to the analogue set
connected,
- the statuses from the analogue sets (on/off hook detection),
voice transmission and conversion:
- in digital form, from the UCT card to the analogue sets,
Each of the 16 PCM TSs exchanged with the UCT card is the medium for the voice
carried over the line of an analogue set,
- in analogue form, from the analogue sets to the UCT card,
X
This transformation uses parameters for converting digital signals into analogue
signals, and analogue signals into digital signals.
These parameters stored initially in the UCT card are loaded into the memory of
the LA16X card when the latter is started.
a power supply function: the LA16X card receives the following on the backplane
connector (J1):
- +5 V, -5 V used for the operation of its internal circuits,
-
-48 V used to supply the analogue set lines,
- 70 V AC of the ringing current for each of the analogue sets connected.
Page 4-124 6/2/06

J1
J8
J9
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LA16A_COTE_01_01
J4
J7
J6
J2
J3
LA16X ST CARD
J1
L7
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LA16X_COTE_01_01
L15
L8
L0
LA16X RJ CARD
Figure 4.53 OVERVIEW OF THE LA16X CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-125

Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
backplane connection
J2 to J9
(ST card)
STOCKO connectors with 4 pins: each Pin 1:

analogue set (i+1)+
socket has two connections to an
Pin
2:
analogue set
analogue set (i+1) Pin 3:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 4:
analogue set (i)-
L0 to L15
(RJ card)
Table 4.62
CONTACTS
RJ45 connectors:
each
provides one connection
analogue set
socket
to an Pin 4:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 5:
analogue set (i) Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
DESCRIPTION OF THE LA16X CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

Page 4-126 6/2/06


The LA16X card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a reckable XS PBX, or a working,
rackable XS12 PBX.
PBX.
The requirements for connecting an analogue terminal are:
Avertissement :
the voltage and current measured across the station during conversation must be:
U > 12,4 V and I > 25 mA,
line resistance (taking the set into account): 600 Ohms,
all the analogue terminals connected to the PBX must be configured for Zref
impedance and self-regulation.
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
The cables with the references HG4765B, HG4765C or HG4731 are

recommended for connecting RJ cards.
The principle for wiring an analogue set is shown in the diagram below:
8-pin
connector
4. L1-1
3. L1-2
2. L2-1
1. L2-2
Line 1
Line 2
4
5
LAx or LMx card
RJ45
Figure 4.54 WIRING AN LAX OR LMX ST CARD

Each line is supplied with balanced direct current. This voltage may vary between -43 V
and -56 V.
The maximum line resistance for a 22mA current is 1000 Ohm. The maximum line current
for a 200 Ohm resistance is 40 mA. With the "set on hook" the permanent line current can
reach 2.5 mA maximum without interference.
The wiring constraints are:
maximum line length:
- 0.4 mm wire: about 2 km,
- 0.6 mm wire: about 3.5 km.
6/2/06
Page 4-127
8 plots
Connector
LAx or LMx card
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LAX_RJ_CABLAGE_01_01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 4.55 WIRING AN LAX OR LMX RJ CARD
4.13.2
LA16X-8 card
The LA16X-8 card is used to connect 8 analogue set lines to a NeXspan PBX.

The LA16X-8 card is functionally identical to the LA16X card (see Section4.13.1.2) except
that it provides an interface with only 8 analogue sets.
Page 4-128 6/2/06

J1
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LA8XST_COTE_01_01
J4
J2
J3
LA16X-8 ST CARD
J1
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LA8XRJ_COTE_01_01
7L
L7
L
LN16 0
X
L0
LA16X-8 RJ CARD
Figure 4.56 OVERVIEW OF THE LA16X-8 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-129

Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J5
(ST card)

analogue set (i+1)+
Pin
2:
analogue set
analogue set (i)+
Pin 4:
analogue set (i)-
L0 to L7
(RJ card)
Table 4.63
CONTACTS
RJ45 connectors:
each
analogue set
socket
to an Pin 4:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 5:
DESCRIPTION OF THE LA16X CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

Page 4-130 6/2/06


The LA16X-8 card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a reckable XS PBX, or a
working, rackable XS12 PBX.
Avertissement :

PBX.
The requirements for connecting an analogue terminal are:

the voltage and current measured across the station during conversation must be:
U > 12,4 V and I > 25 mA,
line resistance (taking the set into account): 600 Ohms,
all the analogue terminals connected to the PBX must be configured for Zref
impedance and self-regulation.
5, impedance 120 .
Note :

The wiring principle for an analogue set with an LAX or LMX ST card is shown in Figure
4.57 and with an LAX or LMX RJ card, in Figure 4.58.
8-pin
connector
4. L1-1
3. L1-2
2. L2-1
1. L2-2
Line 1
Line 2
4
5
LAx or LMx card
RJ45
Figure 4.57 WIRING AN LAX OR LMX ST CARD

Each line is supplied with balanced direct current. This voltage may vary between -43 V
and -56 V.
The maximum line resistance for a 22mA current is 1000 Ohm. The maximum line current
for a 200 Ohm resistance is 40 mA. With the "set on hook" the permanent line current can
reach 2.5 mA maximum without interference.
6/2/06
Page 4-131
The wiring constraints are:

maximum line length:
- 0.4 mm wire: about 2 km,
- 0.6 mm wire: about 3.5 km.
8 plots
Connector
LAx or LMx card
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LAX_RJ_CABLAGE_01_01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 4.58 WIRING AN LAX OR LMX RJ CARD
4.13.3
LA8 card
The LA8 card is used to connect 8 analogue set lines to a PBX.

The LA8 card is functionally identical to the LA16X card (see section 4.13.1.2) except for
the following differences:
it ensures interfacing with only 8 analogue sets,
the parameters for converting digital signals into analogue signals and from analogue
signals to digital signals are not loaded into the memory of the LA8 card when started,
but pre-programmed in the card at the factory.
Page 4-132 6/2/06

4
J2
1
4
J3
1
J1
4
J4
1
4
J5
LA8 ST CARD
4
1
J2
4
1
J1
J3
4
J4
1
J4
J3
4
J2
1
J5
J1
A7
A0
LA8 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LA8-RJ_FAV_01_01
LA8 RJ CARD
LA8 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.59 OVERVIEW OF THE LA8 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-133

Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J5
(ST card)
STOCKO connectors with 4 pins:

each socket provides two connections to Pin 1: analogue set (i+1)+
Pin 2: analogue set (i+1)an analogue set
Pin 3: analogue set (i)+
Pin 4: analogue set (i)-
A0 to A7
(RJ card)
Table 4.64
RJ45 connectors of an RJ card: each

socket provides one connection to an
analogue set
Pin 5: analogue set (i) Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
1
DESCRIPTION OF LA8 CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

The LA8 card has no configuration microswitch.

The LA8 card cannot be hot-plugged in an operational PBX. The PBX must be powered
off before inserting the card. In addition, an LA8 card cannot be plugged into XD and XL
expansion cabinets.
The other constraints relating to installing and wiring the LA8 card are identical to those
for the LA16X card (see Section 4.13.1.5).
Page 4-134 6/2/06

4.13.4
LN16X card
The LN16X card is used to connect 16 digital set lines to a PBX.

The LN16X card ensures:
the transmission of the signalling between the UCT card and the D channel at 8kbit/s
on each of the lines connected to a digital set,
voice transmission between each of the 16 PCM TSs exchanged internally with the
UCT card and the B channel at 64kbit/s on each of the 16 lines connected to a digital
set,
a power supply function: the LN16X card receives several supply voltages on the
backplane connector (J1):
-
-48 V used to supply the digital set lines.
6/2/06
Page 4-135
J1
J8
J9
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LA16A_COTE_01_01
J4
J7
J6
J2
J3
LN16X ST CARD
J1
L7
L8
L0
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LN16X_COTE_01_01
L15
LN16X RJ CARD
Figure 4.60 OVERVIEW OF THE LN16X CARD
Page 4-136 6/2/06


Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J9
(ST card)

each socket provides two connections to a Pin 1: digital set (i+1)+
Pin 2: digital set (i+1)digital set.
Pin 3: digital set (i)+
Pin 4: digital set (i)-
L0 to L15
(RJ card)
RJ45 connectors: each socket provides

one connection to a digital set
Pin 5: digital set (i) Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
Table 4.65
DESCRIPTION OF LN16X CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

The LN16X card has no configuration microswitch.

The LN16X card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a rackable XS PBX, or a working,
rackable XS12 PBX.
Avertissement :

PBX.
It is essential to respect the standards between weak and strong currents.

The distance between the telephone cable and the source of interference (electrical
conductor, mains, fluorescent light with starter, etc.) must be at least 30 cm (12 in).
Do not connect two telephone sockets in parallel to the PBX.
Digital telephones cannot be used as emergency sets (e.g. during a power failure)
Maximum line length:
0.4 mm wire: about 1000 m,
0.6 mm wire: about 1800 m.
5, impedance 120 .
Note :

6/2/06
Page 4-137
4.13.5
LN16X-8 card
The LN16X-8 card is used to connect 8 digital set lines to a NeXspan PBX.

The LN16X-8 card is functionally identical to the LN16X card (see Section4.13.4.2) except
that it provides an interface with only 8 digital sets.
Page 4-138 6/2/06

J1
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LN8XST_COTE_01_01
J4
J2
J3
LN16X-8 ST CARD
J1
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LN8XRJ_COTE_01_01
L
7
L7
L
LN16 0
X
L0
LN16X-8 RJ CARD
Figure 4.61 OVERVIEW OF THE LN16X-8 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-139

Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J5
(ST card)

L0 to L7
(RJ card)

one connection to a digital set
Table 4.66
DESCRIPTION OF LN16X CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

The LN16X-8 card has no configuration microswitch.

The LN16X-8 card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a reckable XS PBX, or a
PBX.
It is essential to respect the standards between weak and strong currents.
Avertissement :
The distance between the telephone cable and the source of interference (electrical
conductor, mains, fluorescent light with starter, etc.) must be at least 30 cm (12 in).
Do not connect two telephone sockets in parallel to the PBX.
Digital telephones cannot be used as emergency sets (e.g. during a power failure)
Maximum line length:
0.4 mm wire: about 1000 m,
0.6 mm wire: about 1800 m.
5, impedance 120 .
Note :

Page 4-140 6/2/06

4.13.6
LN8 card
The LN8 card is used to connect 8 digital set lines to a PBX.

The LN8 card is functionally identical to the LN16X card (see Section 4.13.4.2) except
that it provides an interface with only 8 digital sets.

Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J5
(ST card)
STOCKO connectors with 4 pins: each

socket provides two connections to a Pin 1: digital set (i+1)+
N0 to N7
(RJ card)

one connection to a digital set.
Table 4.67
DESCRIPTION OF THE LN8 CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

The LN8 card has no configuration microswitch.
6/2/06
Page 4-141

The LN8 card cannot be hot-plugged in a working PBX. The PBX must be powered off
before inserting the card. In addition, an LN8 card cannot be plugged into XD and XL
expansion cabinets.
The other constraints relating to installing and wiring the LN8 card are identical to those
for the LN16X card (see Section 4.13.4.5).
4
J2
1
4
J3
1
J1
4
J4
1
4
J5
J1
J5
J2
J3
J4
J3
1
J1
J2
J4
LN8 ST CARD
N7
N0
LN8 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LN8-RJ_FAV_01_01
LN8 RJ CARD
LN8 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.62 OVERVIEW OF THE LN8 CARD
Page 4-142 6/2/06

4.13.7
LM8 card
The LM8 card is used to connect 8 digital and analogue set lines to a PBX.

The LM8 card performs the functions of both the LA8 card (see Section4.13.3.2) and
those of the LN8 card (see Section4.13.6.2).
4
J2
1
4
J3
1
J1
4
J4
1
4
J5
LM8 ST CARD
4
J2
1
4
J3
1
J1
4
J4
1
4
J5
N7
N6
N5
N4
A3
A2
A1
A0
LM8 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LM8-RJ_FAV_01_01
LM8 RJ CARD
LM8 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.63 OVERVIEW OF THE LM8 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-143

Connectors
NAME
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 and J3
(ST card)

each socket provides two connections to Pin 1: analogue set (i+1)+
Pin 2: analogue set (i+1)an analogue set
Pin 4: analogue set (i)-
J4 and J5
(ST card)

Pin 2: digital set (i+1)digital set
A0 to A3
(RJ card)
RJ45 connectors:
each socket provides one connection to an
analogue set
Pin 5: analogue set (i) Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
1
N4 to N7
(RJ card)
Table 4.68
RJ45 connectors:
each socket provides one connection to a
digital set
1
DESCRIPTION OF THE LM8 CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators

The LM8 card has no configuration microswitch.

The LM8 card cannot be hot-plugged into an operational XD and XL PBX. The PBX must
be powered off before inserting the card. In addition, an LM8 card cannot be plugged into
XD and XL expansion cabinets.
The constraints for wiring are those relating to connection with analogue sets
(see Section4.13.1.5) and digital sets (see Section4.13.4.5).
Page 4-144 6/2/06

4.13.8
LH8 card
The LH8 card is used to connect 8 analogue hotel terminals to a PBX.
The LH8 card has the same features as the LA8 card, plus an extra feature that lights up
an LED on sets if messages have been left (for hotel configuration).

The LH8 card has the same features as the LA8 card (see Section4.13.3.2), plus an extra
feature that lights up an LED to inform the user connected that a message has been left
(example of use: hotel customer reception).
The LED signal command is sent to the central unit (UCT card), which activates a high
voltage current generator built into the card providing the power supply (105 V DC)
required for the operation of the lamps on hotel sets.

The LH8 card has the same physical features as the LA8 card (see section 4.13.3.3).

The LH8 card cannot be hot-plugged in an operational PBX. The PBX must be powered
off before inserting the card. In addition, an LH8 card cannot be plugged into XD and XL
expansion cabinets.
The LH8 card has the same installation and wiring details as those of the LA8 card
(see Section4.13.3.5).
6/2/06
Page 4-145
4
J2
1
4
J3
1
J1
4
J4
1
4
J5
LH8 ST CARD
4
1
J2
4
1
J1
J3
4
J4
1
J4
J3
4
J2
1
J5
J1
A7
A0
LH8 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LH8-RJ_FAV_01_01
LH8 RJ CARD
LH8 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.64 OVERVIEW OF THE LH8 CARD
Page 4-146 6/2/06

4.13.9
LH16X card
The LH16X card is used to connect 16 analogue hotel terminals to a NeXspan L/S PBX.
The LH16X card offers the same features as the LA16X card, plus an extra feature that
lights up an LED on sets if messages have been left (for hotel configuration).

The LH16X card has the same features as the LA16X card (see Section4.13.1.2), plus an
extra feature that lights up an LED to inform the user connected that a message has been
left (example of use: hotel customer reception).
6/2/06
Page 4-147
J1
J8
J9
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LH16XSTOCKO_COTE_01_01
J4
J7
J6
J2
J3
LH16X ST CARD
J1
A15
1L5
A7
L
8
A8
L
0
LN16
X
A0
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LH16XRJ_COTE_01_01
L
7
LH16X RJ CARD
Figure 4.65 OVERVIEW OF THE LH16X CARD
Page 4-148 6/2/06


Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J9
(ST card)

analogue set (i+1)+
Pin
2:
analogue hotel/motel set
analogue set (i)+
Pin 4:
analogue set (i)-
A0 to A15
(RJ card)
Table 4.69
CONTACTS
RJ45 connectors:
each
socket
to an Pin 4:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 5:
DESCRIPTION OF LH16X CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators


The LH16X card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a rackable XS PBX, or a working,
rackable XS12 PBX.
Avertissement :

PBX.
The LH16X card has the same installation and wiring details as those of the LA16X card
6/2/06
Page 4-149
4.13.10 LH16X-8 card

4.13.10.1Description
The LH16X-8 card is used to connect 8 analogue hotel terminals to a NeXspan L/S/D
PBX.
The LH16X-8 card offers the same features as the LA16X-8 card, plus an extra feature
that lights up an LED on sets if messages have been left (for hotel/motel configuration).
4.13.10.2Functional description
The LH16X-8 card has the same features as the LA16X-8 card (see Section4.13.2.2),
plus an extra feature that lights up an LED to inform the user connected that a message
has been left (example of use: hotel customer reception).
Page 4-150 6/2/06

J1
J5
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LH16X8STOCKO_COTE_01_01
J4
J2
J3
LH16X-8 ST CARD
J1
PBX_MATRIX_XL_LH16X-8RJ_COTE_01_01
L
7
A7
L
LN16 0
X
A0
LH16X-8 RJ CARD
Figure 4.66 OVERVIEW OF THE LH16X-8 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-151
4.13.10.3Physical description (see Figure 4.56)

Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 to J5
(ST card)

analogue set (i+1)+
Pin
2:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 4:
analogue set (i)-
A0 to A7
(RJ card)
Table 4.70
CONTACTS
RJ45 connectors:
each
socket
to an Pin 4:
analogue set (i)+
Pin 5:
DESCRIPTION OF LH16X-8 CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
4.13.10.4Hardware configuration
4.13.10.5Installation and wiring

The LH16X-8 card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL PBX, a reckable XS PBX, or a
Avertissement :

PBX.
The LH16X-8 card has the same installation and wiring details as those of the LA16X card
Page 4-152 6/2/06

4.13.11 LR4 card

The LR4 card enables four analogue trunk lines to be connected.
It can also be fitted with tone detection (DTOC) or billing (FTXA or FTXC)
daughterboards.

The LR4 card mainly carries out the following functions:
analogue line supervision, by:
- transmitting commands from the central unit to the public network:
X
outbound call request,
line off hook and release,
pulse dialling,
- detection and transmission to the central unit of actions initiated on the public
network:
X
detection of line off hook on the public network side,
detection of the public network response to a line off hook on the PBX side,
detection of a call signal emitted by the public network,
detection of the line busy tone: this function is ensured by a daughterboard

(DTOC card); a DTOC card can be associated with each line.
The release signal (polarity inversion) must be sent by the public exchange; the
signal is detected by the LR4 card.
If the public network does not send this signal, the LR4 card must be fitted with
DTOC cards, with one card per line.
billing pulse detection: this function is ensured by a daughterboard (FTXA card

for 50 kHz pulses, FTXC for pulses from 12 to 16 kHz); a billing card can be
associated with each line.

- in digital form, from the UCT card to the analogue sets,
4 PCM TSs are exchanged with the UCT card, each being the medium for voice
carried over an analogue line,
- in analogue form, from the analogue sets to the UCT card,
power supply: the card receives several supply voltages on the backplane connector
(J1):
- -48 V used to supply the short analogue lines connected to PSTN equipment
requiring remote supply,
6/2/06
Page 4-153
J5
ON
J4
J2
S1.1
2
ON
J7
ON
J6
D1.1
S1.2
S2
1
D1.2
D1.3
ON
J9
D1.4
J8
S1.3
1
ON
J11
J10
J3
S1.4
LR4 ST CARD
ON
S1.1
1
J2
4
ON
D1.1
S1.2
J1
1
D1.2
D1.3
ON
D1.4
ON
J4
S1.3
1
S1.4
1
J3
J1
CONSOLE
T
3
T
0
S
3
S
0
LD4 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LD4RJ_FAV_01_01
LR4 RJ CARD
LR4 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.67 OVERVIEW OF THE LR4 CARD
Page 4-154 6/2/06


Connectors
NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
J2 and J3 (ST card)
each socket provides two connections to
an analogue network line
CONTACTS
Pin 1: network line (i+1)+

Pin 2: network line (i+1)Pin 3: network line (i)+
Pin 4: network line (i)-
J4 to J11
Couples of connectors used for fitting the

DTOC, FTXA or FTXC daughterboards,
one card per analogue line
L0 to L3 (RJ card)
RJ45 connectors:
each socket provides one connection to an
Pin 4: network line (i)+
analogue network line
Pin 5: network line (i) Pins 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8: NC
Table 4.71
DESCRIPTION OF THE LR4 CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
INDICATOR
D1.x (green) (1)
(1)
Off
On
Flashing
EXPLANATION
Status of line x (1):

Line idle
Line used
Pulse dialling rate
x: INDICATOR number, each INDICATOR is assigned to a network line
Note :
Table 4.72
STATE
For an RJ card, indicator located on the card circuit and not on the front panel.
PRESENTATION OF THE LR4 CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-155

Four S1 microswitches are used to configure the line balance and type of gain for each
network line, i.e. standard (LS) or short (LC).
S1.X.1
S1.X.2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
S1.X.3
ON
S1.X.4
ON
SWITCH
ON
Complex impedance (factory setting)
OFF
1
ON
Impedance 600
OFF
SWITCH
ON
OFF
3
OFF
LINE IMPEDANCE
GAIN
Standard line gain, usable for 1.5 to 3.5 km
(factory setting)
OFF
Short line gain, usable for 0 to 1.5 km

ON
OFF
3
(1)
Table 4.73
x represents the microswitch number (1 to 4).
CONFIGURATION OF THE S1 MICROSWITCH ON THE LR4 CARD

Two S2 microswitches are used to configure the billing frequency on a card fitted with
FTXC daughterboards.
S2.1
OFF
S2.2
OFF
SWITCH
2
CHARGING FREQUENCY
12 kHz
1
ON
ON
ON
16 kHz
1
ON
*
Table 4.74

CONFIGURATION OF THE S2 MICROSWITCH ON THE LR4 CARD
Page 4-156 6/2/06

The DTOC daughterboards are fitted with:

switches used to configure the card to suit the tones used in different countries. These
PBXs are factory pre-set,
a microswitch used to change the sensitivity of the DTOC card.
DESIGNATION
Detection threshold [dBm]:

-3 to -25 dBm
-3 to -32 dBm
CONFIGURATION (1)
CA1.4 on OFF
CA1.4 on ON
(1) Factory delivery configuration in bold characters.

The FTXA and FTXC daughterboards are not fitted with microswitches.
The hardware configuration required for installing the FTXC card is implemented from the
S2 microswitch on the LR4 card (see Table 4.74).

Attention : Activating a card connected to an RTCP network requires specific
programming with the administration tool before it can be used (see1.3,

Document[1]).
The LR4 card must be configured according to the length of the wiring
(see Table 4.73).
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
6/2/06
Page 4-157
4.13.12 LI1 card

The LI1 card allows you to connect together 2 private PBXs through a direct analogue or
public network line.
The interface described supports the exchange protocols required for the following links:
DID link with COLISEE type public PBXes,
links to other "LO" type private installations,
specific links with WINK-START type manufacturer protocols, etc.
Several types of signalling can be used:
COLISEE pulse signalling for connection to the COLISEE network
COLISEE pulse signalling in master or slave mode for connection to another private
installation,
MF SOCOTEL pulse and state-change line signalling for connection to the COLISEE
network,
L0 pulse signalling for connection to another private installation,
ATT WINK START signalling for connection to another private installation,
RITTER signalling for connection to another private installation.
The LI1 card mainly carries out the following functions:
integration of TL command signals from the UCT card:
- line seizure,
- release,
- pulse dialling,
- in digital form, from the UCT card to the analogue sets.
The PCM TSs exchanged with the UCT card are the medium for voice carried over
a tie line,
in analogue form, from the analogue sets to the UCT card,
Information can be transmitted:
either using RON/TRON signals,
or an alternate current. The card has a 50 Hz current generator for this purpose,
power supply:
connector (J1):
the LI1 card receives several supply voltages on the backplane

-
-48 V used for the operation of its internal circuits.
Page 4-158 6/2/06

10
J2
4
ON
ON
CA2
CA1
10
J1
J3
1
LI1 ST CARD
10
J2
ON
ON
CA2
CA1
10
J1
J3
LI1 RJ CARD
RX
R/T0
L1
TX BUSY
R/T1
RX
TX BUSY
LI1 X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_LI1-RJ_FAV_01_01
L0
LI1 RJ CARD FRONT PANEL
Figure 4.68 OVERVIEW OF THE LI1 CARD
6/2/06
Page 4-159

Connectorsurs
NAME
CONTACTS)
J1
96-pin connector:
J2

provides a connection to an analog TL 0
"Signalling" pairs:
Pin 1: T01
Pin 2: R01
Pin 3: R00
Pin 8: TB00
Pin 9: TA00
Pin 10: GNDL
"Voice" pairs:
Pin 4: LRB0
Pin 5: LRA0
Pin 6: LERB0
Pin 7: LERA0
J3

provides a connection to an analog TL 1
"Signalling" pairs:
Pin 1: T11
Pin 2: R11
Pin 3: R10
Pin 8: TB10
Pin 9: TA10
Pin 10: GNDL
"Voice" pairs:
Pin 4: LRB1
Pin 5: LRA1
Pin 6: LERB1
Pin 7: LERA1
Table 4.75
DESCRIPTION OF THE LI1 ST CARD CONNECTORS
Page 4-160 6/2/06

NAME
J1
96-pin connector:
L0
RJ45 connector:
carries voice over an analog TL 0
CONTACTS
Pin 3: LRB0
Pin 4: LRA0
Pin 5: LERB0
Pin 6: LERA0
Pin 3: LRB1
Pin 4: LRA1
Pin 5: LERB1
Pin 6: LERA1
RJ45 connector:
carries signaling over an analog TL 0
Pin 2: T01
Pin 3: R01
Pin 4: R00
Pin 5: TB00
Pin 6: TA00
Pin 7: GNDL
RJ45 connector:
carries signaling over an analog TL 1
Pin 2: T11
Pin 3: R11
Pin 4: R10
Pin 5: TB10
Pin 6: TA10
Pin 7: GNDL
1
L1
RJ45 connector:
carries voice over an analog TL 1
1
R/T0
1
R/T1
Table 4.76
DESCRIPTION OF THE LI1 RJ CARD CONNECTORS

Indicators
CONNECTOR
INDICATORS
J2 (ST card)
and
L0/RT0 (RJ card)
NAME
RJ CARD
STATE
10
J2
Eqt0
1
J3 (ST card)
and
L1/RT1 (RJ card)
10
J3
Eqt1
RX
TX
BUSY
RX
TX
BUSY
EXPLANATION
Red
Green
Green
Status of the line:

circuit busy
circuit in transmit mode
circuit in receive mode
Red
Green
Green
Status of the line:

circuit busy
circuit in transmit mode
circuit in receive mode
Table 4.77
PRESENTATION OF THE LI1 CARD INDICATORS
6/2/06
Page 4-161
DESIGNATION
CONFIGURATION (1)(2)
Commissioning the line

TL operating
TL disabled
CAx.1 on OFF
CAx.1 on ON (not used)
Type of gain:
Standard line (1.5 to 3.5 km)
Short line (0 to 1.5 km)
CAx.2 on OFF
CAx.2 on ON
Signaling type:
E/M
50 Hz
CAx.3 on OFF
CAx.3 on ON
Transmission to equipment over 2 or 4 wires:

2-wire
4-wire
CAx.4 on OFF
CAx.4 on ON
(1)
Factory delivery configuration in bold characters.
(2)
x is the microswitch number:

CA1 micro-switch associated with the link assigned to connectors J3 (ST card)
and L1/RT1 (RJ card)
CA2 micro-switch associated with the link assigned to connectors J2 (ST card)
and L0/RT0 (RJ card)
Table 4.78
CONFIGURING THE LI1 CARD

The LI1 card is used to interconnect 2 PBXs through an analogue TL. These analogue
TLs are wired using either two or four wires:
with a two-wire TL, voice communications are carried in both directions on the same
pair (LA and LB) by overlapping electrical states,
with a four-wire TL, one pair is dedicated to reception and the other pair to
transmission.
Page 4-162 6/2/06

4.13.12.5.1Installing and wiring an ST LI1 card

A connection cable with the reference HG4066A simplifies wiring analogue TLs on the ST
LI1 card.
Longueur 5 m (10 paires)
10
C1
1
10
C2
1
Figure 4.69 ST LI1 CABLE

COLOR
Light blue
White
Light blue
Blue
Light blue
Yellow
Light blue
Brown
Light blue
Black
Light blue
Red
Light blue
Green
Grey
White
Grey
Blue
Grey
Yellow
Table 4.79
WIRE
C1-1
C1-2
C1-3
C1-8
C1-4
C1-5
C1-6
C1-7
C1-9
C1-10
C2-1
C2-2
C2-3
C2-8
C2-4
C2-5
C2-6
C2-7
C2-9
C2-10
SIGNAL
T01
R01
R00
TB00
LRB0
LRA0
LERB0
LERA0
TA00
GND
T11
R11
R10
TB10
LRB1
LRA1
LERB1
LERA1
TA10
GND
EQUIPMENT ON LI1
CARD
DESCRIPTION
"Signalling" pairs
"Voice" pairs
Equipment 0
(J2 connector on
the LI1 card)
Ground
Pairs
"Signalling"
Equipment 1
(J3 connector on
the LI1 card)
"Voice" pairs
Ground
WIRING THE ST LI1 CABLE
6/2/06
Page 4-163
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Figure 4.70 WIRING A 50 HZ 2-WIRE ANALOGUE TL (ST CARD)
4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
10
GND
GND
10
TA 00
TA 10
TB 00
TB 10
LERA 0
LERA 1
LERB 0
LERB 1
R 00
R 10
ON
3
2
4 3 2 1
OFF
1
J2
J3
Switch A
Switch B
Figure 4.71 WIRING A 2-WIRE+E/M ANALOGUE TL (ST CARD)
Page 4-164 6/2/06

10
4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
GND
GND
10
TA 00
TA 10
TB 00
TB 10
LERA 0
LERA 1
LERB 0
LERB 1
LRA 0
LRA 1
LRB 0
LRB 1
R 00
R 10
ON
4 3 2 1
OFF
1
J2
J3
Switch A
Switch B
Figure 4.72 WIRING A 4-WIRE+E/M ANALOGUE TL (ST CARD)
4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
10
GND
GND
10
TA 00
TA 10
TB 00
TB 10
LERA 0
LERA 1
LERB 0
LERB 1
LRA 0
LRA 1
LRB 0
LRB 1
R 00
R 10
R 01
R 11
T 01
T 11
J2
J3
Switch A
Switch B
4 3 2 1
OFF
ON
Figure 4.73 WIRING A 4-WIRE + 2 E/M ANALOGUE TL (ST CARD)
6/2/06
Page 4-165
4.13.12.5.2Installing and wiring an RJ LI1 card

A connection cable with the reference HG4661 simplifies wiring analogue TLs on the RJ
LI1 card.
R/T1
L1
C4
C2
R/T0
L0
C1
PBX_MATRIX_LI1_CORDON-RJ_01_01
C3
Figure 4.74 RJ LI1 CABLE
Page 4-166 6/2/06

CONNECTOR/
EQUIPMENT
COLOR
WIRE
SIGNAL
DESCRIPTION
white
blue
white
orange
white
green
white
brown
white
blue
white
orange
white
green
white
brown
white
blue
white
orange
white
green
white
brown
white
blue
white
orange
white
green
white
brown
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC
NC
LRB0
LRA0
LERB0
LERA0
NC
NC
NC
T01
R01
R00
TB00
TA00
GNDL
NC
NC
NC
LRB1
LRA1
LERB1
LERA1
NC
NC
NC
T11
R11
R10
TB10
TA10
GNDL
NC
"Voice"
L0 (RJ45)/
Equipment 0
"Signalling"
L0 (RJ45)/
Equipment 0
"Voice"
L1 (RJ45)/
Equipment 1
"Signalling"
L1 (RJ45)/
Equipment 1
Table 4.80
WIRING THE RJ LI1 CABLE
6/2/06
Page 4-167
LERB 0
LERB 1
LERA 0
LERA 1
8
L0
L1
TA 00
TA 10
GNDL
GNDL
8
RT0
RT1
Switch
Switch
Figure 4.75 WIRING A 50 HZ 2-WIRE ANALOGUE TL (RJ CARD)

1
LERB 0
LERB 1
LERA 0
LERA 1
8
L0
L1
R 00
R 10
TB 00
TB 10
TA 00
TA 10
GNDL
GNDL
8
RT0
RT1
Switch
Switch
Figure 4.76 WIRING A 2-WIRE+E/M ANALOGUE TL (RJ CARD)
Page 4-168 6/2/06

LRB 0
LRB 1
LRA 0
LRA 1
LERB 0
LERB 1
LERA 0
LERA 1
8
L0
L1
R 00
R 10
TB 00
TB 10
TA 00
TA 10
GNDL
GNDL
8
RT0
RT1
Switch
Switch
Figure 4.77 WIRING A 4-WIRE+E/M ANALOGUE TL (RJ CARD)

1
LRB 0
LRB 1
LRA 0
LRA 1
LERB 0
LERB 1
LERA 0
LERA 1
8
L0
L1
T 01
T 11
R 01
R 11
R 00
R 10
TB 00
TB 10
TA 00
TA 10
GNDL
GNDL
8
RT0
RT1
Switch
Switch
Figure 4.78 WIRING A 4-WIRE + 2 E/M ANALOGUE TL (RJ CARD)
6/2/06
Page 4-169
4.13.13 IUMS card

This card provides the same function as an Integrated Unified Messaging System.
.
RJ45
RJ11
J1
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
Slots for
FLASH memory card
IUMS ST CARD
RJ45
RJ11
J1
LAN
10/100-TX
CONSOLE
RUN 100Mbps
LINK LOAD
IUMS X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_IUMX_FAV_01_01
IUMS RJ CARD
IUMS RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.79 OVERVIEW OF THE IUMS CARD
Page 4-170 6/2/06

The capacities and functional characteristics of the IUMS card are:
Basic configuration
20 voice mail boxes,
15 hours recording
8 MB ports.
Extension of the configuration (by adding a flash memory card and/or software
keys)
Number of voice mail boxes (extension licenses: +20, +40, +80, +120, +160, +200,
+220),
Unified messaging (extension licenses: +5, +10, +20, +40, +80, +120, +160, +200,
+240),
Networking with VPIM (Yes/No)

Connectors
NAME
Table 4.81
CONTACTS
J1
96-pin
connector:
connection
backplane
RJ45 (ST card) or 10/

100-TX LAN (RJ card)
Ethernet
10/100
Mbps
(RJ45)
connector: LAN network connection for
administration from a Web interface
RJ11 (ST card)
RJ11 serial connector:

Pin 2: Rx => Pin 2 of Db9

Pin 5: Tx => Pin 3 of Db9
Pin 3: GND => Pin 5 of
Db9
Console (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
Pin 1: Rx => Pin 2 of Db9

Pin 2: Tx => Pin 3 of Db9
Pin 3: GND => Pin 5 of
DB9
DESCRIPTION OF THE IUMS CARD CONNECTORS
6/2/06
Page 4-171
Slots
Slots 1 and 2 are used to fit Compact Flash memory cards.
Indicators
Table 4.82
NAME
ST CARD
NAME
RJ CARD
STATUS
EXPLANATION
LED 1
LINK
ON (green)
Off
Ethernet connection OK
Ethernet connection not OK
LED 2
RUN
ON (green)
Off
System operational
System not operational
LED 3
100 Mbps
ON (green)
Off
Ethernet connection at 100 Mbps

Ethernet connection at 10 Mbps
LED 4
LOAD
ON (red)
Off
Card loaded correctly

Card loaded incorrectly
PRESENTATION OF THE IUMS CARD INDICATORS

The installation details of the IUMS card are described in Document [14] (see section 1.3).
Page 4-172 6/2/06

4.13.14 BTX card

This charging buffer card is used to print detailed telephone traffic reports.
.
4
3
BATT.
J4
J8
1
6
COM
J3
TICK
J1
4
1
J7
J2
RESET
INT EXT
ON
LD1
BTX ST CARD
4
3
BATT.
J8
J3
J4
1
COM
TICK
J1
4
1
J7
J2
1
RESET
INT EXT
ON
LD1
PRN
TAX
MMI
ALA
BTX X
PBX_MATRIX_CARTE_BTX-RJ_FAV_01_01
BTX RJ CARD
BTX RJ CARD FRONT PANEL

Figure 4.80 OVERVIEW OF THE BTX CARD
The BTX card is used to record, store, sort, and edit on request, from a set with interactive
keys, by issuing Room status tickets (see section 1.3 Document [15]).
6/2/06
Page 4-173

Connectors
NAME
J1
Table 4.83
CONTACTS
96-pin connector:
Backplane connection
Ticket serial port
Pin 1: RD
Pin 2: DTR
Pin 3: GND
COM
TICK
(ST card)
6-pin connector:
ticket serial port
MMC serial port (optional)
J4 (ST card)
4-pin connector:
A-A line not used
B-B line RL1 relay contact
Pin 1:
Pin 2:
Pin 3:
Pin 4:
Line B
Line B
not used
not used
J7 (ST card)
4-pin connector:
serial port to printer or PC
Pin 1:
Pin 2:
Pin 3:
Pin 4:
RD
TD
RTS
GND
J8
Stocko 3-pin connector:

External buffer power supply
Pin 1: GND
Pin 3: +12 V
PRN (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
connection to a PC or printer (see
Figure 5.5)
TAX (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
Pin 1: RD
link with printer port on UCT card Pins 3,4,5 and 6: GND
Pin 7: DTR
(ticket serial port)
MMI (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
Pin 1: TD
link with operating port on UCT card Pin 2: RD
Pins 3,4,5 and 6: GND
(MMC serial port, optional)
ALA (RJ card)
RJ45 connector:
relay contact
MMC serial port

Pin 4: RD
Pin 5: TD
Pin 6: GND
Pin 1: TX
Pin 2: RX
Pins 3,4,5 and 6: GND
Pin 7: CTS
Pin 8: RTS
Pin 1:
Pin 2:
Pin 3:
Pin 4:
Line B
Line B
not used
not used
DESCRIPTION OF THE BTX CARD CONNECTORS
Page 4-174 6/2/06

Indicators
NAME
STATUS
LD1
On steady (green)
On green/red alternating
Green flashing
Red flashing
EXPLANATION
Normal buffer operation

PBX data received on the serial ticket port
Pre-alarm: 80 % total memory used
Alarm: 95 % total memory used
*LD1 located on the card circuit (and not on front panel)

Table 4.84
PRESENTATION OF THE BTX CARD INDICATORS

Jumpers
NAME
Table 4.85
FEATURE
J2
Set INT side: indicates buffer power supplied by the PBX

Set EXT side: indicates buffer power supplied by connector J8 (external
supply)
J3
If set, indicates memory power supplied by the buffer battery
PRESENTATION OF THE BTX CARD JUMPERS
The hardware configuration of the BTX card is described in Document [15]
(see section 1.3).

The installation details of the BTX card are described in Document [15] (see section 1.3).
6/2/06
Page 4-175
Page 4-176 6/2/06

Presentation of peripheral devices
5.1
Digital sets
5.1.1
Presentation
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs basically allow the connection of digital sets. Only Aastra digital
sets are accepted by the PBXs.
Digital sets can manage notably:
an alphanumeric screen,
programmable keys,
an internal directory,
user-friendly navigator,
on-hook dialling
caller name display,
a call log,
set locking,
direct calling from the call log,
loading and saving directories, logs, and the set's parameters.
Digital sets are connected to PBXs through the following cards:
For C/S/L PBXs
UCT1-S/UCT2-S: 8 digital sets connectable,
UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12: 4 digital sets connectable,
UCT1-C/UCT2-C: 4 digital sets connectable,
For C/S/L/D PBXs
LN16X: 16 digital sets connectable,
LN16X-8: 8 digital sets connectable for the NeXspan range,
LN8: 8 digital sets connectable,
LM8: 4 digital sets connectable.
5.1.2
Installation
The various characteristics (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of digital
sets are described in the sections dealing with these cards (see Sections 4.7, 4.8, 4.9 and
Sections 4.13.4 to 4.13.7).

Presentation of peripheral devices 6/2/06
Page 5-1
5.2
Analogue sets
5.2.1
Description
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs accept the connection of analogue sets of all types and makes.
Analogue sets are connected to PBXs through the following equipment cards:
For C/S/L PBXs
UCT1-S/UCT2-S: 8 connectable analogues sets,
UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12: 8 connectable analogue sets,
UCT1-C/UCT2-C 4 connectable analogues sets,
For C/S/L/D PBXs
5.2.2
LA16X
16 connectable analogue sets,
LA16X-8
8 analogue sets, connectable for the NeXspan range,
LA8
LH8
LH16X
LH16X-8
LM8
4 connectable analogue sets.
Installation
The various characteristics (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of
analogue sets are described in the sections dealing with these cards
(see Sections 4.13.2, 4.13.3, 4.13.7 and 4.13.10).
Page 5-2
6/2/06

5.3
IP sets
5.3.1
Description
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs allow the transmission of voice signals with an IP set. Only
Aastra IP sets are accepted by NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs.
IP sets have the same features as traditional digital sets (see Section 5.1.1). In addition,
upgrade to IP brings numerous advantages:
a single network socket serves both the PC and telephone,
no interface card is required on the IP set,
switching is performed live over the LAN,
geographical location is no longer a constraint (teleworking, independent set, etc.).
5.3.2
Installation
Connecting IP sets to a PBX requires equipping the latter with a PT2 card (Ethernet
network interface card) fitted with a VoIP daughter card (see Section 4.4.3).
IP sets communicate with a PBX through an Ethernet LAN. Connection to the LAN is via a
standard Ethernet cable with an Ethernet 10/100 Base-T connector on an Ethernet hub or
switch.
Follow the steps below to programme an IP set:
Unlock the IP TERMINALS function (see section 1.3, Document [2]).
Configure the IP access point (see section 1.3, Document [4]) and activate the IP card
(see section 1.3, Document [2]).
Create logical subscribers (see section 1.3, Document [0]):
- for an i7xx set, create at least one "general IP DS" logical subscriber and one "IP
DS" logical subscriber,
- for a NeXspan Softphone i2052 set, create a "Software phone on PC" set.
For more detailed information on installing and starting IP sets, refer to the following
documents:
i7xx IP sets: see section 1.3, Document [15],
NeXspan Softphone i2052: see section 1.3, Document [16].
Certain sets require connection to the Ethernet network of a PC fitted with software for
configuring IP equipment.
5.4
Computer terminals
5.4.1
Description
A PBX can communicate with computer terminals:
data transmission equipment (DTE),

Page 5-3
data communications equipment (DCE) (modem).

This communication is possible on PBXs fitted with:
CS1 cards, for a connection in packet mode via an X25 network,
CA1 cards, for connection to an asynchronous data terminal through an RS232 link.
5.4.2
Installation
The various characteristics (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of
computer terminals are described in the Sections dealing with the CS1 and CA1 cards
(see Sections 4.12.5 and 4.12.6).
Page 5-4
6/2/06

5.5
Attendant consoles (ATDC)
5.5.1
Description
An attendant console is dedicated to call reception and distribution. In general, the
operator can supervise all extensions in the network and has access to maintenance
terminal data (alarm management, calendar management, time management). There are
two types of operation:
class A: monitoring of all extensions and trunks (reduced configuration),
class B: monitoring of the management of an ongoing call.
An attendant console can be either a digital set with programmable keys (for example, an
M760) or an attendant console on PC (for example, a NeXspan i2070 Software Attendant
Console).
NeXspan C/S/L/D PBXs support at most:
8 ATDCs (6 Windows ATDC max.) on NeXspan D, L and S,
4 ATDCs on the NeXspan C.
5.5.2
Installation
The various characteristics (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of digital
sets are described in the sections relating to these cards (see section 4.13.4 to 4.13.7).
For more detailed information on configuring and installing an M760 set, see section 1.3,
Document [15].
The various characteristics (connections, wiring, etc.) relating to the installation of ATDCs
on PC are described in the corresponding installation manuals (see section1.3 Document
[17] for the i2070).

Page 5-5
5.6
Miscellaneous equipment
5.6.1
Description
Various external devices can be connected directly to the management ports of the UCT
and IUCT-D card:
administration tool:
- a VT100 terminal or,
- a PC,
serial printer,
common bell,
alarm bell.
On the UCT-D card
a test console,
a tool for downloading and saving the PBX configuration,
5.6.2
VT100 terminal (see Figure 5.3)
5.6.2.1
Description
A VT100 terminal can be used as a programming console providing access to the PBXs
operating software (installed on the UCT and UCT-D card) to program, view, and print site
configuration data if a printer is connected to this console.
5.6.2.2
Installation
The VT100 terminal can be connected:
locally:
- via the serial port of the UCT and IUCT-D card,
Note :
Do not connect the VT100 terminal, used as programming console, to the serial
port of the UCT-D card. Only one debug console can be connected to the serial
port of the UCT-D card.
- via a modem (V23 emulation),

Note :
If you use a connection via modem, use the configuration 7 bits, even parity and
1 stop bit.
Page 5-6
6/2/06

remotely:
- via an ISDN T0 or T2 trunk access,
- via a modem (V23 emulation).
Note :
1 stop bit.
Direct connection of the programming console to the serial port of the UCT and IUCT-D
card must not exceed 15 m (see Figure 5.1).
Console
VT 100 Console or PC
Figure 5.1
CONNECTING AN ADMINISTRATION TOOL TO THE SERIAL PORT OF THE UCT

AND IUCT-D CARD
SUBDB9-F
(IUCT)
SIGNALS
SUBDB9-F
(PC)
SUBDB25-M
(CONSOLE)
TXA
RXA
GND
6
7
9
Note : RX = card input, TX = card output
Table 5.1
PC/IUCT-D CONSOLE WIRING

Page 5-7
Remote connection to the UCT and IUCT-D card can use the internal modem present on
the UCT card:
remotely through an analogue line via the PSTN network. If connection is made
through the remote maintenance modem dial number, the latter is indicated in the
administration tool (see Section 1.3 , Document [1]).
through a local analogue line. In this case, connection is set up by dialling 799: default
local call number of the modem.
5.6.3
Administration PC (see Figure 5.3)
5.6.3.1
Presentation
A PC can be used as an administration tool to:
provide the same functions as a VT100 programming console: use of a VT100
emulation application (HYPERTERMINAL, CROSSTALK, BBTH, PROCOMM PLUS,
TERA TERM, etc.) or M7425 ENTERPRISE management centre (see Section 1.3 ,
Document [10]).
- use the following configuration for hyperterminal under Windows 95/98/NT/2000/
XP:
Table 5.2
PARAMETER
VALUE
Transmission
speed
9600
Data bits
Parity
none
Stop bits
Flow control
Xon / Xoff
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR A VT100 EMULATION

manage the system; use the following applications or management centres:
- M7425 ENTERPRISE (see Section 1.3, Document [10]):
full system management application through an IP or ISDN connection (PBX
subscriber management, upgrading with secure exchanges between the
management centre and the PBX's Operating server, and rollback, backup, restore,
etc.),
- M7425 UPDATE (see section, 1.3 Document [6]):
local or remote system download management application (IP or ISDN connection),
remote management of the reception and downloading of the PBX (updates with
secure exchanges between the management centre and the PBX's Operating
server, and rollback function, loading of synchronised announcements, backup,
restore, etc.). M7420 Update allows announcements and messages to be created
locally on a PC.
Page 5-8
6/2/06

- M7425 Directory Manager (see section, 1.3 Document [7]):

Simplified tool used to download the internal directory of a PBX from a PC.
- M7420 Music Manager (see section, 1.3 Document [8]):
Synchronised announcement loading tool.
- M7420 Local Loader
Local loading tool for updating, backup, restore (local management without IP/ISDN
access, no compatibility with secure mode),
- Current applications for backup, restore (HYPERTERMINAL, CROSSTALK, BBTH,
PROCOMM PLUS, TERA TERM, etc. ).
5.6.3.2
Installation
An administration PC can be connected:
locally:
- to the serial port of the UCT and IUCT-D card to execute the emulation functions,
- to the parallel port of the UCT and UCT-D card, to transfer the backup and
downloading data through backup software, but not from a Management Centre.
In this case, the PC cannot be used to download software releases.
- via a LAN access,
- via a modem, V23 emulation (programming).
Note :
1 stop bit.
remotely:
- via a T0 or T2 ISDN access (programming, update, backup, restore),
- via a WAN access (programming, update, backup, restore),
- via a modem, V23 emulation (programming).
Note :
1 stop bit.
Direct connection of the PC to the serial port of the UCT and IUCT-D card must not
exceed 15 m (see Figure 5.1).
Direct connection of the PC to the parallel port of the UCT and UCT-D card must not
exceed 1m (with shielded cable).
Connection to the LAN port is possible through:
a LAN,
an Ethernet twisted cable.

Page 5-9
PC
- Management Centre (1)
- TELNET (exploitation)
- M7420 Update (2)
- M7420 Directory Manager (4)
PC
PC or VT 100
TELNET
IP Network
VT 100
emulation
PC
8 bits
no parity
1 stop bit
- M7420 Local Loader (3)

Twisted
cable
Asynchronous terminal
Data transmission
Parallel
port
LAN
Parallel
port
CONSOLE
MODEM
MODEM
UCTD
active
M7420 Directory Manager (4)
nlocal
LAN
UCTD
passive
IUCTD
nSDA
nSDA
nlocal
CA1
LAX
T0/T2/LR
PBX
PC or VT 100
VT 100
Emulation
7 bits
even parity
1 stop bit
MODEM
PSTN
PC or VT 100
VT 100
Emulation
(1) - Subscriber management

- Update
- Backup/restore
(2) Remote management of
greeting services (IVS,
announcements and messages
(3) - Local loading Tool
- Update
- Backup/restore
(4) Loading the switch's internal
directory
ISDN
FRONT END
7 bits
even parity
1 stop bit
CP1
MODEM
IP Network
PC
- Management Center (1)
- M7420 Update (2)
Figure 5.2
CONNECTING AN ADMINISTRATION TOOL LOCALLY OR REMOTELY (IUCT-D CARD)
Page 5-10
6/2/06

0#
0#OR64
0#
64
%MULATION
-,OCAL,OADER
--USIC-ANAGER
4%,.%4
BITS
NOPARITY
STOPBIT
4WISTEDCABLE
0ARALLEL
PORT
!SYNCHRONOUSTERMINAL
$ATATRANSMISSION
#ONSOLE
,!.
-ODEM
-$IRECTORY-ANAGER
5#4
#!
.3$!
.LOCAL
44,2
,!8
0"8
0#OR64
BITS
%MULATION EVENPARITY
64
STOPBIT
0#
-ANAGEMENTCENTRE
4%,.%4/PERATION
-5PDATE
-$IRECTORY-ANAGER
-ODEM
0#OU64
BITS
%MULATION EVENPARITY
64
STOPBIT
)0.ETWORK
)3$.
034.
-ODEM
&2/.4%.$
#0

3UBSCRIBERMANAGEMENT
UPDATE
BACKUPRESTORE

5PDATE
BACKUPRESTORE
LOADINGSYNCHRONISED
ANNOUNCEMENTS
,OCALLOADINGTOOL
TRANSFER
DOWNLOAD
,OADINGSYNCHRONISEDANNOUNCEMENTS

,OADINGTHE0"8SINTERNADIRECTORY
Figure 5.3
)0.ETWORK
0#
-ANAGEMENTCENTRE
-5PDATE
CONNECTING AN ADMINISTRATION TOOL LOCALLY OR REMOTELY (UCT CARD)

Page 5-11
5.6.4
Serial printer
5.6.4.1
Description
The serial printer is used to print out records as the system issues them.
5.6.4.2
Installation
Configure the serial printer (RS232C) as follows:
Data rate:
9600 bit/s
Data bits:
8 bits
Parity:
no parity
Stop Bit:
1 stop bit
Respect the distance defined in Standard RS 232C (approximately 15 m, or 50 ft)

Note :
IUCT
A cable, referenced HG4790AA, facilitates the wiring of a printer to the UCT and
IUCT-D card.
PRINTER
J9A
PRINTER
1
RJ45
8-pin
male
Figure 5.4
SUB-D
9-pin
female
PBX_MATRIX_IUCT_IMP_CABLE_01_01
PRINTER / IUCT-D CABLE
UCT
PRINTER
PRINTER
J6B
1
RJ45
8-pin
male
Page 5-12
6/2/06
SUB-D
9-pin
female
PBX_MATRIX_UCT_IMP_CABLE_01_01

Figure 5.5
PRINTER/UCT CABLE
CABLE PAIR NO.
RJ45 (UCT
AND IUCT-D CARD)
1
2
SUB-D 9 PIN (IMPR)
SIGNALS
CTS
TXB*
3 to 6
GND
RXB
*TXB: not used on a printer

Table 5.3
PRINTER / UCT AND IUCT-D WIRING
5.6.5
External music source
5.6.5.1
Description
The music used while a call is put on hold and as background music can be supplied by
any digital music on-hold device with a high-impedance audio output.
5.6.5.2
Installation
Once connected to the UCT or IUCT-D card, the external music source must be selected
as music on-hold on the administration tool (see Section 1.3, Document [2]).
The volume of the music source can also be adjusted using the administration tool.
Music-on-hold
UCT
MUSIC
J8B
1
2
JP12
GND
MUSA
ETM
GND
MUSB
Music source power supply command

15 k LF input
device for monitoring correct
operation of external music
source (loop display)
600 LF input
Figure 5.6
PBX_MATRIX_UCT_MUSIC_CABLE_01_01
EXTERNAL MUSIC / UCT WIRING

Note :
Make a loop between GND (3) and ETM (5) to check that the external music is
present.

Page 5-13
5.6.6
Common bell
5.6.6.1
Presentation
The PBX has a restricted night service relay on its (UCT and IUCT-D) CPU card enabling
the connection of a telephone set or any type of ringing device. This device switches the
relay on the UCT and IUCT-D card in the event of an incoming call which is answered or
not answered, depending on the required type of operation (call handling programming).
The common bell has its own directory number (by default 798).
5.6.6.2
Installation
Common bell setup requires no programming. It is implemented when you power on
the system.
230 V mains
,8&7FDUG
SLAT
bell
interface
11
Alterning
bell
type 1000
-
12
R3
1 SLAT interface, type TAT 524

7KHDODUPEHOOLVFRQWUROHGE\WKH5UHOD\
$GU\FRQWDFWLVDYDLODEOHRQ-PD[LPXPFXUUHQW$
Figure 5.7
CONNECTING A COMMON BELL (IUCT-D CARD)
9PDLQV
8&7FDUG
6/$7
EHOO
LQWHUIDFH

$OWHUQLQJ
EHOO
W\SH7
-$
5

6/$7LQWHUIDFHW\SH7$7
$GU\FRQWDFWLVDYDLODEOHRQ-$PD[LPXPFXUUHQW$
Figure 5.8
CONNECTING A COMMON BELL (UCT CARD)
Page 5-14
6/2/06

5.6.7
Alarm bell
5.6.7.1
Description
The PBXs CPU card (UCT and IUCT-D) includes a relay used to connect an alarm bell.
This relay is triggered by a problem detected on the synchronisation clock selected by the
system. Alarms are assigned by MMC (XD)
5.6.7.2
Installation
Alarm bell setup requires no programming. It is implemented when you power on the
system.
9PDLQV
8&7FDUG
6/$7
EHOO
LQWHUIDFH

-$
5

$OWHUQLQJ
EHOO
W\SH7
6/$7LQWHUIDFHW\SH7$7
$GU\FRQWDFWLVDYDLODEOHRQ-$PD[LPXPFXUUHQW$
Figure 5.9
CONNECTING AN ALARM BELL (IUCT-D CARD)

R2: degraded operation alarm or synchronisation clock alarm relay
Figure 5.10 CONNECTING AN ALARM BELL (UCT-D CARD)

Page 5-15
Page 5-16
6/2/06

Installation
6.1
Security guidelines
6.1.1
Staff clearance
Only qualified staff should service the PBX.
The installer must be aware of the possible electrical hazards to which they may be
exposed.
It is essential to take every precaution necessary for people's safety.
6.1.2
Safety
The switch is grounded for safety reasons and this connection should be made
before any others.
The PBXs are powered up by the 230 V/50 Hz or 115 V/60 Hz mains or an optional
external battery.
A switch on the front panel of the power supply module is used to power the PBX on or
off.
The power supply module is protected by two fuses located on the mains socket.
Safety relating to energy distribution
Apply the usual precautions relating to mains power supply.
In case of danger, disconnect the power supply cable.
High leakage currents
In the event of a power line fault near telephone lines, installation and maintenance
technicians must be aware of the possibility of high leakage currents on metal system
surfaces.
Leakage currents normally flow safely through the power cable to protective ground.
Isolate the telephone network lines before any intervention on the PBX.
Lightning overvoltages
Transient overvoltages due to lightning can be conveyed by the supply cables and
telephone lines of the installation:
the electrical power supply installation of the room must be protected against
lightning-generated overvoltages coming from the power supply network
the telephone installation must be protected against lightning-generated
overvoltages by inserting protection modules between the PSTN and the
distribution frame.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-1
6.1.3
Powering on the system

Risk of fire and electrical shock
To protect against risk of fire and electrical shock:
make sure there are no screws, tools, or any metallic items inside the racks.
make sure the system is connected to a socket with an grounding conductor.
Before switching on the power, check that:

the PBX is connected to the ground socket,
air flows freely all around the cabinet(s) and there are no objects lying on the cabinet,
there must be sufficient clearance between the cabinet and the wall
all expansion cards are connected (XD, XL, XS and rackable XS12 cabinets),
in an IP connection the PBX is connected to the Ethernet LAN ("LAN" port of the UCT/
UCT-D or PT2 card),
all devices are connected to the PBX and earthed
the 48V external battery (optional - XL, XS and XS12 cabinet) is connected to the
power supply module or to the rear of the XD cabinet.
In systems with 2 or 3 cabinets, first power on the expansion cabinet(s) (I/O push-button
in position I) then the main cabinet.
6.1.4
Powering off the power supply module and the cards

The power supply module(s) must be powered off before being removed or inserted ("I/O"
push-button in position "O").
For a system with 2 or 3 cabinets, first power off the main cabinet, then the expansion
cabinet(s).
The following cards can be removed or inserted when powered on in a cabinet:
UCT-D, RUCT-D and IUCT-D (XD cabinet)
LA16X, LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X, LH16X-8, LD4N, LD4X ( XD, XL, rackable
XS, and rackable XS12 cabinets)
Warning :Do not hot-plug in or unplug a non-rackable XS cabinet equipment card.
All the other cards must be powered off before being removed from or inserted in an XD,
XL, XS or XS12 cabinet. Power off the PBX from the power supply module(s).
Note : It is advisable to stop the IPS card application before powering off the PBX. There is a minor risk of
information loss if the IPS card is powered off before its software application is stopped.
6.1.5
Handling cards
Before carrying out an operation on a card, lay the card on its antistatic envelope.
6.2
Description
The installation of a system includes the operations for installing, configuring and making
Page 6-2
6/2/06

Installation
a PBX operational according to the customers configuration.

The installation can be:
a 1st installation,
a hardware upgrade for an installed site.
This manual gives the various steps required for a full installation, but details only
hardware operations. The details of the software programming operations are given in
documents [0], [1] and [2] (see section 1.3).
To perform a quick, high-quality installation of the PBX, before installing a new system,
you must:
make a site inspection,
make a checklist of the equipment to install,
make a checklist and summary of the tools required for installing and starting up the
PBX,
have read the information in the sections below.
6.3
Site inspection
To make sure the system has the correct conditions to function properly, check the site
before you start installing the PBX.
Here is a summary of considerations:
location
environment
space
electricity
6.3.1
Location
Unpacking, installation, operation, service, and storage
The location must be large enough to house the PBX and a worktable. The table will be
used to install a telephone set, an administration tool or a computer, a printer, and all
the other peripheral equipment.
Main distribution frame and battery
Check that there is sufficient space for the switching rack and battery no more than
4 meters from the PBX cabinet. Both 5 m and 10 m RJ45 connection cables are
available.
Follow the supplier's instructions concerning the location of the battery.
Minimum clearance
A minimum space is required for air circulation (see SHEET I-2 and SHEET I-5):
- 55 mm on the left-hand side and at the back of XL and XD cabinets,
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-3
- 55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an XS cabinet,

- 55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an e-diatonis XS12 cabinet,
- 55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an XC cabinet.
Also check that there is enough room above an XS cabinet to open it.
Electrical devices
There must be a minimum distance of 4 m (13 ft) from equipment such as
photocopiers, electric motors, and other equipment that can produce electromagnetic
or radio-frequency interference.
Fire precautions
A fire extinguishing system, for example, a carbon dioxide system, needs to be in the
room.
6.3.2
Environment
General conditions
The room should be clean, dry, and well-ventilated to allow free airflow.
Temperature
The temperature of the room must be controlled, and kept between 5 C (41 F) and
40 C (104 F).
Humidity
The degree of non-condensing humidity in the room must remain between 10 % and
80 %. The humidity must not exceed 30 % per hour during operation.
6.3.3
Space required
The space must be sufficient to fix the PBXs to the wall (XS, XS12 and XC only), or to
install:
a rack for installing 19 inch cabinets, if not pre-installed,
a work table for peripheral equipment.
When installing inside a rack, the rack must be large enough to install the external backup
battery.
For future expansion of the PBX, it is advisable to reserve some space in the rack for a
second cabinet.
6.3.4
Electrical power supply

On the installation premises, include one socket dedicated to each cabinet (main and
extension), and a socket for the administration tool.
Each socket must be capable of carrying the rated voltage of 230 V AC (or 115V,
depending on the type of installation) at 50 Hz/60 Hz at a current of 10/16 A and must
have a third, grounding conductor for protection against electrical discharges and shock,
Page 6-4
6/2/06

Installation
and to prevent electromagnetic interference. The power sockets installed must comply
with the standard NF C-15100.
Protection against electric shock
For the safety of the installers, the PBX must be connected to a 3-wire power point
connected to the general ground of the building.
Use only three-conductor (male and female) connectors: two phase conductors and
one earthing conductor.
Make sure there are sufficient sockets for other equipment as required.
Note : Do not use an extension cable between the power source and the PBX power supply module(s).
6.4
Equipment checklist
If the customer wishes to install equipment from an existing installation, e.g. the customer
may supply a common bell device and an external music source, to determine the overall
size of the new installation, produce a full equipment checklist:
existing equipment,
new equipment.
6.4.1
Existing equipment
If the customer has equipment to install, draw up a hardware checklist of all the
equipment supplied by the customer and note the detailed information required for
programming in a Programming Record.
6.4.2
New equipment
Equipment for the new system is delivered in individual boxes. To complete a checklist of
the delivered equipment, look for the package labelling and enter this information.
An example of the labelling on the packages is given below:
HJ3970BA01D980353483
QTY : 1
LT2
HJ3970B
1
Legend:
1- Product description
2- Product sales code
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-5
6.5
Installation tools
This section lists the tools required for the various installation procedures described in this
chapter and the various maintenance operations described in Chapter 7.
6.5.1
Operating equipment
DESIGNATION
Administration tool
Table 6.8
see Section 5.6
TYPE
SHEET
SHEET I-7,
SHEET I-8 to
SHEET I-13,
SHEET E-21
LIST OF OPERATING EQUIPMENT
Page 6-6
SPECIFICATIONS
6/2/06

Installation
6.5.2
Tools
DESIGNATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
SHEET
Standard tool case
SHEET I-1
SHEET I-2
SHEET I-4
SHEET I-5
SHEET I-6
SHEET I-14
SHEET P-4
SHEET P-6
SHEET E-2
SHEET E-3
SHEET E-5
Pliers for nylon cable ties
SHEET I-6
1 pair of adjustable pliers for wiring

the Stocko insulation-displacement
connectors
SHEET I-6
Distribution frame insertion tool

Electric screwdriver with the following
accessories:
- battery
- single charger
or
- double
- screw bits (Torx M3 and M6 screws)
PW1007A
SHEET I-6
Torque 390 N.cm
10*75
Torx screwdriver for M3 screw (cards)
SHEET I-5
Facom
AZXR
SHEET I-1
SHEET I-4
SHEET I-8
SHEET I-9
SHEET I-10
SHEET I-11
SHEET E-12
SHEET E-13
SHEET E-14
SHEET E-17
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-7
15*75
Facom
AZXR
SHEET I-4
SHEET I-8
SHEET I-9
SHEET I-11
SHEET I-13
SHEET P-4
SHEET P-7
SHEET P-8
SHEET E-3
SHEET E-4
SHEET E-5
SHEET E-12
SHEET E-14
SHEET E-17
SHEET E-18
SHEET E-19
SHEET E-21
25*10
Facom
AZXR
SHEET P-5
SHEET P-6
SHEET P-7
SHEET P-8
Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover)
Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (fan)
Table 6.8
6.5.3
LIST OF TOOLS
Miscellaneous
DESIGNATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
SHEET
Vacuum cleaner
SHEET P-1
Adaptor + mains cable
According to
need
6 pins
8 pins
Connectors
Cables
Table 6.8
SHEET I-7,
SHEET I-14
9 pin cable
SHEET I-7
SHEET I-8
to SHEET I13,
SHEET I-14
25 pin cable;
maximum length 3
meters
SHEET I-8
to SHEET I13,
SHEET I-14
MISCELLANEOUS TOOLS LIST
Page 6-8
SHEET I-6
Ethernet twisted cables
1 cable for connecting on site the

administration tool to the serial port of
the UCT card
1 25-pin cable for connecting on site

the backup and downloading PC to the
parallel port of the UCT card
Stocko
6/2/06

Installation
6.6
List of consumables
This section lists the ingredients and consumables required for the various installation
procedures described in this chapter and the various maintenance operations described
in Chapter 7.
DESIGNATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
SHEET
1 mounting kit (2 brackets +8 screws)
SHEET I-2
SHEET I-5
Screws and captive nuts for fitting in a

rack
SHEET I-2
SHEET I-5
Dry non-fluffy cloth
SHEET P-1
Sheet of paper
SHEET P-1
Nylon cable ties
Self-locking head
Adhesive bases (for cable ties)

Label-holder nylon cable ties
Self-locking head
MNC
SHEET I-6
MNC
SHEET I-6
MNC
SHEET I-6
Adhesive labels for cables
Table 6.8
SHEET I-6
LIST OF CONSUMABLES
6.7
Installation procedures
6.7.1
Structure of the installation sheets

The installation sheets include (see Figure 6.1):
a header identifying the sheet and its title,
a set of headings giving logistic information relating to the task:
- any warnings required indicating the precautions to be taken relating to staff and
system safety,
- a short description of the task if required,
- the technical constraints relating to performing the task,
- the tool(s) required for performing the task,
- the ingredients and consumables used,
a main body, describing all the operations required to perform the installation covered
by the sheet:
- The installation procedures are in the form of a table with two columns:
X
the first column lists only the main actions to be performed,
the second column provides the detailed procedure to be carried out for the main
operation, and any comments.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-9
- The description of the installation operations is based on:

X
descriptions or characters of subassemblies described in the other chapters of

this manual; here the section concerned is provided as a reference,
actions to be performed on software tools connectable to the PBX; here the

software tool user guide is provided as a reference.
Page 6-10
6/2/06

Installation
AND
TYPE
NUMBER
SHEET I-X
"NAME OF THE TASK"
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
WARNING
SHORT
DESCRIPTION
OF
THE
INTRODUCTION
TASK
CONSTRAINT
TECHNICAL CONSTRAINTS
TOOL(S)
LIST OF TOOLS
REQUIRED
INGREDIENT(S)
/ CONSUMABLE(S)
LIST OF INGREDIENTS
AND CONSUMABLES USED
INSTALLATION
OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED
OUT TO INSTALL THE ITEM
Figure 6.1
PRESENTATION OF AN INSTALLATION SHEET (I SHEET)
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-11
6.7.2
List of operations
6.7.2.1
For a first installation

The first installation of a PBX requires carrying out, in the sequence defined, the
procedures described in the installation sheets listed in the following table.
PBX
DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATION
SHEET NO.
XD
Installing the subassemblies of an XD cabinet
SHEET I-1
Installing an XD cabinet
SHEET I-2
Starting up an XD installation
SHEET I-3
XL, XS and XS12
Table 6.8
6.7.2.2
Mise en place des sous-ensembles dun coffret (XL, XS et XS12)
SHEET I-4
Installing an (C/S/L) cabinet
SHEET I-5
Wiring (XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET I-6
Starting up the installation (XL, XS, XS12)
SHEET I-7
LIST OF PROCEDURES TO PERFORM DURING A PRE-INSTALLATION
Operations on a site already installed

The following table lists the various installations which can be performed on a site already
in place.
Adding a CLX card (XD, XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET I-8
Adding an equipment card (XD, XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET I-9
Adding an equipment card (XD, XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET I-9
Adding a daughterboard (XD PBX)
SHEET I-10
Adding a daughter board (XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET I-11
Adding an expansion cabinet (XD PBX)
SHEET I-12
Adding an expansion card (XL and XS)
SHEET I-13
Adding an ADS300XD power supply cable
SHEET I-14
Adding an UCT-D/RUCT-D CPU card
SHEET I-15
Replacing an XL power supply module
SHEET E-2
Replacing an XS power supply module
SHEET E-3
Replacing an XS12 power supply module
SHEET E-4
Replacing an XC power supply module
SHEET E-5
change des fusibles du module alimentation
SHEET E-8
Echange dune carte dextension (XL et XS)
SHEET E-12
Page 6-12
SHEET NO.
6/2/06

Installation
Table 6.8
6.7.2.3
change dune carte fille (XL et XS)
SHEET E-14
change standard dun coffret principal XL
SHEET E-16
change standard dun coffret principal XS
SHEET E-17
change standard dun coffret principal XS12
SHEET E-18
change standard dun coffret principal XC
SHEET E-19
Echange dun coffret dextension
SHEET E-21
OPERATIONS WHICH CAN BE PERFORMED ON A SITE ALREADY INSTALLED
Upgrading the software

The following table provides the list of sheets whose procedures can be performed as part
of a software upgrade.
Table 6.8
6.7.3
SHEET NO.
Upgrading the software (simplex mode)
SHEET I-16
Upgrading the software (duplex mode)
SHEET I-17
SOFTWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURES
General instructions
Apply all safety instructions (see section 6.1).
Before any operation on an already installed site, the PBX configuration must be saved on
a hard disk or diskette (see Section1.3, Documents[6] or [10]).
Immediately after installing and programming any new components, you should make a
second backup to save the system's new configuration.
For a first installation, we recommend installing the various expansion cards beforehand
at the factory, so that a hardware-configured PBX can be installed at the customers.
Each card has a label specifying its identification code, approval level, and warranty level.
If a card is damaged, return it to the supplier with a description of the problem (see 7.2.6).
6.7.4
For a first installation
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-13
SHEET I-1
INSTALLING THE SUBASSEMBLIES OF AN XD CABINET
AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
A cabinet can be supplied by the manufacturer, with or without its expansion card(s) and
main card(s).
The subassemblies can be installed at the factory or the installation site.
Basically, the main cabinet of an XD comprises a UCT-D main card, an IUCT-D card with
i-button and a power supply module (see cabinet reference in Section 7.2.7.6).
Depending on the configuration chosen by the client, it is necessary to add to the basic
cabinet:
a ventilation module, for a simplex configuration,
a power supply module, for a simplex configuration with secure power supply,
a power supply module and a UCT-D main card, for a duplex configuration.
Basically, the expansion cabinet of an XD comprises a RUCT-D main card, with a cable
for connecting the main cabinet, and a power supply module (see cabinet reference in
Section 7.2.7.6). Depending on the configuration chosen by the client, it is necessary to
add to the basic cabinet:
a ventilation module, for a simplex configuration,
a power supply module, for a simplex configuration with secure power supply,
a power supply module and a RUCT-D main card, for a duplex configuration.
CONTRAINTE
Refer to section 3.5 to check the constraints imposed by the hardware configuration
rules.
OUTIL(S) NCESSAIRE(S) LINSTALLATION

1 standard tool case
1Facom AZXR 10*75 Torx screwdriver for M3 screw (cards)
INGRDIENT(S)/CONSOMMABLE(S)
N/A
Page 6-14
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
Remove
plates.
the
blanking
Install the daughterboards

(on the main card(s) and/or
expansion cards).
DETAILS OF THE OPERATION / COMMENTS

Turn the blanking plate locks by a 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1), on the
front panel of the slots where the cards must be installed and
remove the plates.
If the cabinet is supplied from the factory fitted with its cards
corresponding to the customer's configuration:
- Check that the cards which can be fitted with daughterboards
(according to the customer's installation) are equipped correctly
(see Sections 4.3 to 4.10).
- For a duplex configuration, check that the voice memory
capacity is the same on the two UCT-D cards (the same number
of FMEVO daughterboards on the two UCT-Ds).
If the cabinet is not equipped with its subassemblies:
(according to the customer's installation) need to be fitted with
such cards (see sections4.3 to 4.10).
- If necessary, install the daughterboards on the cards requiring
them.
- Check that the cards fitted with configuration microswitches are
configured correctly (see sections 4.3 to 4.10).
If the cabinet is not equipped with its subassemblies
- For cards fitted with microswitches, lay the card on its antistatic
envelope and set the configuration microswitches correctly
before inserting it into the appropriate slot of the PBX (see
Sections4.3 to 4.10).
Set the configuration

microswitches on the
cards.
Insert the cards in the

appropriate slots of the
cabinet(s).
Slide the card along the card guides until it clicks into place.
Lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
This operation concerns only a simplex configuration.
If
it
is
a
simplex
configuration,
install
a
ventilation module.
Insert the ventilation module in its slot and push it fully home.
Secure the ventilation module onto the PBX structure using its two
captive screws.
Note : For a simplex configuration, the cabinet has only one main
card (UCT-D for the main cabinet and RUCT-D for an
expansion cabinet), an IUCT-D card (for the main cabinet),
a single power supply module and a ventilation module.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-15
OPERATION
If
it
is
a
simplex
configuration with secure
power supply, install a
second
power
supply
module.
If
it
is
a
duplex
configuration,
install
a
second
power
supply
module and a second main
card.

This operation concerns only a simplex configuration with
secure power supply.
Check that the power supply module to be installed is powered off

(I/O switch set to O).
Insert the power supply module in its slot and push it fully home.
Secure the power supply module onto the PBX structure using its
two captive screws.
Note :
For a simplex configuration with secure power supply,

the cabinet has only one main card (UCT-D for the main
cabinet and RUCT-D for an expansion cabinet), an
IUCT-D card (for the main cabinet), and two power
supply modules.
This operation concerns only a duplex configuration.
Install the power supply module.

- Check that the power supply module to be installed is powered
off (I/O switch set to O).
- Insert the power supply module in its slot and push it fully home.
- Secure the power supply module onto the PBX structure using
its two captive screws.
Install the main card:
- Slide the card along the card guides until it clicks into place.
- Lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
Note :
Remove
plates.
the
Page 6-16
6/2/06
blanking
For a duplex configuration, the cabinet has two main

cards (two UCT-Ds for the main cabinet and two RUCTDs for an expansion cabinet) and two power supply
modules.
Insert the blanks in the free slots and lock them by turning the
securing keys by a 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1).

Installation
SHEET I-2 INSTALLING AN XD CABINET

CONTRAINTE
The various installation options of an XD cabinet are given in the following table:
CABINET
STACKED
XD
With slip-free
feet
(1)
Table 6.8
INSIDE A CABINET
With mounting kit: 1 flush position
ON A
WALL
No
OPTIONS FOR INSTALLING A CABINET

(1)
The cabinets in a 2XD or 3XD version can be placed on a piece of furniture, on top
of one another.
A minimum clearance is required for the air flow: 55 mm on the left-hand side and at the
back of an XD cabinet.
Read the environment constraints described in section 6.3.2.

1 drill
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-17
1 mounting kit (2 brackets +8 screws)
Screws and captive nuts for fitting in a rack
INSTALLATION
Positioning on a piece of furniture
OPERATION
Secure the four slip-free feet on the lower
side of the cabinet.
Place the cabinet in position.
Installation in a rack
OPERATION

The brackets offer only one mounting option: flush with the
front panel of the rack
Fit the securing brackets on

the sides of the cabinets using
the screws supplied (4 per
bracket).
Identify the position in the rack

where the cabinet is to be
installed. On the brackets on
which the cabinet is to be
fitted, install the captive nuts
on the holes selected.
Lift the cabinet and align the

bracket attachment holes with
those of the rack.
Page 6-18
6/2/06

Installation
OPERATION
Fix the securing brackets on

the rack using screws.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-19
SHEET I-3 STARTING UP AN XD INSTALLATION

AVERTISSEMENT
Ground
The system must be correctly grounded in order to ensure user safety and protect against
lightning and voltage drops, and also to prevent service interruptions.
Resetting
Total reset erases programming
A Total reset erases any existing programmed data, and the system configures itself
automatically to the default settings.
A total reset should only be performed when required, for example if installing new
software.
PRSENTATION
The administration tool is used as an interface with the PBX, for programming and viewing
parameters.
After the hardware installation, during a first installation, the system must be initialised
before starting programming. After a total reset, a resident program automatically
configures the system using the default parameters. In the process, the installed cards are
activated and recognised.
After commissioning the system, you can view the system information and check that the
equipment is operating properly.
CONTRAINTE
See the safety instructions (see section 6.1.2).
Protection against mains failures
See the constraints relating to the external battery (see section 3.7.6.4).
Resetting
The installer access password is needed to carry out a total reset

1 administration tool (see section 5.6).
N/a.
Page 6-20
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
Warning :The switch is grounded for safety reasons and this connection should be made before any
others.
OPERATION
Connect the PBX to the
ground connector.
Install the battery cabinet.
Configure
administration
tool.
the
Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the two battery leads.
Make sure the polarity is correct.
Connect the battery to the "48V BATT." connector located at the
back of the cabinet.
Connect the administration tool to the IUCT-D card (refer to the
connection characteristics of the administration tool, section 6.5).
Configure the communication software of the administration tool
(see section 5.6.3.1).
Attention : The power supply module(s) must be powered off
when installing the power supply cable(s)..
Never connect network lines while the mains power
cable is unplugged.
Before powering on the cabinet, check that all the following tasks
have been performed:
Power on the PBX.
- all line connections are installed,

- For an IP connection, the IP port of the UCT-D card or IP
gateway card has been connected to the LAN,
- a digital telephone has been connected to the PBX,
- all equipment has been connected to a grounded power point.
For a PBX with several cabinets, connect one end of the power
cable(s) to the power supply module(s) of the expansion
cabinets and the other end to a grounded mains power point.
Connect one end of the power cable(s) to the power supply
module(s) of the main cabinet and the other end to a grounded
mains power point.
For a PBX with several cabinets, first power on the expansion
cabinet(s) by setting the I/O switch of the power supply
module(s) to I.
Set the I/O switch on the main cabinet power supply module(s)
to I.
Check that:
- the yellow and green indicators on the front panel of the cabinet
subassemblies are lit, and that no red indicator is on (refer to
Sections4.3 to 4.13 to check that the operating conditions
shown by the indicators are correct),
- the start-up tests are displayed on the administration tool.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-21
OPERATION

See section 1.3, Document [2].
The system is initialised correctly and operates normally when the

set displays show:
Carry out a "total" reset on
the administration tool.
Monday 01.01.00:00 am.

The equipment is now in service using the default configuration
data.
Note :During initial start-up of a duplex configuration, by default,

the active card is the UCT-D card on slot A (see Figure
3.28).
On the administration tool (see section 1.3, Document [2]):
Display the software release number:

- the System Processor (SP) software
- the application software,
- the software of the CLX cards.
Display the identification number of the IUCT-D card's i-Button.
Note :The identification number of the i-Button (ID) is labelled on

Check the hardware
installation.
Configure the installation.

Back up the
customer configuration.
Page 6-22
6/2/06
the back panel of the main cabinet. It is stored in a

removable software dongle like the i-button of the IUCT-D
card. This identifier is required to obtain the software key
codes for the functions.
Note the system's identification code. It will be useful if you need

to restore an upgraded system after a system restart.
Also note the software releases. They must be provided to
technical support if required.
Display network line status.
Display allocation of preconfigured users.
Display user status.
Declare the PBX configuration data according to the clients
installation parameters (system parameters, IP and X.25 gateway
access, multi-site IP links, etc.).
See section1.3, Document [10].

Installation
SHEET I-4 INSTALLING SUBASSEMBLIES IN A CABINET (XL, XS AND XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
A cabinet can be supplied by the manufacturer with or without its expansion cards (XL,
XS, and XS12 cabinets) and its main card.
The subassemblies can be installed at the factory or the installation site.
CONTRAINTE
rules.

1 standard tool case (for the XS cabinet).
1Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover)
1Facom AZXR 10*75 Torx screwdriver for M3 screw (cards)
N/A
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
Open the cabinet (XS and

XS12).
Install the daughterboards

(on the main card and/or
expansion cards).

This operation concerns only XS and XS12 PBXs.
Unscrew the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet,
Slide the PBX cover to the back.
(see Sections 4.6 to 4.13).
If the cabinet is not equipped with its subassemblies:
(according to the customer's installation) need to be fitted with
such cards (see sections4.12 to 4.13).
- If necessary, install the daughterboards on the cards requiring
them.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-23
OPERATION
Set the configuration

microswitches on the
cards.
For a non-rackable XS12

with backplane (optional),
position the backplane.
Connect any expansion

ribbon cable on the main
cabinet (XS).

- Check that the cards fitted with configuration microswitches are
configured correctly (see sections 4.12 to 4.13).
If the cabinet is not equipped with its subassemblies
- For cards fitted with microswitches, lay the card on its antistatic
envelope and set the configuration microswitches correctly
before inserting it into the appropriate slot of the PBX (see
Sections 4.12 to 4.13).
This operation concerns only the non-rackable XS12 PBX
(optional backplane).
Connect the backplane to the main card.
This operation concerns only the XS main cabinet
If it is the main cabinet of a PBX with two cabinets, connect the
expansion ribbon cable (supplied with the expansion cabinet)
linking the CPU card to the expansion cable connector.
Note : In the expansion cabinet, the expansion ribbon cable is

already connected.
OPERATION
Insert the cards in the

appropriate slots of the
cabinet(s).
XL, rackable XS and rackable XS12 PBX

For an RJ card, lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks
(see Section4.1).
Non-rackable XS and XS12 PBXs
For an ST card:
- remove the card's plastic handle,
- insert the card in the backplane,
- fit the card on spacers,
- screw in the metal blanking plates on the front panel of the
cards,
- put the plastic cover and plug in place on the blanking plates.
For an RJ card:
- lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Section4.1 ),
- put the plastic cover in place. There are holes provided for
inserting the locks. Once the plastic cover is in place the plate
cannot be unlocked.
This operation concerns only the ST type XS PBX.
see sheet SHEET I-6.
Fit the wiring (ST type XS).
Page 6-24
6/2/06
Note : An XL PBX (ST and RJ type) or XS PBX (RJ or rackable

XS12 type) can be wired once the cabinet is in place. For
an ST type XS PBX fit the wiring before closing the
cabinet.

Installation
OPERATION
Close the cabinet.

ST type XL PBXs
Place the blanking plates:
- In a cabinet with ST cards, fit the blanking plates on each
cabinet on the front panel of the rows of cards.
- Lock the blanking plates by turning the securing keys by a 1/4
turn (see section 4.1).
In the empty slots,
empty slots,
- put the plastic cover and plug in place on the blanking plates.
Secure the cover,
- fit the cover slightly to the rear of the cabinet and push it
forward,
- tighten the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
- If necessary, secure the screws on the sides with brackets.
Rackable XS and XS12 PBXs
In the empty slots,
- Insert the metal blanks and lock them by turning the securing
keys by a 1/4 turn.
Secure the cover,
- fit the cover slightly to the rear of the cabinet and push it
forward,
- Tighten the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-25
SHEET I-5 INSTALLING AN (C/S/L) CABINET

CONTRAINTE
The various installation options of a NeXspan C/S/L cabinet are given in the following
table:
CABINET
STACKED
INSIDE A CABINET
ON A WALL
XC
With slip-free
feet
With 2-position mounting kit

(flush and recessed)
Vertically (3)
XS and
XS12
With slip-free
feet
(1) (2)
With 2-position mounting kit:

Flush position
Vertically (3)
Recessed position (except

for rackable XS and XS12 )
XL
Table 6.8
With 2-position mounting kit

(flush and recessed)
No
OPTIONS FOR INSTALLING A CABINET

(1)
When placed on a piece of furniture, a CPU and a PC console can be stacked on the
XS and XS12 cabinet, using a mechanical accessory if required.
(2)
The cabinets in a 2XS, 2XL or 3XL version can be placed on a piece of furniture, on
Page 6-26
With slip-free
feet (2)
6/2/06

Installation
top of one another.

(3)
When mounting a cabinet on the wall (XS, XS12 or XC), the front panel of the
cabinet may face upwards or downwards. However, we recommend turning it
upwards.
A minimum clearance is required for the air flow:

55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an XC cabinet,
55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an e-diatonis XS12 cabinet,
55 mm on the left-hand and right-hand sides of an XS cabinet,
55 mm on the left-hand side and back of an XL cabinet.
Read the environment constraints described in section 6.3.2.

1 drill
1 mounting kit (2 brackets + 4 screws)
4 pins and 4 securing screws for wall mounting
Screws and captive nuts for fitting in a rack
INSTALLATION
Wall mounting (XS, XS12 and XC cabinets)
OPERATION
Mark the drill points on the wall using the
drilling template supplied with the mounting
kit.
Drill the holes. Insert the wall plugs adapted
to the type of wall.
Fix the two securing brackets on the wall
using screws (two per bracket).
Fix the cabinet on the securing brackets
using the screws in the mounting kit (2 per
bracket).
Attention : The front panel of the cabinet
See Table 6.9
can
face
upwards
or
downwards,
though
we
recommend turning it upwards.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-27
Positioning on a piece of furniture

OPERATION
Secure the four slip-free feet on the lower
side of the cabinet.
Place the cabinet in position.
Installation in a rack
OPERATION

The brackets provide for two fitting options: flush with the front
panel of the rack or recessed inside the rack (see Table 6.9).
Fit the securing brackets on

the sides of the cabinets using
the screws supplied (2 per
bracket).
screw (2 units)
Identify the position in the rack

where the cabinet is to be
installed. On the brackets on
which the cabinet is to be
fitted, install the captive nuts
on the holes selected.
Lift the cabinet and align the

bracket attachment holes with
those of the rack.
Fix the securing brackets on

the rack using screws.
Page 6-28
6/2/06

Installation
SHEET I-6 WIRING (XL, XS AND XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/a.
PRSENTATION
On an RJ cabinet, all connections are made on the front panel of the various
subassemblies of the cabinet.
CONTRAINTE
Always use the cable recommended (see section "Installation and wiring" on each subassembly to install: 4.6 to 4.13).
Use the correct cable lengths and avoid coiling excess cable inside the rack
Always label cables and keep a record of the cabling.

Pliers for nylon cable ties
Nylon cable ties
Label-holder nylon cable ties
Adhesive labels for cables
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
Remove the blanking plates

(ST type XL).
This operation concerns only the ST type XL PBX.

Turn the blanking plate locks by a 1/4 turn and remove the plates
(see section 4.1).
Measure the length of cable

required.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-29
OPERATION

Insert the wires to be connected into the guides provided (pin A
and pin B).
Exert pressure with multigrip pliers when inserting the wires
(insulation displacement connections).
For ST cards: install the

insulation
displacement
connectors at the end of the
cables to be connected to
the card.
Wire routing
Centering piece
Pin A
Route the cables.
Pair
Pressure
connector open
insert the wires
Connect the associated

devices to the various PBX
cards by connecting the
cables to the appropriate
communication ports.
Label the cables and enter
the details in the cabling
inventory.
Pin B
Pair
apply pressure
connector closed
with wires inserted
For each of the cards, refer to their connection characteristics

(see sections 4.6 to 4.13).
In an XL cabinet, lower the cables down inside the cabinet.

In an XS cabinet, route the cables to the right-hand side of the
cabinet (location of the cable clamp).
Check that the cables are

not too tight.
Bundle and tie together
cables of the same type.
Page 6-30
6/2/06

Installation
OPERATION

On an ST type XL cabinet
Install the blanking plates on each cabinet on the front panel of

the rows of cards by passing the cable braid through the hole
provided.
Crimp the cables using the hatch located at the bottom of each
blanking plate.
Lock the blanking plates by turning the securing keys by a 1/4
On an ST type XS cabinet
Screw the cable clamp routing the cable braid under the cable
clamp.
Install the special blanking plate for cable routing.
Remove the blanking plates.
Lock the blanking plate by turning the securing keys by a 1/4

Put the plastic cover in place. There are holes provided for
inserting the locks. Once the plastic cover is in place the plate
cannot be unlocked.
Note : Do not tie the temporary cables.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-31
SHEET I-7 STARTING UP THE INSTALLATION (XL, XS, XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
Ground
The system must be correctly grounded in order to ensure user safety and protect against
lightning and voltage drops, and also to prevent service interruptions.
Resetting
Total reset erases programming
A Total reset erases any existing programmed data, and the system configures itself
automatically to the default settings.
A total reset should only be performed when required, for example if installing new
software.
PRSENTATION
The administration tool is used as an interface with the PBX, for programming and viewing
parameters.
After the hardware installation, during a first installation, the system must be initialised
before starting programming. After a total reset, a resident program automatically
configures the system using the default parameters. In the process, the installed cards are
activated and recognised.
After commissioning the system, you can view the system information and check that the
equipment is operating properly.
CONTRAINTE
See the safety instructions (see section 6.1.2).
Protection against mains failures
See the constraints relating to the external battery (see section 3.7.6.4).
Resetting
The installer access password is needed to carry out a total reset

N/a.
Page 6-32
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
Warning :The switch is grounded for safety reasons and this connection should be made before any
others.
OPERATION
Connect the PBX to the
ground socket (XL, XS
and XS12).
This operation concerns only XL, XS and XS12 PBXs.
Install the battery cabinet

(XL, XS and XS12).
Configure the
administration tool
(For an XC PBX, the battery is integrated in the cabinet)

Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the battery cable to the 48 V BATT. connector on the
power supply module:
- located on the front panel of the power supply module on an XL
PBX,
- located at the back of an XS and XS12 PBX.
Connect the administration tool to the UCT card (refer to the
connection characteristics of the administration tool, section6.5).
Configure the communication software of the administration tool
(see section 5.6.3.1).
Attention : Power supply to the PBX must be switched off while
installing the power cable.
cable is unplugged.
Power on the PBX.

- in the case of an IP connection, the IP port of the UCT card or IP
gateway card has been connected to the LAN,
- a digital telephone has been connected to the PBX,
For a PBX with several cabinets, connect one end of the power
cable to the power supply module of the expansion cabine(ts)
and the other end to a grounded mains power point.
Connect one end of the power cable to the power supply module
of the main cabinet and the other end to a grounded mains power
point.
cabinet(s) by setting the I/O switch of the power supply module
to position I.
Set the I/O switch on the main cabinet power supply module to
position I.
Check that:
- the yellow (only for XL cabinet) and green indicators located on
the front panel of the cabinet subassemblies are lit, and that no
red indicator is on (refer to sections 4.6 to 4.13 to check that the
operating conditions shown by the indicators are correct),
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-33
OPERATION
Carry out a "total" reset on

the administration tool.

The system is initialised correctly and operates normally when the

set displays show:
Monday 01.01.00:00 am.
The equipment is now in service using the default configuration
data.
For each card, perform the card's operation test see section 7.6).
On the administration tool (see section 1.3, Document [2]):
Display the software release number:
- the System Processor (SP) software
- the application software,
- the software of the CLX cards.
Display the identifier number of the UCT card's i-Button.
Check the hardware

installation.
Configure the installation.

Back up the
customer configuration.
6.7.5
the back panel of the main cabinet. It is stored in the CPU

card's removable i-Button software dongle. You will need the
ID to obtain the key codes to unlock functions.
Note the system's identification code. It will be useful if you need

to restore an upgraded system after a system restart.
Also note the software releases. They must be provided to
technical support if required.
Display network line status.
Display allocation of preconfigured users.
Display user status.
Declare the PBX configuration data according to the clients
installation parameters (system parameters, IP and X.25 gateway
access, multi-site IP links, etc.).
See section 1.3, Document [6] and [10].
Operations on a site already installed
Page 6-34
Note :The identification number of the i-Button (ID) is labelled on
6/2/06

Installation
SHEET I-8 ADDING A CLX CARD (XD, XL, XS AND XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/a.
PRSENTATION
The PBX can be fitted with one or more expansion cards to increase the system capacity.
In a PBX, it is possible to install all types of expansion cards according to the existing
configuration and hardware configuration rules.
Attention : Except for the IPS card, a CLX card is only authorised in the main cabinet of a PBX.
CONTRAINTE
rules.
Check any particular installation and wiring details for the card to be added
(see Sections4.6 to 4.13).
The configuration data needs to be changed if the system is expanded. Before adding
new components, the data must be saved on hard disk or floppy.
Immediately after installing and programming any new components, you should make
a second backup, to save the system's new configuration.

1 administration tool (see section 5.6) with the backup software (see section5.6.3)
1 Facom AZXR 10*75 Torx screwdriver for M3 screw (card)
1 Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover) (except for XD PBX).
N/a.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-35
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Check the compatibility of

the card to be installed.
Power off the PBX (except

if an LD4N/LD4X card is
added to an XD, XL,
rackable XS or rackable
XS12 PBX).

Precautionary operation to be carried out if there is no existing
copy (which is the case when previous installation operations
have been carried out and the procedures followed).
See section 1.3, Document [6] or [10].
In the case of remote operation, call the remote management
operator before starting the operation.
Connect and reset the administration tool (see section 5.6).
Check the compatibility between the card to be installed and its
slot in the main or expansion cabinet (see section3.5).
Check that the cards fitted with configuration microswitches are
configured correctly (see sections 4.12 to4.13).
Check that the cards which can be fitted with daughterboards
If required, install the daughterboards on the cards requiring them.
I/O switch on the power supply module set to O.
For a system with 2 or 3 cabinets, first power off the main cabinet,
then the expansion cabinet(s).
Note : (1) The LD4N/LD4X card can be hot plugged in a working

XD, XL PBX, a rackable XS PBX, or rackable XS12 PBX.
(2) It is advisable to stop the IPS card before
powering off the PBX.
Access the card's slot.
Page 6-36
6/2/06
XD, XL, rackable XS and rackable XS12 PBX

Remove the blanking plate:
- Turn the plate 1/4 turn locks by 1/4 turn (see section 4.1).
- Remove the blanking plate of the slot where the card is to be
installed.
Open the cabinet:
- Unscrew the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet,
- Slide the PBX cover to the back.
To add an RJ card, remove the blanking plate:
- remove the plug and plastic cover from the front panel of the
empty slot,
- unscrew the metal blanking plate and remove it.

Installation
OPERATION
Insert the card into its slot.
Install the cable.
Power on the PBX (XD, XL,

XS12 PBX already
powered on if an LD4N/
LD4X is added).

(see Section4.1).
For an ST card:
- fit the card on spacers.
For an RJ card:
- place the plastic cover on the front panel of the card. There are
holes provided for inserting the locks. Once the plastic cover is
in place the card cannot be unlocked.
For the ST card, see SHEET I-6
For the RJ card, install the cable on the front side of the card.
to position I.
position I.
For a card fitted with indicators, check that the yellow and/or green
indicators on the front panel are on, and that no red indicator is on
(refer to Sections4.6 to 4.13 to check that the operating
conditions indicated by the LEDs are correct).
Note : The LD4N/LD4X card can be hot plugged in an XD, XL

Power on the card from the
administration tool.
Program any additional
equipment associated with
the card.
Perform the card operating
test.
Back up the customer
configuration.
PBX, a rackable XS PBX, or rackable XS12 PBX in

operation.
See section 1.3, Documents [0], [1] and [2].

See section 8.7.
ST type XL PBXs
Close the cabinet
Install the blanking plate on the front panel of the cabinet by

feeding the cable braid through the hole provided.
Crimp the cables using the hatch located at the bottom of the
blanking plate.
Lock the blanking plate by turning the securing keys by a 1/4 turn
(see section 4.1).
Close the cabinet:
- Fit the cover slightly to the rear of the cabinet and push it
forward.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-37
SHEET I-9 ADDING AN EQUIPMENT CARD (XD, XL, XS AND XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/a.
PRSENTATION
In a PBX, it is possible to install all types of expansion cards according to the existing
configuration and hardware configuration rules.
An equipment card can be installed in the main cabinet or expansion cabinet of a PBX.
CONTRAINTE
rules.

1 Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover) (except for XD PBX).
N/A
Page 6-38
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION.
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer


if an LA16X, LA16X-8,
LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X
or LH16X-8 card is added
to an XD, XL, rackable XS
or rackable XS12 PBX).

Check the compatibility between the card to be installed and its
slot in the main or expansion cabinet (see section3.5).
Check that the cards fitted with configuration microswitches are
configured correctly (see Sections4.12 to 4.13).
Check that the cards which can be fitted with daughterboards
Note : (1) LA16X, LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X or LH16X-8

can be hot plugged in an XD, XL, rackable XS or rackable
XS12 PBX in operation.
- Turn the plate 1/4 turn locks by 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1).
- Remove the blanking plate from the slot where the card is to be
installed
Open the cabinet:
For an RJ card, remove the blanking plate:
empty slot,
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-39
OPERATION
Fit the wiring.

XS12
PBX
already
powered on if an LA16X,
LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X8, LH16X or LH16X-8 card
is added).
Check the card indicators.


(see Section4.1).
For an ST card:
- fit the card on spacers using the screws provided.
For an RJ card:
For the ST card, see SHEET I-6
For RJ cards, install the cable on the cards front panel.
For a PBX with two or three cabinets, first power on the expansion
to position I.
position I.
Note : LA16X, LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X and LH16X-8

can be hot plugged in an XD, XL, rackable XS or rackable
(refer to Sections4.6 to 4.13 to check that the operating conditions
indicated by the LEDs are correct).

lines or sets associated
with the card.
test.
configuration.
Page 6-40
6/2/06
For a subscriber card, assign a directory number to each extension

and put all the extensions in service (see section 1.3, Documents
[0]).
See section 8.7.

Installation
OPERATION
Close the cabinet.

ST type XL PBXs

blanking plate.
(see section 4.1).
Close the cabinet:
forward.
- Tighten the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-41
SHEET I-10
ADDING A DAUGHTERBOARD (XD PBX)
AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
Adding a daughterboard extends the capacity of an expansion or main card.
CONTRAINTE

1 administration tool (see section 5.6) with the backup software (see section5.6.3).
N/a.
Page 6-42
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
On an RJ card
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX (unless

a daughterboard is being
added to an LD4N/LD4X
card).
If the card can be hot
unplugged, power it off
from the administration
tool.
Disconnect the cables.
Pull out the card from its
slot.
Install
the
daughterboard(s) on the
appropriate connectors.
Check the configuration of
the card.
Lock the card.
Connect the card's external
cables to the front panel.
Power off the PBX (PBX
already powered on if a
daughterboard is being
added to an LD4N/LD4X
card).
Modify any parameters of
the card with the
test.
configuration.

Note :It is advisable to stop the IPS card before powering off the
PBX.
See Section 1.3, Documents [10].

Disconnect the external cables from the front panel of the card,
and mark the cables for refitting.
Use the 1/4 turn locks to remove the card from its housing
(see Figure 4.1).
See sections 4.12 to 4.13.
Installing a daughterboard on a card may require using spacers.
Daughterboards are usually screwed onto the cards.
If required, change the position of the microswitches according to
the new configuration of the card (see sections 4.12 to 4.13).
Use the 1/4 turn locks to lock the cards (see Figure 4.1).

cabinet(s) by setting the I/O switch(es) of the power supply
module(s) to position I.
Set the I/O switch(es) on the main cabinet power supply
See section 7.6.2
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-43
On an UCT-D card
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX

slot.
Install
the

Lock the card.
Power on the PBX.
the card with the
test.
configuration.
Page 6-44
6/2/06

PBX.
(see Figure 4.1).
See section 4.3.
Attention : For a duplex configuration, the voice memory
capacity must be the same on the two UCT-D

cards (the same number of FMEVO
daughterboards on the two UCT-Ds).

cabinet(s) by setting the I/O switch(es) of the power supply
Set the I/O switch(es) on the main cabinet power supply
See section 7.6.2
See Section1.3, Document [10].

Installation
SHEET I-11 ADDING A DAUGHTER BOARD (XL, XS AND XS12)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
Adding a daughterboard extends the capacity of an expansion or main card.
CONTRAINTE

1 administration tool (see section 5.6) with the backup software (see section5.6.3).
1 Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover).
N/a.
INSTALLATION
On an ST card
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX

See section 1.3, Documents [2] or [10].
ST type XL PBXs
- Turn the plate 1/4 turn locks by 1/4 turn (see section 4.1).
installed.
ST type XS PBXs
Open the cabinet:
- Unscrew the two securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-45
OPERATION

slot.
Install
the
the card.
Fit the wiring.
Power on the PBX.
the
card
with
the
test.
configuration.

Disconnect the external cables from the card and mark the cables
for refitting.
In the case of an XL cabinet, use the extraction handle to pull the
card out of its slot (see section 4.1).
In the case of an XS cabinet, unscrew the spacers maintaining the
card, and extract the backplane.
In the case of an XL cabinet, slide the card along the card guides
until it clicks into place.
In the case of an XS cabinet, insert the card in the backplane, and
secure it on spacers.
See Sheet SHEET I-6.
to position I.
position I.
See section 7.6.2.

On an RJ card
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX
Access the card's slot

(non-rackable
XS
and
XS12).
Page 6-46
6/2/06

PBX.
This operation concerns only non-rackable XS and XS12 PBXs.
Open the cabinet:

Installation
OPERATION

slot.
Install
the
the card.
Lock the card.

For an XL, rackable XS or XS12 cabinet:
(see Section 4.1).
For a non-rackable XS and XS12 cabinet:
Remove the plastic cover from the front panel of the card,
Unlock the card (see section 4.1) and pull it out from the
backplane.
For an XL, rackable XS or XS12 cabinet:
For a non-rackable XS or XS12 cabinet:
Insert the card in the backplane.
Use the 1/4 turn locks to lock the cards (see section 4.1).
For a non-rackable XS and XS12 PBX, install the plastic cover on
the front panel of the card. There are holes provided for inserting
the locks. Once the plastic cover is in place the card cannot be
unlocked.

Power on the PBX.
the card with the
test.
configuration.
Close the cabinet (nonrackable XS and XS12).

to position I.
position I.
See section 7.6.2
This operation concerns only the non-rackable
XS and XS12 PBXs
Secure the cover:
forward.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-47
SHEET I-12 ADDING AN EXPANSION CABINET (XD PBX)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
CONTRAINTE

1 administration tool with the backup software (see section 5.6.3)
1 (simplex configuration or 2 (duplex configuration) cables for connecting the basic
cabinet (delivered with the expansion cabinet).
N/a.
Page 6-48
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
OPERATION

configuration.
Power off the PBX.

For a twin cabinet system, first power off the main cabinet, then
the expansion cabinet.
PBX.
Fit the expansion cabinet

subassemblies.
Fit the wiring.
Put the expansion cabinet
in place.
Connect the mains cable.
Power on the PBX.
Check that the software

has taken the expansion
cabinet into account.
See SHEET I-1.

Install the cable on the front panel of the expansion cabinet cards.
Connect the expansion cabinet to the main cabinet using the
connection cable(s), according to the simplex or duplex
configuration of the cabinets (see Sections 4.5.4.1 and 4.5.4.1).
See SHEET I-2.
Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the battery to the "48V BATT." connector located at the
back of the XD cabinet.
Connect one end of the mains cable to the power supply
module(s) of the expansion abinet and the other end to a
grounded mains power point.
Attention : The PBX must be powered off when installing the
mains cable.
cable is unplugged.
Power on the PBX:
- first power on the expansion cabinet(s) by setting the I/O
switch of the power supply module(s) to position I.
- Set the I/O switch(es) on the main cabinet power supply
Check that:
Sections4.3 to 4.13 to check that the operating conditions
Check on the administration tool (see section 1.3, Document [2]).
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-49
OPERATION
Program the new
subassemblies on the
Check the hardware
installation.
Page 6-50
6/2/06

For each card, perform the card's operation test (see section 7.6).

Installation
SHEET I-13 ADDING AN EXPANSION CARD (XL AND XS)

AVERTISSEMENT
N/A
PRSENTATION
CONTRAINTE

1 cable for connecting to the base cabinet (supplied with an expansion cabinet): "Y"
cable on XL cabinet.
N/a.
INSTALLATION
OPERATION

configuration.
Power off the PBX.

For a twin cabinet system, first power off the main cabinet, then
the expansion cabinet.
PBX.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-51
OPERATION
Access the subassemblies

of the expansion cabinet
(ST type XL and nonrackable XS).
Fit the expansion cabinet

subassemblies.

ST type XL PBXs
Remove the blanking plate from the front panel of the expansion
cabinet, after turning the plate securing locks 1/4 turn (see section
4.1).
Non-rackable XS PBXs
Unscrew the two securing screws of the upper cover, at the back
of the cabinet.
Remove the upper cover by sliding it backwards.
Note : For an XS expansion PBX, check that the extension ribbon

cable connecting the CPU card to the expansion cable
connector is connected.
Fit the wiring on the front panel of the expansion cabinet cards
(see Sheet SHEET I-6).
connection cable.
- Example of XL cabinet connected to its two expansion cabinets:
BASE
CABINET
EXPANSION
CABINET
EXPANSION
CABINET
PBX_MATRIX_COF_RACCOR-EXT_MONT_01_01
Install the cables.
Attention : For a non-rackable XS cabinet, do not connect the

mains cable. The cabinet must first be closed.
ST type XL PBXs
Fit the blanking plates on the new cabinet:
- In a cabinet fitted with ST cards, install on each cabinet the
blanking plates on the front panel of the card rows feeding the
cable braid through the hole provided.
- Crimp the cables using the hatch located at the bottom of each
blanking plate.
Close the cabinet (ST type

XL, and non-rackable XS).
Page 6-52
6/2/06
For an ST type XS PBX, install the blanking plates:
cards,
- fit the plastic covers and plugs on the blanking plates.
In the empty slots (ST and RJ PBXs),
empty slots,
Secure the cover,
forward.

Installation
OPERATION
Put the expansion cabinet
in place.
Connect the mains cable

(once the cabinet is closed
if it is a non-rackable XS
PBX).

Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the battery cable to the 48 V BATT. connector on the
power supply module:
- located on the front panel of the power supply module on an XL
PBX,
- located at the back of the cabinet on an XS PBX.
Connect one end of the mains cable to the power supply module
of the expansion cabinet (XL) or directly to the expansion cabinet
(XS) and the other end to a grounded mains power point.
Attention : The PBX must be powered off when installing the
mains cable.
cable is unplugged.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-53
SHEET I-14 ADDING AN ADS300XD POWER SUPPLY CABLE

AVERTISSEMENT
N/a.
PRSENTATION
An ADS300XD power supply module is added to a simplex XD cabinet in order to secure
the PBX operation. It is installed in place of the VADS ventilation module. The cabinet thus
has two ADS300XD power supply modules.
When one power supply module is out of service, the second power supply module takes
over the entire load (only one power supply is enough to supply the power required by a
cabinet under full load). This switchover is transparent for the cabinet equipment. There
is, thus, no service interruption.
CONTRAINTE
N/a.

1 standard tool case.
N/a.
Page 6-54
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
customer

Check
the
functional
technical state of the power
supply module to be
installed.
Check that the functional technical state of the new power supply
module is compatible with the old one (see Section1.3, Document
[9]).
Back up the
configuration.
Warning :The operator has about 90 seconds to make the
Remove
module.
the
ventilation
Install the power supply

module.
Power on the power supply
module.
Perform the power supply
operating test.
replacement. After 90 seconds, the cabinet is automatically

powered off.
Unscrew the two securing screws on the front panel of the
ventilation module.
Remove the ventilation module using its handles.
Check that the power supply module to be installed is powered off
(I/O switch set to O).
two captive screws.
Connect the mains cable on the front panel of the power supply
module.
"I/O" switch to "I".
See SHEET T-1.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-55
SHEET I-15 ADDING AN UCT-D/RUCT-D CPU CARD

AVERTISSEMENT
N/a.
PRSENTATION
A second UCT-D CPU card is added to a simplex XD main cabinet (and RUCT-D for an
expansion cabinet) to secure the PBX operation. Two specific slots (see Figure 3.28) are
reserved for the installation of CPU cards.
In a configuration with two CPU cards (duplex configuration), one card is active and the
other passive. In case of hardware failure on the active card, the passive card takes over
and becomes active.
CONTRAINTE
rules.

N/a.
Page 6-56
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Install the cables.

Check the compatibility of the card to be inserted (UCT-D/RUCTD) and its slot in the (main/expansion) cabinet.
If daughterboards are fitted on the card (depending on the
customers installation), check that they are correctly installed
(see Section 4.3) and that the voice memory capacity is the same
on the two UCT-D cards (the same number of
FMEVO
daughterboards on both UCT-D cards).
installed.
If required, install the cables on the front panel of the UCT-D card.
For a duplex configuration comprising one or two expansion
cabinets, a RUCT-D card is added to each expansion cabinet.
connection cable and respecting the colour code (see
Sections 4.5.4.1 and4.5.4.2).
Note : A cable for connecting the main cabinet is provided

with each RUCT-D card.
Note : The UCT-D/RUCT-D card can be hot-plugged in an

operational XD PBX.
Attention : Wait until the passive card is completely loaded
and initialised
configuration.
Activate
the
duplex
configuration
from the
before
validating
the
duplex
A specific menu (see Section 1.3, Document [2]) allows you to

modify the PBX configuration (simplex/duplex). Selecting duplex
configuration enables the system to take into account the second
UCT-D (and RUCT-D) card and ensure as soon as possible full
synchronisation between the active card and the new passive card
(software, data, announcements, IVR, etc.). This passive card
then becomes active during the next switchover.
Note : There is a switchover when a hardware anomaly is

detected on the active UCT-D card, or if the card is
removed intentionally. It can also be triggered through by
the MMC (from the administration tool in the restart
request menu, see Section 1.3, Document [2]).
In the same menu check that the passive card has actually been
taken into account by the system (status: In service).
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-57
OPERATION
equipment associated with
the card.
test.
configuration.
6.7.5.1
See section7.6.2.
Upgrading the software
Page 6-58

6/2/06

Installation
SHEET I-16 UPGRADING THE SOFTWARE (SIMPLEX MODE)

This procedure applies to a NeXspan XD PBX in simplex mode and to a NeXspan C/S/L
PBX.
AVERTISSEMENT
Loading a new software release is performed without traffic
While upgrading the software, all internal and outgoing calls are suspended throughout
procedure.
System backup
Back up the customer configuration on floppies before each software upgrade.
PRSENTATION
Expanding the hardware increases the capacity of the system, whereas upgrading the
software adds new functions to the configuration and/or allows you to follow the
development of the cards used by the PBX.
The PBX software is initially loaded at the factory. It is then upgraded when necessary.
The software upgrade is performed from a PC connected to the UCT card
(see section5.6).
This operation allows new PBX software releases to be loaded.
The PBX software package is in two parts:
the System software which initialises and configures the processor card
the Application software which contains the PBX functions (configuration programs
and installation parameters)
The software package also contains the parameters specific to each country.
Software loading is secured by a particular protocol and can be performed:
via the parallel port of the UCT card,
via an IP port through:
- a twisted cable,
- a LAN,
- a WAN1,
through an ISDN network1.
For an installation through the ISDN or Ethernet network.
You can upgrade the PBX application software by downloading it, without losing the
customer's configuration data. Downloading is a series of exchanges between the
application installed on a remote server and the PBX. A PC connected through an
1.Take into consideration the site access rules.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-59
ISDN_T interface or an Ethernet network through the TCP/IP protocol, is used as a

remote server.
Downloading consists in transferring the following into the memory of the PBX's main
card:
the software package, including the new application software and configuration data for
the site.
the time at which the system's upgrade is to be performed.
At the prefixed time, the PBX restarts automatically by transferring the software into the
memory of its central processing unit, then performs a reset in order to take into
account the new application software.
Traffic stopped during automatic reset following the downloading of a new
software release
During automatic reset, at the present time, no internal or external communications are
possible during the process.
CONTRAINTE
It is only possible to upgrade release n-1 of the software (never release n-2).
For a system through the ISDN network
Downloading requires an ISDN network card.
The X25 parameters on the PBX side are those of the default configuration of the
remote identifier IDENT_0.

For an installation on site
The software upgrade kit.
For a system through a network
a remote server
N/A.
Page 6-60
6/2/06

Installation
INSTALLATION
Remotely (see section 1.3, Document [6] or [10]).
OPERATION
Prepare the administration

tool
Activate the link.

Run
the
software
downloading procedure.

For an installation through an ISDN network, activate the link
between the ISDN network interface card and the remote software
server.
For an installation through an Ethernet network, activate the link
between the IP gateway card and the remote software server.
Run the procedure for loading the system and application software
and the updated customer data.
Locally (see section 1.3, Document [6] or [10]).

OPERATION

tool

configuration.
Load the system software.
Load the application
software.
Install and transfer the VUs
to PC.
Restore the customer
configuration.
Reset the PBX.

Note :The integrated IP port on the UCT CPU card is declared
automatically (IP address = 192.168.65.01 and sub-network
mask = 255.255.255.0). It is thus possible to manage the PBX
directly (after a TOTAL reset) using a management tool
connected to the IP port of the UCT CPU card with a twisted
cable (example with M7425 Enterprise, see Section 1.3
Document [11]).
If loading a new release of the application software, install and

transfer the VUs to the PC.
Reset the PBX using the "RST" push-button on the front panel of
the UCT card.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-61
SHEET I-17 UPGRADING THE SOFTWARE (DUPLEX MODE)

AVERTISSEMENT
Loading a new software release is performed without traffic
While upgrading the software, all internal and outgoing calls are suspended for a
period which varies according to the operation mode used.
System backup
Back up the customer configuration systematically before each software upgrade.
PRSENTATION
Expanding the hardware increases the capacity of the system, whereas upgrading the
software adds new functions to the configuration and/or allows you to follow the
development of the cards used by the PBX.
The PBX software is initially loaded at the factory. It is then upgraded when necessary.
The software upgrade is performed from a PC connected to the UCT-D card as described
in Section5.6.
Two operation modes are possible:
- via M7425 ENTERPRISE or NOMAD
- via M7420 LOCAL LOADER
This operation allows new PBX software releases to be loaded.
The PBX software package is in two parts:
the System software which initialises and configures the processor card
the Application software which contains the PBX functions (configuration programs
and installation parameters)
The software package also contains the parameters specific to each country.
Software loading is secured by a particular protocol and can be performed:
via the parallel port of the UCT-D card,
via an IP port through:
- a twisted cable,
- a LAN,
- a WAN1,
through an ISDN network1.
1.Take into consideration the site access rules.
Page 6-62
6/2/06

Installation
For an installation through the ISDN or Ethernet network.

You can upgrade the PBX application software by downloading it, without losing the
customer's configuration data. Downloading is a series of exchanges between the
application installed on a remote server and the PBX. A PC connected through an
ISDN_T interface or an Ethernet network through the TCP/IP protocol, is used as a
remote server.
Downloading consists in transferring the following into the memory of the PBX's main
card:
the software package, including the new application software and configuration data
for the site.
the time at which the system's upgrade is to be performed.
At the prefixed time, the PBX restarts automatically by transferring the software into the
memory of its central processing unit, then performs a reset in order to take into
account the new application software.
Service stopped during automatic reset following the downloading of a new
software release
During automatic reset, at the pre-set time, no internal or external communications are
possible.
CONTRAINTE
For a system through the ISDN network
Downloading requires an ISDN network card.
The X25 parameters on the PBX side are those of the default configuration of the
remote identifier IDENT_0.

For an installation on site
The software upgrade kit.
For a system through a network
a remote server
N/A.
Installation
6/2/06
Page 6-63
INSTALLATION
Case of use of the M7425 tool
OPERATION

tool
Activate the link.

Run
the
software
downloading procedure.

Note : The integrated IP port on the UCT-D CPU card is declared
automatically (IP address = 192.168.65.01 and sub-network
mask = 255.255.255.0). It is thus possible to manage the
PBX directly (after a TOTAL reset) using a management
tool connected to the IP port of the UCT-D CPU card, with a
twisted cable (example with
M7425 Enterprise, see Section 1.3, Document [10]).
For an installation through an ISDN network, activate the link
between the ISDN network interface card and the remote software
server.
For an installation through an Ethernet network, activate the link
between the IP gateway card and the remote software server.
Run the procedure for loading the system and application software
and the updated customer data (see Section 1.3, Document [10]).
Case of use of M7420 LOCAL LOADER

OPERATION

tool
Perform the upgrade on the

passive UCT-D.
Reboot the system with the

new software.
Page 6-64
6/2/06

Run the VUs to adapt the data to the new-generation software.
Connect a PC to the debug port of the passive UCT-D card (the
same wiring and configuration as for the console port).
Perform an INIT RST on the PASSIVE UCTD.
Run a CO during the start-up tests, then type in the password
CHARG.
Connect the parallel cable between the passive UCTD and the
M7420 Local Loader PC.
Load the SYS, APPLI software and the appropriate DATA.
Remove the active UCT-D card (PBX not operational).
Remove the debug and parallel cable from the passive UCT-D
card
Start the system by performing an RST of the UCT-D card you
have just upgraded (ex passive UCT-D)
Wait until the system becomes operational.
Plug in the second UCT-D card (future passive card).

Installation
Maintenance
7.1
Security guidelines
Refer to section 6.1
7.2
Maintenance overview
7.2.1
Role and possibilities available

System maintenance includes operations used to maintain the system in a given state or
restore it to a given state, or to restore the operating characteristics specified by the
manufacturer.
This manual concerns only operations which can be performed on site using standard or
easy to use tools.
When maintenance exceeds the level defined above, the installer should contact the
manufacturer's technical support to complete the maintenance if required.
The maintenance operations affect the PBX availability. The equipment can have one of
the following states:
Full Mission Capable. All major services of the equipment are fully provided.
Partial Mission Capable. One or more of the major services are not fully provided by
the equipment.
No Mission Capable. None of the major services is provided by the equipment.
PBX maintenance operations are divided into preventive and corrective maintenance.
The system is able to identify the origin of an anomaly and locate it using instant
messages appearing on the operating software (administration tool, see section 5.6).
In the case of remote operation, the operator on site intervenes to confirm the diagnosis
made remotely, locate the faulty subassembly precisely, and return the PBX to its normal
operating state.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-1
7.2.2
Maintenance resources
7.2.2.1
Role of the administration tool in maintenance

Within the framework of maintenance, the administration tool is used to perform
investigations or maintenance operations.
Hardware start-up tests
Hardware start-up tests take place automatically each time the PBX is reset.
For the NeXspan D, the behaviour then varies, depending on whether the system is
simplex or duplex:
In simplex mode, the status of the UCT-D card changes immediately to Active.
In duplex mode, the status of the UCT-D card changes to Active if it is not out of
service and if the other UCT-D card is not itself Active.
Note :
Only a hardware problem prevents the active card from working correctly;
otherwise an intentional removal of the active card triggers a switchover to the
passive card, which takes over and becomes active.
For any PBX range, the hardware start-up test consists in completing the initialisation of
the active CPU card, identifying the card resources, and identifying the hardware
configuration (number of cabinets, equipment cards, presence of power supply modules
and, for the XD, presence of the IUCT-D card, presence of the passive UCT-D card, status
of the active UCT-D card, etc.).
A series of tests are then performed on the main functions of the active CPU card. The
entire hadrware start-up tests are divided into phases then each phase into tests. The
results of these tests are gradually d isplayed on the user console.
Hardware start-up tests are never blocking, except in the absence of the i-button; since
this component is the key used to access the various optional software functions.
An operator can stop an on-going hardware start-up test by entering CO (operator
control) during the start-up test. A password is then required.
Below is a list of passwords:
Total: total reset request
A total reset clears all data from existing programming. The system is then configured
automatically with the equipment installed.
STAND: standard reset request (same as the UCTx RST button)
A standard reset restarts the PBX with the same configuration.
MCONF: customised reset request
A customised reset corresponds to a total reset with the following modifications:
- Subscribers are created without any directory number (their status remains
disabled).
- The PBX is configured for TL-calss and feature-class management. Intercom
groups are managed manually.
- The PBX is set to multi-company and multi-site mode.
- Service tickets are configured to leave towards the charging unit (Kitaxe).
Page 7-2
6/2/06

Maintenance
- Alarms are configured to generate a service ticket each time.

- The deafult active service is no longer the Management" screen but the welcome
screen (which allows the management centre to connect directly).
CHARG: parallel loading request (system, application, files, etc.)
Note : If the operator fails to enter a password, hardware start-up tests are performed in standard
mode after a timeout of about 45 seconds.
If the hardware start-up test is completed successfully, a report is displayed on the user
console at the end of the test, indicating to the operator that the test phases are OK.
Fault messages
The CPU card centralises and broadcasts all the statuses of each of the PBX
subassemblies and peripheral lines or networks associated with the administration tool.
The administration tool summarises all the results and presents them in the form of fault
messages which appear in the operating software log.
The fault messages are used to inform the operator when important events have been
detected.
Note :
7.2.2.2
The logbook displays additional information concerning service records, charge

records, etc.
List of support equipment

The support equipment required for maintenance operations is that required for the
installation procedure (see section 6.5), in addition to certain specific tools:
DESIGNATION
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
SHEET E-8
Multimeter
Table 7.1
7.2.3
SHEET
LIST OF ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE RESOURCES
Preventive maintenance
This is performed at predefined intervals or according to recommended criteria, in order to
reduce the probability of failure or degradation of the system's operation.
It includes:
checking operations described in P sheets (see section 7.5),
preventive replacement operations, described in E sheets
All preventive maintenance operations are performed at O level.
7.2.4
Corrective maintenance
This applies following failure of an item of equipment or a subassembly.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-3
A corrective maintenance operation is initialised:

by the management operator, following an alarm (error message) on the administration
tool,
by the operator on site, after detection of an anomaly during a preventive maintenance
operation or a fault signalled by an indicator,
following an operating anomaly reported by the user.
The Table in section 7.0.1.1 lists the correspondence between an error message and the
subassemblies involved.
Corrective maintenance comprises three types of procedure:
fault localisation,
testing,
replacement.
7.2.5
Restarting
After replacing a subassembly on site, the following operations must be performed on the
administration tool, using Documents [0], [1] and [2] (see section 1.3):
check that the element generates no more error messages,
return it to the same configuration as the old subassembly.
7.2.6
Returning subassemblies to be repaired

Faulty subassemblies are returned to the manufacturer's repair centre, in the exchange
batch reusable packaging, accompanied with a fault sheet describing the anomaly
observed.
The fault sheet must notably specify the fault number indicated in the test sheets
(see section 7.6.1), which identifies the branch of the test flowchart which has led to the
replacement of the subassembly (see section 7.6.1).
7.2.7
List of interchangeable subassemblies, fuses, batteries, cables and

securing kits
The lists of references for the interchangeable main cards and cabinets of the NeXspan
C/S/L/D range are given in the product bulletin.
The lists and references of the subassemblies (cards and power supply modules), cables,
fuses, batteries, cabinets and mounting kits are given in Table 7.3 to Table 7.8.
Page 7-4
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.2.7.1
Interchangeable XD PBX subassemblies

INTERCHANGEABLE XD PBX SUBASSEMBLIES
ITEM CODE
Power supply module
ADS300XD
HR7559A
Ventilation module
VADS
AHR0011A
Blanking plates
Slot blanking plate
HR6995A
Main cards
UCT-D
FMEVO (UCT-D daughterboard)
HJ4859A
HJ4641
RUCT-D (delivered with an external cable for connecting the main

cabinet)
HJ4856A
IUCT-D (without i-button)
HJ4855B
CLX cards
LD4 RJ
LD4N RJ / LD4X RJ
ADPCM16 (LD4/LD4N/LD4X daughterboard)
HJ4741
HJ4699
HJ4399
LT2 RJ
HJ4738
IPS
PT2 RJ
VOIP4E - 8 channels (PT2 daughterboard)
VOIP4E -16 channels (PT2 daughterboard)
VOIP4E -32 channels (PT2 daughterboard)
HJ4724
HJ4449C
HJ4449B
HJ4449A
CS1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7853
CA1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7852
CP1 RJ
HJ4721
MUM RJ (+ cable)
HT7847

Maintenance
AHJ0004A
6/2/06
Page 7-5
INTERCHANGEABLE XD PBX SUBASSEMBLIES
ITEM CODE
Equipment cards
LA16X RJ
HJ4431A
LA16X-8 RJ
HJ4431B
LA8 RJ
Table 7.2
LN16X RJ
HJ4475A
LN16X-8 RJ
HJ4475B
LN8 RJ
HJ4715
LM8 RJ
HJ4726
LH8 RJ
HJ4716
LH16X RJ
HJ4830A
LH16X-8 RJ
HJ4830B
HJ4717F
HJ4717A
HJ2817
HJ2818
LR4d RJ (with DTOC)

LR4 RJ (without DTOC)
FTXA (LR4 duaghter card, 50 Hz charge detector)
FTXC (LR4 duaghter card, 12/16 KHz charge detector)
LI1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7854
BTX RJ
HJ4751
IUMS RJ (basic package, 64 MB)

IUMS RJ (basic package, 128 MB)
HT7813A
HT7813B
LA16X RJ
HJ4431A
LIST OF INTERCHANGEABLE XD PBX SUBASSEMBLIES
Page 7-6
HJ4714
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.2.7.2
Interchangeable C/S/L PBX subassemblies

INTERCHANGEABLE XL, XS, XS12 AND XC SUBASSEMBLIES
ITEM CODE
ADS300X
HR6953D
ADS100X
HJ4621A
ADS50X
HJ4644A
UCT card daughterboards
FMEVO
HJ4641
ADPCM16 (on UCT2-S, UCT2S-12 and UCT2-C only, and LD4

daughterboard)
HJ4399
CLX cards
LD4 ST
LD4 RJ
LD4N ST / LD4X ST
LD4N RJ / LD4X RJ
LT2 ST
LT2 RJ
IPS
PT2 ST
PT2 RJ
VoIP4 -8 channels
VoIP4 - 16 channels
VoIP4 -32 channels
Table 7.3
HJ3970
HJ4738
AHJ0004A
HJ4243
HJ4724
HJ4449C
HJ4449B
HJ4449A
CS1 ST (+ cable)
CS1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7849
HT7853
CA1 ST (+ cable)
CA1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7848
HT7852
CP1 ST
CP1 RJ
HJ2706
HJ4721
MUM ST (+ cable)
MUM RJ (+ cable)
HT7851
HT7847
LIST OF INTERCHANGEABLE XL, XS, XS12 AND XC PBX SUBASSEMBLIES (1/2)

Maintenance
HJ4054
HJ4741
HJ4734
HJ4699
6/2/06
Page 7-7
INTERCHANGEABLE XL, XS, XS12 AND XC SUBASSEMBLIES
ITEM CODE
Equipment cards
LA16X ST
LA16X RJ
HJ4624A
HJ4431A
LA16X-8 ST
LA16X-8 RJ
HJ4624B
HJ4431B
HJ4768
HJ4714
LA8 ST
LA8 RJ
Table 7.3
LN16X ST
LN16X RJ
HJ4622A
HJ4475A
LN16X-8 ST
LN16X-8 RJ
HJ4622B
HJ4475B
LN8 ST
LN8 RJ
HJ4769
HJ4715
LM8 ST
LM8 RJ
HJ4770
HJ4726
LH8 ST
LH8 RJ
HJ4771
HJ4716
LH16X ST
LH16X RJ
HJ4829A
HJ4830A
LH16X-8 ST
LH16X-8 RJ
HJ4829B
HJ4830B
LR4d ST (with DTOC)

LR4d RJ (with DTOC)
LR4 RJ (without DTOC)
HJ2765F
HJ4717F
HJ4717A
FTXA (50 Hz charge detector)

FTXC (12/16 KHz charge detector)
HJ2817
HJ2818
LI1 ST (+ cable)
LI1 RJ (+ cable)
HT7850
HT7854
CPM ST (+ cable)
CPM RJ (+ cable)
HT7894
HT7813
BTX ST
BTX RJ
HJ4772
HJ4751
List of interchangeable XL, XS, XS12 and XC PBX subassemblies (2/2)
Page 7-8
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.2.7.3
Interchangeable C/S/L/D PBX cables

INTERCHANGEABLE C/S/L/D PBX CABLES
ITEM CODE
RJ45-RJ45 cable (length 5 m)

for LA8, LN8, LM8, LA16 and LN16 cards
HG4765B
RJ45-RJ45 cable (length 10 m)

for LA8, LN8, LM8, LA16 and LN16 cards
HG4765C
Standard FTP cable (120 ohms, cat 5)

for LD4, LD4N, LD4X, LT2, PT2, and LR4 cards
Table 7.4
7.2.7.4
HG4731
LIST OF INTERCHANGEABLE C/S/L/D PBX CABLES
Interchangeable fuses
Only power supply modules have interchangeable fuses.
FUSE
ITEM CODE
AMPERAGE
PK925F
PK184M
3.15 A
6.3 A
PK925F
PK184M
3.15 A
6.3 A
ADS100X power supply module mains protection fuse

(accessible on rear panel)
PK925D
2.5 A
ADS50X power supply module mains protection fuse

(accessible on rear panel)
PK1105B
1A
ADS300XD power supply module fuses:

mains protection (accessible on front panel)
battery polarity inversion protection (F300
accessible on the power supply card)
fuse
ADS300X power supply module fuses:

- mains protection (accessible on front panel)
- battery polarity inversion protection (F300 fuse
accessible on the power supply card)
Table 7.5
7.2.7.5
LIST OF INTERCHANGEABLE FUSES
Optional interchangeable batteries

INTERCHANGEABLE SUBASSEMBLY
Table 7.6
XD and XL cabinet battery (wall/rack)
HT7781
XS and XS12 cabinet battery (wall/rack)
HR7061
LIST OF OPTIONAL INTERCHANGEABLE BATTERIES

Maintenance
ITEM CODE
6/2/06
Page 7-9
7.2.7.6
Table 7.7
7.2.7.7
Interchangeable cabinets (PBX XD)

INTERCHANGEABLE XD PBX CABINETS
ITEM CODE
XD main cabinet comprising: 1 UCT-D card, 1 IUCT-D card with ibutton, 1 power supply module
AHR0001A
XD expansion cabinet comprising: 1 RUCT-D card, 1 power supply

module
- delivered with an external cable for connecting the main cabinet
AHR0002A
LIST OF INTERCHANGEABLE (XD PBX) CABINETS
Mounting kits
MOUNTING KIT
Table 7.8
XD mounting kit
HT7716E
XL mounting kit
HT7716A
XS and XS12 mounting kit
HT7716B
XC mounting kit
HT7716C
LIST OF MOUNTING KITS
Page 7-10
ITEM CODE
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.3
PBX availability
The impact of a faulty subassembly on XD and XL/XS/XC PBX availability is indicated in
T7.9 and T7.10.
FAULTY SUBASSEMBLY
FUNCTIONAL CONSEQUENCE AND

COMMENT
ADS300XD
power supply
module fans
Duration of fan replacement operation above 90 seconds, so power supply failure => PBX
not operational
VADS
ventilation
module fans
Duration of fan replacement operation above 90 seconds, so power supply failure => PBX
not operational
ADS300XD
power supply
module
Depending on PBX configuration:

if the converters are out of service:
- the power supply module is not duplicated: power supply no longer distributed to the
various subassemblies => PBX not operational
- the power supply module is duplicated:
if the duration of exchange is below 90 seconds: the second power supply module is
still in service => PBX operational
if the duration of exchange is above 90 seconds: air is no longer sent to the various
subassemblies => PBX not operational
If the rectifier is out of service or mains absent: operation with the backup battery
(see autonomy Section 3.7.6.4).
Battery
PBX operational, but immediate shutdown of the PBX in case of mains failure.
UCT-D card not duplicated: PBX not operational
UCT-D card duplicated: PBX operational
Note : After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration (15 s. to 1
min. ), the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in the following three
cases:
- if the active card is removed,
UCT-D card
- if the active card remains idle for 2 minutes,

- if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case, a
hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the cabinet can,
therefore, be up to 3 minutes).
RUCT-D card not duplicated: loss of communication with the sets or lines associated with
the cards installed in the RUCT-D card expansion cabinet
RUCT-D duplicated: PBX operational.
Note : After a switchover the duration of which depends on the configuration (15 s. to 1
min. ), the passive CPU card takes over and becomes active in the following three
cases:
RUCT-D card

- if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCT-D card (in this case, a
hardware fault detection is performed. The unavailability time on the cabinet can,
therefore, be up to 3 minutes).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-11
FAULTY SUBASSEMBLY

COMMENT
IUCT-D card
i-button module inaccessible. The locking software checks every hour whether the i-button
module is available. If the software makes this check while the IUCT-D is being replaced,
some functions will be locked dynamically (the directory, for instance).
Equipment
card
Loss of communication with the sets or lines associated with the faulty card
CLX card
Loss of communication with the network or terminal associated with the faulty card
Table 7.9
IMPACT OF A FAULTY SUBASSEMBLY ON XD PBX AVAILABILITY
FAULTY SUBASSEMBLY

COMMENT
Power supply module fans
Power supply off: PBX not operational
Power supply module
According to the fault:

Converters out of service: PBX not operational, power supply is no longer
distributed to the various subassemblies,
Rectifier out of service or mains absent: operation with the backup battery
(see autonomy section 3.7.6.4)
Battery
PBX operational, but immediate shutdown of the PBX in case of mains failure.
UCT card
PBX not operational
RUCT card
Loss of communication with the sets or lines associated with the cards installed
in the RUCT card expansion cabinet
Equipment card
Loss of communication with the sets or lines associated with the faulty card
CLX card
Loss of communication with the network or terminal associated with the faulty
card
Table 7.10
7.4
IMPACT OF A FAULTY SUBASSEMBLY ON C/S/L PBX AVAILABILITY
Local operation
The elements (indicators, microswitches, test sockets, push buttons, etc.) likely to be
used during local operations on the PBX are described for each subassembly in Sections
4.6 to 4.13.
Page 7-12
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.5
Preventive maintenance
7.5.1
Description
7.5.1.1
Chapter organisation
Preventive maintenance includes three types of procedure:
checking characteristics (voltage, current, etc.) of the subassemblies and adjustment if
required,
preventive replacement of the subassemblies before wear.
Check type procedures are described in P sheets and preventive replacement
procedures in E sheets.
All preventive maintenance procedures and their frequency are listed in Table 7.11 of
section 7.5.2.
The procedures themselves are described:
in section 7.6.2 for P sheets,
in section 7.0.1.1 for E sheets.
A visual inspection is also made of the indicators on the front panel of the subassemblies
(see description of subassemblies in sections 4.6 to 4.13). This inspection must be done
at each on site visit.
The operations described in the P sheets can be performed periodically, or following the
replacement of a subassembly, when checks are required.
7.5.1.2
Presentation of P sheets
P sheets include (see Figure 7.1):
- the equipment availability (see section 7.2.1),
- the task frequency,
- the number of operators on site or on the TMP,
- the duration of the task,
- the means required for performing the task,

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-13
a main body, describing the operations to perform, broken down into 3 sections:
- Preliminary operations:
This section describes the operations required before the procedure described in
the sheet (checking indicators, connections, etc.).
- Procedure:
This section describes all the operations required to carry out the check. These are
displayed in the form of a table with two columns:
X
the second column provides details of the operations to be carried out to perform
the maintenance procedure, and any comments relating to restoring the
configuration, with checks of the front panel LEDs, if necessary.
If required, a sheet can include an example of results and/or a diagram showing an

assembly.
Page 7-14
6/2/06

Maintenance
TYPE
AND
NUMBER
P-X SHEET
PBX AVAILABILITY:
- FULL MISSION CAPABLE
- PARTIAL MISSION CAPABLE
- NO MISSION CAPABLE
"NAME OF THE TASK"
AVAILABILITY
TASK FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
AND
NUMBER
TYPE
OF
OPERATOR(S)
DURATION
TASK DURATION
TOOL(S)
LIST OF TOOLS
REQUIRED
INGREDIENT(S)
/ CONSUMABLE(S)
LIST OF INGREDIENTS
PRELIMINARY OPERATION(S)
OPERATIONS
CARRY
OUT
TO
PERFORM
THE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
Figure 7.1
TO
PREVENTIVE
PROCEDURE
PRESENTATION OF A PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SHEET (P SHEET)

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-15
7.5.2
Preventive maintenance operations schedule

FREQUENCY
4.6 To
Indicator check (1)
Annually
Removing dust from and checking the ventilation of an C/S/L/

D PBX
3 years
Preventive replacement of the optional XD PBX battery
P2
3 years
Preventive replacement of the optional battery on an XL, XS

or XS12 PBX
P3
3 years
Preventive replacement of the battery integrated in an XC

PBX
P4
3 years
Preventive replacement of the XD cabinet fans
P5
3 years
Preventive replacement of XL cabinet fans
P6
3 years
Preventive replacement of an XS or XS12 cabinet fan
P7
3 years
Preventive replacement of an XC cabinet fan
P8
4.13
SHEET P-1
see description of the subassemblies in sections 4.6 to 4.13

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS SCHEDULE
Page 7-16
SHEET NO.
Each visit
on site
(1)
Table 7.11
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET P-1 REMOVING DUST FROM AND CHECKING THE VENTILATION OF AN

C/S/L/D PBX
DISPONIBILIT
FULL MISSION CAPABLE
PRIODICIT
Annually
1 operator on site
DURE
15 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 vacuum cleaner
Dry non-fluffy cloth
Sheet of paper
OPRATION(S) PRLIMINAIRE(S)
Check that the power supply is working properly (in case of fault, refer SHEET T-1,
SHEET T-2, SHEET T-3 or SHEET T-4).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-17
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Check that the ventilation is

working properly.
Place a sheet of paper at the fresh air inlets and check that the
sheet of paper stays in place. The inlets are located:
on the left side of the XD and XL PBXs (Figures 3.2 and 3.3)
on the right side, for XS, XS12, and XC PBXs (Figures 3.6, 3.13,
3.17).
Place a sheet of paper at the hot air outlets and check that the sheet
of paper is blown away. The hot air outlets are located:
at the back of XD and XL PBXs
on the left side of XS, XS12 and XC PBXs
In case of fault, refer to the

power supply module
replacement sheet.
See SHEET E-1 SHEET E-5.
Check that the air inlet and

outlet grids are clean.
Remove the dust from
these grids with the
vacuum cleaner.
Clean the dust from the
cabinet using the dry nonfluffy cloth.
Page 7-18
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET P-2 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF THE OPTIONAL XD PBX BATTERY

DISPONIBILIT
Full mission capable
PRIODICIT
3 years
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/a.
N/a.
Check that the power supply is working properly (in case of fault, refer to SHEET T-1).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-19
PROCDURE
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Only
replace a battery with another battery of the same type.
The PBX must be connected to the ground socket. The switch is grounded for safety reasons and this
connection should be made before any others.
Warning :
OPERATION
Remove the battery

cabinet.
Disconnect the two battery leads.

Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the two battery leads to the new battery, respecting the
polarity.
Attention : If polarity is not respected:
Install the new battery

cabinet.
Page 7-20
6/2/06
- for ADS300XD, a fuse (F300,

see Section 7.2.7.4) protects the power supply
module. In case of
wrong leads connection, replace the fuse
on the power supply module card
(remove the power supply module, see SHEET
E-1, then replace the fuse, see Figure 4.2).

Maintenance
SHEET P-3 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF THE OPTIONAL BATTERY ON AN XL,

XS OR XS12 PBX
DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/a.
N/a.
Check that power supply is working properly (in case of fault, refer to SHEET T2orSHEET T-3).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-21
PROCDURE
The PBX must be connected to the ground socket. The switch is grounded for safety reasons and this
connection should be made before any others.
Warning :
OPERATION
Power off the power supply

module.
"I/O" switch to "O".

Remove the battery

cabinet.
Do not disconnect the battery cable from the 48 V BATT.

connector on the power supply module (located on the front panel
of the power supply module of the XL cabinet, at the back of XS
and XS12 cabinets).
Disconnect the two battery leads.
Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the two battery leads to the new battery, respecting the
polarity.
Attention : If polarity is not respected:
Install the new battery

cabinet.

module.
Page 7-22
6/2/06
- for ADS300X, a fuse (F300,

see Section 7.2.7.4) protects the power supply
module. In case of
wrong leads connection, replace the fuse
on the power supply module card
(remove the power supply module, see SHEET
E-2, then replace the fuse, see Figure 4.3).
- for ADS100X, power supply is
protected. Simply change the leads round.
If it is a PBX with multiple cabinets, first power on the power
supply module for the expansion cabinets ("I/O" switch on "I").

Maintenance
SHEET P-4 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF THE BATTERY INTEGRATED IN AN XC

PBX
DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 standard tool case.
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-23
PROCDURE (see Figure 3.27)

Warning :
OPERATION

module.
Attention : Disconnect the
mains cable.
Open the cabinet.
Unscrew the three securing screws at the back of the cabinet.

Remove the battery.
Warning :
Disconnect the battery to power off the PBX.
Disconnect the battery cable on the power supply side.
Unscrew the screw securing the metal flange located on the
power supply card, and pull the flange out of the notch.
Remove the battery-cable assembly.
Install the new battery.
Follow
the
battery
manufacturer's
environmental
recommendations.
Connect the battery leads to the new battery, respecting the
polarity.
Install the battery.
Insert the metal securing flange in the notch, and screw it onto the
power supply card.
Connect the battery cable to the power supply.
Close the cabinet.
Fit the cover slightly to the rear of the cabinet and push it forward.
Tighten the three securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
Reconnect the mains cable.

module.
Page 7-24
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET P-5
PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF THE XD CABINET FANS
DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 25*10 Torx screwdriver for N4 screw (fans).
N/a.
The PBX must be connected to the ground socket. The switch is
grounded for safety reasons and this connection should be made before any others.
Warning :

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-25

OPERATION

Warning :

module(s),
For a duplex configuration, when a power

supply module is out of service, the operator
has approximately 90 seconds to replace
and power on again the power supply
module. After 90 seconds, the second power
supply module is automatically powered off.
Preventive replacement of fans requires
more than 90 seconds. It is, therefore,
necessary to power off the power supply
module(s), no matter the cabinet's
configuration (simplex or duplex).

If it is a PBX with multiple cabinets, power off the power supply
module of the main cabinet then those of the expansion cabinets.
Remove the power supply
module or the ventilation
module.
See SHEET E-1 (power supply module) or SHEET E-6 (ventilation

module).
Disconnect the fan cables

from the power supply.
Cut the ties retaining the
cables.
Unscrew
the
securing the fans.
screws
Fit the new fans and screw

in the securing screws.
Check that the ventilation flow is turned towards the exterior.
Secure the fan cables with

new ties.
Reconnect the fan cables
to the power supply.
Reinstall the power supply
module or the ventilation
module.
Page 7-26
6/2/06
See SHEET E-1 (power supply module) or SHEET E-6 (ventilation

module).

Maintenance
SHEET P-6 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF XL CABINET FANS

DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 25*10 Torx screwdriver for N4 screw (fans).
N/a.
Warning :

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-27

OPERATION

module.
see SHEET E-2.
Disconnect the fan cables

cables.
Unscrew
the
securing the fans.
screws
Fit the new fans and screw


new ties.
Reconnect the fan cables
to the power supply.
module.
Page 7-28
6/2/06
see SHEET E-2.

Maintenance
SHEET P-7 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF AN XS OR XS12 CABINET FAN

DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 25*10 Torx screwdriver for N4 screw (fan).
N/a.
Warning :

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-29
PROCDURE
Preventive replacement of a non-rackable XS or XS12 cabinet fan
OPERATION

module.
See SHEET E-3 (for a non-rackable XS cabinet and SHEET E-4

(for a non-rackable XS12 cabinet).

fan cable.
Unscrew
the
securing the fan.
screws
Fit the new fan and screw

new ties.
module.
Page 7-30
6/2/06
See SHEET E-3 (for a non-rackable XS cabinet and SHEET E-4

(for a non-rackable XS12 cabinet).

Maintenance
P-1Preventive replacement of a rackable XS or XS12 cabinet fan

OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management


module to be removed.

If it is the power supply module of a main cabinet in a PBX with
multiple cabinets, also power off the power supply module of the
expansion cabinets ("I/O" switch to "O").
Disconnect
cables.
Disconnect the mains cable, and if required the backup battery

connected on the rear panel of the cabinet.
the
external
Remove the cabinet cover.


fan cable.
Disconnect the fan cable
Remove the fan.
Install the new fan.

new ties.
Fix the cover.
Tighten the securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
If necessary, secure the screws on the sides with brackets.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-31
SHEET P-8 PREVENTIVE REPLACEMENT OF AN XC CABINET FAN

DISPONIBILIT
OUT OF SERVICE
PRIODICIT
3 years
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 25*10 Torx screwdriver for N4 screw (fan).
N/a.
Page 7-32
6/2/06

Maintenance

OPERATION
module.
Attention : Disconnect the
mains cable.
Deactivate the battery.
Open the cabinet.
To power off the PBX, it is necessary to deactivate the battery

before opening the cabinet, using the push button located at the
back of the XC cabinet.
Warning :
If the PBX has no push

button for powering off the
battery, disconnect the
battery.
Cut the ties retaining the fan
cable.
Unscrew
the
screws
securing the fan.
Fit the new fan and screw in
the securing screws.
new ties.
Reconnect the fan cable to
the power supply.
If the battery has been
disconnected,
reconnect it.
Close the cabinet
Reconnect the mains cable.
module.
Disconnect the battery cable from the power supply.
Reconnect the battery cable.

Tighten the three securing screws at the back of the cabinet.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-33
7.6
Corrective maintenance (Test sheet)
7.6.1
Presentation
The test sheets include (see Figure 7.2):
a test flowchart.
The number of operators recommended is one operator on site and if appropriate one
operator on the administration tool in the case of a remote console.
The test procedures usually consist in checking the operating state of a subassembly by
checking indicators or displays, and by measuring characteristics (voltage, etc.).
When the result of a test is negative, the flowchart helps to pinpoint the fault using
additional tests and operations involving the replacement of subassemblies presumed to
be faulty. Such troubleshooting helps to correct faults, but can in no event cover all cases,
notably multiple faults. If troubleshooting fails, the operator must contact the
manufacturer's technical support service.
Whenever a corrective maintenance operation is performed (exchanging subassemblies,
site compliance updating, etc.) during a test, the operator must perform the full test again.
A subassembly is operational when the positive branch of the flowchart has been carried
out fully, without any passage in the negative branch.
A subassembly is considered as faulty when the procedure on a test sheet has been
carried out and the subassembly replaced.
Faulty subassemblies are returned to the manufacturer's repair centre, accompanied with
a fault sheet describing the anomaly observed.
The fault sheet must indicate the branch of the test flowchart which has led to the
replacement of the subassembly, each branch leading to a replacement being identified
by a fault number (e.g. T-1-c).
Note :
From the administration tool, you can view the hardware status of the different
cards physically present in the PBX (menu 5-4-2,Hardware identification). The
following information is displayed for each card: the card's physical location in
the PBX, the card type, the card item code, the serial number, the resource
name, the factory name, and quantity.
Page 7-34
6/2/06

Maintenance
TYPE
AND
NUMBER
T-X SHEET
"NAME OF THE TASK"
No
Yes
TEST FLOWCHART
AND LOCALISATION
OF FAULT
Anomaly
corrected ?
No
T-x-n
Yes
Execute
replacement
sheet
Test
correct.
POSITIVE BRANCH
= TEST CORRECT
NEGATIVE BRANCHES
= FAULT SEARCH
FAULT NUMBER = IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
OF THE BRANCH LEADING TO A REPLACEMENT
Figure 7.2
PRESENTATION OF A TEST SHEET (T SHEET)

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-35
7.6.2
LIST OF T SHEETS
SHEET NO.
SHEET T-1
Testing the ADS300XD power supply module
SHEET T-2
Testing the ADS300X power supply module
SHEET T-3
SHEET T-4
SHEET T-5
Testing an active UCT-D card
SHEET T-6
Testing a passive UCT-D card
SHEET T-7
Testing a UCT-L card
SHEET T-8
Testing a UCT1-S / UCT2-S card
SHEET T-9
Testing a UCT1s-12 / UCT2S-12 and UCT1-C / UCT2-C card
SHEET T-10
Testing a PT2 card
SHEET T-11
Testing an LT2 card
SHEET T-12
Testing a CA1, CP1, CS1 or LD4 card
SHEET T-13
Testing an LD4N / LD4X card
SHEET T-14
Testing a MUM card
SHEET T-15
Testing an IUMS card
SHEET T-16
Testing an equipment card
SHEET T-17
Testing a telephone set
Page 7-36
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET T-1 TESTING THE ADS300XD POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Power supply test
Mains indicator
on the power
supply module on ?
No
"I/O" switch
set to "I"?
Yes
Wiring
Battery/Power
Supply Module
and mains
connector correct ?
Yes
Mains Power
Present ?
Yes
No
Set the switch to "I".
No
Adjust the
No
Yes
Fuses
of the power supply
module
in good condition ?
Power back on.

No
T1-a
Replace the fuses
(see SHEET E-8)
Yes
Power off
the power supply
module then power it
back on
Does the fan

indicator go out then
all the other
indicators go out?
Yes T1-b
No
T1-c
Replace the power
supply module
Replace the fans.

Indicator
"Rectifier" on?
Yes
1
No
T1-d
Power off
the power supply module,
wait for 10 s then
power it back on
If the indicator remains
off, replace the power
supply module
(seeSHEET E-2).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-37
Converter
indicator on ?
No
Power off
the power supply
commissioned.
Yes
Converter indicator
on?
No
Yes
2
The problem was due

to overconsumption.
Indicator
Ringing
on?
Yes
Battery absent ?
Yes
No
T1-e
Replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2)
No
Battery indicator
on?
Yes
3
Power supply OK.
Page 7-38
6/2/06
No
T1-g
Check the connection
If the fault persists,
there has probably
been a polarity fault.
Make sure the polarity
is correct. Plug the lead
back in in case of error,
and replace the F300
fuse of the power
supply module with a
fuse with the same

Maintenance
Power off the power

supply module and
disconnect the battery
lead. Disconnect one
of the expansion
cards, then switch the
power supply back on.
Converter
indicator on?
No
T1-j
Yes
Reconnect the card and

repeat the operation with
another card until the fault
disappears.
replace the power supply
module
(seeSHEET E-2).
T1-i
Replace the
expansion card
(see SHEET E-12).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-39
Disconnect the power

supply module mains
plug.
Do the indicators of
the various
subassemblies
remain lit ?
Yes
Reconnect the power
supply module mains
plug.
No
T1-k
Check the battery's
voltage.
If the voltage is < 48V,
recharge the battery.
If the voltage is > 48 V,
replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2).
Power supply OK.
Page 7-40
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET T-2 TESTING THE ADS300X POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Power supply test
Mains indicator
on the power
supply module on ?
No
"I/O" switch
set to "I"?
No
Yes
Wiring
Battery/Power
Supply Module
and mains
connector correct ?
Yes
Mains Power
Present ?
Yes

No
Adjust the
No
Yes
Fuses
of the power supply
module
in good condition ?
Power back on.

No
T2-a
Replace the fuses
(see SHEET E-8).
Yes
Power off
the power supply
back on
Does the fan

indicator go out then
all the other
indicators go out?
Yes T2-b
No
T2-c
Replace the power
supply module
Replace the fans.

Indicator
"Rectifier" on?
Yes
1
No
T2-d
Power off
the power supply module,
wait for 10 s then
power it back on
If the indicator remains
off, replace the power
supply module
(seeSHEET E-2).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-41
Converter
indicator on ?
No
Power off
the power supply
commissioned.
Yes
Converter indicator
on?
No
Yes
2
The problem was due

to overconsumption.
Indicator
Ringing
on?
Yes
No
Optional "40V
ISDN" indicator
on?
Yes
No
Battery absent ?
Yes
T2-e
Replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2)
T2-f
Replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2)
No
Battery indicator
on?
Yes
3
Power supply OK.
Page 7-42
6/2/06
No
T2-g
Check the connection
there has probably
been a polarity fault.
Make sure the polarity
is correct. Plug the lead
back in in case of error,
and replace the F300
fuse of the power
supply module with a
fuse with the same

Maintenance
Power off the power

supply module and
disconnect the battery
lead. Disconnect one
of the expansion
cards, then switch the
power supply back on.
Converter
indicator on?
No
T2-j
Yes
Reconnect the card

and repeat the
operation with
another card until the
fault disappears.
replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2).
T2-i
Replace the
expansion card
(see SHEET E-12).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-43

supply module mains
plug.
the various
subassemblies
remain lit ?
Yes
Reconnect the power
supply module mains
plug.
No
T2-k
Check the battery's
voltage.
replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-2).
Power supply OK.
Page 7-44
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET T-3
TESTING THE ADS100X POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Power supply test
ALIM" indicator on
the UCT card lit
steady on?
No
No
"I/O" switch
set to "I"?
Yes
Set the Switch(es) to "I".
Yes
"Battery/Power
Supply Module"
wiring and mains
connector correct?
No
Yes
Power off the power
supply module(s),
wait for 10 seconds,
then power back on.
ALIM indicator
on?
Adjust the
connections.
No
T3-a
Replace the power
supply module(s)
(see SHEET E-3 or
SHEET E-4).
Yes
Mains power present?
No
Yes
Power back on.
Fuses of the power

supply module(s) in
good condition?
Yes
No
T3-c
Replace the power supply

module(s)
(see SHEET E-3).
Battery absent ?
Yes
T3-b
Replace the fuses (see
SHEET E-8).
No
Power supply OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-45

supply module mains
plug.
the various
subassemblies remain
lit ?
No
Yes
T3-d
Reconnect the power
supply module mains
plug.
Power supply OK.
Page 7-46
6/2/06
Check the battery's

voltage.
replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-3).

Maintenance
SHEET T-4 TESTING THE ADS50X POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Power supply test
ALIM" indicator on
the UCT card lit?
Yes
No
No
"I/O" switch
set to "I"?
Yes

No
Mains socket
wiring OK?
Yes
Adjust the connections.
Power off the

power supply
module,
wait for 10s then
power
commissioned.
ALIM indicator
No
T3-a
replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-5).
Yes
Mains power present?
No
Yes
Power back on.
Fuses of the power

supply module in good
condition?
Yes
T3-c
Replace the power
supply module
(see SHEET E-5).
No
T3-b
Replace the fuses (see
SHEET E-8).
Power supply OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-47
SHEET T-5
TESTING AN ACTIVE UCT-D CARD
Testing an active UCT-D

card
OP indicator
lit green?
No
T-2-a
The OP indicator is lit
red.
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Yes
ACT indicator lit

green?
Yes
RUN indicator
flashing?
No
T-2-b
The card is no longer
active.
- If the UCT-D card is
duplicated, the second,
passive UCT-D takes
over and becomes
active. A hardware
anomaly has been
detected on the UCT-D
card or on the RUCT-D
card, hence the
switchover.
Replace the
UCT-D
(see SHEET E-9) or
RUCT-D card
(see SHEET E-10)
- If the UCT-D card is not
duplicated,
replace
the UCT-D card
No
T-2-c
The RUN indicator is
off or on.
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Yes
AUX indicator on?
No
T-2-d
Yes
Replace the card

(see SHEET E-9).
Page 7-48
6/2/06

Maintenance
S.EXT indicator on
the front panel
of the IUCT-D card
lit green?
Yes
No
Only 1
synchronisation
card present?
(LD4, LD4N, LD4X
or LT2 card
installed in one of
the slots
0 to 5).
Yes
T-2-e
Check successively:
the status of the
LD4, LD4N, LD4X
or
LT2
synchronisation
card (see SHEET T11, SHEET T-12 or
SHEET T-13).
the status of the
synchronisation
clock provided by
the public network.
replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
No
T-2-f
Check the status of the
synchronisation clock
provided by the public
network.
replace
the card
(see SHEET E-9).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-49
S.DECT indicator on
the front panel of
IUCT-D lit green?
No
T-2-i
Yes
M.DECT indicator on
the front panel of
IUCT-D lit green?
The indicator is off or lit

red.
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
No
Yes
The UCT-D card

is a slave
synchronisation card
(see Section
Yes
MEVO indicator on
the front panel of
IUCT-D lit green?
Yes
No
T-2-j
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
No
T-2-k
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Page 7-50
6/2/06

Maintenance
No connection
on the J8 connector
(LAN access)?
No
LAN indicator
on and the "Tx/Rx"
indicator
flashing?
Yes
Yes
No
T-2-l
Check the link with the
Ethernet network (cable
and connections).
replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
"Ping" the IP server
PING test OK?
No
T-2-m
Yes
No error message
reported in the
administration tool?
Yes
Check successively:
the IP addresses
the link with the
Ethernet
network
(cable
and
connections)
the IP server status;
if the fault persists,
replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
No
Locate and replace the

faulty element specified
in the error
message(s), referring
to
7.0.1.
No error message
reported in the
Yes
No
T-2-n
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Active UCT-D card

correct.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-51
SHEET T-6 TESTING A PASSIVE UCT-D CARD

Testing a passive UCT-D
card
OP indicator
lit green?
No
T-3-a
The OP indicator is lit
red.
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Yes
ACT indicator
off?
No
T-3-b
Yes
RUN indicator
flashing?
If the UCT-D card is

duplicated, this UCT-D
card is no longer
passive. It is active. A
hardware anomaly has
been detected on the
other UCT-D card or on
the RUCT-D card, hence
the switchover.
Replace the other
UCT-D card
(see SHEET E-9) or
RUCT-D card
(see SHEET E-10)
No
T-3-c
off or on.
Replace the card
(see SHEET E-9).
Yes
AUX indicator on?
No
T-3-d
Yes
Replace the card

(see SHEET E-9).
Passive UCT-D card

correct.
Page 7-52
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET T-7 TESTING A UCT-L CARD

Testing a UCT-L card
RUN indicator
flashing?
No
T7-a
off or on.
Replace the cabinet
(seeSHEET E-16).
Yes
AUX indicator on?
No
T7-b
Yes
S.EXT indicator
lit green ?
Yes
Replace the cabinet

(see SHEET E-16).
No
Only 1
synchronisation
card present?
(LD4, LD4N, LD4X
or LT2 card
installed in one of
the slots
0 to 5).
Yes
T7-c
Check successively:
the status of the
LD4, LD4N, LD4X
or
LT2
synchronisation
card (see SHEET T11 , SHEET T-12 or
SHEET T-13 ).
the status of the
synchronisation
clock provided by
the public network.
replace the cabinet

Maintenance
6/2/06
No
T7-d
network.
replace
the cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
Page 7-53
S.DECT indicator lit

green?
No
T7-e
Yes

red.
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
MST DECT indicator
lit green ?
No
Yes
Is the UCT card
is a slave
(see Section
Yes
MEVO indicator
lit green?
Yes
No
T7-f
Replace the
cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
No
T7-i
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
Page 7-54
6/2/06

Maintenance
No connection
on the J8A connector
(LAN access) ?
No
LAN indicator
on and the "Tx/Rx"
indicator
flashing?
Yes
Yes
No
T7-j
and connections).
replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
"Ping" the IP server
PING test OK?
No
T7-K
Check successively:
the IP addresses
the link with the
Ethernet
network
(cable
and
connections)
the state of the IP
server. If the fault
persists, replace the
cabinet (see SHEET
E-16).
Yes
No error message
reported in the
Yes
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.
No error message
reported in the
Yes
No
T7-l
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-16).
The UCT card is OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-55
SHEET T-8 TESTING A UCT1-S / UCT2-S CARD

Testing a
UCT1-S/UCT2-S card
RUN indicator
flashing?
No
T8-a
off or on.
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
Yes
S.EXT indicator
lit green ?
Yes
No
Only 1
present?
(LD4, LD4N, LD4X or
LT2 card installed in
one of the slots 0 to 2)
No
Yes
T8-b
Check successively:
the status of the
LD4, LD4N, LD4X
or
LT2
synchronisation
card (see SHEET T11 , SHEET T-12 or
SHEET T-13 ).
the status of the
synchronisation
clock provided by
the public network.
T8-c
network.
replace
the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
Page 7-56
6/2/06

Maintenance
S.DECT indicator
lit green?
No
T8-d
Yes

red.
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
MST DECT
indicator lit green ?
No
Yes
Is the UCT card
is a slave
(see Section
Yes
MEVO indicator
lit green?
Yes
No
T8-e
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
No
T8-f
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-57
No connection
(LAN access) ?
No
Yes
LAN indicator
on and the "Tx/Rx"
indicator
flashing?
Yes
No
T8-i
and connections).
replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
PING the IP server
PING test OK?
No
Yes
No connection
with a digital set,
analogue set or S/T
access?
T8-j
Check successively:
the IP addresses
the link with the
Ethernet
network
(cable
and
connections)
the state of the IP
cabinet (see SHEET
E-17).
No
Yes
Page 7-58
6/2/06

Maintenance
Make a call on each

connection
Call OK?
No
T8-k
Check that the virtual
card
(digital,
analogue, S/T0) is
activated (menu 3.2.2
Mother
board
management
migration) see section
1.3 Document [2] :
Check the programmi
ng:
- of digital, analogue
and S0 users (menu
1.1.1,
Extension
characteristics)
- of
DECT
base
stations
of T0 lines
replace the cabinet (see
SHEET E-17).
Yes
No error message
reported in the
No
Yes
in the error
to
7.0.1.
No error message
reported in the
Yes
No
T8-l
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-17).
The UCT card is OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-59
SHEET T-9 TESTING A UCT1S-12 / UCT2S-12 AND UCT1-C / UCT2-C CARD

Testing a
UCT1S-12/UCT2S-12
and
RUN indicator
flashing?
No
Yes
S.EXT indicator
lit green ?
No
T9-b
network.
replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-18 or
SHEET E-19).
Yes
MEVO indicator
lit green?
Yes
1
Page 7-60
6/2/06
T9-a
The RUN indicator is off
or on.
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-18 or
SHEET E-19).
No
T9-c
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-18or
SHEET E-19).

Maintenance
No connection
(LAN access) ?
No
Yes
LAN indicator
on and the "Tx/Rx"
indicator
flashing?
Yes
No
T9-d
and connections).
replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-18 or
SHEET E-19).
PING the IP server
PING test OK?
No
Yes
T9-e
No connection
with a digital set,
analogue set or S/T
access?
Check successively:
the IP addresses
the link with the
Ethernet
network
(cable
and
connections)
the state of the IP
cabinet (see SHEET
E-18 or SHEET E-19).
No
Yes

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-61
Make a call on each

connection
Call OK?
No
T9-f
Check that the virtual
card
(digital,
analogue, S/T0) is
activated (menu 3.2.2
Mother
board
management
migration) see section
1.3 Document [2] :
Check the programmi
ng:
- of digital, analogue
and S0 users (menu
1.1.1,
Extension
characteristics)
- of
DECT
base
stations
of T0 lines
replace the cabinet (see
SHEET E-18 or SHEET
E-19).
Yes
No error message
reported in the
No
Yes
in the error
to
7.0.1.
No error message
reported in the
Yes
No
T9-g
Replace the cabinet
(see SHEET E-18 or
SHEET E-19).
The UCT card is OK.
Page 7-62
6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET T-10 TESTING A PT2 CARD

Testing a PT2 card
Is at least one card

indicator on?
No
T10-a
Check that the card is
inserted properly.
replace the PT2 card (see
SHEET E-12).
Yes
NRA indicator off ?
No
T10-b
Yes
Replace the PT2 card

(see SHEET E-12).
LINK indicator
on?
No
T10-c
Yes
COL, TX or RX
indicator flashing ?
Yes
Check successively:
the connections,
the connection cable,
state
of
the
IP
network,
replace the PT2 card
(see SHEET E-12).
No
T10-d
Replace the PT2 card
(see SHEET E-12).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-63
Is the card fitted with a

VoIP daughterboard ?
No
Yes
Make a call with
an IP set
Call OK?
No
T10-e
Yes
Check successively:
the connections on
the PT2 card and IP
set,
state of the IP set,
state of the IP
network,
the configuration of
the external accesses
and the numbering
plan (see section 1.3,
Document [1]).
replace the PT2 card.
(see SHEET E-12).
No error message
reported in the
Yes
The PT2 card is OK.
Page 7-64
6/2/06
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.

Maintenance
Ping the IP server
Ping
OK?
No
T10-f
Yes
Check successively:
IP addresses,
the connections on
the PT2 card and IP
server,
state of the IP server.

replace the PT2 card
(see SHEET E-12).
No error message
reported in the
No
Yes
in the error
to
7.0.1.
The PT2 card is OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-65
SHEET T-11 TESTING AN LT2 CARD

Testing an LT2 card

indicator on?
No
Check that the card

is inserted properly.
Check that the card
is in service (menu
3.2,
card
management,
see
Section
1.3
Document [2]).
replace the LT2 card
(see SHEET E-12).
Yes
RUN indicator
flashing?
No
T11-b
Yes
COM indicator on
steady or
flashing ?
Yes
T11-a
Replace the LT2 card

(see SHEET E-12).
No
T11-c
Check successively:
the wiring,
the T2 interface.
If the fault persists, ask
the operator to check the
connection up to the
interface.
(see SHEET E-12).
Page 7-66
6/2/06

Maintenance
No red indicator on?
No
T11-d
Check the state of
the frames (clock
missing,
frame
locking
absent,
etc.). When the fault
has been resolved,
the indicator goes
out.
(see SHEET E-12).
Yes
Make a call
Call OK?
No
T11-e
Yes
No error message
reported in the
administration
tool?
Yes
Check the
programming of:
the trunk group,
the lines,
the routing.
(see SHEET E-12).
No
in the error
to
7.0.1.
The LT2 card is OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-67
SHEET T-12 TESTING A CA1, CP1, CS1 OR LD4 CARD

Testing a card
Check that the card is in

service
Menu 3.2
Card Management
(see section 1.3 document
Make a call.
Call OK?
or
No
T12-a
Check that the card
Yes
Check the
programming.
or
or
No error message
reported in the
Yes
Card OK.
Page 7-68
6/2/06
or
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.
CA1 card:
PAD programming
(menu 2.1.1, link
characteristics).
CP1 card
packet circuit coupler
programming (menu
2.1.1, link
characteristics).
CS1 card:
synchronous link
programming (menu
2.1.1, link
characteristics).
LD4 card:
synchronous link S0
programming
(menu 1.1.1, extension
characteristics)
and T0 (line
characteristics).

replace the card
(see SHEET E-12).

Maintenance
SHEET T-13 TESTING AN LD4N / LD4X CARD

Testing an
LD4N/LD4X card
"RUN" indicator
flashing rapidly?
No
Yes

inserted correctly and
activated (Menu 3.2,
card management)
(see Section 1.3,
Document[2]). If the
fault persists, replace
the card (see SHEET
E-12).
Make a call.
Call OK?
No
Check the S0
(extension
characteristics) and T0
programming (line
characteristics). If the
fault persists, replace
the card (see SHEET
E-12).
Yes
No error message
reported in the
administration
tool?
Yes
No

faulty element
specified in the error
to section 7.0.1.
Card OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-69
SHEET T-14 TESTING A MUM CARD

Testing a MUM card

service
Menu 3.2
Card Management
Make a call :
call the DID number of
the remote MUM card
(test both sides).
Call OK?
No
T14-a
Yes

inserted properly.
Check the programming

(see section 1.3 Document
[13]).
replace the MUM card
(see SHEET E-12).
No error message
reported in the
Yes
MUM card OK.
Page 7-70
6/2/06
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.

Maintenance
SHEET T-15 TESTING AN IUMS CARD

Testing an IUMS card

indicator on?
No
Check that the card

Check that the card
is in service (menu
3.2,
card
management,
see
Section
1.3
Document [2]).
replace the IUMS card
(see SHEET E-12).
Yes
Is the LINK indicator

on steady?
No
T15-b
Yes
Is the RUN
indicator on
steady?
Yes
T15-a
If this indicator flashes

rapidly, there is a startup
problem.
Check
that
the
PCMCIA
card
is
installed and plugged
in correctly.
(see SHEET E-12).
No
T15-c
Check:
the connections,
the PCMCIA card.
(see SHEET E-12).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-71
LINK indicator on?
No
T15-d
Check the wiring
and
network
connections.
(see SHEET E-12).
Yes
Carry out a Ping test on

the card or connect to
CallPilot Manager.
Ping test OK?

Yes
No
T15-e
Check the
network configuration (IP
address and subnet mask
compatible).
(see SHEET E-12).
Page 7-72
6/2/06

Maintenance
Make a connection in
consultation mode
(voice mail direct call).
Test
OK?
No
T15-f
Yes
Check the PBX

configuration.
(see SHEET E-12).
Make a connection in
delivery mode (voice
mail indirect call).
Test
OK?
No
T15-g
Yes
No error message
reported in the
administration
tool?
Yes
Check the PBX

configuration.
(see SHEET E-12).
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.
IUMS card OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-73
SHEET T-16 TESTING AN EQUIPMENT CARD

Testing an equipment
card

service
Menu 3.2
Card Management
Make a call on each

trunk.
Call OK?
No
Yes

inserted properly.
Check the programming

(menu 1.1.1, extension
characteristics).
T16-a
replace the equipment
card
(see SHEET E-12).
No error message
reported in the
administration
tool?
Yes
Equipment card OK.
Page 7-74
6/2/06
No

in the error
to
7.0.1.

Maintenance
SHEET T-17 TESTING A TELEPHONE SET

Testing a telephone set
Does the set

have a screen ?
No
Yes
Does the screen

light up?
T17-b
Yes
Does the set

produce a tone ?
No
T17-a
Check successively:
the wiring,
the programming:
-MMC side
-set side (for IP sets,
IP address, mask,
etc.)
replace the set.
Yes
Make a call.
Call OK?
Yes
No
Check successively:
the wiring,
the programming:
-MMC side
-set side (for IP sets,
IP address, mask,
etc.)
replace the set.
No
T17-c
Replace the set.
Telephone set OK.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-75
7.0.1
Alarm messages and codes

Error messages sent by the Maintenance and Startup system are displayed by the
Operating system in the logbook. They advise the operator that the software has detected
one of the following events:
an anomaly detected in the configuration a fault report message is posted in the log. A
fault report can be:
- a software error detected by a software module
- a software error detected by the real-time monitor operating system iRMX286
- a software error detected in a RAM directory file
- a hardware error detected on a peripheral terminal or card
fail-safe action initiated and executed by maintenance software. A fail safe action
report message is then recorded in the logbook.
Page 7-76
6/2/06

Maintenance
7.0.1.1
Description of errors
Error
number
Description
100
Description
Matrix error.
Action
Monitor the error.
Contact the maintenance support team.
200
Description
A serious software fault has been detected by the program number LC XXXXXX.
This fault causes a system restart.
The information accompanying this error message will vary depending on the number of the
program that generated the fault.
Action
Monitor the error.
The system automatically restarts when this error occurs.
201
Description
A serious software fault has been signaled by the program number LC XXX.
For example, incorrect data received.
The information accompanying this error message will vary depending on the number of the
program that generated it.
Action
Monitor the error.
205
Description
File or Catalogue not found in DSC file.
If Index: 0 - Catalogue cannot be found
If Index: 1 - File (of a catalogue) cannot be found
Three types of information are displayed:

a) The action that required the File(1 byte)
0 : Loading TMS
1 or 2: Loading SVF
3 : Loading Lax Codec
b) The Catalogue/File ID(1 byte)
c) The Catalogue Name(only for case 'file not found')(1 byte)
Action
Monitor the error.
20A
Description
Low priority IRMX tasks (FEH) are not regularly executed by UC software (software execution
overload).
Action
Monitor the error.
20C
Description
There is insufficient reserved memory to send a signalling message.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically restarts when this error occurs.
- Folio 1 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-77
Error
number
20D
Description
Description
There is an incorrect PAS type file parameter.
(INDEX = fault code AGD).
- AGD number of the accessed table : 1 byte
- the logic cluster number
- the number of the PAS file AGD descriptor : 1 word
*1 word is displayed as 2 inverted bytes.
3=IRMX286 primitive call problem.

5= AGD internal fault: internal file full, incorrect message code in AGD message
6=BASIC I/O call problem
7=no resources (memory space), GEDI primitive call problem
9=fault, transaction duration value too high.
50/5A = fault, inconsistent or missing file
Disk/Mem
51/5B = fault, inconsistent or missing descriptor header
Disk/Mem
52/5C = fault, inconsistent or missing table descriptor
Disk/Mem
53/5D = error, function number parameter incorrect Disk/Mem
54/5E = error, descriptor number parameter incorrect Disk/Mem
55/5E = error, table number parameter incorrect
Disk/Mem
56/60 = error, type of table accessed incorrect
Disk/Mem
57/61 = error, index parameter incorrect
Disk/Mem
58/62 = error, length position parameter incorrect
Disk/Mem
Action
20F
Description
The CPU software no longer has sufficient memory resources (IRMX objects, memory area).
-the calling IRMX task token
: 1 word.
-the IRMX86/286 error code
: 1 word.
Notes: The index gives the type of request responsible for the error:
1, 2, 3, 10H: task creation.

4 : mailbox creation,
5, 6 : signalling channel creation,
7 : segment creation,
8 : large memory area,
9 : small memory area.
Action
Monitor the error. The system quickly restarts the CPU when this error occurs
- Folio 2 de 23 -
Page 7-78
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
214
Description
Description
A programming error was detected by the IRMX286 monitor.
If the IRMX error code is different from C008H/C00AH/C00CH:
- error code IRMX286 ( 7.0.1.3): 1 word.
- DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP, BX, DX, CX, AX: 14 words.
fault code, IP, CS, flags
- first words in stack.
If the IRMX error code is C008H/C00AH/C00CH:
- error code IRMX286: 1 word.
- processor error code: 1 word.
- IP, flags: 2 words.
- AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, DI: 8 words.
- ES, CS, SS, DS: 4 words.
- first words in stack (SS:SP).
*1 register is displayed as 2 inverted bytes.
Action
- Folio 3 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-79
Error
number
314
Description
Description
Programming error detected by the IRMX286 monitor, caused by a 32 bit ML. (exception).
Processor code and error code (error code is given in the two lower bits of the word; if error code
is C008, C00A or C00C: see section 7.0.1.4; if the error code is different from C008, C00A or
C00C then this code is an IRMX386 error code: see section 7.0.1.3),
DS, ES, FS,
GS, EDI, ESI, EBP,
ESP, EBX, EDX, ECX,
EAX, EIP, CS, Eflags,
SS, first words in stack.
For example:
***ERREUR:0314 **********:
Proc code
and error code
DS
0000810D
000011B0
GS
EDI
00004140
00000B5A
ESP
EBX
00000BF8
0000007A
EAX
EIP
0000001E
00003AA1
SS
STACK
00005710
00000200
00000000
ES
000011B0
ESI
00000000
EDX
00001168
CS
000011A8
FS
00003FD8
EBP
00000BE4
ECX
000011B0
EFLAGS
00000746
3FD80000
00000C00
Information in italics is not displayed in the logbook.

The size of an elementary cell is one word: 16-bit registers are displayed as 32-bit registers (for
example DS).
Action
601
Description
The OCX card does not recognise an address.
Program registers interrupted:
- register NMI, BP, DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP.
- BX, DX, CX, AX, IP, CS, Flags.
Action
- Folio 4 de 23 -
Page 7-80
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
602
Description
Software watchdog has been triggered by the CPU software loop or interrupt.
- register NMI, BP, DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP.
Action
603
Description
- Incorrect data has been transmitted by the system bus.
- Program registers interrupted:
REB, BP, DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP.
BX, DX, CX, AX, IP, CS, Flags.
first words in stack.
Action
604
Description
An incorrect I/0 card access instruction was given.
Action
Contact the maintenance support team. The state of the card is changed to faulty.
606
Description
An overall power supply problem has occurred.
Action
607
Description
The processor has shut down.
- REB, IP, CS, flags
- DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP, DX, CX, AX.
Action
608
Description
The OCT card does not recognise the I/O address.
- REB, BP, DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP.
Action
- Folio 5 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-81
Error
number
Description
609
Description
interrupt 2 caused by an int 2 instruction in a 16-bit ML.
-REB, BP, DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP.
-BX, DX, CX, AX, IP, CS, SS, flags.
-First words in stack.
An example of the information displayed in the logbook is given in the description of error 601.
Action
611
Description
Address not recognised on a UCT card, caused by a 16-bit ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS
- GS, EDI, ESI, EBP,
- ESP, EBX, EDX, ECX,
- EAX, EIP, CS, EFLAGS,
- First words in stack
For example:
***ERROR: 0611 **********:
REB
DS
00000008 000011B0
GS
EDI
00004140 00000B5A
ESP
EBX
00000BE4 0000007A
EAX
EIP
000000FF 00003AA2
STACK
00000200 3FD80000
ES
000011B0
ESI
00000000
EDX
00009003
CS
000011A8
FS
00003FD8
EBP
00000BF8
ECX
000011B0
EFLAGS
00000646
00000C00
00000000
Information in italics is not displayed in the logbook.

The size of an elementary cell is one word: 16-bit registers are displayed as 32-bit registers (for
example DS).
Action
- Folio 6 de 23 -
Page 7-82
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
612
Description
Software watchdog has been triggered by a CPU software loop or interrupt, caused by a 32-bit
ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS
Action
613
Description
Incorrect data transmitted by system bus, caused by a 32 bit ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS

Action
617
Description
Processor shut down in a 32 bit ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS

Action
- Folio 7 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-83
Error
number
618
Description
Description
IO address not recognised by a UCT card, caused by a 32 bit ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS

Action
619
Description
interrupt 2 caused by an int 2 instruction in a 32-bit ML.
- REB, DS, ES, FS

Action
635
Description
Dry loop alarm.
Action
636
Description
End of dry loop alarm.
Action
637
Description
Shortage of IRMX resources alarm.
Action
638
Description
End of IRMX shortage of resources alarm.
Action
650
Description
This error occurs when a card is put in service: the card is absent.
Action
Monitor the error. The card is actually absent or may be faulty.
- Folio 8 de 23 -
Page 7-84
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
700
Description
The CLX card cannot be woken up.
Action
Monitor the error. The state of the card is changed to faulty.
701
Description
Fatal CLX card error while loading.
- the first two bytes in the IRRD area.
- the first indicates the number of the faulty phase. The second is the general error report.
Action
702
Description
There is no initialisation report from the CLX card software.
Action
703
Description
Address not recognised on a CLX card.
- program register interrupted:
- CS, IP, flags.
- DS, RS, DI, SI, DX, CX, AX, BP, SP.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically restarts the CLX card when this error occurs.
705
Description
CLX card has a software loop or shutdown.
Action
706
Description
A spurious NMI has occurred on the CLX card.
Action
707
Description
Too frequent automatic restart of a CLX card.
Statistics counter value.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the CLX card status to faulty when this
error occurs. Contact the maintenance support team.
708
Description
The CLX card has detected a bus time-out.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the CLX card status to faulty when this
error occurs.
- Folio 9 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-85
Error
number
Description
70A
Description
Spurious ICBS on a CLX card, (16-bit registers).
-IP interrupted program register :1 word
-CS interrupted program register:1 word
-Registers AX, BX, CX, DX, SI, DI, ES, DS, BP, SP, SS: 11 words
-First words in stack (SS:SP) :7 words
Action
70D
Description
The interrupt processor on the CLX card (16-bit registers) has detected a programming error.
Corresponds to software interruptions 0, 4, and 5 ->15.
Error code same as IRMX386 error code (appendix 3) :1 word
-DS, ES, DI, SI, BP, SP, BX, DX, CX, AX:10 words
-error code, IP, CS, Flags :3 words
-The first 6 words of the user stack :6 words
Action
715
Description
Address not recognised on a CLX card, 32-bit registers (for example PT2).
EFLAGS register:1 double word
-CS register of the interrupted program: 1 double word
-Value of EIP, SS, ESP, EBP registers: 4 double words
-First words in stack (SS:SP): 4 double words of interrupted program
-Registers EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, ESI, EDI, DS, ES : 11 double words
FS, GS
-Value of ERROR_CODE :1 double word
Action
716
Description
Spurious ICBS on a CLX card (32-bit registers), for example PT2.
EFLAGS register :1 double word
-Content of start of stack (SS:SP) : 4 double words of interrupted program
FS, GS
-Value of ERROR_CODE:1 double word
Action
- Folio 10 de 23 -
Page 7-86
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
717
Description
Description
Programming error detected by the interrupt processor on the CLX card (32-bit registers), for
example PT2. Corresponds to software interruptions 0, 4, and 5 ->15.
EFLAGS register:1 double word
-Content of start of stack (SS:SP) : 4 double words of interrupted program
FS, GS
-Value of ERROR_CODE:1 double word
Action
718
Description
Bug Trap in a virtual card.
Number error (0x718): word
-Card Number: word
-Data : 14 bytes
-Data Stack: x Bytes
Action
Update of the circular buffer in SRAM (5006400h) with more stack data
Contact the TDD support team.
719
Description
Timeout when changing card state to faulty or disabling.
Organe CLC (0x07) : word
-Phy_TDD : word
Action
The system automatically changes the state of the card to faulty or disabled.
9xx
Description
CLX Link error.
Action
The system automatically changes the state of the card to faulty.
C05
Description
The number of active operator stations is greater than that authorised by the dongle (voice mail).
Action
Check the number of stations authorised by the dongle.
C20
Description
This error occurs when an analogue subscriber is put in service by the operator: the analogue
subscriber is absent. The state of the subscriber is still disabled.
Action
If intentional: no action
If not: replace the LA or LM card.
- Folio 11 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-87
Error
number
Description
C21
Description
This error occurs when an analogue subscriber is put in service automatically: the analogue
subscriber is absent. The state of the subscriber is changed to faulty.
Action
If not: replace the LA or LM card.
1000
Description
External clock control problem (VCXO absent?)
Action
Monitor the error. Contact the maintenance support team.
1003
Description
No usable external reference clock for synchronising ISDN T access connections to the ISDN.
Switch to the internal clock.
Action
Monitor the error.
1700
Description
Passive UCT-D card unavailable.
Action
The state of the passive UCT-D card is changed to faulty.
1701
Description
IUCT-D card unavailable
Action
The state of the IUCT-D card is changed to faulty.
1702
Description
Ethernet link cut.
Action
The first time this error occurs, the duplex link is automatically reactivated to perform a test
again (in case of software problem in the IP stack, for example). If a second error occurs during
this reactivation phase, the status of the passive UCT-D security block changes to faulty.
2300
Description
TMS file cannot be loaded.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the state of the TMS to faulty.
2305
Description
No reply from TMS (SGX) during supervision.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically reloads or restarts the TMS.
2306
Description
Maximum TMS restarts reached.
Action
Monitor the error. The state of the TMS is changed to faulty.
- Folio 12 de 23 -
Page 7-88
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
2307
Description
TMS Driver execution fault.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically reloads and restarts the TMS.
2310
Description
Remote maintenance Modem not accessible.
Action
2800
Description
JRA trunk error.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the state of the card to faulty. Contact the
maintenance support team.
2A00
Description
AUX driver error.
Action
3900
Description
Alarm detected by telephony (GIS) on the T2 access on an LT2 card.
Action
Monitor the error.
3901
Description
End of an alarm detected on a T2 access on an LT2 card, alarm detected by telephony.
Action
Monitor the error.
- Folio 13 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-89
Error
number
3902
Description
Description
A persistent or intermittent alarm was detected on the T2 access to an LS2 card for a 1-minute
period. If the alarm disappears for more than one minute, an end of alarm message is given.
1 : the alarm is signalled by a message with the appropriate LT2 access references and the
nature of the alarm in plain text (if there are several alarms, the one with the highest priority is
signalled).
MS: No remote clock
SIA: Alarm indication signal.
PVT: Frame alignment loss.
TE: Error rate.
CRC4: CRC4 invalid.
BitE: Invalid bit.
IADC: Remote alarm indication
2 : error 3902 is accompanied by data groups describing the nature of the alarms and the
number of transitions per alarm.
- characters indicating the alarm type
- 2 characters indicating the hexadecimal number of transitions for this alarm
- space characters (blank)
Action
Monitor the error.
3904
Description
Level 2 alarm detected on the T2 access, alarm detected by telephony.
Action
Monitor the error.
3905
Description
Disappearance of a level 2 T2 alarm, detected by telephony.
Action
Monitor the error.
3B20
Description
This error occurs when a digital subscriber is put in service by the operator: the digital subscriber
is absent. The state of the subscriber is still disabled.
Action
If not: replace the LN or LM card (see SHEET E-12).
3B21
Description
This error occurs when a digital subscriber is automatically put in service by the operator: the
digital subscriber is absent. The state of the subscriber is changed to faulty.
Action
If not: replace the LN or LM card (see SHEET E-12).
3D10
Description
Management of hardware anomalies on access S0 (QUATS) level 1.
Action
Restore the access.
- Folio 14 de 23 -
Page 7-90
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
3D11
Description
More than three 3D10h error events in 5 minutes.
Action
Change the state of the access concerned to faulty.
3D20
Description
This error occurs when an S0 access is put in service by the operator: the S0 access is absent.
The state of the access is still disabled.
Action
If not: replace the card (see SHEET E-12).
3D21
Description
This error occurs when an S0 access is put in service automatically: the S0 access is absent.
The state of the access is changed to faulty.
Action
3E00
Description
Unsuccessful call due to establishment failure on level 2.
2 specific program words.
Action
Monitor the error.
3E01
Description
There is an activation problem on T0 access.
2 specific program words.
Action
Monitor the error.
3E02
Description
4 unsuccessful attempts to activate level 1 on a T0 access of an LD4 card.
Action
Monitor the error.
3E03
Description
Put level 1 back in service on a T0 access of an LD4 card.
Action
Monitor the error.
3E04
Description
Persistent level 2 cut-off on a T0 access of an LD4 card.
Action
Monitor the error.
3E05
Description
Put level 2 back in service on a T0 access of an LD4 card.
Action
Monitor the error.
- Folio 15 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-91
Error
number
Description
3E10
Description
Management of hardware anomalies on access T0 (QUATS) level 1.
Action
Restore the access.
3E11
Description
More than three 3E10h error events in 5 minutes.
Action
Change the state of the access concerned to faulty.
3E20
Description
This error occurs when a T0 access is put in service by the operator: the T0 access is absent.
The state of the access is still disabled.
Action
3E21
Description
This error occurs when a T0 access is put in service automatically: the T0 access is absent. The
state of the subscriber is changed to faulty.
Action
4003
Description
Clock Timer Error.
+ Index = 0: Clock Timer has made a read error.
No other information
+ Index = 1: Clock Timer has made a write error.
No other information
+ Index = 2: Clock Timer has given an incorrect piece of information.
Pcd (word):
1 : wrong year
2 : wrong month
3 : wrong day
4 : wrong hour
5 : wrong minute
6 : wrong second
Action
Monitor the error.
6601
Description
Catalogue missing at the startup of the CCS LSB.
Action
The system automatically stops the startup and changes the state of the LSB to faulty.
- Folio 16 de 23 -
Page 7-92
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
6D00
Description
PCM interface on LT2 card is not configured in selected mode.
No action or information for the operator.
Action
The PCM interface of the LT2 card has not been configured in the selected mode.
6D04
Description
Appearance of PCM alarm on an LT2_T1 card.
- frame alarm register (8 least significant bits): 1 word.
- multiframe alarm register (8 least significant bits): 1 word.
1 word is displayed as 2 inverted bytes.
Action
No action, information for the operator.
6D05
Description
End of alarm on the PCM of the LT2_T1 card.
Action
6D06
Description
Alarm of a blocked junctor on LT2_T1 card PCM.
Action
6D07
Description
Alarm of a blocked junctor on LT2_T1 card PCM ends.
Action
6F00
Description
2-channel DECT BS cannot be loaded.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the base station status to faulty when this
error occurs.
6F01
Description
2-channel DECT BS cannot communicate.
Action
This error is not displayed in the logbook. The system automatically changes the BS status to
blocked when this error occurs.
6F02
Description
2-channel DECT BS communications are restored (after error 6F01h) or the BS is activated.
Action
This error is not displayed in the logbook. The system automatically changes the BS status to in
service when this error occurs.
- Folio 17 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-93
Error
number
Description
6F03
Description
The type of 2-channel BS coding when this error occurs is not compatible with that of the PBX.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the base station state to faulty when this
error occurs.
7004
Description
Onset of alarm on an LT2_RTC card PCM.
Action
7005
Description
The alarm on the PCM of the LT2_RTC card ends.
Action
7006
Description
Alarm of a blocked junctor on LT2_RTC card.
Action
7007
Description
End of blocked junctor on LT2_T1 card PCM alarm.
Action
7008
Description
PCM alarm on LT2_RTC card (7004) has been sent for 60 seconds.
Position of trunk, type of alarm.
Action
7300
Description
4-channel DECT base station cannot be loaded.
Action
error occurs.
7301
Description
4-channel DECT BS cannot communicate.
Action
This error is not displayed in the log. The system automatically changes the BS status to
blocked when this error occurs.
- Folio 18 de 23 -
Page 7-94
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
7302
Description
4-channel DECT base station communications are restored (after error 7301h) or the base
station is activated.
Action
This error is not displayed in the log. The system automatically changes the BS status to in
service when this error occurs.
7303
Description
The type of 4-channel BS coding when this error occurs is not compatible with that of the PBX.
Action
error occurs.
7400
Description
Hardware anomalies on an S0 access EPIC_S.
Action
Restore the access.
7402
Description
Hardware anomalies on a T0 access EPIC_S.
Action
Restore the access.
7800
Description
Compression of the BVF (or MEVO) card Flash memory.
If Index = 1: start of the compression
If Index = 2: end of the compression
Action
The system creates the compression task.
7801
Description
Loading MEVO DSP failed.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically changes the state of the FMEVO card to faulty when
this error occurs.
7802
Description
MEVO DSP does not reply to an "IVB" compression.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically reloads the DSP and changes the state of the
MEVO card to "in service" when this error occurs.
7803
Description
Incorrect response of the MEVO DSP to a compression request.
Action
7804
Description
"IVB" compression failed.
Action
- Folio 19 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-95
Error
number
Description
7805
Description
Flash memory compression in progress.
If Index = 1: appears during new compression request
If Index = 2: appears during startup request of IVB LSB
If Index = 3: appears during remote startup request of IVB LSB
Action
The system refuses the request.
7806
Description
The MEVO card is not available for compression.
Action
The system refuses the compression request.
7900
Description
The LAN link of the PT2 card has been disconnected for 2 minutes.
Position of the PT2 card and message "network alarm".
Action
Reconnect the LAN link.
7901
Description
The LAN Link of the PT2 card has been reconnected for 30 seconds.
Position of the PT2 card and message "end of network alarm".
Action
No action.
7A00
Description
Voice prompts missing at the startup of the IVB LSB.
Action
The system automatically stops the startup and changes the state of the LSB to faulty.
7B00
Description
This error occurs when a PT2 trunk is put in service by the operator.
The trunk is not put in service; its state is still "disabled".
There is an inconsistency between the declaration of the PT2 card and its hardware
configuration:
- Vocoder absent,
- or, for instance, declaration of a 16-channel PT2 for a 32-channel PT2 card.
Position of the trunk: there is one 7B00 error per trunk.
Action
If the inconsistency is intentional: no action
If not, change the declaration of the card or replace the VOIP card (see SHEET E-14).
7B01
Description
This error occurs when a PT2 trunk is put in service by the operator; the vocoder is out of
service.
Position of the trunk: there is one 7B01 error per trunk.
Action
Replace the VOIP card (see SHEET E-14).
- Folio 20 de 23 -
Page 7-96
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
7B02
Description
This error occurs when PT2 trunks are put in service.
(The trunks are not put in service and their states are changed to faulty.)
There is an inconsistency between the declaration of the PT2 card and its hardware
configuration:
- Vocoder absent,
- or, for instance, declaration of a 16-channel PT2 for a 32-channel PT2 card.
In both cases, you cannot put any trunks in service.
Position of the first trunk of a vocoder: there is only one 7B02 error per vocoder.
Action
If the inconsistency is intentional: no action
If not, change the declaration of the card or replace the VOIP card (see SHEET E-14).
7B03
Description
This error occurs when PT2 trunks are put in service automatically;
the vocoder is out of service.
Position of the first trunk of the vocoder: there is only one 7B03 error per vocoder out of service.
Action
7B04
Description
The CRI ML has detected a problem in an operational vocoder.
Position of the first trunk of the out of service vocoder.
Action
7C00
Description
Driver error when trying to read the ibutton identifier.
Action
Monitor the error.
7D00
Description
Driver error when trying to read the eeprom.
Action
Monitor the error.
7F00
Description
Catalogue missing at the startup of the IVS LSB.
Action
Monitor the error. The system automatically stops the startup and changes the state of the LSB
to faulty.
8200
Description
Lax driver error when loading the codecs.
Action
Monitor the error.
- Folio 21 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-97
Error
number
Description
8500
Description
An expansion cabinet has been detected as not present by the starting test and this absence
has been confirmed by the MAI software.
The number of the expansion cabinet is given with the error (2: expansion cabinet 1, 3:
expansion cabinet 2):
For example, 0x8500 error on expansion cabinet no. 1 1 :
***ERROR: 8500 ******cabinet: 2-00
The two bytes given are the values of the registers RLVDS and RCTLKF of the UCT card.
Action
If the absence of the expansion cabinet is intentional: no action.
8501
Description
An expansion cabinet has been detected as not present by the starting test and this absence
has not been confirmed by the MAI software.
For example, 0x8501 error on expansion cabinet no. 1 :
***ERROR: 8501 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
No cards can be put in service in this expansion cabinet. The expansion cabinet has
probably been switched on too late.
8502
Description
Detection of a macro power shutdown on an expansion cabinet.
For example, 0x8502 error on expansion cabinet no.1 :
***ERROR: 8502 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
If the power shutdown is intentional (for example, the operator has switched off the expansion
cabinet): no action.
If not: Contact the maintenance support team.
8503
Description
Detection of the end of a macro power shutdown on an expansion cabinet.
***ERROR: 8503 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
If the end of the power shutdown is intentional (for example, the operator has switched off the
expansion cabinet then switched it back on again): no action.
If not: Contact the maintenance support team.
- Folio 22 de 23 -
Page 7-98
6/2/06

Maintenance
Error
number
Description
8504
Description
Description of a transmission error between the main cabinet an an expansion cabinet.
***ERROR: 8504 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
Monitor the error.
8505
Description
Detection of a micro power shutdown on an expansion cabinet.
***ERROR: 8505 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
Monitor the error.
8506
Description
Detection of a too frequent micro power shutdown on an expansion cabinet.
***ERROR: 8506 ******cabinet: 2-00
Action
Monitor the error. No cards can be put in service in this expansion cabinet. The operator must
reset the PBX to put a card back in service.
8600
Description
ADS or VADS module absent or presence of a module other than the one configured (VADS
instead of ADS or vice-versa).
Action
The status of the ADS or VADS security block changes to faulty.
- Folio 23 de 23 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-99
7.0.1.2
Operating system errors
Value
(hex)
Error description
Normal.
Timeout for unaccomplished task request.
Insufficient memory space for task request.
Other task is currently accessing data protected by a region.
Task attempt to violate monitor protection.
Incorrect system call.
Token with a value corresponding to an impossible transition of this task state.
Task attempt to execute an operation resulting in an impossible state transition for that task.
System call not defined in monitor.
IT task has reached the authorised limit of SIGNAL$INTERRUPT.
0A
Interrupt task has accumulated a number of SIGNAL$INTERRUPT greater than the

authorised limit.
0C
No available GDT entry (IRMX286 only).
Value
(hex)
Error description
20
File already exists.
21
File does not exist.
22
Device driver and file driver are not compatible.
23
Unauthorised parameter combination.
24
Free position in directory.
25
Position outside directory limits.
26
File access denied.
27
Incompatible file type.
28
Incorrect file sharing request.
29
No free space.
2A
Incorrect peripheral controller request.
2B
I/O error.
2C
The connection in a call has been deleted

before the end of the operation.
2D
"Named Volume" incorrect.
2E
Disabled peripheral access.
2F
Incorrect "File driver" request.
Page 7-100 6/2/06

Maintenance
Value
(hex)
Error description
40
Directory name begins with " : " but does not contain a " : " pair.
41
Extended I/O system can no longer transfer the remaining data from the buffer to the output
peripheral.
42
Basic I/O system has insufficient memory space to process the request.
44
Peripheral containing required file not in service.
45
Extended I/O system cannot find the logical name requested in the object directories it
manages.
46
The user currently attempting to detach the peripheral is not the peripheral processor.
47
Extended I/O system cannot create an I/O job because the requested object directory is too
small.
50
Unknown I/O error.
51
I/O " soft " error. A fresh attempt may be successful.
52
I/O " hard " error. A fresh attempt is probably pointless.
53
Peripheral out of service. Operator action is required.
54
Volume write-protected.
60
An absolute format program is installed in a protected system memory area.
61
Illegal group component in the Group definition record.
62
Object file with an incorrect header record.
63
Segment definition record incorrect.
64
Checksum error while reading a record.
65
Unexpected EOF when reading file records.
66
File containing an incorrect fix up record.
67
Insufficient memory to meet dynamic loader needs.
68
Insufficient memory to create PIC/LTL segments.
69
Illegal record format.
6A
Record length exceeds the defined load buffer size.
6B
Incorrect record type.
6C
No start-up address.
6D
The maximum job size is less than the memory requirements specified in the file.
6E
Overlay name does not match overlay module names
6F
The defined file loader cannot handle the required load file characteristics.
70
The address called by a data record loaded by the Application Loader is outside the limits of
the segment created for that record.
- Folio 1 de 2 -

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-101
Value
(hex)
Error description
80
Analysis buffer contains a literal with no closing quote marks.
81
The string returned as a parameter name is longer than that of the buffer supplied by the user
at the time of the call.
82
Analysis buffer contains a command separator.
83
Analysis buffer contains a continuation character.
84
Numeric value contains an incorrect numeric character.
85
Last value missing in the list of values.
86
Wildcard character used in the wrong context, as an intermediate component of a complete

file name.
87
Prepositions not allowed in command lines.
88
Wrong path name in command line.
89
User has pressed CONTROL-C during command loading.
8A
Command line contains an invalid control character.
8B
No more input path names whereas the list of output path names is not empty.
- Folio 2 de 2 -
Page 7-102 6/2/06

Maintenance
7.0.1.3
Programming error codes
Value
(hex)
Error description
8000
Division by zero performed by a task.
8001
Overflow interrupt occurrence.
8002
A token refers to an existing object which is not the type of object required.
8003
Task attempting to access beyond the end of a segment.
8004
Incorrect parameter value. The parameter is neither a token nor an offset.
8005
The I/O system code was deleted due to an error in an application program. Recovery
impossible.
8006
Table overflow detected by hardware or processor.
8007
8087 error.
8008
Attempt to run an incorrect instruction.
800D
Memory protection violation.
800E
Attempt to load a segment record with an non-existent segment.
800F
Logical address incorrect (segment unknown or offset).
8021
No default distributor.
8022
No default prefix.
8040
The object specified is neither a connection device nor a connection file.
8041
Token refers to an existing object which is not a device connection.
8042
Token referring to an existing object which is not a file connection.
8060
The maximum size of the job specified is smaller than the job's minimum size.
8080
Error in the the internal analysis tables.
8081
A human interface internal table has been deleted and contains an incorrect value.
8083
The string with the default output name is incorrect.
8084
The length of the path name returned is greater than 255 characters.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-103
7.0.1.4
Other errors caused for various reasons
Value
(hex)
Error description
8100
Divide error
8104
Overflow (INTO instruction)
8105
BOUND range exceeded
8106
Invalid Opcode
8107
Device not available
8108
Double Fault
8109
Coprocessor segment overrun
810A
Invalid TSS
810B
Segment not present
810C
Stack-segment fault
810D
General protection
810E
Page fault
8110
Floating point error
8111
Alignment check
7.0.1.5
Additional error codes

These error codes are not IRMX codes, as they are generated by the maintenance
software.
Value
(hex)
Error description
C008
Double Fault (interrupt 8)
C00A
Invalid TSS (interrupt 10)
C00C
Stack-segment fault (interrupt 12)
Page 7-104 6/2/06

Maintenance
7.1
Corrective maintenance - Exchange sheet
7.1.1
Description
7.1.1.1
Structure of exchange sheets

The exchange sheets include (see Figure 7.3):
- the equipment availability (see section 7.2.1),
- the number of operators,
- the duration of the task,
- the means required for performing the task,
a main body, describing the operations to perform, broken down into 4 sections:
- Removal:
This section describes all the operations required to remove the element. These are
displayed in the form of a table with two columns:
X
the second column provides the detailed removal procedure to be carried out,
plus any comments.
- Reassembly:
This section describes all the operations required to reassemble the element. These
are displayed in the form of a table with two columns:
X
the second column provides the detailed procedure to be carried out to put back
the subassembly, plus any comments.
The description of exchange operations is based on figures providing a physical

description of the subassembly. If required, an additional removal/reassembly figure
shows the fittings and connections of the subassembly.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-105
TYPE
AND
NUMBER
E-X SHEET
PBX AVAILABILITY:
- FULL MISSION CAPABLE
-PARTIAL MISSION CAPABLE
-NO MISSION CAPABLE.
"NAME OF THE TASK"
AVAILABILITY
NUMBER
AND
TYPE
OF
OPERATOR(S)
DURATION
TASK DURATION
TOOL(S)
LIST OF TOOLS
REQUIRED
INGREDIENT(S)
/ CONSUMABLE(S)
LIST OF INGREDIENTS
REMOVAL
OPERATIONS TO PERFORM
TO REPLACE THE ELEMENT
Figure 7.3
REASSEMBLY
PRESENTATION OF AN EXCHANGE SHEET (E SHEET)
Page 7-106 6/2/06

Maintenance
7.1.1.2
Conventions used in the sheets

The means (standard tools, etc.) are listed at the beginning of the sheet, but are not
detailed for each operation in the procedure.
The duration indicated is the approximate time required to perform the procedure;
when the latter refers to another exchange sheet, the times must be added together to
obtain the total time required.
However, the duration does not include the time required for preparing the procedure
(tools, etc.).
Cable references are not always given in the sheets: to make the connections of the
subassemblies to be installed the operator must refer to the labels attached to the
cables.
The microswitch configurations of the subassemblies are described in Chapter 4.
7.1.1.3
Guidelines
Apply all safety instructions (see section 6.1).
Keep the exchange procedure time to a minimum, in order to minimise operational
(availability) or technical (lack of ventilation, etc.) consequences.
When refitting a subassembly, check that it is inserted properly, and that the cables are
connected securely.
Before performing any corrective maintenance operation on a cabinet, we
recommend saving the customer configuration (see section 1.3, Document [6] or
[10]).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-107
7.1.2
List of E sheets
SHEET NO.
Table 7.12
SHEET E-1
Replacing an ADS300XD power supply module
SHEET E-2
Replacing an XL power supply module
SHEET E-3
Replacing an XS power supply module
SHEET E-4
Replacing an XS12 power supply module
SHEET E-5
Replacing an XC power supply module
SHEET E-6
Replacing a VADS ventilation module
SHEET E-7
Replacing fuses in the power supply module (XD PBX)
SHEET E-8
Replacing fuses in the power supply module (XL, XS, XC PBX)
SHEET E-9
Replacing a UCT-D CPU card
SHEET E-10
Replacing a RUCT-D CPU card
SHEET E-11
Replacing an IUCT-D card
SHEET E-12
Replacing an expansion card (XD, XL, XS and XS12)
SHEET E-13
Replacing a daughterboard (XD PBX)
SHEET E-14
Replacing a daughterboard (XL, XS and XS12 PBX)
SHEET E-15
Standard replacement of an XD main cabinet
SHEET E-16
Standard replacement of an XL main cabinet
SHEET E-17
Standard replacement of an XS main cabinet
SHEET E-18
Standard replacement of an XS12 main cabinet
SHEET E-19
Standard replacement of an XC main cabinet
SHEET E-20
Replacing an expansion cabinet (XD PBX)
SHEET E-21
Replacing an expansion cabinet (XL, XS and XC PBX)
LIST OF E SHEETS
Page 7-108 6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET E-1 REPLACING AN ADS300XD POWER SUPPLY MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable if power supply module is not duplicated
Full mission capable if power supply module is duplicated
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
1 minute 30 seconds
MOYEN(S)
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-109
PROCEDURE
See Figure 4.2 for an overview of the power supply module.
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management

Check
the
functional
technical state of the new
power supply module.
module is compatible with the old one (see section 1.3, document
[9]).

Warning :
For a duplex configuration,
when a power supply module is out of service, the operator
has approximately 90 seconds to replace and power on
again the power supply module. After 90 seconds, the
second power supply module is automatically powered off.
Disconnect
cable.
the
mains

In a simplex configuration, if it is a PBX with multiple cabinets,
power off the power supply module of the main cabinet then those
of the expansion cabinets.
Disconnect the mains cable on the front panel of the power supply
module.
Pull out the power supply

module.
Unscrew the two securing screws on the front panel of the power
supply module.
Pull out the power supply module using its handles, and remove it.
Fit the new power supply

module.
Check that the new power supply module is powered off (I/O
switch set to O).
two captive screws.
module.

module.

For a simplex configuration, if it is a PBX with several cabinets:
- first power on the power supply modules in the expansion
cabinets,
- then power on the power supply module in the main cabinet.

operating test.
Page 7-110 6/2/06
See SHEET T-1.

Maintenance
SHEET E-2 REPLACING AN XL POWER SUPPLY MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
15 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-111
PROCEDURE
See Figure 4.3 for an overview of the power supply module.
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management




connected on the front panel of the power supply module.

module.
Unscrew the two securing screws on the front panel of the power
supply module.
Pull out the power supply module using its handles, and remove it.
Check
the
functional
[9]).

module.
Check that the new power supply module is powered off (I/O
switch set to O).
two captive screws.
Connect the cables.
Connect the mains cable, and if required the backup battery

connected on the front panel of the power supply module.

module.

If it is the power supply module of the main cabinet in a PBX with
multiple cabinets:
cabinets,

operating test.
Page 7-112 6/2/06
See SHEET T-2.

Maintenance
SHEET E-3 REPLACING AN XS POWER SUPPLY MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover)
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-113
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management



Disconnect
cables.

the
external
Unscrew the securing screws at the back of the cabinet.

Rackable XS PBXs
Use the 1/4 turn locks to remove the RJ card from its slot
(see Figure 4.1).
Remove the guide rails.
expansion
RJ cards
Remove the plastic covers from the front panels of the cards.
Unlock the cards (see Figure 4.1) and pull them out from the
backplane.
ST cards
Unscrew the spacers then extract the cards from the backplane.
If required, disconnect the

expansion ribbon cable.
If the PBX has two cabinets, disconnect the expansion ribbon

cable linking the CPU card to the expansion cable connector.
Remove the backplane
Disconnect the backplane from the main card.

module
cover
(nonrackable XS).
This operation concerns only the non-rackable XS PBX.

Unscrew the power supply cover screws and remove the cover.
Remove the expansion

ribbon
cable
holder
(rackable XS).
This operation concerns only the rackable XS PBX.
Remove
cards.
the
Disconnect
the
power
supply ribbon cable from
the CPU card.
Page 7-114 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Unscrew the two securing

screws on the mains unit.
module.
Unscrew the power supply module and pull it out slowly.
Check
the
functional
module is compatible with the old one (see Section 1.3, Document
[9]).

module.
Insert the power supply module in its slot and secure it with its
screws.
Connect the fan cable to

the power supply.
Screw on the mains unit (at
the back of the cabinet).
Connect the power supply
ribbon cable to the CPU
card.
Place the power supply
module
cover
(nonrackable XS).

Refit and tighten the power supply cover.
Mount
the
expansion
ribbon
cable
holder
(rackable XS).
This operation concerns only the rackable XS PBX.
Refit the backplane.
If required, connect the

If the PBX has two cabinets, dconnect the expansion ribbon cable
linking the CPU card to the expansion cable connector.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-115
OPERATION

Rackable XS PBXs
Place the guide rails.
Insert the card in its slot and lock it in place using the 1/4 turn
locks (see Section 4.1).
Reinstall
cards.
the
expansion
Secure the cover,

forward.
- Tighten the securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
Close the cabinet.
Connect
cables.
the
external

module.

operating test.
Page 7-116 6/2/06
RJ cards
Insert the cards in the backplane.
Use the 1/4 turn locks to lock the cards (seeFigure 4.1).
Install the plastic covers on the front panels of the cards. There
are holes provided for inserting the locks. Once the plastic cover is
ST cards
Insert the cards in the backplane and secure them on spacers with
the screws provided.

If it is the power supply module of the main cabinet in a PBX with
multiple cabinets:
cabinets,
See SHEET T-3.

Maintenance
SHEET E-4 REPLACING AN XS12 POWER SUPPLY MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1Facom AZXR 15*75 Torx screwdriver for M4 screw (cover)
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-117
PROCDURE
See Figure 3.22 and Figure 3.23 for a view of the XS PBX.
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management


Disconnect
cables.

the
external
Remove
cards.
the
expansion

Rackable XS12 PBX
(see Figure 4.1).
Remove the guide rails.
backplane.
Remove the backplane
Disconnect the backplane from the main card.

module
cover
(nonrackable XS12).
This operation concerns only the non-rackable XS12 PBX.

Unscrew the power supply cover screws and remove the cover.
Disconnect
the
power
supply cable from the CPU
card.
Unscrew the two securing
screws on the mains unit.
module.
Page 7-118 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Check
the
functional
[9]).

module.
screws.

the power supply.
Screw on the mains unit (at
the back of the cabinet).
cable to the CPU card.
Place the power supply
module
cover
(nonrackable XS12).
This operation concerns only the non-rackable XS12 PBX.

Refit and tighten the power supply cover.
Refit the backplane.

Rackable XS12 PBX
Place the guide rails.
Insert the card in its slot and lock it in place using the 1/4 turn
locks (see Figure 4.1).
Reinstall
cards.
the
expansion
Secure the cover,

forward.
Close the cabinet.

Connect
cables.
the

external

module.
operating test.

See SHEET T-3.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-119
SHEET E-5 REPLACING AN XC POWER SUPPLY MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/a.
Page 7-120 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
See Figure 3.27 for an overview of the XC PBX.
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management

Disconnect
cables.
the
external

Attention : Disconnect the mains cable.

Warning :
Disconnect the battery to

power off the PBX.
Disconnect
the
power
supply cable from the CPU
card.
Unscrew
the
various
elements in the PBX.
Unscrew the power supply cable bracket, and remove it.

Unscrew the two screws securing the mains power supply unit
and remove it.

module.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-121
OPERATION
Check
the
functional
[9]).

module.
screws.

the power supply.
Screw on the various
elements to the PBX.
Refit the power supply cable bracket, and tighten it (at the back of
the cabinet).
Refit the mains power unit, and tighten it (at the back of the
cabinet).

the power supply.
cable to the CPU card.
Reconnect the battery
cable to the power supply.
Close the cabinet.
Secure the cover,

forward.
- Tighten the three securing screws at the back of the cabinet.

module.
operating test.
Page 7-122 6/2/06

See SHEET T-4.

Maintenance
SHEET E-6 REPLACING A VADS VENTILATION MODULE

DISPONIBILIT
Full mission capable
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
1 minute 30 seconds
MOYEN(S)
N/a.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-123
PROCDURE
See Figure 4.2for an overview of the power supply module.
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management

Check
the
functional
VADS ventilation module.
Check that the functional technical state of the new ventilation

module is compatible with the old one (see Section 1.3, Document
[9]).
Remove
module.
the
ventilation
Fit
the
new
ventilation module.
Page 7-124 6/2/06
Warning :
The
operator
has
about
90 seconds to make the replacement. After 90 seconds,
the power supply module is automatically powered off.
Unscrew the two securing screws on the front panel of the

ventilation module.
Remove the ventilation module using its handles.
VADS
Insert the ventilation module in its slot and push it fully home.
Secure the ventilation module onto the PBX structure using its two
captive screws.

Maintenance
SHEET E-7
REPLACING FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (XD PBX)
DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable if power supply module is not duplicated
Full mission capable if power supply module is duplicated
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
1 minute 30 seconds
MOYEN(S)
1 multimeter
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-125
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management

module.
Disconnect
cable.
the
mains

Warning :
when a power supply module is out of service, the operator
has approximately 90 seconds to replace and power on
again the power supply module. After 90 seconds, the
second power supply module is automatically powered off.

In a simplex configuration, if it is a PBX with multiple cabinets,
power off the power supply module of the main cabinet then those
of the expansion cabinets.
Disconnect the mains cable on the front panel of the power supply
module.
Use a tool (for example a small flat screwdriver) as a lever, as
shown in the diagram below:
Remove the fuse holder

located between the I/O
switch and the connector.
1-
2-
Unclip the fuses from the

fuse holder.
Check the continuity of the
fuses using the multimeter
(W position).
Page 7-126 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Check the compliance of

the new fuses.
See Table 7.5.
Insert the new fuses in the

fuse holder.
Refit the fuse holder in its
slot, on the front panel of
the power supply module.
module.

module.
"I/O" switch to 'I".

For a simplex configuration, if it is a PBX with several cabinets:
cabinets,

operating test.
See SHEET T-1.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-127
SHEET E-8 REPLACING FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
(XL, XS, XC PBX)
DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
5 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 multimeter
N/A
Page 7-128 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Notify the
operator.
management

Power off the cabinet's


If it is a PBX with multiple cabinets, power off the power supply
module of the main cabinet then those of the expansion cabinets
("I/O" switch to "O").
Disconnect the mains cable, and if appropriate the backup battery

connector:
- on the front panel of the power supply module (XL),
- at the back of the cabinet (XS, XS12 and XC).
Use a tool (for example a small flat screwdriver) as a lever, as
shown in the diagram below:
Remove the fuse holder

located between the I/O
switch and the connector.
1-
2 Unclip the fuses from the

fuse holder.
Check the continuity of the
fuses using the multimeter
(W position).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-129
OPERATION
Check the compliance of

the new fuses.
See Table 7.5.
Insert the new fuses in the

fuse holder.
Refit the fuse holder in its
slot, on the front panel of
the power supply module.
Connect the cables.
Disconnect the mains cable, and if appropriate the backup battery

connector:
- on the front panel of the power supply module (XL),
- at the back of the cabinet (XS, XS12 and XC).
Power on the PBX
If it is a PBX with multiple cabinets, first power on the power

supply module for the expansion cabinets ("I/O" switch on "I").
Power on the power supply module of the main cabinet (I/O
switch on I).

operating test.
See SHEET T-2 (XL power supply), SHEET T-3 (XS and XS12
power supply) or SHEET T-4 (XC power supply).
Page 7-130 6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET E-9 REPLACING A UCT-D CPU CARD

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable if UCT-D is not duplicated
Full mission capable if UCT-D card is duplicated
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
2 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 administration tool (see Section 5.6) with the backup software (see Section5.6.3)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-131
PROCDURE
Replacing a non-duplicated UCT-D card
OPERATION

configuration.
Precautionary operation to be carried out if there is no existing copy (which is

the case when previous installation operations have been carried out and the
procedures followed).
In the case of remote operation, call the remote management operator before
starting the operation.
I/O switch on the power supply module(s) set to O.
For a system with several cabinets, first power off the main cabinet, then the
expansion cabinet(s).
Note : (1) All the systems services are interrupted when a nonduplicated UCT-D card is being replaced. .
Power off the PBX
(2) It is advisable to stop the IPS card before powering off the
PBX.
Disconnect
cables.
the
Pull out the card from

its slot.
Check
that
the
functional
technical
state of the new card
is compatible with the
old one.
Check
configuration
card.
the
of the
Insert the new card

into its slot.
Disconnect the external cables from the card and mark the cables for refitting.
Use the 1/4 turn locks to remove the card from its slot (see Figure 4.1).
See section 1.3 Document [9].
For a card with microswitches, check that these latter are configured as they
were on the old card, unless the configuration has been changed (in which
case, see Section 4.3).
As the card may have daughterboards, check that it is fitted in the same way as
the previous one, unless its configuration has been modified due to a change in
its capacity (in which case, see Section 4.3 and/or the product Data sheet).
Perform the wiring

exactly as in the old
cabinet.
Power on the PBX.
For a PBX with several cabinets, first power on the expansion cabinet(s) by
setting the I/O switch of the power supply module to position I.
Set the I/O switch on the main cabinet power supply module to position I.
Perform
check.
View the card's software release using the administration tool (see section 1.3,
Document [2]).
Contact your distributor if the details do not coincide.
software
Check
the
indicators.
card
Perform
the
operating test.
card
Page 7-132 6/2/06
For a card fitted with indicators, check that the yellow and/or green indicators on
the front panel are on, and that no red indicator is on (refer to Section4.3 to
check that the operating conditions indicated by the LEDs are correct).
See section7.6.2.

Maintenance
OPERATION

configuration.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-133
Replacing a duplicated UCT-D card

OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Disconnect the cables on

the UCT-D card to be
removed.

for refitting.
Perform the wiring exactly as for the card to be removed.
Note : A hardware anomaly detected on the active UCT-D

card triggers an automatic switchover of the UCT-D,
which becomes passive. The second UCT-D card
takes over and becomes active.
After a switchover the duration of which depends on
the configuration (15 s. to 1 min.), the passive CPU
card takes over and becomes active in the following
three cases:
Reconnect the cables to
another UCT-D card.

- if a hardware failure is detected on the active UCTD card (in this case, a hardware fault detection is
performed. The unavailability time on the cabinet
Note : If the PBX has an expansion cabinet, the active
RUCT-D card is the one connected to the active
UCT-D card. In case of switchover to the UCT-D
card, there is also a switchover to RUCT-D. If for
example
UCT-D(A) becomes faulty, UCT-D(B) takes over and
becomes active. On the expansion cabinet side, it is
the RUCT(B) that is active (and RUCT(A) passive).
Pull out the faulty card from

its slot.
Check that the functional
card is compatible with the
old one.
Page 7-134 6/2/06
Use the 1/4 turn locks to remove the card from its slot (see Figure
4.1).
Note : The UCT-D card can be hot-unplugged in an

operational XD PBX.

Maintenance
OPERATION

the card.
For a card with microswitches, check that these latter are

configured as they were on the old card, unless the configuration
has been changed (in which case, see Section 4.3).
As the card may have daughterboards, check that it is fitted in the
same way as the previous one, unless its configuration has been
modified due to a change in its capacity (in which case, see
Section 4.3 and/or the product Data sheet).
Note : The voice memory capacity must be the same on

the two UCT-D cards (the same number of FMEVO
daughterboards on the two UCT-Ds).
Insert the new card into its
slot.
Note : The UCT-D card can be hot-plugged in an

operational XD PBX.
Note :
Activate the passive UCT-D
card
from
the
This new card is now the passive card and must

be activated so that the system can take it into
account, and to fully synchronise as soon as
possible the active card and the new passive card
(software, data, announcements, IVR, etc.). This
passive card will only become active during the
next switchover.
Perform a software check.
View the card's software release using the administration tool (see
Check the UCT-D card

indicators.
(refer to Section4.3 to check that the operating conditions indicated
by the LEDs are correct).
Perform a UCT-D
operating test.
Back up the
configuration.
card
customer
See section7.6.2.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-135
SHEET E-10 REPLACING A RUCT-D CPU CARD

DISPONIBILIT
Partial mission capable if RUCT-D is not duplicated
Full mission capable if RUCT-D card is duplicated
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
2 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-136 6/2/06

Maintenance
Replacing a non-duplicated RUCT-D CPU card

OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

4.1).

its slot.

old one.

the card.

slot.
Note : The RUCT-D card can be hot-unplugged from an

operational XD PBX.
Note : When the active RUCT-D card fails, there is loss of
communication with the sets and lines associated
with the cards installed in the expansion cabinet.

Note : The RUCT-D card can be hot-plugged in an

operational XD PBX.
Check the RUCT-D card

indicators.
Activate the RUCT-D card

tool.
See Section 1.3 Document [2].
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-137
Replacing a duplicated RUCT-D CPU card

OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

4.1).
Note : The RUCT-D card can be hot-unplugged from an

operational XD PBX.

its slot.
Note : A failure of the active RUCT-D card triggers a

switchover of the active UCT-D/RUCT-D to the
passive UCT-D/RUCT-D.
After a switchover the duration of which depends on
the configuration (15 s. to 1 min.), the passive CPU
card takes over and becomes active in the following
three cases:
- if a hardware failure is detected on the active
RUCT-D card (in this case, a hardware fault
detection is performed. The unavailability time on
the cabinet can, therefore, be up to 3 minutes).
Note : Of course, this system performs this switchover only
if it does not encounter serious anomalies on the
second UCT-D card.

old one.

the card.

slot.
Page 7-138 6/2/06

Lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (seeFigure 4.1).
Note : The RUCT-D card can be hot-plugged in an

operational XD PBX.

Maintenance
OPERATION

Activate the passive RUCTD
card
from
the
Note :
This new card is now the passive card (since it

is connected to the passive UCT-D card). It
must be activated in order to be taken into
account by the system.
Check the RUCT-D card

indicators.
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-139
SHEET E-11 REPLACING AN IUCT-D CARD

DISPONIBILIT
Partial mission capable
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
2 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-140 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Activate the IUCT-D card

tool.

for refitting.
4.1).
Note : The IUCT-D card can be hot-unplugged in an

operational XD PBX.
slot.
Recover
module.
the
i-button
Note : The i-button becomes inaccessible when the IUCTD card is removed. The locking software checks
every hour whether the i-button module is available.
If the software makes this check while the IUCT-D is
being replaced, some functions will be locked
dynamically (the directory, for instance). Simple call
(also for IP sets) remain operational.
Recover, on the IUCT-D card, the i-button module containing the
system's identifier.

old one.
Install the i-button module.
Install the i-button module of the old IUCT-D card on the new card.

slot.
Note : The IUCT-D card can be hot-plugged in an

operational XD PBX.
Perform the wiring exactly

as in the old cabinet.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-141
OPERATION
Activate the IUCT-D card

tool.

reactivate
the
passive
UCT-D card from the
Note : In a duplex configuration, the two UCT-D cards

(active and passive) communicate through the
IUCT-D card. When the IUCT-D is removed, the
duplex function stops working. The status of the
passive UCT-D card then changes to "alarm" or
"faulty". It is, therefore, necessary to reactivate the
passive UCT-D card.

test.
See section7.6.2.
Back up the
configuration.
Page 7-142 6/2/06
customer

Maintenance
SHEET E-12 REPLACING AN EXPANSION CARD (XD, XL, XS AND XS12)

DISPONIBILIT
1 operator on site
DURE
10 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-143
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

if an LA16X, LA16X-8,
LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X,
LH16X-8, LD4N or LD4X
card is replaced in an XD,
XL,
rackable
XS
or
rackable XS12 PBX).

tool.

For a system with 2 cabinets, first power off the main cabinet, then
the expansion cabinet(s).
Note : (1) It is advisable to stop the IPS card before

(2) LA16X, LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X,
LH16X-8, LD4N and LD4X cards can be hot
uplugged from an XD, XL, rackable XS or rackable
Access the card slot (ST

type XD and XL, nonrackable XS andXS12).
ST type XD and XL PBXs

Remove the blanking plate from the front of the row of cards, after
turning the plate's locking keys by 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1).
Open the cabinet:
for refitting.
Page 7-144 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION

slot.
XD PBX
for an RJ card, use the 1/4 turn locks to pull out the card from its
slot (see Figure 4.1).
XL PBX
for an ST card, use the extraction handle to pull out the card from
its slot (see Figure 4.1).
for an ST card:
- unscrew the spacers maintaining the card and pull it out from the
backplane,
for an RJ card:
- remove the plastic cover from the front panel of the card,
- unlock the card (see Figure 4.1 and pull it out from the
backplane.
Rackable XS and XS12 PBXs
(see Figure 4.1).

old one.

the card.
For a card with microswitches, check that these are configured as

they were on the old card, unless the configuration has been
changed (in which case, see sections 4.12 to 4.13).
As the card can include daughterboards, check that it is fitted
identically to the previous one, unless its configuration or capacity
has been modified (in which case, see sections 4.6 to 4.13 and/or
the product Data sheet).

slot.

(see Figure 4.1).
For an ST card:
- fit the card on spacers using the screws provided.
For an RJ card:
- lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1),
Install the cables.
For RJ cards, install the cables on the cards front panel.

For ST cards, see SHEET I-6.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-145
OPERATION

XS12
PBX
already
powered on if an LA16X,
LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X8, LH16X, LH16X-8, LD4N
or LD4X card is added).

to position I.
position I.
Note : LA16X, LA16X-8, LN16X, LN16X-8, LH16X, LH16X-8,

LD4N and LD4X cards can be hot-plugged in an XD,
XL, rackable XS or rackable XS12 PBX in operation.
In the case of a CL card,

perform a software check.


with the card.
See section 1.3, Documents [0], [1] and [2]

and put all the extensions in service (see section 1.3, document [0]).

test.
See section7.6.2.
Back up the
configuration.
customer
ST type XL PBXs
Close the cabinet

blanking plate.
(see Figure 4.1).
Secure the cover,
forward.
Page 7-146 6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET E-13 REPLACING A DAUGHTERBOARD (XD PBX)

DISPONIBILIT
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
10 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-147
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX (unless

a daughterboard is added
to an LD4N/LD4X card).

Note :
(1) The LD4N, LD4X cards can be hot-plugged/

unplugged in a working XD PBX.

tool.
for refitting.
Extract the card (along with

the daughterboard to be
replaced) from its slot.
4.1).

daughterboard
is
compatible with the old
one.
the card.

Install the daughterboard

on
the
appropriate
connectors.
Attention : If it is all about replacing a daughterboard on a
duplicated UCT-D card, check that the voice

memory capacity is the same on both UCT-D
cards (the same number of FMEVO
daughterboards).
Insert the card (equipped

with
its
new
daughterboard) into its slot.
Lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (seeFigure 4.1).
Install the cables.
Install the cables on the cards front panel.
Page 7-148 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Power off the PBX (PBX

already powered on if a
daughterboard is added to
an LD4N/LD4X card).

to position I.
position I.

Activate the card from the

administration tool (unless
a
daughterboard
is
replaced on a UCT-D card).
See Section 1.3, Documents [0],[1] and [2] .

with the card.

and put all the extensions in service (see Section 1.3, Document
[0]).

test.
See section7.6.2.
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-149
SHEET E-14 REPLACING A DAUGHTERBOARD (XL, XS AND XS12 PBX)

DISPONIBILIT
1 operator on site
DURE
10 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-150 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX

Nota : It is advisable to stop the IPS card before powering off the
PBX.
Access the card slot (ST

type XL, non-rackable XS
and XS12).
ST type XL PBXs
- Remove the blanking plate from the slot where the card is to be
installed
Open the cabinet:
for refitting.
Extract the card (along with

the daughterboard to be
replaced) from its slot.

for an ST card:
- unscrew the spacers retaining the card and pull it out from the
backplane.
for an RJ card:
- Remove the plastic cover from the front panel of the card,
backplane.

daughterboard
is
compatible with the old
one.

the card.

Install the daughterboard

on
the
appropriate
connectors.


Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-151
OPERATION
Insert the card (equipped

with
its
new
daughterboard) into its slot.

(see Figure 4.1).
For an ST card, secure the card on spacers.
For an RJ card:
- Lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
- Place the plastic cover on the front panel of the card. There are
Install the cables.
See SHEET I-6.
Power on the PBX.

to position I.
position I.


with the card.

and put all the extensions in service (see section 1.3, document [0]).

test.
See section7.6.2.
Back up the
configuration.
customer
ST type XL PBXs
Close the cabinet

blanking plate.
(see Figure 4.1).
Secure the cover,
forward.
Page 7-152 6/2/06

Maintenance
SHEET E-15
STANDARD REPLACEMENT OF AN XD MAIN CABINET
DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-153
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer
Power off the PBX

If necessary, back up the synchronised announcements using
M7420 Update (see Section 1.3, Document [6]).
If necessary, back up the content of the integrated directory with
M7420 Directory Manager (see section 1.3, Document [7]).
For a system with several cabinets, first power off the main
cabinet, then the expansion cabinet.
PBX.
Disconnect the mains cable.

Disconnect the cables connected to the front panel of the UCT-D,
IUCT-D card and those on the cabinet's expansion cards and
mark the cables for refitting.
For a system with several cabinets, disconnect the cable located
at the rear of the cabinet.
Remove the old cabinet.

Remove the IUCT-D card.
Pull out the IUCT-D card from its slot using

the 1/4 turn locks (seeFigure 4.1).
Recover the
i-button module.
Recover, from the IUCT-D card, the i-button module containing the
Remove the new IUCT-D

card.
Pull out the new IUCT-D card from its slot using the 1/4 turn locks
(seeFigure 4.1).
Install the
i-Button.module.
Install the i-button module of the old IUCT-D card on the new
card.
Remove and recover the ibutton

identification number.
Remove and recover, at the back of the cabinet, the label with the
i-Button's identifier number (the i-Button's identifier label only,
not the product identification label).
Stick the i-Button's identification label on the back of the new
cabinet.
Recover the expansion

cards from the old cabinet.
Expansion cards and new UCT-D card(s).
See SHEET E-1.
Install the cards in the new
cabinet.
Fit the new cabinet.
Page 7-154 6/2/06
Note :
Since UCT-D card(s) may be fitted with
daughterboards, check that the new card(s) is/are
equipped exactly like the previous one(s), except in
case of modification its/their configuration(s) owing
to a change in its/their capacity(capacities) (in this
case, see Section 4.3 or the product Data sheet).
See SHEET I-3.

Maintenance
OPERATION
Install the cables exactly

like in the old cabinet.
On the front panel of the expansion cards,

on the front panel of the IUCT-D card,
on the front panel of the UCT-D card(s),
if the PBX has an expansion cabinet, at the back of the cabinet,
on the front panel of the power supply module.
of the cabinet and the other end to a grounded mains power point.
Attention : The PBX must be powered off when installing
the mains cable.

Never connect network lines while the mains
power cable is unplugged.
Power on the PBX.
Power on the PBX:
- for a PBX with several cabinets, first power on the expansion
cabinet by setting the I/O switch of the power supply module(s)
to position I.
- Set the I/O switch on the main cabinet power supply module(s)
to I.
Check that:
Sections4.3 to 4.7 to check that the operating conditions shown
by the indicators are correct),
Check
the
hardware
installation of the cards.
For each card,

(see section 7.6.2).
Check the UCT-D card's

system and application
software releases using the

In case of inconsistency, update the customer's backup
(see section 1.3, Document[6]).
Restore the data of the old

configuration.
6/2/06
the
card's
operation
test

If necessary, load the synchronised announcements previously
backed up using M7420 Update (see Section 1.3, Document [6]).
If necessary, load the content of the integrated directory backed
up previously with M7420 Directory Manager (see section 1.3,
Document [7]).

Maintenance
perform
Page 7-155
SHEET E-16 STANDARD REPLACEMENT OF AN XL MAIN CABINET

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-156 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

If necessary, back up the synchronised announcements with
M7420 Music Manager (see section 1.3, Document [8]) or M7420
Update (see section 1.3, Document [6]).
Power off the PBX
PBX.
In the case of an ST cabinet, remove the blanking plate from the
front panel of the cards, after turning the plate's locking keys by 1/
4 turn (see Figure 4.1).
Disconnect the cables from the front panel of the UCT card and
those on the cabinet's expansion cards and mark the cables for
refitting.

Remove the UCT card.
Pull out the UCT card from its slot using

the 1/4 turn locks (seeFigure 4.1).
Recover the
i-button module.
Recover, on the UCT card, the i-Button module containing the

Remove
card.
the
new
UCT
Pull out the new UCT card from its slot using the 1/4 turn locks
(seeFigure 4.1).
Install the
i-button module.
Install the i-Button module from the old UCT card on the new
card.

the UCT card.

identically to the previous one, unless its configuration has been
modified due to a change in its capacity (in which case,
see sections 4.3 to 4.5 or the product Data sheet).

cabinet.

Install the cards in the new
cabinet.
Expansion card and new UCT card.

See SHEET I-4.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-157
OPERATION
See SHEET I-5.

On the front panel of the expansion cards (see SHEET I-6),

on the front panel of the UCT card,
if the PBX has an expansion cabinet, at the back of the cabinet,
on the front panel of the power supply module.
of the cabinet and the other end to a grounded mains power point.
the mains cable.

Power on the PBX.
Power on the PBX:
cabinet by setting the I/O switch of the power supply module to
position I.
- Set the I/O switch on the main cabinet power supply module to
position I.
Check that:
Sections 4.6 to 4.13 to check that the operating conditions
Check
the
hardware
For each card,

Check the UCT card's



configuration.

XL PBX).
Page 7-158 6/2/06
perform
the
card's
operation
test

If necessary, load the synchronised announcements backed up
previously with M7420 Music Manager (see section 1.3,
Document [8]) or M7420 Update (see section 1.3, Document [6]).
Document [7]).
This operation concerns only the ST type XL PBX.
blanking plate.

Maintenance
SHEET E-17 STANDARD REPLACEMENT OF AN XS MAIN CABINET

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
30 minutes
MOYEN(S)
1 Facom AZXR 10*75 Torx screwdriver for M3 screw (card).
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-159
PROCDURE
OPERATION

configuration.

Precautionary operation to be carried out if there is no existing copy
(which is the case when previous installation operations have been
carried out and the procedures followed).
If necessary, back up the synchronised announcements with M7420
Music Manager (see section 1.3, Document [8]) or M7420 Update
(see section 1.3, Document [6]).
I/O switch to position O.

Power off the PBX
PBX.
Disconnect
cables.
the
external

Disconnect the cables from the front panel of the UCT card and
those on the cabinet's expansion cards (RJ cards) and mark the
cables for refitting.
Remove the cover from the

old cabinet.
of the cabinet.
Disconnect the cables on

the ST cards (non-rackable
XS PBX).

Disconnect the ST card cables.
Remove the blanking plate for cable routing:
- remove the metal blanking plate's plastic cover (on the right of
the cabinet) so as to access the locks,
- turn the locks by a 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1) and remove the
plate,
- unscrew the cable clamp to free the cables.
Remove
cards.
the
expansion
Rackable XS PBXs
Unlock the cards (see Figure 4.1) and pull them out from
backplane.
ST cards:
Remove the plugs and plastic covers from the front panels of
cards.
Unscrew and remove the metal blanking plates.
Unscrew the spacers retaining the cards and pull them out from
backplane.
RJ cards:
Unlock the cards (see Figure 4.1) and pull them out from
backplane.
the
the
the
the
Note :Keep hold of the cards as you remove them to

prevent them from falling on the main card.
Page 7-160 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
If required, recover the

If the PBX has two cabinets, disconnect the expansion ribbon

cable linking the CPU card to the expansion cable connector.
Recover
module.

the
i-button

new cabinet.
of the cabinet.
Install
module.
card.
the
i-Button

the UCT card.

identically to the previous one, unless its configuration has been
modified due to a change in its capacity (in which case,
see sections 4.3 to 4.5 or the product Data sheet).

cabinet.
If required, connect the

If the PBX has two cabinets, connect the expansion ribbon cable
(recovered from the old cabinet) linking the CPU card to the
expansion cable connector.
Install the expansion cards

in the new cabinet.
Rackable XS PBXs
Slide the cards along the guides until they click into place and lock the
cards in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Section 4.1).
Fit ST cards on spacers using the screws provided.
For RJ cards:
- lock the cards in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
- Install the plastic covers on the front panels of the cards. There are
holes provided for inserting the locks. Once the plastic cover is in
place the card cannot be unlocked.

On the front panel of the expansion cards (see SHEET I-6),

on the front panel of the UCT card (see SHEET I-6),
at the back of the cabinet. Do not forget to wire the protective
ground.
Attention : Do not connect the mains cable. The cabinet
must be closed.
Close the new cabinet.

cards,
empty slots,
Secure the cover,
forward.
See SHEET I-5.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-161
OPERATION
Connect one end of the mains cable to the main cabinet and the
other end to a grounded mains power point.
the mains cable.

Power on the PBX.
Power on the PBX:
cabinet by setting the I/O switch of
the power supply module to position I.
position I.
Check that:
- the green indicators located on the front panel of the cabinet
subassemblies are lit, and no red indicator is on (refer to
Sections 4.6 to 4.13 to check that the operating conditions
shown by the LEDs are correct),
Check
the
hardware
For each card,




configuration.
Page 7-162 6/2/06
perform
the
card's
operation
test

Document [7]).

Maintenance
SHEET E-18 STANDARD REPLACEMENT OF AN XS12 MAIN CABINET

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
15 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-163
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

I/O switch at rear of cabinet set to position O.
Power off the PBX
PBX.

Disconnect the external cables from the front panel of the UCT
card, and mark the cables for refitting.

old cabinet.
of the cabinet.
Remove
cards.
the
expansion
Rackable XS12 PBX

backplane.
backplane.
Note :Keep hold of the cards as you remove them to

prevent them from falling on the main card.
Recover
module.
the
i-button


new cabinet.

Install
module.
card.
the
i-Button

the UCT card.
As the UCT card may be fitted with a daughterboard, check that

the new card is fitted exactly like the previous one, unless its
configuration has been modified due to a change in its capacity (in
this case, see Sections 4.6 to 4.13 or the product Data sheet).

cabinet.
Page 7-164 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Install the expansion cards

in the new cabinet.
Rackable XS12 PBX

Slide the cards along the guides until they click into place and lock
the cards in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
Lock the cards in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1).
Secure the cover,

forward.
See SHEET I-5.

On the front panel of the UCT card,

at the back of the cabinet (mains cable).
the mains cable.
Power on the PBX.


configuration.
Power on the PBX:
- Set the I/O switch on the cabinet power supply module to
position I.
Check that:
Section4.9 to check that the operating conditions shown by the
LEDs are correct),
Document [7]).

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-165
SHEET E-19 STANDARD REPLACEMENT OF AN XC MAIN CABINET

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
15 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-166 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Power off the PBX
I/O switch at rear of cabinet set to position O.
Attention : Disconnect the mains cable.

Disconnect the external cables from the front panel of the UCT
card, and mark the cables for refitting.
Deactivate the battery.


old cabinet.

Warning :

battery.

Recover
module.
the
i-button

Deactivate the battery in

the new cabinet.


new cabinet.

Warning :

battery.
Install
module.
the
i-Button

card.
cabinet.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-167
OPERATION
If the battery has been

disconnected,
reconnect it.
Reconnect the battery cable.
Secure the cover,

forward.
- Tighten the three securing screws at the back of the cabinet.
See SHEET I-5.

On the front panel of the UCT card,

at the back of the cabinet (mains cable).
the mains cable.
Power on the PBX.


configuration.
Page 7-168 6/2/06
Power on the PBX:
position I.
Check that:
Section4.8 to check that the operating conditions shown by the
LEDs are correct),
Document [7]).

Maintenance
SHEET E-20 REPLACING AN EXPANSION CABINET (XD PBX)

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
INTERVENANT(S)
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-169
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Power off the PBX
PBX.
First power off the main cabinet then the expansion cabinet.
Disconnect the cables connected at the back of the expansion
cabinet.
Disconnect the cables from the cabinet subassemblies and mark
the cables for refitting.

4.1).
Check that the new

expansion
cabinet
is
powered off.
Install the expansion cards.
Install the expansion cards from the old cabinet in the new cabinet.

On the front panel of the expansion cards,

connect the expansion cabinet to the main cabinet using the
connection cable(s) (see Sections 4.5.4.1 and 4.5.4.2).
Do not forget to wire the protective ground.
See SHEET I-3.

Connect one end of the mains cable to the power supply
module(s) of the expansion abinet and the other end to a
grounded mains power point.
the mains cable.

Page 7-170 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION
Power on the PBX.
Before powering on the cabinet, check that the following tasks

Power on the PBX:
- power on the expansion cabinet then the main cabinet.
- I/O switch on the power supply module(s) set to I.
Check that:
- the yellow and green indicators located on the front panel of the
cabinet subassemblies are lit, and that no red indicator is on
(refer to Sections 4.3 to 4.7 to check that the operating
conditions shown by the indicators are correct),
E-2

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-171
SHEET E-21 REPLACING AN EXPANSION CABINET (XL, XS AND XC PBX)

DISPONIBILIT
No mission capable
1 operator on site
DURE
20 minutes
MOYEN(S)
N/A
Page 7-172 6/2/06

Maintenance
PROCDURE
OPERATION
Back up the
configuration.
customer

Power off the PBX
PBX.
First power off the main cabinet then the expansion cabinet.
In the case of an ST type XL cabinet, remove the blanking plate
from the front panel of the row of cards, after turning the plate's
locking keys by 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1).
Disconnect the cables connected at the back of the expansion
cabinet.
Disconnect the cables from the cabinet subassemblies and mark
the cables for refitting.
Note : The cables on ST expansion cards in an XS cabinet

will be disconnected once the cabinet is opened.
old cabinet (non-rackable
XS).

of the cabinet.
Disconnect the cables from

the ST expansion cards
(non-rackable XS)
Disconnect the cables from the ST expansion cards.

Remove the blanking plate for cable routing:
- remove the metal blanking plate's plastic cover (on the right of
the cabinet) so as to access the locks,
- turn the locks by a 1/4 turn (see Figure 4.1) and remove the
plate,
- unscrew the cable clamp to free the cables.

Rackable XL and XS PBX

for an ST card:
card,
- unscrew the spacers retaining the card and pull it out from the
backplane,
for an RJ card:
- Remove the plastic cover from the front panel of the card,
backplane.

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-173
OPERATION
Check that the new

expansion
cabinet
is
powered off.

new cabinet (XS).
This operation concerns only the XS PBX.

of the cabinet.
Check that the expansion

ribbon cable has been
fitted (XS).
This operation concerns only the XS PBX.

Check that the expansion ribbon cable connecting the CPU card
to the expansion cable connector is connected.
Install the expansion cards from the old cabinet in the new cabinet.
Install the expansion cards.

Rackable XL and XS PBX

(seeFigure 4.1).
For an ST card, secure the card on spacers using the screws
provided.
For an RJ card:
- lock the card in place using the 1/4 turn locks (see Figure 4.1),
- Place the plastic cover on the front panel of the card. There are
at the back of the RUCT card,

on the front panel of the expansion cards (see SHEET I-6),
connect the expansion cabinet to the main cabinet using the
connection cable.
Do not forget to wire the protective ground.
Attention : In the case of an XS cabinet, do not connect
the mains cable. The cabinet must first be

closed.
Page 7-174 6/2/06

Maintenance
OPERATION

This operation concerns the ST type XL PBX and the XS PBX
(ST and RJ).
ST type XL PBXs
blanking plate.

XL, and XS).
PBX XS
See SHEET I-5.

(once the cabinet is closed
if it is an XS Switch)
Power on the PBX.

cards,
empty slots,
Secure the cover,
forward.
of the expansion cabinet (XL) or directly to the XS cabinet and the
other end to a grounded mains power point.
the mains cable.

Before powering on the cabinet, check that the following tasks
Power on the PBX:
- power on the expansion cabinet then the main cabinet.
- I/O switch on the power supply module set to I.
Check that:
- the yellow and green indicators located on the front panel of the
cabinet subassemblies are lit, and that no red indicator is on
(refer to Sections 4.6 to 4.13 to check that the operating
conditions shown by the indicators are correct),

Maintenance
6/2/06
Page 7-175
PAGE LAISSE INTENTIONNELLEMENT BLANCHE
Page 7-176 6/2/06

Maintenance
Installing and using the IPS board
8.1
Description
The IPS board is a NeXspan expansion card which serves as SIP access point and thus
allows the connection of SIP terminals and network SIP type interfaces. The IPS board
works on the GNU/Linux Debian standard operating system and can be inserted in any
CLX slot of the F6 NeXspan cabinets (XS, XS-12, XL and XD).
The board is powered through the back plane but it is not managed by the PBX software.
The PBX only knows the position of the IPS board in the PBX, but the board is managed
through direct connection to the IPS software on the board. A reset of the board is
possible from the PBX MMI and from a reset button on the board.
The IPS board operates independently of the PBX on which it is installed and thus its
setup requires the four following steps in order:
Installing and wiring the IPS board in the PBX (Section 8.2)
Installing IPS board software applications (Section 8.7)
Customising and securing the IPS board (Section 8.8)
Configuring the IPS board (Section 8.9)
The IPS board supports 500 IP sets and 100 simultaneous calls.
Note :
(1) There is a maximum of one IPS board per system. This is not controlled by
the NeXspan system but remains under the operators responsibility.
(2) The IPS board is not restarted when the PBX is restarted. In this case, a
restart of the board is not required as its continuous operation during a PBX
restart maintains communications.
The IPS board can be used in a NeXspan S, L and D from Release 4.2 and onwards.
8.1.1
The IPS board has the following features:
contains the boards IP address
- a default value, modifiable after a first connection (there is no automatic
configuration via DHCP).
manages the following board functions through a web interface, accessible on the
network (or through local access using VT100):
- read - write of the IPS boards IP address
- read - write of the PBX CPU cards IP address
- read - write of a SIP port
- reading of other operating system parameters, such as date/time, memory-space
occupation CPU and disk
Installation and Maintenance Manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D

6/2/06
Page 8-1
- ping tests for connection to the web browser or to the PBX CPU card
- IPS board stop and restart commands
- IPS application stop, start and restart commands
- web server stop commands
- boards configuration backups (configuration part and network part)
- reading of the application-software release, the operating system, boot and
CompactFlash releases
- to obtain the tools and documentation associated with the board
SNMP MIB-2
exploration of the MIB2 of the IPS board via SNMP
password-protected operation access
download and update of the IPS software:
through standard SSH protocol over IP on operator action, including remote
actions
NeXspan release and IPS coherency is managed by the operator according to
configuration instructions.
automatic board reset in case of watchdog failure
setting the time using the time on the PBX
8.1.2
This board only exists in RJ format. The front panel includes:
an RJ45/DB9 console serial port
an "RST" push-button used to reset the card
an "NMI" pushbutton (not operational)
six control LEDs
an RJ45 Ethernet port
An overview of the IPS board is given in Figure 8.1.
Page 8-2
6/2/06

CA1
ON
PROG
FLASH
234
#/.3/,%
.-)
!.2
#/,
48
,!.
48
25.
,).+
28
)038
0"8?-!42)8?#!24%?)03?&!6??
IPS board
Front panel of the IPS board
Figure 8.1 IPS board

6/2/06
Page 8-3
NAME
J1
CONTACTS
96-pin connector: backplane connection.

CONSOLE
RJ45 connector (for connecting a PC)
Pin 1: TPTX+
Pin 2: TPTXPin 3: TPRX+
Pin 6: TPRXPins 4, 5, 7, and 8: NC
1
10/100-TX LAN
IPS
RJ45 connector (for connecting the IPS to the

LAN).
1
Table 8.1 Description of IPS board connectors
LED
COL (green)
STATE
EXPLANATION
On
Ethernet collision
LINK (green)
On
Ethernet link status:

Good link with the Ethernet switch
TX (green)
On
LAN transmitting
RX (green)
On
LAN receiving
RUN (green)
On
Slow flashing
Board downloading status:

Starting up
SIP access point is operational
NRA (red)
On
Internal failure detected
Table 8.2 Description of IPS board LEDs
Page 8-4
6/2/06

8.1.2.1
The IPS board has a CA1 configuration microswitch.
DESIGNATION
CONFIGURATION (1)
Operating mode:
CA1 on OFF
normal mode
programming mode (programming the flash memory using the CA1 on ON
programming tool board)
(1)
Factory delivery configuration in bold characters

Table 8.3 IPS board hardware configuration
8.2
Installing and wiring the IPS board in the PBX

Before installing the IPS board, follow the NeXspan security and installation instructions
given in Chapter 6.
The IPS board cannot be hot-plugged in a working PBX. The PBX must be powered off
before inserting the board.
The IPS board can be inserted in any CLX slot of the F6 NeXspan cabinets (XS, XS-12,
XL and XD) and in slots 14 and 15 in the XD PBX.
The IPS board can be installed only in an RJ cabinet of a NeXspan.
Note :
There is a maximum of one IPS board allowed per system. This limit is not
controlled by the system and is the operators responsibility.
This board must be connected using L904 - FTP cables (shielded twisted pairs), category
5, impedance 120 .
Note :
The cable referenced HG4731 is recommended for connecting RJ boards.
The PBX is connected to the Ethernet LAN by plugging the RJ45 connector of the IPS
board into an available LAN socket, as shown in Figure 8.2.

6/2/06
Page 8-5
5-
6:
/$1FRQQHFWRU
6:
,36
15$
581
5;
7;
/,1.
&2/
)03BOARD
Figure 8.2 Wiring an IPS board
8.3
Recommendations on how to handle the IPS board

The IPS board is a Linux device with a disk (the CompactFlash card). The operation of
this system is comparable to running a Windows PC where some operations are strongly
recommended to avoid possible loss of data on the CompactFlash card.
The list of recommended operations is as follows:
Power off the IPS board before removing the CompactFlash card.
Stop the IPS board before powering it off. There is a minor risk of information loss if the
IPS board is powered off without first being stopped.
Use the reset function on the NeXspan MMC only in an extreme case such as the
complete block of the IPS board.
Page 8-6
6/2/06

8.4
Conventions
This chapter uses the following conventions:
ELEMENT
CONVENTIONS
Commands and keywords
bold style
Information displayed by terminal device

sessions and other applications
device font
Data you must enter
bold device font
Variable you must enter
<variable to be entered>
Carriage return
8.5
Shutting down Linux on the IPS board

Before powering off the IPS board or the associated NeXspan, we recommend shutting
down the IPS board.
The IPS board can be shutdown using the following methods, listed in their recommended
order of usage:
through the IPS web browser (see Section 8.10.3)
through the VT100 console (see the procedure below)
through a TFTP server, using the PuTTY utility (see the procedure below)
through the NeXspan MMC*
by powering off the cabinet (ON / OFF)*
(*) The methods marked with an asterisk are considered brutal and recommended only as
last resort, for example in case of a complete block of the IPS board. These methods do
not guarantee a proper shutdown of the operating system.

6/2/06
Page 8-7
Procedure
Step 1 Log on as super user from an IPS board VT100 window:
IPS login: user
Password: guest
user@IPS:~$ su
Password: admin
IPS:/home#
Step 2 Enter the IPS board's Linux shutdown command and request a disk check upon
restart:
IPS:/home#
shutdown -Fh now
Step 3 Wait for the Power down message to be displayed.
Step 4 Power off the IPS board.

The procedure is now complete.
Page 8-8
6/2/06

8.6
Restarting Linux on the IPS board

The IPS board can be restarted using the following methods, listed in their recommended
order of usage:
through the IPS web browser (see Section 8.10.3)
through the VT100 console (see the procedure below)
through an SSH/Telnet server, using the PuTTY utility (see the procedure below)
through the NeXspan MMC*
using the Reset button on the front panel of the IPS board*
by powering off the cabinet (ON / OFF)*
(*) The methods marked with an asterisk are considered as brutal and recommended only
as last resort, for example in the case of a complete block of the IPS board. These
methods do not guarantee a proper operating system shutdown.
The VT100 or SSH (PuTTY) connection procedure must be respected to restart or reset
the IPS board.
Step 1 Enter the following commands to log on as super user from the SSH or VT100
terminal emulation of the IPS board. (The passwords indicated are default
passwords; replace them with your personal passwords).
IPS login: user

Password: guest
user@IPS:~$ su
Password: admin
IPS:/home#
Step 2 Enter the following command, request for the IPS board to be restarted in Linux
(with disk check upon restart):
IPS:/home#
shutdown -rF now
Step 3 Wait for the device to restart (approximately 30 seconds).


6/2/06
Page 8-9
8.7
Installing IPS board software applications

Two software applications must be installed:
the IPS board Boot software (EPROM)
the system disk software contained in the IPS CompactFlash card
This section describes how to install the IPS board Boot software.
The system disk software in the CompactFlash card is pre-installed at delivery, hence its
installation is only required to update the CompactFlash master file or if the IPS board
suffers a loss of data and requires a re-installation. Information about CompactFlash
system disk software installation is given in Section 8.11.
The Boot (EPROM) software is installed in three steps:
Configuring the switches on the IPS board (Section 8.7.1)
Flashing the EPROM (Section 8.7.2)
IPS board startup test (Section 8.7.3)
The software applications must be installed by an installer or any other qualified person
with good knowledge of the network or NeXspan in question. Before starting the
installation, ensure that you have the hardware and software described in Table 8.4.
MAIN HARDWARE
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
IPS board
IPS board accompanied by its daughterboard that will

receive the CompactFlash card
9-pin female Canon RJ45 serial port cable
256 MB CompactFlash disk card
BOF3 kit
BOF3 card
mains transformer
25-pin male/female Canon parallel port cable
PC with Windows 2000 or XP, with a parallel port, a serial
port and a CD-ROM drive
PC
Refer to the BOF3 Kit Installation Manual for more

information about the PC connected to the BOF card (see
Section 1.3, document [5]).
Table 8.4 Hardware requirements for Boot software installation
Page 8-10
6/2/06

8.7.1
Configuring the switches on the IPS board

For software installation, the PROG FLASH micro-switch of the IPS board must be set to
ON. The presence of a CompactFlash card, regardless of its content, is preferable for
daughterboard tests.
8.7.2
Flashing the EPROM

Flashing the EPROM is a procedure common to several NeXspan boards and is done
using the BOF3 Kit. The flashing procedure is described in the BOF3 Kit Installation
Manual (see Section 1.3, document [5]).

6/2/06
Page 8-11
8.7.3
IPS board startup test

After flashing the EPROM, test the IPS board startup and its FIPS daughterboard with an
available CompactFlash (the CompactFlash content does not matter). This test must be
performed using the VT100 emulation connected to the IPS board.
Step 1 Set the IPS board PROG FLASH micro-switch to OFF.
Step 2 Insert the IPS board in the NeXspan cabinet (which must be powered off).
Step 3 Connect the 9-pin Cannon RJ45 cable to the IPS board console port and to the
PC serial port.
The serial cable diagram required in the test phase is shown in Figure 8.3.
Step 4 Launch the VT100 HyperTerminal configuration tool.
The Call description window opens, prompting you to choose a name then an
icon for the new connection.
Step 5 Enter a name for the new connection, select an icon and click OK.
A connection window opens allowing you to choose your console port.
Step 6 Select the right port and click OK.
A <port name> properties window opens, with the default parameters.
Step 7 Configure the console port using the parameters provided in the following table:
IPS CONSOLE PORT
PARAMETERS
VALUE
Transmission speed
9600
Data bits
Parity
None
Stop bits
Flow control
None
Emulation
VT100
Step 8 Enter the following command in a VT100 HyperTerminal window to restart Linux.
IPS:/home#
shutdown -rF now
Step 9 Wait (approximately 30 seconds) for Linux to restart and for the IPS login:
prompt to appear on the screen.
Note :
After the test, check the results to ensure that the daughterboard is working
properly.
Page 8-12
6/2/06

Figure 8.3 Serial cable diagram

6/2/06
Page 8-13
8.8
Customising and securing the IPS board

After installing the software in the CompactFlash card and starting the IPS board, the first
action to take is to customise the IPS board. Each user connecting to the IPS board must
then provide the password(s) defined during this customisation phase.
The customisation can be performed using the IPS web interface or VT100. Modifying the
default passwords generates private and public (asymmetric) keys for the SSH encryption
protocol .
There are two customisation/security programs in the CompactFlash card, one in French,
the other in English. The procedure for implementing these programs is described in the
following three sections:
Starting Linux on the IPS (Section 8.8.1)
Getting into superuser mode (Section 8.8.2)
Running the customisation /security program (Section 8.8.3)
8.8.1
Starting Linux on the IPS

Step 1 Connect to the IPS board using the IPS board serial link.
The serial port is used to run this security procedure locally.
Step 2 Launch the VT100 HyperTerminal tool.
Wait for the display of the IPS login: prompt, showing that Linux is
operational on the IPS board.
Page 8-14
6/2/06

8.8.2
Getting into superuser mode

The customisation program is available only within the superuser mode. The default
logins and passwords to use at initial startup are provided in Table 8.5. These parameters
can be modified during the initial connection.
USER'S HOME
ACCOUNT
SUPER USER
WEB SERVER
ACCESS
Login
user
root
webips
Password
guest
admin
web
Table 8.5 Default logins and passwords

The procedure for getting into superuser mode using a VT100 is as follows:
Step 1 Connect to the IPS board using the IPS board serial link.
Step 2 Run the HyperTerminal application and open a window.
Step 3 Wait for the IPS login: prompt to be displayed on the screen.
Step 4 Enter the following commands (using the default passwords):
IPS login: user
Password: guest
user@IPS:~$ su
Password: admin
IPS: /home#
You are now in superuser mode.

6/2/06
Page 8-15
8.8.3
Running the customisation/security program

Changing to superuser mode gives you access to the two IPS board customisaton /
security programs available on the CompactFlash card:
perso-ips-en.sh for the English version of the program.
perso-ips-fr.sh for the French version of the program
Both programs are in the /home path of the CompactFlash disk, a directory obtained after
changing to superuser mode as described in Section 8.8.2.
Either of the programs can be executed as follows:
Step 1 Enter the following command in superuser mode:
IPS: /home# ./perso-ips-fr.sh

The following text is displayed:
*** SUPER USER PASSWORD ***
Enter your new IPS user password
Enter new UNIX password:
(by default, admin).
Step 2 Enter your new superuser password:
IPS: /home# <password>

The following text is displayed: Retype new UNIX password:
Step 3 Enter your superuser password again.
: passwd: password updated successfully

*** USER PASSWORD ***
Enter your new IPS user password (by default, guest).
Enter new UNIX password:
The superuser password has been modified successfully and you can modify
your user password.
Step 4 Enter your new user password:
IPS: /home# <password>

The following text is displayed Retype new UNIX password:
Step 5 Enter your user password again:
: passwd: password updated successfully

*** WEB PASSWORD ***
Enter your new IPS user password (by default, web) Adding
password for webips.
New password:
The user password has been modified successfully and you can modify your web
server password.
Step 6 Enter your new web server access password.
The following message is displayed: Re-type new password:
Page 8-16
6/2/06

New asymmetric encryption keys are generated. This phase will enable you to
encrypt access to the IPS board using the Secure Shell protocol. This is used,
among other things, to obtain an encrypted Telnet access (SSH) and an
encrypted FTP access (SFTP). The VT100 output for running the customisation
program is shown below.
We recommend testing the password modifications by restarting the system and

logging on again as superuser.
Step 7 Enter the following command to restart Linux.
IPS: /home#
shutdown -rF now
Step 8 Wait for Linux to restart (approximately 30 seconds) and for the IPS login:
prompt to appear on the screen.
Step 9 Enter the following commands to change to superuser mode, using the new
passwords.
IPS login: user
Password: <new password>
user@IPS:~$ su
Password: <new password>
IPS: /home#
You are now in superuser mode and the password modifications have been taken
into account.
Note :
In case of loss of the superuser password (Root), you must reinstall the system
disk software contained in the CompactFlash card. See the Installation
procedure in Section 8.11.1.1.

6/2/06
Page 8-17
8.8.4
Connecting to the IPS board through a web browser

After the IPS web server passwords have been modified, the connection through the web
browser will confirm that this modification has been taken into account.
Step 1 Launch a web browser from a PC connected to the network.
Step 2 Enter the default address of the IPS web server: http://192.168.65.2
The server authentication screen appears.
Step 3 Enter the username webips and the associated password.
If the authentication fails, the browser displays a window with an error message.
If the authentication is successful, the IPS configuration site startup window
opens, and you can start configuring the IPS board.
Page 8-18
6/2/06

8.9
Configuring the IPS board

It is best to use the IPS web browser interface to configure the IPS board. The
configuration functions are located in the Configurations tab.
8.9.1
Presentation of the IPS web browser

The IPS web browser is comprised of six tabs used to configure the following aspects of
the IPS board.
IPS BROWSER TAB

Home page
AVAILABLE INFORMATION
POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS / TASKS
Site plan
Map
Configurations
Versions
IPS board software versions

CompactFlash image version
Boot Flash EPROM version
SIP (GSI) access-point software
version
Linux kernel version
Monitor
System status
Internal server status
GSI traces
IPS date and time
IPS board IP address

IPS mask
IPS gateway address
PBX IP address
UDP port for communication with SIP sets
IPS ping to the browser

IPS ping to the PBX
Restart
Utilities and links
Downloading of the following utilities:

Command line Telnet SSH for Windows
Command line SFTP client for Windows
Graphic SFTP client for Windows

6/2/06
Stop
Restart
Start
Time synchronization
Page 8-19
8.9.2
Network configuration of the IPS board using the web interface

The basic network configuration of the IPS board is presented in the web browser
configuration menu. The basic parameters are as follows:
FIELDS
PARAMETERS
IPS IP address
192.168.65.2
IPS mask
255.255.255.0
IPS gateway
not provided
PBX IP address
192.168.65.1
SIP port
5060
Table 8.6 Basic IPS board network configuration parameters

Proceed as follows to modify the network parameters using the web browser.
Step 1 Connect a twisted cable between the PC and the IPS board.
Step 2 Configure the PC with the same sub-network as the IPS IP address.
For example 192.168.65.10
Step 3 Run the web browser on your PC.
Step 4 Enter the default IP address of the IPS board in the browser address field:
http://192.168.65.2
The home page of the IPS web interface is displayed.
Step 5 Click on the Configurations tab.
Step 6 The IPS board network configuration window opens, with the associated default
values.
Page 8-20
6/2/06

Step 7 Enter or modify information in the required fields.

Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Wait for the confirmation window to open.
Step 10 Check the values displayed.

Step 11 If the values are correct, click CONFIRM.
To correct certain values, click Back in the browser tab and correct the values in
question. Click OK then CONFIRM. A window opens, confirming your
parameters.

6/2/06
Page 8-21
8.9.3
Network configuration of the IPS board using a VT100 connection

This method is only recommended if network access is not possible. This method consists
of connecting locally through VT100 and using a text editor to modify the interface
parameters contained in the following IPS board Linux configuration files:
/etc/network/interfaces for the network aspect of the IPS board.
/ips/gsi/gsi.ini for the PBX address aspect.
The configuration files are edited locally by connecting to the IPS through VT100.
Two text editors are available in the IPS:
elvis-tiny, a light vi type text editor
nano-tiny, a light nano type text editor
Unlike elvis-tiny, which requires knowledge of vi commands, no special knowledge is
required to use the nano-tiny editor.
The procedure to use is as follows:
Step 1 Connect to the IPS board through the serial link.
Step 2 Run the VT100 HyperTerminal application.
Wait for the IPS: prompt to be displayed.
Step 3 Enter the following commands to change to superuser mode:
IPS login: user
Password: <password>
user@IPS:~$ su
IPS: /home#
Step 4 Enter the following command:
IPS: /home# nano-tiny /etc/network/interfaces

The nano-tiny utility window opens.
Page 8-22
6/2/06

Step 5 Complete the following 5 fields with an IP address: address, netmask,

network, broadcast and gateway
Step 6 Save the changes and quit by using the Crtl X command. Enter Y
the modification and quit.
to confim
Step 7 Restart the IPS.

See the procedure in Section 8.6.

6/2/06
Page 8-23
8.9.4
Backing up the IPS configuration

Performed in the Configuration tab, this backup allows users to save the two following IPS
configuration files onto a PC:
SIP access-point configuration file
Network configuration file
Backing up the GSI.INI file
Step 1 Select the Configuration tab.
Step 2 Click on the Config. backup menu in the left column.
Step 3 Click on the GSI.INI file.
A Windows download window opens prompting you to confirm the backup.
Step 4 Click Save.
A Windows backup screen appears, allowing you to choose the backup directory
and to rename the file if you wish.
Step 5 Choose the backup directory.
Step 6 Click Save to back up the configuration file on your PC.
Backing up the INTERFACES file
Step 1 Click on the upper bands Configuration tab.
Step 2 Click on the Config. backup menu in the left column.
Step 3 Click on the INTERFACES file.
The file interfaces.doc is displayed in the IPS web browser window.
Step 4 Select Save in the IPS web browser file menu.
A Windows backup screen appears, allowing you to choose the backup directory
and to rename the file if you wish.
Step 5 Choose the backup directory.
Step 6 Click Save to back up the configuration file on your PC.
Page 8-24
6/2/06

8.9.5
Stopping the IPS web server

Stopping the IPS server increases the security of your IPS system during an intervention.
This closes port 80. Administration can be performed in two ways:
through the boards local serial port
through Ethernet using secure SSH protocol.
Note: The web server is restarted by restarting the IPS board. It can also be done using
the secure utility PuTTY.exe as administrator.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the Stop web server menu in the Configurations tab.
The Stop web server window opens.
Step 2 Click Stop web server.

The IPS web server is stopped.

6/2/06
Page 8-25
8.10
Managing the IPS board through the IPS web browser

The tasks and information available in the following five tabs are used to manage the IPS
board through the IPS web interface:
Configurations (described previously in section 8.9)
Versions (Section 8.10.1)
Monitoring (Section 8.10.2)
Reboot (Section 8.10.3)
Utilities and links (Section 8.10.4)
8.10.1
Checking IPS board versions

This is done in the Versions tab of the IPS web interface and is used to view the versions
associated with the following IPS board software applications:
CompactFlash image (this image contains the operating system and the SIP access
point application),
Boot EPROM flash,
Active SIP access point software
Version of the Debian GNU/Linux packets and of the Linux kernel stored on the
CompactFlash card.
To see the version-related information, select the corresponding menu in the left column.
8.10.2
Monitoring
This function, performed in the IPS browser monitoring tab, is used to view the following
information:
System status
- Time since the IPS board was started
- Disk occupation
- CPU activity
The result of a Ping from the IPS board to the browser (the IPS board makes four Ping
attempts before giving up).
The result of a Ping from the IPS board to the PBX (the IPS board makes four Ping
attempts before giving up).
Status of the main IPS board internal servers
Date and time on the IPS board
SIP access point traces, including the last traces of the system syslog and traces of the
last kernel starts.
To see this monitoring-related information, choose the corresponding menu in the left
column.
Page 8-26
6/2/06

8.10.3
Rebooting
In the Reboot tab, you can reboot the IPS system, and start, restart and stop the SIP
access point. You can also reset the IPS board clock with the PBX clock.
8.10.3.1 Restarting the SIP access point

Step 1 Select Restart of the SIP access point application from the menu titles in the left
column.
The Stop and Restart window opens, proposing three options. The current state
of the SIP access point is also indicated.
Step 2 Select SIP access point Restart.

Step 3 Click OK.
The restart confirmation window opens, showing the current active status of the
SIP access point after restart. The SIP access point is active.

6/2/06
Page 8-27
8.10.3.2 Starting the SIP access point

column.
Step 2 Select SIP access point start.

Step 3 Click OK.
The Start confirmation window opens, showing the current active state of the SIP
access point after startup. The SIP access point is now active.
Page 8-28
6/2/06

8.10.3.3 Stopping the SIP access point

column.
Step 2 Select Stop SIP access point.

Step 3 Click OK.
The Stop & Restart confirmation window opens, showing the current stopped
status of the SIP access point after the stop command. The SIP access point is
stopped.

6/2/06
Page 8-29
8.10.3.4 Rebooting the IPS board

There are two reboot options:
Reboot with disk check, used to correct file system consistency faults when the card is
started (restart and verification time is approximately 1 minute).
Reboot without disk check, which is faster but does not include file system correction
Step 1 Select Reboot the system from the menu titles in the left column.
The IPS board reboot window opens and proposes three options.
Step 2 Select a start option.

Step 3 Click OK.
A restart confirmation window is displayed.
Page 8-30
6/2/06

8.10.3.5 Shutting down the IPS board

Step 1 Select Reboot System from the menu titles in the left column.
The IPS board reboot window opens and proposes three options.
Step 2 Select Shutdown the IPS system (maintenance).

Step 3 Click OK.
The IPS board shuts down and a confirmation screen is displayed.

6/2/06
Page 8-31
8.10.3.6 Time update

This procedure forces the resynchronisation of IPS time with the PBX time. This time
reset takes effect once the PBX responds. If the PBX does not respond, a request is sent
every hour until the PBX responds.
Following a time reset request, a periodic time reset service is automatically provided
every hour.
Step 1 Select Time update from the menu options in the left column.
The IPS time reset confirmation window opens.
Step 2 Click Resynchronise IPS time.

The synchronisation results window is displayed confirming the command. The
time is synchronised.
Page 8-32
6/2/06

8.10.4
Utilities and links

The functions in the Utilities and links tab are used to download the following Open
Source tools for communication and IPS board administration from a Windows PC:
PuTTY, a secure command line Telnet/SSH client
PSFTP, a secure command line FTP client
FileZilla PSFTP, a secure graphic client
These tools are downloaded from the Download menu. Just click on the links provided
and install the executable files in one of your PC directories. Then double-click the
executable file and follow the instructions given to complete the installation.
The user help for these utilities is available on the Internet at the following address, the
shortcuts of which are provided in the Links menu:
PuTTY and PSFTP: http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/
FileZilla: http://filezilla.sourceforge.net/

6/2/06
Page 8-33
8.11
Maintenance
The SFTP, PSFTP and FileZilla utilities are used to execute updates or patches.
8.11.1
Full CompactFlash card software update

You must re-install the CompactFlash disk system in order to perform a complete update
of the IPS software.
The IPS software must be installed by an installer or any other qualified person with good
knowledge of the network or NeXspan in question. Before starting the installation, check
that you have the hardware and software described in Table 8.7.
MAIN HARDWARE OR
PROCEDURE
IPS board
HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
IPS board accompanied by its daughterboard that will

receive the CompactFlash card
9-pin female Canon RJ45 serial port cable
256 MB CompactFlash disk card
Laptop PC running Windows 2000 or XP, fitted with a
PCMCIA connector and a serial port
PCMCIA / CompactFlash adapter for connecting a laptop
PC.
Note :
PC
(1) The CompactFlash card via the passive

PCMCIA adapter to be inserted in a PC is
obligatory, a remote USB type reader is not
compatible with the CreateCF.exe tool.
(2) If the CompactFlash was formatted with an F4,
the WinRMX software must be uninstalled.
WinRMX interferes with the proper creation of the
CompactFlash using Windows.
CreateCF.exe software, used to create a CompactFlash

disk for the IPS from the Master Image file.
Creating or updating the
Master Image file with reference number 8hxxnnnn.n11

CompactFlash card
(where xx indicates the country and nnnn the software
release).
Table 8.7 Hardware requirements for IPS board CompactFlash creation
Page 8-34
6/2/06

The CompactFlash can be re-installed using one of two methods: one in the Windows
environment and the other in Linux.
Note : For a successful re-installation in the Windows environment, the CompactFlash card must
have been prepared initially in the factory.
Once the card has been prepared in the factory for initial startup, the installer can use the
Windows update tool as many times as required without the need for help from the
factory.
However, if the client or installer formats this card with DOS, FAT16 or FAT32, the user
must contact the factory to clean the CompactFlash card and thus allow the use of the
Windows update tool.
8.11.1.1 Creating the CompactFlash card using a Windows PC

The procedure using a Windows PC takes approximately 10 minutes.
Step 1 Download the CreateCF.exe software and the Master Image file 8hxxnnnn.n11
from the extranet server (http://support.nexspan.net/) and copy them in the same
directory.
Step 2 Insert the CompactFlash card in the Windows laptop PC.
Step 3 Enter the IPS CompactFlash card creation command in a DOS window:
D:\> CreateCF 8hxxnnnn.n11

To avoid any operation error, the tool searches for the storage device whose
capacity matches the size of the image file, that is 256 MB.
Step 4 Enter the letter of the drive containing CompactFlash.
Example: F:
Step 5 Entrer O
This command confirms the copy. A percentage of the progress of the
CompactFlash programming is updated in real time; at the end of the
programming process, the tool CreateCF.exe takes over.
Step 6 Stop the PCMCIA peripheral using the eject icon of the hardware concerned.
Wait for the display of the confirmation message.
Step 7 Remove the CompactFlash card from the PC.

6/2/06
Page 8-35
Figure 8.4 Screenshot of the CreateCF.exe program in Windows 2000

After the creation, test the start of the IPS board in Linux.
Test procedure
Step 1 Equip the IPS with the CompactFlash card.
Step 2 Connect the serial link of the IPS board.
Step 3 Power up the IPS board.
Step 4 Run the HyperTerminal tool.
Step 5 Wait about 30 seconds during Linux initialisation until the display of the Linux
prompt: IPS Login.:
Page 8-36
6/2/06

8.11.1.2 Creating a CompactFlash card using a LINUX PC

Hardware requirements:
Laptop PC running Linux, with a PCMCIA connector
256 MB CompactFlash card
Step 1 Download the CreateCF.exe software and the Master Image file 8hxxnnnn.n11
from the extranet server (http://support.nexspan.net/) and copy them in the same
directory.
Step 2 Run the VT100 HyperTerminal emulation tool.
Step 3 Enter the following commands to change to super user mode (the default
passwords are provided in Table 8.5):
IPS login: user

user@IPS:~$ su
IPS:/home#
Step 4 Insert the CompactFlash card in the Linux laptop PC.
Step 5 Place the image file in the "home" directory of the Linux PC.
Example: # cp /media/cdrom/8hxxnnnn.n11 /home/compact
(since /media/cdrom and /home/compact are examples, directories may vary
according to the configuration of the laptop PC used).
Step 6 Go to the "home" directory.
Example: # cd /home/compact
Step 7 Copy the image file to the CompactFlash card using the following command:
# dd if= 8hxxnnnn.n11 of=/dev/hde

(since /dev/hde is the device name, it may vary according to the configuration of
the laptop PC used).
Step 8 Enter a cache purge command:
# sync
Or enter a command to copy or empty the cache at the same time:
# dd if=/media/cdrom/8hxxnnnn.n11 of=/dev/hde
# sync
Step 9 Remove the card.

6/2/06
Page 8-37
After creation, test IPS board start in Linux.

Test procedure
Step 1 Equip the IPS with the CompactFlash card.
Step 2 Connect the serial link of the IPS board to the PC.
Step 3 Power up the IPS board.
Step 4 Run the VT100 HyperTerminal application.
Step 5 Wait about 30 seconds during Linux initialisation until the display of the Linux
prompt: IPS Login.
Page 8-38
6/2/06

8.11.2
Updating individual files or patches

The FileZilla utility is recommended for updating individual IPS software files or for
executing a patch.
To execute a patch or update a file, proceed as follows:
Step 1 Install FileZilla on your PC.
Download the executable FileZilla file from the Utilities and links tab, install it on
the PC and complete the installation.
Step 2 Stop the SIP access point using the IPS web interface.
Step 3 Run FileZilla.
Step 4 Download the update file(s) or patch file(s) from the Extranet server
http://support.nexspan.net/ and install them in a local PC directory (PC directories
are displayed in the left window of the FileZilla interface).
Step 5 Navigate within the IPS directories (displayed in the right window of the FileZilla
interface).
Step 6 Perform a copy / paste command to copy the update or patch files in the
appropriate IPS directory (or directories) of the IPS board.
In the case of a SIP access point update, two files will be updated: gsi and
identite.txt. These files must be copied in the /ips/gsi/ directory of the IPS board.
Step 7 Restart the SIP access point.

6/2/06
Page 8-39
Page 8-40
6/2/06

FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

This chapter contains the following six functional system diagrams:
NeXspan D in a simplex configuration (Figure 9.1)
NeXspan D in a duplex configuration(Figure 9.2)
NeXspan L, S and S12 (Figure 9.3)
Standard non-rackable NeXspan S12 (Figure 9.4)
NeXspan C (Figure 9.5)
Multisite synchronisation (Figure 9.6)

Functional system diagrams
6/2/06
Page 9-1
! DMINIS TRA TION

INTE RFA C E
! NA LOG
S E TS
$ IGITA L
S E TS
( OTE L
A NA LOG
S E TS
! TTE NDA NT
# HA RGING
S E RV E R
% THE RNE T
. E TWORK
! NA LOG . E TWORK
2 4#0
0"8 .
0"8
0 # OR
0 RINTE R
0"8
# ONS OLE
0 /
% THE RNE T
NE TWORK
) 5 -3
"48
0"8
-A NA GE ME NT
# E NTE R
# HA RGING
BUFFE R
5 NIFIE D
ME S S A GING
, )
, -X
, !X
4 # 0 ) 0
GA TE WA Y
0 4
0"8
, .X
,(X
,2
6 OIC E A ND $ A TA 4 3 S
0 4 6 O) 0
3 YS TE M
" US
3 Y NC HR O NO U S
" US
)03
)0
S E TS
5 # 4 $
A C TIVE
#3
0 A C K E T MODE
DA TA
TRA NS MIS S ION
8 .ETWORK
4RANSPAC OR ($,#
3 YS TE M
BUS
3 TA TES
A ND # ODE S
0 # - 4 3 S WTIC HING
) 5 # 4 $
3 TA TES
A ND # ODE S
#0
0 A C K E T MODE
DA TA
TRA NS MIS S ION
! S Y N C HR O NO U S
TRA NS MIS S ION
3 IGNA L PROC E S S ING

GE NE RA TION
DE TE C TION
E TC
# !
2 3
0"8
-5 -
6 OIC E MA IL
3 Y NC HR O NO U S
A NNOUNC E ME NTS
)6 3
)6 "
-5 -
3 UBS C RIBE R
S E RV E R
0"8?-!42)8?8$?37)4#(?39./0?3)-0,%8??AI
$ A TA
TE RMINA LS
3 YNC HRONIS A TION

MA NA GE ME NT
6 OIC E & A X
MULTIPLE X ER
# LOC K S A ND
S Y NC HR O S
0#,4
0 # - C HA NNE LS
0 RIVA TE S YS TE M
0 !" 8
,4
% 4
% 4
, $ , $ . , $ 8
)3 $ . 4
4
) 3 $ . . E TWORK
, $ , $ . , $ 8
)3 $ . 3
3
4 L C HA RGE ME NT
3 A UVE GA RDE
$% # 4
BA S E
S TA TIONS
/ PE RA TING
C ONS OLE
% THE RNE T
. E TWORK
-A NA GE ME NT
# E NTE R
-US IC
3 O URC E
0 RINTE R
& UNC TION A LS O INTE GRA TE D IN THE 5 # 4 $ C A RD
Figure 9.1 Functional diagram of a NeXspan D in a simplex configuration
Page 9-2

2/6/06
! DMINIS TRA TION

INTE RFA C E
$ IGITA L
S E TS
! NA LOG
S E TS
( OTE L
A NA LOG
S E TS
! TTE NDA NT
# HA RGING
S E RV E R
% THE RNE T
. E TWORK
! NA LOG . E TWORK
2 4#0
0"8 .
0"8
0 # OR
0 RINTE R
0"8
# ONS OLE
0 /
2 S EA U
% THE RNE T
) 5 -3
"48
0"8
-A NA GE ME NT
# E NTE R
# HA RGING
BUFFE R
5 NIFIE D
ME S S A GING
, )
, -X
, !X
4 # 0 ) 0
GA TE WA Y
0 4
0"8
, .X
,(X
,2
6 OIC E A ND $ A TA 4 3 S
0 4 6 O) 0
3 YS TE M
" US
3 YS TE M
" US
3 Y NC H R O N O U S
" US
3 Y NC HR O NO U S
" US
)0
S E TS
5 # 4 $
A C TIVE
#3
0 A C K E T MODE
DA TA
TRA NS MIS S ION
8 .ETWORK
4RANSPAC OR ($,#
3 YS TE M
BUS
3 TA TUS E S
A ND # ODE S
3 TA TUS E S
A ND # ODE S
5 # 4 $
PA S S IVE
) 5 # 4 $
3 TA TUS E S
A ND # ODE S
#0
0 A C K E T MODE
DA TA
TRA NS MIS S ION
! S Y NC HR O NO U S
TRA NS MIS S ION

GE NE RA TION
DE TE C TION
E TC
# !
2 3
0"8
-5 -
6 OIC E MA IL
3 Y N C HR O NO U S
A NNOUNC E ME NTS
)6 3
)6 "
-5 -

GE NE RA TION
DE TE C TION
E TC
3 UBS C RIBE R
S E RV E R
6 OIC E MA IL
3 Y NC HR O NO U S
A NNOUNC E ME NTS
)6 3
)6 "
3 YNC HRONIS A TION

MA NA GE ME NT
3 UBS C RIBE R
S E RV E R
3 YNC HRONIS A TION

MA NA GE ME NT
6 OIC E & A X
MULTIPLE X E UR
# LOC K S A ND
S Y N C HR O S
0#,4
0 # - C HA NNE LS
0 RIVA TE S YS TE M
0 !" 8
,4
% 4
% 4
, $ , $ . , $ 8
)3 $ . 4
4
) 3 $ . . E TWORK
, $ , $ . , $ 8
)3 $ . 3
3
$ OWNLOA DING
" A C K UP
$% # 4
BA S E
S TA TIONS
/ PE RA TING
C ONS OLE
0"8?-!42)8?8$?37)4#(?39./0?$50,%8??AI
$ A TA
TE RMINA LS
$ OWNLOA DING
" A C K UP
-US IC
3 OURC E
% THE RNE T
. E TWORK
-A NA GE ME NT
# E NTE R
0 RINTE R
& UNC TION A LS O INTE GRA TE D IN THE 5 # 4 $ C A RD
Figure 9.2 Functional diagram of a NeXspan D in a duplex configuration

2/6/06
Page 9-3
3&&RQVROH
3&RU
SULQWHU
3ULQWHU
'RZQORDG
%DFNXS
0XVLF
VRXUFH
PBX N
(WKHUQHW
1HWZRUN
0DQDJHPHQW
FHQWUH
BTX
PBX 3
%LOOLQJ
EXIIHU
PBX
PBX 2
UCT
7HOHSKRQ\ GDWD76
PT2*
JDWHZD\
7&3,3
LI1
(WKHUQHW
QHWZRUN
6\QFKURQRXV
Bus
PBX
$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ
LQWHUIDFH
PT2 + VoIP
IUMS
3&0766ZLWFKLQJ
Console
8QLILHG
PHVVDJLQJ
,3
6HWV
$QDORJVHWV
6\VWHP
EXV
CS1
6LJQDOSURFHVVLQJ
JHQHUDWLRQ
GHWHFWLRQHWF
CP1
6WDWHVDQG
FRGHV
3DFNHWPRGH
GDWD
WUDQVPLVVLRQ
'DWD
WHUPLQDOV
$V\QFKURQRXV
WUDQVPLVVLRQ
9RLFHPDLO
V\QFKURQRXV
DQQRXQFHPHQWV
. ,96
MUM
6\QFKURQLVDWLRQ
PDQDJHPHQW
6\VWHP
Bus
LMx
LNx**
S0
,9%
CA1
76DFFHVVRQ8&76 8&76
.
ZD\EDVHVWDWLRQIXQFWLRQLI$'3&0
GDXJKWHUERDUGLVHTXLSSHG
8&76DQG8&76RQO\
. %LWV\QFKURQLVDWLRQ
0)UDPH6
8&76DQG8&76RQO\
RS232
PBX
'LJLWDOVHWV
6XEVFULEHU
VHUYHU
MUM
$WWHQGDQW&RQVROH
LHx
9RLFH)D[
0XOWLSOH[HU
%LOOLQJ
VHUYHU
&ORFNVDQG
V\QFKURQLVDWLRQ
LT2
3&0
LD4/LD4N/LD4X**
,6'17 LD4/LD4N/LD4X**
,6'16
LT2
(E1/T1)
E1/T1
3&0FKDQQHOV
3ULYDWHV\VWHP
HJ3%;
,6'1
T0
LR4
S0
'(&7
EDVH
VWDWLRQV
$WWHQGDQW
IXQFWLRQLVDOVRLQWHJUDWHGRQWKH8&7/8&76DQG8&76ERDUGV
IXQFWLRQLVDOVRLQWHJUDWHGRQWKH8&76DQG8&76ERDUGV
+RWHO
DQDORJVHWV
$QDORJ3671
QHWZRUN
PBX_MATRIX_XL_SWITCH_SYNOP_01_04
;QHWZRUN
7UDQVSDFRU+'/&
LAx**
6WDWHVDQG
&RGHV
3DFNHWPRGH
GDWD
WUDQVPLVVLRQ
Figure 9.3 Functional diagram of a NeXspan L, S and S12
Page 9-4

2/6/06
0##ONSOLE
0RINTER
$OWNLOAD
"ACKUP
-USIC
SOURCE
UCT
6OICEMESSAGING
SYNCHRONOUSANNOUNCEMENTS
)63
6-3
3UBSCRIBER
DATABASE
4#0)0 8'ATEWAY
43ACCESSSLOTS
WAYBASESTATIONIF!$0#-
DAUTHERBOARDISEQUIPPED
5#4ONLY
"YTE-&RAME3SYNCHRONISATION
5#4ONLY
ANALOGTERMINALS
$ATATRANSMISSION
PACKETMODE
DIGITALTERMINALS
P B X _ M A T R IX _ S X 2 _ S W IT C H _ S Y N O P _ 0 2 _ 0 1
3IGNAL
PROCESSING
Figure 9.4 Functional diagram of a standard non-rackable NeXspanS12

2/6/06
Page 9-5
0##ONSOLE
0RINTER
-USIC
SOURCE
$OWNLOAD
"ACKUP
UCT
3IGNALPROCESSING
4#0)0 8'ATEWAY
43ACCESSSLOTS
. WAYBASESTATIONFUNCTIONIF
!$0#-DAUGHTERBOARDISEQUIPPED
5#4ONLY
. 3YNCHRONISATIONBYBIT-&RAME3
5#4ONLY
ANALOGTERMINALS
$ATATRANSMISSION
PACKETMODE
DIGITALTERMINALS
P B X _ M A T R IX _ X C _ S W IT C H _ S Y N O P _ 0 2 _ 0 1
6OICEMESSAGING
3YNCHRONOUSANNOUNCEMENTS
)63
6-3
3UBSCRIBER
DATABASE
Figure 9.5 Functional diagram of a NeXspan C
Page 9-6

2/6/06
034.
034.
2EFERENCE
CLOCK
2EFERENCE
CLOCK
2EFERENCE
CLOCK
-!34%20"8
./.02)/2)49
-!34%20"8
02)/2)49
%XPANSION
CARDS
BITSYNCHRONISATION
$%#4SYNCHRONISATION

5#4
4IME
BASE
4IME
BASE
0"8
SLAVE
BITSYNCHRONISATION
$%#4SYNCHRONISATION

0"8
SLAVE
BITSYNCHRONISATION
$%#4SYNCHRONISATION
4IME
BASE
4IME
BASE
BITSYNCHRONISATION
$%#4SYNCHRONISATION
0"8
SLAVE
/UT OF SERVICE
!0"8THATISOUT OF SERVICE
DOESNOTPREVENTTHETRANSMISSION
OFSYNCHRONISATIONSIGNALSTO
OTHER0"8S
BITSYNCHRONISATION
$%#4SYNCHRONISATION
0"8
SLAVE
)NTERNAL
REFERENCE
)NTERNAL
REFERENCE
4IME
BASE
4IME
BASE
0RIMARYSYNCHRONISATION
PORT
3ECONDARYSYNCHRONISATION
PORT
0 " 8 ?-! 4 2 )8 ?8 , ?3 9 . # ( 2 / ? 3 9 . / 0 ??
Figure 9.6 Functional diagram of multisite synchronisation

2/6/06
Page 9-7
Page 9-8

2/6/06

1instnex r42 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1instnex r42 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and maintenance manual

NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

AASTRA MATRA Telecom

Installation and Maintenance Manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESCRIPTION OF THE NEXSPAN C/S/L/D PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FUNCTIONAL AND PHYSICAL ARCHITECTURE OF THE PBXS. . . . . . . . . . .

DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF NEXSPAN PBXS . . . . . . . . . .

Physical description of NeXspan D in simplex configuration

3.1.3 Physical description of NeXspan D in duplex configuration, (see 3.8 to 3.10)

3.1.4 Physical description of a NeXspan L PBX (see 3.11 to 3.15) . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.5 Physical description of a NeXspan S PBX (see 3.16 to 3.18) . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.6 Physical description of a NeXspan S12 PBX (see Figure 3.23 ) . . . . . . . . .

Physical description of a NeXspan C PBX (see Figure 3.27) . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

3.1.7.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4 XS12 PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-BUTTON DONGLE AND SOFTWARE LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.1 Command and processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connection to the communication networks and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.4 Synchronisation chain (Figure 9.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

3.7.4.2 Management of the master/slave mode (multisite network) . . . . . . . . .

3.7.5 Defence chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.6 Power supply chain (3.34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTRODUCING THE USER INTERFACE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESCRIPTION OF NEXSPAN COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading CLX cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1 ADS 300XD (XD PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2 ADS 300X (XL PBX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

4.2.2.4 Physical description (Figure 4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3 ADS 100X (XS and XS12 PBXs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.4 ADS 50X (XC PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.4 Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and maintenance manual - NeXspan C/S/L/D Range

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UCT1-S AND UCT2-S CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UCT1S-12 AND UCT2S-12 CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UCT1-C AND UCT2-C CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 RUCT-L CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.2 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.3 Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.4 Installation and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11 RUCT-S CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.2 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11.3 Hardware and software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .